fot bet AMERICAN JOURNAL SCIENCE AND ARTS. EDITORS AND PROPRIETORS, Proressors JAMES D. DANA anv B. SILLIMAN. ASSOCIATE EDITORS, Prorrssors ASA GRAY ann WOLCOTT GIBBS, OF CAMBRIDGE, AND Prorrssors H. A. NEWTON, S. W. JOHNSON, GEO. J. BRUSH anp A. E. VERRILL, OF NEW HAVEN. THIRD SERIES, VOL. IL—[WHOLE NUMBER, CII.| Nos. 7-12. JULY TO DECEMBER, 1871. WITH A PLATE AND A MAP. NEW HAVEN: EDITORS i871. ine PRINTED BY TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE & TAYLOR, 221 STATE ST. CONTENTS OF VOLUME II. NUMBER VIL Art. 1—On some phenomena of Binocular Vision; by J. Le ~ oe ee RY WV MA ee eek s ccs ee 10 I1.—The Glacial Features of Green Bay of Lake ‘ae with some observations on a former outlet of Lake Supe- rior IV, Bat tet Se Cireuit of Generations ; by T. C. Hinearp,_- V.—On the application of Photograph ie hia determination of Astronomical data; by Asapn Hart, ----..-------- 25 NE. 7 ae a new Fluoride idm: ‘Arkwat Ford ; by i) o v1 —Notes on in the Primordial Rocks in the vicinity of Troy, ys ONG oe Ss oa oe eee ea 33 VIL. Note of. some nes Fossil Mammals from the Tertiary O. C. M 35 IX. — Oonketuatiins to Chanieneg from the Laboratory of the awrence Scientific School. No. 16.—On the Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel; by R. H. Les, --..---- 4h be —Note on the Spectrum of the Corona; by C. o Youne, 53 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics.—-Note on Para-sulphobenzoic Acid, Ira REMSEN, 55. Geology and Natural History.—Mineral Rae g ts in Fossils, T. S. Hunt, 57.—Mas- todon Remains in seid New York, B. G. WILDER: Fucoids in the ‘Coa | Meas- ures of Iowa, Prof. Wu : Phosphatic Sands i in South Carolina, C. U. SHEPARD, 58.—CovEs on Rakes peabeth fame incl ig pie to “Annélides ché- topodés an Goife du Naples,” 61-—-Diapensiacess, 62.—Form ead Sealpture’ of Seeds: Hypocotyledonary > heey 63. Astronomy.—A eee Meteor, R. H. Taurston, 63. Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence—On the influence of a covering of Snow on Climate, A. Worms : ientific Expedition from s College: De- Seription of a Tide-Gauge for cold climates, J. M. Barc American Weather Note: ASE, 68.—European and American Rain-falls, P. Cuask, 69.—Discove: e Animal of the Spongiadse rs 70.—A new attachment for Lan 71 —Report on iced cand — a tals, descriptions of Military Posts: Captain Hall’s The so-called ‘ Seawall 73.—Party of oration under cot "Hayden, a —Survey of the Great Lakes: Geological Survey of Tertiary, 75 viens: of Kilauea, Hawaian Islands, 76. Miscellaneous Bibliography.—Smitbsonian Contribution: , Vol. xvii: Manual of Geometrical and Infinitesimal Analysis, B eater: teats 7 6. Appenprx, Letter of B. A. Gould, 77; Expedition of Prof. Marsh, 80. 1v CONTENTS, NUMBER VIC Page Arr. XI.—Historical Notes on the Systems of Weather Tel- egraphy, and especially their development in the United States ; by CLEVELAND AmB 2o75 oo eee 81 .—Infusorial Circuit of Generations; by T. C. oe oe 88 XIU.—Tornadoes of the Sohehaal Sa by H. 8. Warr Paps (eam rate Capt penrterpecae Ste uriget age ami Mates Fe oS 96 XIV. —Preliminary Notice be New North American Phyl- lopodu; by A, 8: Packaun: Jr; 2202 so 52 ccci a 108 : V.—On a New Difference Siante by G..B. Grant. 113 XVIL—A New Form of alvanometer ; by J. TROWBRIDGE, 118 XVIL—N otice of some new Fossil Mammals and Birds, from the Tertiary Formation of the West; by O. C. Marsn, 120 —Notes on the distribution of the Vegetation of santo Domingos by W. M. Gams, 2.105037 127 XIX.—Brief Dobtsticless to Zodlogy from the Museum of Yale College. No. XV.—Descriptions of Starfishes and Ophiurians from the ace Coasts of America and Atriga 5 by ACI VY meen, <0 oem 2 130 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. — and pi, once the Spectrum of Uranus: On the application of the pe to the Measurement and comparison of the intensity of colored light, om pes quantitative d nie corset of Coloring Matters, VIERORDT, 138, —On th neutralization of organic and inorganic bases soluble in water, AY or Geology and eee al History.—Currents of the Oceans, J. eo 140.—On the “Benches,” or Valley Terraces, of British Columbia, M. G. rane sn —Note on River Terraces, J. D. DANA, 144,—Glaciers, A. Herm, 145.—On Sigillaria, Calamites and Calamodendron, J. W. Dawson, 147. —Lepidodendra aad aa ize, V ILLIAMSO i » ©. ne, N: Helderberg Corals in New Ha COCK, 148.—On Fossil Coal plants from the ial 5 Bo 3: Gatares Report on the Vertebrata discovered in Port Kennedy Bone Cave, HE. D CopE, — ite exite: erite: Arrangement for Cross-fertil- ization of the Flowers of Scrophularia nodosa, 150.—Transmu of Form i M. Jounson, 151.—Embryological Studies on Diplax, mis, and the Thysanurous genus Isos PACKARD, Studies in a ry, E. C. and A. Agassiz: Report on the Brachiopoda obtained by the U. 8. Coast Survey Expedition, in charge of L. F. De Pourtales, W. H. D. A the Families of. Mollusks, T. Git, 152.—Supplement to the Synopsis Extinct Batrachia and Re of North America, E. D. COPE of Spon, onges, H. J. CARTER Oe = — of some of the Cranial bones of the Reptilia, ete., E. D. Core, Miscellaneous Scientific Intellig ee. to the tn on a new attachmen the cate —Note to cm Article on the applicati on of Photography to ae _ determination of Astronomical data, A. Hau: On the C Color of fluorescent So- Tutions, H. macnn: Indianapolis Meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, 154. CONTENTS. sd NUMBER IX. Page Arr. XXI.—On the Testimony of the se tag ee toh o the os truth of the Nebular Hypothesis; by D. Kir 155 XXII.—On the time required to communicate AE essions ont the Sensorium, and the reverse; by T.C. MenpEnnALL, 156 XXIL—On we amount of Time necessary for Vision ; by . Roo XXIV.—On the nature and duration of the discharge of a Leyden Jar connected with an Induction Coil, Part Sesond< by OF N-Roop... c,h ete 160 X1V.—Memoranda concerning the introduction of the Manufacture of Spelter into the U.S.; by J. Wuarron, 168 XXV.—The Daily Motion oh a Bie: ck Tower, caused by Solar Seat by Co GO ae Won ele as 177 XXVI—On the destructive Distillation of Light Petroleum oN ep at low temperatures; by S. Dana Hayes, -. 184 XVIL—The Paragenesis and Derivation of Copper and its associates on Lake Superior; by OMPRILY, 2205, 188 xX aiinebregs oleteres on b Color of Fluorescent Solu- tone; ly Haney Moeron. °° 0S oso 198 TX —-Doinposition OF hs Meteorie Stone that fell near geet Maine, May 21, 1871; by J. L. Sarrn,_-_--- 200 XXX.—Discovery of a new Planet; by C. = o Seema 201 XXXI.—A new Planet; by Jamxs C, Watson, .. 5-2-2: 201 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE Chemistry and Physies,—On the existence and formation of ieee of Nitrous Oxi On a group of Mercurial Colloids, REYNOLDS, 202.—A new Syn set = Acide Von Ricuter: Gallein, 203.—Decomposition of Chinasaites R. men Geology and Rares Seay —Address to the American Associ Botany, by E. BrerscHNEIDER: Plants killed ty F eee Astronomy.—Scintillation of the Stars, L. RESPIGHI, tee the recent Solar Eeli . N. Lockyer, 226.—Shooting § geste August 10th-11th: On = Matont seen at Wilmington, N. C., E. S. Mar } ] ius Dredging, under the direction of the can Naturalist, 229.— Obituary.—Edw. Claparéde: A. K. Johnston, 229. Bibliography.—Dr. Ellis’s A ra Sir Benjamin beam pono dl ie, Von va CONTENTS, NUMBER X. Page Arr, XX XIL—On the Connecticut River valley Glacier, and other examples of Glacier movement —S the valle eys of New England; by James D. Dana,-_------------- 233 XX XIII.—The Paragenesis ~~ Derivation a Copper and its associates on Lake Superior; by Rapuarn PuMPELLY,. 243 XXXIV.—On roa de spoke: Hatclenes Preparations by Sunlight ; J. 3; Wo00pwakd, 3 425562 ae 258 XX EV Baron ettioal Measurements in Ecuador; by W. Reiss and A. Sripet, :.....- 2-2-2 ee 267 XXXVIL—Inaugural Aadieas before the British Association at Edinburgh; by Sir Wm11am THompson, ---------- 269 XXXVIL—On some new Silurian Crinoids and Shells; by sl a Sal hogan rad ph i ai ie eee Seep Ba, Pa ee Tn Or Mae Meta th F. B. Meek, XXXVIIL—Disco overy of anew Planet, and the Elements of the 114th Asteroid; by C. H. F. PETERS, -. - - 2 es 303 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Physics. Reiger in Electricity, Inaugural-Dissertation for the attainment of : the Degree of Doctor of Philosophy at the eee tee University Gottingen, by Taomas R. etn 303.—Water unfrozen at a temperature 8°C. Bous- SINGAULT, 304. Geology and Natural History. —Glaciers: Tine of the Glacial epoch, 304,—Das Elbthalgebirge in Sachsen, von Dr. Hanns Bruno GEINITZ: Sieboldtia Davidi- ana: Bivalve ae: On the early pens of Terebratulina septentrionalis, by Epw.S. Morse cial Scratches ne Seratly 305.—Anthers of Parnassia: Journal of epee FBaclety (Botany), 3 Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence.—Twentieth Meetin of the epee Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science, held at Indianapolis, Ind., August 16-21, 1871, 307.—On the relation of the Auroras to Gravitating Currents, by PLINY E. Case, 311 Miscellaneous ‘Pidography _—War and the Weather, or the Artificial production of Rain, by KE. POWERS, 313. a Text-Book of Meteorology, A. BucHAN: Dominican Republic, Report of the Commission of Doane to Santo Domingo: Sun-Pictures of Rocky 5 salons eae ery, F. V. HAYDEN, NUMBER XI. Art. XXXTX.—On some Phenomena of Binsediar Vision ; by Josern LeConrEe 315 _ XL.—On the position rie height of the elevated Plateau in which the Glacier of New eo cid n the Glacial era, _had its origin; by James D. Dana, ---------------- —Variations in the peed a “of the Human Body ; es BP. Cane a eee . XLUL.—Preliminary ” Catalogue of the bright lines in the — er of the Chromospher; by C. A. Youns, _---. CONTENTS. ~ vii Page XLII.—The eee Geographical position of the large & masses of meteoric iron in North Mexico, with the Genoription “of a new mass—The San- -Gregorio Meteor- i . LAWREN GB Beira, oi Se ee ae 335 XLIV.—On the Iridium compounds analogous to the Ethylen and Protochloride of Platinum Salts; by 8. P.Saprier, 338 XLV.—Directions for Constructing Lightning-Rods : by 5 BEY eek da ari li ito Oe ete eere ee eoess 344 XLVI.—The Paragenesis and Da = Piag ee sets a associates on Lake Superior: by Rapsarn Pump 347 XLVIIL—Obse crauons on the color of Phisreiseht. pac tions— ; by H. Morron, «2222052252 222 S008 355 XLVIIL—Brief Contributions to Zodlogy from the Museum . ot Yale College. No. XVI—On the Distribavion of Marine Animals on the southern coast of New w Eng- lgnds by Ai BCVmmReiy ss foetus ieee es ee 357 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physies.—On nitro tf come itric acids, HASENBACH, 362.—- New method of separating aaahicie m potash and soda, SCHEERER, og On the methylation of the phenyl aioe in anilin, BERTHELOT, 364.— rene of “sage oe which correspond to ethylamin and eaytaanin, A. W. HorMany, Geology and Ne sine History.—Note on an Apparent Violation of the Law of eater Ae aermai deuitunntiinetion of the American Coal beds coming East, LESLEY, 366 n the Oil wells of Terre Haute, Tndiatia, Hunt, 369.—Surface Brunswick, MatTHEw, 371.—Remarks on Fossil Vertebrates x; re ing i i irection 0 the U.S. Lake Survey, Suir —A. FEA ¥: Report of Botanical Sur- vey of Southern and Central g peltrso 374. oe ‘Dr. Rohrbach on Typha, 375. pro Nate ge teaber "estat 376.—Encke’s Comet, 380.—Discovery of new * Planet, Luruzr, 38 entific Tatclijense —Midway merece te" be the North Pacific, 380.— Pee 1.—-The Eruption of the Volcano of Colima in June, Sartortus, 381.— Variations of in the Western puovigned of] R SAWITSCH ogical Results of the 1870 Dredging Expedition of the Yacht * Norna” off the coast of Sp Portugal, W. 8S. , 385. “ats truction of the vad the Chicago Academ ‘ga Sciences, 387. Sime ee in N. Jersey, Delaware Pennsylvania, W. WG ter D. Knieskern, Pati ale Edwards Holbrook, 389; Tr De Carle Snot. ae R I, Murchison, 3 Miscellaneous grb a far — —_ ese of Weights, Measures and Money, Mann: Earthqua’ antain Building, WHITNEY : The Minerals and Gothtey of Denial? taka, 7% Danas 390. NUMBER XIL Art. XLIX. one the Geological History of the Gulf of Mex- ico; by E. W. Hina. With & Map. 0-2-5 391 Space; by Asapu a Hat, PE Vili * CONTENTS. LI,—On a new Micrometic Goniometer eye-piece for the Mi- SECBCODG |. OY Vv. 2 + DOUTAWORITES oie eee bu caine 408 LIJ.—On the bearing of Devonian Botany on Questions as to the Origin and Extinction of Species; by J. W. ae 410 LII.—On some Phenomena of Sinadae Vision; by JosE MO Bae wir oe tae worse Gees wb Yes is oad 417 LIV.—The American Spongilla, a craspedote, flagellate In- fusorian; by H. James-Crarx. With a Plate,..______ 426 LV. = Deseription of a Printing Chronograph; by Ga W; LVL. —Longitu Determination across the Continent; by RGE oak LE ee a ae ae ee aa: 441 LVII. ere of the Invertebrata dredged i in Lake Superior in 1871 oe ee U.S. Lake Survey; by S. I. Surra and dee MeV MAREN, oo i 448 LVIIL—On Kilauea and Mauna Loa; by Trrus Coan, -... 454 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. Chemistry and Physics.—On the ee to light of the haloid salts of silver, and the connection ‘between optical and che cag absorption of light, og deena LLACK: On the proteine series, Tuaciwort d H. , 457.—On the pro- ducts of the reduction of silicic ether and some of its derivatives, 5 eieyy 458. Geology and Natural History.—Triassic Sandstone of the Palisade Range, 459 Martius, Flora Brasiliensis, 460.—Baillon’s Histoire des Plantes, 461 —Ba tisk Acid by Foliage, 464.—-Herbarium for sale, 4 “a ag enn athonsee on the Spectrum of ee Aurora, Gro. F. BARKER, 465.—An Explos e Sun, C. A. Hho te 8.—November Meteors in 1871, 470.— Aaeeroid ( (ii 17): ured s Comet, 471 Miscellaneous Scientific Intelligence—Plattner’s Manual of Qualitative and Quanti tive Analysis with the Blowpipe: Geological seen under ation: Ha ay aL. —-Madagascar, — abel: On Sea Wav pe ere 473. On a Meteor seen at Alexandria, Egypt, B. Kr bathers Kansa tee of Sci- ences: The Fossil Plants of the Saverion and Upper Pan ag oe pane 475. Inpex, 476. ERRATA. Page 20, 2d line of npoarerats for by yosen etc., read cellular or, etc. 24. line 16, for represent, re “24, lines 4 and 10 from eeagee for ¢ Cacteria, read bacteria. * 62, line 31, for nassiform, read na apiforn. . 62, line 33, for -petaled, read -petioled. 4 80, line 8 from bottom, for 1860, ss 1869. * 205, ine : >Re 7, the proportion of nitre referred to is that of fused nitre. a 227, line rom bottom, for vena read ten. eS ee ee ee AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS, [THIRD SERIES] Art. L—On some phenomena of Binocular Vision ;* by JOSEPH LeConts, Prof of Geol. and Nat. Hist., Univ. of California. V. Stereoscopie phenomena. Ir isa familiar fact that in stereoscopic pictures, properly mounted, identical points in the foregrounds of the two pictures are always a little nearer together than identical points in the backgrounds. With a pair of compasses we can, by this means, easily test whether or not pictures are properly mounted. i evident therefore that it requires greater optic convergence to unite the foregrounds than the backgrounds of the two pict- ures, It is also evident that we cannot at the same time and Il respects to natural vigion of near and distant objects, instine- tively introduces the idea of depth of space. Or even looking steadily at any point, say in the middle ground, the depth of space is still perceived, as in nature under similar circumstances, for the same reason, viz: that the eye or the mind, istine- * For the preceding articles on this subject, see II, xlvii, 68, 153, and HI, 1, 33. Am. Jour. Sc1.—Turep Sertes, Vou. II, No. 7.—Ju tyr, 1871. 1 2 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. tively distingu shes between homonymous and heteronymous images, referring the one to a position beyond, and the other to a position on this side the point of sight. This last point is so important in the theory of binocular rspective, and so at variance with the accepted view on this subject that I must dwell upon it a moment. It is now gener- ally admitted that Wheatstone’s idea of a complete mental com- bination of dissimilar pictures or ot. ws not true, hg in stereoscopic experiments or in ral vision ;* but the theory thorities on this subject, i siiat puckpeakive is aS ally the result of rapid changes of convergence, or what I have called ranging of the eyes back and forth from foreground to back- round and vice versa. 7 J think, however, close attention to jects while Abas steadily at one point, even in those cases in perspective. This is accounted for on the principle just an- Gonoct ¥ viz: that the eye instinctively distinguishes between homonymous and heteronymous images, referring the former to objects beyond and the latter to objects on this — _ point e aad, or in other words, each eye knows its own 1 true we are not usually conscious of as kirg distinetion, * Mr. Townes in the elaborate paper “on the physiology of vision” already alluded to in my last paper, (III, 1, 33 ,) devotes much time and many experiments to the subversion of this view, under the impression that it is still the universally acce + an admirable review of the wae Dh ates by Claparéde, Bib. Univ. ~a es Sci. Nouv. Per., vol. iii, p, 138 seq. . 155. eee I give Wheatstone’s result on the authority of De la Rive, (vol. ii, p. 184, trans.) og of Daguin Seok iii, p. Is ——. we is somewhat remarkable that nearly e Whe s result as a little less than ee Hehe pet lew second. “Prof Mase i Gin seal + admirable researches on this ‘ene eahers ‘naforvanately ts fallen into the same mistake. The quodoon Of ase but it is the time orcupied by the electric current in in passing from oue interruption of the wire to SS ee ee ee a ee ae J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 8 ments of Fedderson in 1858, and of Prof. O. N. Rood in 1869, give nearly the same results; the former ‘00004 of a second, and the latter from ‘000022 to -000050* depending upon the . . a second. Now it is obviously impossible that in s;}55 OF even in <=}, of a second the eye can change its convergence so as to adapt it consecutively to single visions of different objects at different distances. The perception of stereoscopic relief under these circumstances is therefore inexplicable on any other theory than that which I propose. The ¢rue theory of binocular perspective seems, therefore, to be this: the eye, even when fixed steadily on one point, perceives the relative distance of objects by means of double images, as already explained ; but this perception is made much clearer by the ranging of the eyes back and forth, uniting successively the images of near and distant objects. e pictures on a stereoscopic card be reversed, i. e. the right picture placed on the left side and the left picture on the right side, the binocular perspective is also reversed, the objects in the foregrounds being seen at a distance, and objects in_the backgrounds near at hand; in other words, the foregrounds of grounds of the pictures the foreground of the scene. The rea- son is obvious. By changing the pictures, identical points im the backgrounds become nearer together than those of the fore- ind, where aa and bd are seen. Fig. 1 represents the result where the pictures are properly mounted, and fig. 2 when reversed. By comparing the two figures the reverse perspective and its cause becomes evident. This inverse perspective was long ago pointed out and ex- plained by Wheatstone, and stereoscopic pictures are often made expressly to exhibit it. I am not aware, however, that any one has drawn attention to the beautiful, and in some respects another—the time between the occwrrence of the sparks and not the duration of the j t of the image of middle spark, I am indebted to my * This Jour., I, vol. xlviii, p. 153. + This Jour., III, vol. i, p. 15. } The italic a and 6 are underlined in the figures. 4 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. peculiar, results both of natural and inverse perspective, pro- duced by the combination of stereoscopic pictures with the naked eye by squinting. I find that I am able to combine stereoscopic pictures in this way, quite as easily or even more easily than with the stereoscope. The results by this mode of combination differ from ordinary stereoscopic results in several respects. ist. In combining on és side a“ plane of the pictures by squinting the right-eye image of the left picture, combines with the lefi-eye image of the right pistes while in combining beyond the plane of the pictures as in ordinary stereoscopic ee ies it is the right-eye image of the ec picture, and the binocalar result. This 1 ident n comparing with fig. .d. Besides the entre result there are - course ec monocular pictures on the right and ; while in the stereoscope these monocular pictures (which, howe an in this case would be heteronymous) are cut off by the septum. 3d. The onrneres result, instead of being magnified as in the stereose is seen in exquisite miniature and has all the charm of miniature nine 4th. The depth of perspective is pro- portionally less than in —— beyond the car th. he perspective is always the reverse of that given by the stereoscope, and hee in order to produce the same per- sg oe mounting must be reverse nary stereoscopic photogra raphs be reversed and the oats of then combined with the naked eye by squinting, the gehen effect is as perfect as can be imagined. Minia- ture houses, gardens, lawns, statuettes, fountains, &e., such as Gulliver pete have seen in the land of Lilliput, are presented in perfect perspective. I have often amused myself by changing the mounting of stereoscopic pictures in order to enjoy the nan effect. Of course in order that sents should be per- efinition of the objects, there must be complete dissocia- i of the focal and axial adjustments, as seats explained in my first paper.* If stereoscopic pictures are combined by squinting without reversing the mounting, then of course the * This Jour., II, vol. xlvii, p. 68. J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 5 is not possible, to bring out the inverse perspective distinctly. — he reason is that it violates other kinds of perspective, and sometimes sets at defiance the known properties of bodies. It is most distinct when other kinds of perspective are least dis- tinct. In natural vision there are many kinds of perspective, or many modes of judging of the relative distance of objects ; viz. aertal perspective or increasing dimness with increasing dis- tance; mathematical perspective or decreasing size with increas- ing distance; change of focal adjustment necessary for distinct vision of near and distant objects; change of axial adjust- ment necessary for s’ngle vision of near and distant objects. The first three of these are monocular, the last is binocular. The painter can give only the first two. The stereoscope gives also the last, and its surprising effects are due to this cause. In natural vision alone all kinds concur. Now in reversing the binocular perspective we do not affect the other kinds. ere is therefore, a discordance between this and the other kinds, and when they exist it must overpower them. This it cannot do when the mathematical perspective is strongly marked. us the curious effects of inverse perspective is best seen when the other forms of perspective, particularly the mathematical, are least marked. It is impossible to see it in cases of long build- ings or long rows of buildings taken in perspective. In such cases the mathematical overpowers the binocular perspective. But in buildings and grounds seen directly in front it is very evident. I now combine with the naked eye stereoscopic 8 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. houses above and nearer, and the larger farther away in the distance. On combining in a similar manner one of those skeleton of pees iution. In the first ara in most stereoscopic siokiies identical points. are farther apart than the eyes, and therefore, cannot be combined beyond the pictures without = aid of lenses or prisms. In the second place, even if the pictures are not farther apart than the eyes, and may therefore ie thus com- bined, the dissociation of the focal from the axial adjustment, as already explained in my first paper* is difficult and imperfect, aid the combined picture therefore is not clear. T wish now to apply the method proposed in my last article, in the representation of stereoscopic phenomena. The usua method, which I have used in figs. 1, 2, 3, and 4, because it is familiar, represents pertectly the position of objects seen single and therefore their relative distance or the depth of space, when the eyes are directed upon them consecutively ; but can- not represent the position of double vmages in the stereoscope any more than it can in natural vision. Fig. 7, gives the mode of representing by the usual method. A R, A Lis the position of the optic axes when objects aa in the foregrounds are com- bined at A and bd’+ the position of the double images of bé, seen at the same distance as A; BR,BL the direction of the optic axes when objects bb in the backgrounds are combined and seen at B and aa’, the apparent position of aa at the same distance as B. Fig. 8 gives the same when pictures are com- bined by squinting. Now it is evident that this mode of representation is not true, for we do not refer bb’ to the same distance as A, when we look at A, nor aa’ to the same distance as B when we look at B. The whole stereoscopic effect would be lost if we did. On the other hand my method of representation gives the true chow positions of the double images as we now proceed to show. When we gaze through a stereoscope the two pictures seem to slide aaeed over each other until they unite to form a single * This Jour., IL, xlvii, pp. 73 and 76. t ee Le er ee ee MRP mE ES TT ee ee Ter Te eet Ae Oe SOS ee NG PER Ey Meee a eines ee Se ge ne” Py Rie aee oy =: J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 9 median lines n S,n’S’. It will be observed that these double images occupy precisely the position of those of an object at A fig. 9. Fig. 11, gives the relation of parts and the direction of the optic axes, when objects aa in the foregrounds of the ictures are combined and seen at A, and fig. 12, the visual result. To combine aa (fig. 11), bd do not slide by each other, presentation (fig. 12) the exact position of bd’ of the scene, is determined as 5 the ray lines. _ The phenomena of combination by squinting is represented in figs. 13,14, 15, of which fig. 13 represents the actual relation oe and the direction of the optic axes when foregrounds _ ease of combination by squinting, the two images of the card do not slide over each other inward, as in the stereoscope, but oo = 10 J. W. Mallet on Meteorie Iron from Virginia. outward ; so that, as already stated, the right-eye image of the left picture covers the left-eye image of the right picture, to form — the binocular picture or scene; while homonymous images of — the right and left pictures are seen to the right and left. I have represented this in figs. 14 and 15, where 7 and i are right © and left pictures as seen by the rig ht eye, and r’ /’ the same as seen by the left eye. By careful St after what I have already said, the figures will explain themselves. It is true, this mode of representation is complex, and, for those unaccus- tomed to binocular experiments, perhaps ‘difficult to under- stand; but it has the advantage of truly representing the some- what complex visual phenomena. Oakland, Cal., March 20, 1871. Art. I1.—On % Masses of Meteoric Tron, from Augusta Co. Virginia ; by J. W. MALLET, Professor of Anal. and Applied T Chemistry, ae of Virginia. NEARLY two years ago [ learned that a lump of iron, which ~ from the description given of it I supposed to be meteoric, had been turned up by the plough in Augusta Co. in this State, . and soon afterwards I obtained possession of this specimen by the kind assistance of Hon. J. B. Baldwin of Staunton. It Sees to be beyond question a meteorite, weighing about — 56 Ibs a A few months later, I saw at the Annual Fair of the State — Agricultural Society in Richmond, a second mass, of smaller — size, weighing about 36 Ibs., which had come from the same county, and was exhibited along with some iron ores by Maj. Jed. Hotchkiss of Staunton. Learning sien me that t wane about to examine and analyze my own specimen, and was — ; No. ing my own specimen, ae ‘Nos. 2 and 3 those of Maj. Hotchkiss ~All three’ present quite the same general appearance. They @ are oe a very irregular pear shape, one end of each mass being ~ and more mended ed than the other—the ania ene s each is somewhat flattened, but by concave surfaces, in oe No. 1 was more massive and rounded than the J. W. Mallet on Meteorite Iron from Virginia. 11 others—No. 2 most flattened—the latter had some rude resem- blance in shape to a shoulder of mutton. The dimensions of the masses before cutting were as follows: No. 2. No. 3. meme tenets os oo cos ow or. 28 centimeters 27 ¢.m. 11 ¢. m. “ width, at large end,___21 es 5S alte 5 * = “at small end, -.17 a i. Be . thickness, at large end, _13 He 13 °° 3.3 = 2: at small end, 11 5 as SE No. 1. Sheet A pretty good idea of the shape and size may.be obtained from the accompanying fig- ures, from photographs of the original speci- mens with attached scale. The exact weights before cutting were, No. 1. No. 2- No. 3. 25,429 grams. 16,441 grams. 1,644 grams. the masses being entire, nothing having been previously de- tached from any one of The surface of each of the masses is rough and irregular. At some points, which have been rubbed, the iron exhibits its metallic luster, and traces of its crystalline character may be observed, but nearly the whole surface is covered with a dark rown crust, consisting essentially of hydrated ferric oxide, w which varies from about an eighth toa third of an inch in thick- he union of hardness and toughness in the iron makes it quite difficult to cut, and in attempting to obtain with the plan- ing machine a slice of considerable size the ordinary cutting tools were blunted and broken ; it was found necessary to drill a row of holes and connect these by a cut made with the planer. 12 J. W. Mallet on Meteoric Iron from Virginia. e specific gravity was taken for Nos. 1 and 2 with solid pieces of about 140 grams and 95 grams, respectively, cut from the interior of the masses, and for No. 3 with about 10 grams of clean shavings (from the planer) in a specific gravity bottle. The results were, No. 1. No. 2. No. 3. Specific gravity, at 15° C, 7°853 7°855 7°839 he interior structure of the iron is compact and highly crystalline, of much the same general character throughout, ut a few small grains and streaks of a brownish yellow min- eral were noticed, which on being picked out and examined ved to be troilite. There are, however, minute fissures proach 90°; on the much smaller cut surface of No. 3, the fizures are somewhat more irregular, but the angles approach 60°. By etching surfaces obtained in other planes it was ren- dered evident that the difference of appearance is merely due to looking at different projections of the same crystalline struc- ture. The accompanying engravings, taken from photographs, exhibit the results of etching these specimens. e metal soon rusts upon cut surfaces, especially where the exudation of chlorine occurs, and this renders more distinctly visible the slight fissures which penetrate the interior. No. 1. ee ee a ee ee a Se Pe J. W. Mallet on Meteoric Tron from Virginia. 13 he iron is not passive, though very easily rendered so by nitric acid. It reduces copper rather slowly -from the sulphate, ‘and if the whole surface be covered by the latter metal and then washed under a stream of — rubbing * poke with the hand or a cloth, a part of the copper comes ; off ry easily, leaving the remainder firmly attached and feprod sett very beautifully the Widmannstiittian figures ; obviously a case of galvanic deposition, the Schreibersite pee the electro-negative solid and receiving the coating of coppe y the rolonged action of acid Mole sate white lamine of Schreibersite are “brought into view, which if completely de- tached are found to be flexible and strongly magnetic. The following are the results of chemical analysis. Nor1:; No. 2. No. 3. ON eee. 88°706 88°365 89°007 Deke oo 10163 10°242 9964 tO SR ee Ee oe 396 “428 "387 OPUOR oe 6255S “003 “004 *003 Rs 002 002 00 Man ganese, ....... trace ne ce trace Phosphorus, ee "341 "362 "375 pee ‘019 008 026 Chloring, een ce 003 002 004 14 J. W. Mallet on Meteoric Iron from Virginia. — No, 1 No. 2, No. 3. ees ees 172 185 122 Sits, 5 067 061 “056 99872 99°659 99°947 These numbers are so closely accordant that there can be no doubt of the masses being essentially identical in chemical composition. The nickel and iron were separated, in a cold and quite dilute solution, by means of carbonate of baryta, and the pre- cipitates obtained were carefully tested as to purity before the weights were finally accepted as correct. Considerable quantities of material were used for the deter- mination of the minor constituents. Particular attention was given to the identification of the minute quantity of tin present, as Professor J. Lawrence Smith has lately mentioned* the fact, that he has never found this metal in the course of numerous analyses of meteoric iron, The precipitate with sulphuretted hydrogen, which contained the tin and copper, was in each case obtained from a solution of more than a hundred grams of the ron. I feel satisfied that the chlorine is not of meteoric origin—not an essential constituent of the original masses—but has been derived from the soil in which the iron has lain imbedded. The exudation of watery drops containing metallic chlorides is observable only at points on the outside and on cut surfaces along the lines of fissures communicating with the outside. Although chlorine is mentioned above as found in the general analysis of the planing machine shavings, I failed altogether to detect it in a specially selected solid piece of some fifty grams taken from a part of No. 1 destitute of fissures or flaws. The siliceous residue is set down as silicic acid, but some of it seems to have in reality existed as silicide of iron. A part of this residue having been examined with the blowpipe to identify it as silicic acid, another portion was looked at with a magnifying power of 250 to 500 diameters, and in polarized ight was seen to consist of an amorphous powder, and rounded, transparent grains of very small dimensions, for the most part from ‘0025 to 0100 millimeter in diameter, of well-marked masses of meteoric iron a iris portions of a single fall from the heavens, agreeing so ¢ n chemical constitution ; having, moreover, all been found at but short distances from each other. The precise localities from which they came are as follows: * This Journal, I, xlix, 333, (May, 1870). N. H. Winchell on the Glacial features of Green Bay. 15 No. 1, from a spot on the land of Mr. Robert Van Lear, about five miles (a Little age of) North from Staunton, in 38° 14’ N. lat. and 79° O1’ W. long. No. 2, from the land of Mr. M. Fackler, about one mile to the San of the locality of No. 1. No. 8, about half a mile still further Southeast, or rather a little North of a N.W. and SE. line passing through the last named locality. It will be interesting to watch for the possible detection of other masses in the same neighborhood. This makes the fourth recorded instance of meteorites found within the State of Virginia, the three preceding having been, eteoric stone, which fell in Chesterfield Co., June 4th, 1828, phe Jour. I, xv, 195 and xvi, 191). 2. Meteoric iron, found in Grayson Co., described ce rof. Rogers of thee University i in 1842, ” Ghia Jour., I xlili, 169). 3. Meteoric iron, found in Roanoke Co., and described by Prof. Houeres in 1842, (this Jour., I, xlin, 169). University of Virginia, March 27, 1871. Art. Il].—The Glacial Features of Green Bay of Lake Michigan, with some observations on a probable former outlet of Lake rato ae N. H. Wiscee, of the Geological Corps of Michiga THE topographical features of the region of Green Bay, are strikingly dependent on the geological structure as acted on by glacial forces. The west coast is low, and in but few places can the underlying rock be seen above the drift deposits. The immediate shore varies oie little from the rola trend - _ takes a direction nearly N. and &., an interesting fact, the special significance of which will be noticed further on. east coast is in the same way dependent on the line of piovien of the Niagara limestone; but, very unlike the west is frequent es indented by oa as fe LA Sees their great tiful ship hart ese real 16 N. H. Winchell on the Glacial features of Green Bay. frequently uniting with the shore-line, the entrances to the little bays being uniformly very deep. ‘The passage through Port des Morts is 21 fathoms, north of Louse island 24 fathoms. The mouth of Eagle harbor is 11 fathoms, of Ellison’s bay 12 fathoms, and of Hedgehog harbor 17 fathoms. The average depth of Green Bay is 16 to 18 fathoms. 3 The uniformity in the direction of these bays is another remarkable fact. They indent the peninsula in a southerly or southeasterly direction. On the contrary the bays on the op- posite side of the peninsula, and opening into Lake Michigan, have a very uniform direction northerly or northwesterly, com- plementing those opening into Green Bay in such a way, that the peninsula is in several cases almost intersected by their near inosculation. The barrier of the Niagara limestone is broken through at each of these bays, and its broken off ends form perpendicular and bald bluffs which face each other across their entrances, and rise to the height of 75 to 175 feet. Government and Hib- bard’s bluffs enclose Sturgeon bay. The former has a height of 115 feet, the latter about 80 feet. Eagle Bluff is on the south side of Kagle harbor and has a height of 149 feet 10 inches. Its counterpart on the north side is about 60 feet. Garden Bay in Great bay de Noc is another example of the same pheno- menon. The Niagara barrier is more broken down between Port des Morts and Pt. de Morts and Pt. de Tour than at any other place. Projecting southward, the peninsula which en- closes Great bay de Noc and terminates with Pt. de Tour, is a counterpart of that which encloses Green Bay ; and the whole interval between Door Bluff on the south and Sag Bluff in Great bay de Noe on the north, is but an enlarged illustration of the phenomena already described. In this case the Niagara lime- stone is so completely broken down as to admit the waters of Lake Michigan, the Potawatamie islands, which lie in that a being its only parts remaining above the level of the lake. : N. H. Winchell on the Glacial features of Green Bay. 17 Glacial strize and polished surfaces at the head of Green Bay have a direction N. 34° E. coinciding with the axis of Green Bay. In the bay north of Sag and Burnt Blufts, in Great Bay de Noe, they run about N.W. and S.E. epost of the east shore of Green Bay and of Great Bay de Noe. Those deeply cut bays before mentioned must be regarded as again expose Another evidence of the more southward tendency of the main glacier consists in the fact that it actually broke through the Niagara barrier in numerous instances in a southerly direc- tion, but did not once encroach upon the Trenton, on the Opposite side of Green Bay, although it hardly rises above the water level. most demolished between Port des Morts and Pt. de Tour, and conclude that that interval must lie in the course of the original glacier. A course nothward thence carries us up the valley of Little Bay de Noe and the Whitefish river to the shore of Lake Superior. If we examine the south shore of Lake Superior, Am. Jour. Sct —Tuirp Seriss, Vow. II, No. 7—Juty, 1871. 2 18 N. H. Winchell on the Glacial features of Green Bay. we find that in a line directly north from the head of Little Bay — de Noe occurs the only break in the otherwise continuous rock barrier. Dr. D. Hemedtnis in his report to the Michigan Legis- lature in 1840, says that “an elevated range of hills,” or in @ another place, “an elevated and very regular chain of hills stretches from Point Iroquois to the Pictured Rocks,” from which place they “pass away from the shore southwesterly,” and Dr. Houghton adds that “the western prolongation of this rock has not been determined.” From the mouth of the Chocolate river, six or eight miles east of Marqtctté, to a point one-and-a-half ‘miles east of the mouth of Train river, the ore is low and occupied with drift, deposits, the usual roc barrier of sandstone is interrupted and entirely wanting. Both © he east and to the west from this interval the shore of the Oo cause the Falls of the aan, sce ane in Diner: and — oO Nenin in sek cliffs at or near Iroq m the mouth of Chocolate river of the falls of the upper mileabuiiaas occurs, in general, the strike of the Huronian, — from the latter place to the head of Keweenaw bay, a right line would pass some of the highest primary knobs an through the head waters of some of the principal rivers of the Upper : : Peninsula of Michigan. This rough and elevated character — continues westward to the Montreal river, near the western ~ _Desor says of te «The latter are distinesdy. seen ernie the others, and are therefore more recent. Some of them are besides distinctly curved, as if the body which produced them _ had been deflected in ascending the ene; a pn gin not yet observed elsewhere.” On an island east of Dead river (neat ~ Marquette) there are also two systems of furrows, ome ei ing = N. and S. and one N. 20° E., the latter being the more distinct N. H. Winchell on the Glacial features of Green Bay. 19 and sometimes taking the form of troughs four feet wide and two feet deep.* These indicate that the continental glacier moved in a direction N.E. and S.W., forming the deepest furrows, but that the local glacier passed N. and 8. It was also, doubtless, “ deflected” from its course, and the opposition of the Huro- sand. Thus it appears that not only was the outlet of Lake Su- perior through Little Bay de Noc up to the close of the Ter- tiary, but that it continued to exist there after the stratification of the drift. e curious excavation and piling up of the drift on either side of the Whitefish valley could only have been done since the deposit of the same, and the water-worn surface of the Trenton limestone, on the top of the water-shed, must have been produced since the dawn of the Terrace Epoch. Ann Arbor, Mich., August 20, 1870. * Foster and Whitney’s Report on L. Superior, Part I, p. 206. 20 TL. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. Art. I1V.—Infusorial Circuit of Generations; by THEoD. C. HILGARD. he are all evidently immature forms, subject to a vast cycle of oe gressive and retrograde developments and infinitely multiply- ing the molecular germs at every individual dissolution.+ A little salt, glycerine, or sugar destroys their present form; but they seem to be hardly affected by morphia or r atropia, even in strong solutio It is this feature of the non-endurance in nein up, which renders it at once certain, that no such sarcode bodies can continue to exist integro, when exposed to the full heat of summer, on a cracking dry tub, or on a roof, likewise as torrid as a blazing July sun can Paden it within four weeks. The same applies to all the confervaceous, palmellaceous, protoc occous, desmidiaceous, etc., fresh-water spawns, of true Mosses; which, once collapsed by drought, rarely continue growth in a progres: sive sense. ith the exception of their c “n Ea (specially adapted to endure even excessive Sepia they . e. exclusive of all the seve on tgabag rs ilica-coated, and oe Ree pees cau or featbaior cell-like sarcodic bodies and also the clear and vibrionic form to the algoid bryaceous prota ts. They are — classed =r green _ ia,” and also constitute the ‘“ Chloro ex” of ‘ rosperm + The same doubtiess applies to a small ‘ Stentor Roe, is ue hovering up and down in water taken from ponds, aquaria, etc. It is of a hazy white color, ite oe to the naked Cys; and re maskabie for never touching the surfé When placed under the a drop e air, this expose nimal germ (in Shape resembling a Pie or a pis bean) is seen olny throwing “cloak ” or mantle, Berges bes intense ciliary (fingered) vibratory action, ae the interior surface It then throws out hyaline constitutive brood- balls of | with the same “ fingered” action—(a ed various sizes, sag — visible pentsy One ultimately entirely flows apart into such Sleshy cilia, the } This fo oe of ee muting “serial =. bead-strings enveloped in a foliaceous slime - mon to y the genus — and various brooding-phases of the algoid alate tiee Sp oscapa wie. With the ns, the internal ay wing ie of gee thallus often eon as is well known, in similar goid) tissue-fibers ; in @ manner giao repconmated bey - siatoaiy of Bldgettia pita sto ges in Harvey’s “Nereis.” | T. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. 21 “revive” only by starting anew from very reduced, but im- mensely multitudinous constituent particles of their own, which perdure exsiccation. In the class of Fungi we meet with simi- the size of those didymous (érichothecitum) spores which pres- ently stand erect on pedicels, as a pink velvet, in the chinks of the bark and collapse at the first touch of the sun; while their ultimate subcortical development into a mature, “ black enamel” Spheeria again perdures in the hea Under the circumstances above mentioned, the rain water molecular condition, which adapts them to last and survive in a dry condition, as we find it not only with the Fungi, but also in the case of the pruinose-pulverulent, primitive moss-spawns, three agreeing in this feature of being “reducéd to dust,” out of which they are again resuscitated. This evanescent con- dition, however, where gelatinous particles of about z;';5 of a line diameter shrink alike to imperceptible dimensions, affords no pretext whatever for assuming identities, just because we ourselves lose the means of discrimination. Whenever the iden- tity of substance is preserved, each of these yarious molecular organisms preserves its cyclar developments distinct from simi- ar, corresponding ones as true species, so far as my observa- ions go. ge There being, at present, no comprehensive pictorial works available to fall back upon for reference, that are sufficiently correct, even in their designs, to identify the forms, allowance must be made for the liberties of comparison taken in the fol- lowing descriptive representation of the most frequent infusorial processes, : 22 T. ©. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. | way, rather scantily ‘‘fructifies” in a “ sexual” fashion, 1. e. by the development of a theca ; but on clayey soils fills all the slug- gish and stagnant waters with its virescent uliginous spawns ; while it covers the surface of fields, by millions of acres, with minute crust, or “ brick red leprosy,”* whose fine, molecular dust is swept aloft by every wind. Immediately before the frost, the same fields are densely covered with a small crop of minute hese minute, but in this instance coated, swarming cells are (or vibratory lash) arises, a clear point of substance ; wherein, in a small percentage of these cells, a parasite is found to develop. This parasite is a perfectly colorless globule, apparent in the clear navel-point of the cell, and exhibits a faintly opalescent hue. As it grows, the cell which harbors the “ incubus ” loses its own individual vitality. It ceases to swarm about and dissect into living, chlorophylliferous and automatous progenies, e live ones do. Instead of spontaneously dissolving as 1m the living process the cell-coat remains firm; and as the para- sitic animal yol ws and occupies more space, executin tremulous and vibratory contractions, the chlorophyll is press into the rear, a lifeless mass. At last the cell is ruptured in * See St. Louis Med. Reporter, Jan. Ist, 1867, pp. 522, 527—528. Also Proc. St. Louis Ac. Se. (July, 1861), vol. ii, No. 1, p. 160; and vol. i, p. 156. For “ Chiorococcum ” read “ : ” (lately renamed ‘ Protuberans” Ag. its “ botrydium” progenies. The latter collapse and turn red. This pulverulent, mintate ‘* ‘a kermesina” Auct., must, however, by no means be confoun with the darkly purpureous, uliginous moss-spawns which cover, e. g. the hilly “ Orange-sand ” regions of the State of Mississippi. It is prevalent in winter 41 - red i“ Mi OC le ¢ ” Ww , and ists of matted i moss-cells, each one containing a central brood-fiber which is medullary-dott li ing, and fascicularly surrounded by a stratum us, prore “« Qscillaria ”-fibrils. Not ouly the ultimately enlarged (chlorophylliferous) brond- also the undulating fiber, form brood-balls (terminally). Its gelatine forms a cement of the loose sandy clay, and a home or abode for the iae (or bright-green foliolate lichens) as well as for grasses, etc. T. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. 23 front, and the cupular-compressed, dead, chlorophylline mass remains inert and void of life until devoured nfusoria or the zymotic fungus. The cell-coat, likewise, is effete, while the large globular and somewhat acicularly-granulated incubus, after a few very wry contractions, at once widely opens a large, ciliate mouth, gaping across the sphere’s surface ; and disengag- ing or displaying a girdle of cilia round the rear part of the y, it immediately represents the free-roving Vorticella in full equipment. Its subsequent “ encystment,” into a spherical cyst densely covered with short prickles (somewhat like the rim of a Helio- pelta) and containing entrail-like designs, is well known.* Also, that it eventually bursts—occasionally, at least—and dis- gorges a peculiar sort of wafer-shaped, elliptical (not ellipsoidal !) cells, or nuclei, whose ulterior fate and abode, however, hitherto t of their shape, they znhere, as an almost rage Ge pellicle or stratum, which to the microscopic observer is the instantane- clear granular nucleus or “germinal speck ” inside. The multiplication of the pedunculate Vorticelle, by fission, lengthwise, and by budding-out, sideways, at the rear end, is ng | gularly about, and ‘rebounding at head-long speed, within a few minutes it “settles” upon some suitable surface, with the * In fig. 215, Carp. “ Mier.” (p. 446), the short prickles are omitted, B. to E. 24 T. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. As for its sable multiplications, when a Vorticella gets “sick,” for want of air or food (as when kept between glass- plates held sas and glued round about, or cemented, to pre- vent evaporation), the weeye contracts to a perfect globe, with a ig germinal are 6. - oF nucleus t in the middle; the densely punctuated cloud, ru dp like a cumulus ; its tips mostly warty as with (dotted) i awtercies a sort of primordial fram boésia.” It is to this form that I wish to call tion, sincé it presents the most minute phase of indvichaal ant- mate life visible at represent under the known powers of the aioroeOhe: being the ultimate retrograde development- phase, as well as the first manifestation, common to all such soft ora sarcode bodies, — the ‘“ Vorticellan” to the most bulky “ Paramecian” forms. And from each little dot in these “clouds of life” a ani Vorticella can be seen — to develop! It is here, indeed, at this first visible advent or — exordium of animate life, and the resurrection of millions of — germs through the spontaneous dissolution of a single one, that the last nubecular microscopic perceptions closely resemble the last nebular telescopic as well as the theoretic ones of Laplace’s cosmogony. ; 4 For the —— = = col such often repeated forms of | retro- rade self-c a germin Such likewise occur in a ‘very closely analogous mae in ae self-maceration (of the engulfed pencil-beads and the enlarged “oidium”-joints) of the yeast or ‘“‘zymotic” fungus. The | ti | exists into bos iebees. Of the black or i ae nebula-form of the zymotic or yeast-fungus I have are aca in the St. Louis Medical Reporter, Jan. 1st, 1868, (Zymotic Condition, etc.) and Proc. A. A. A. S., 1870, e¢ anée. Neither the animal molecules nor the (coated) "& Cacte acteria” join into file, as do the fermentic — ae naked. The oh ee opportunity of witnessing A. Hall on the application of Photography, ete. 25 with its “amoeba” or pseudopodial dissolution, when treating ; relia.” of the so-called “* Paramecium Au (To be continued.] Art. V.—On the application of Photography to the determination of Astronomical data; by ASAPH HALL.* ANY one who has witnessed a total eclipse of the sun must have felt his utter inability to make a correct description of the various features of the phenomenon, and must have wished for some means by which all these features, so suddenly and so grandly displayed, might be portrayed impartially and truth- fully and in such a way that they could be subjected to a cool and leisurely examination. Such a means is furnished in a good degree by photography. A few photographs of the corona and protuberances of a total eclipse are far more trustworthy than all the hand sketches that have ever been made. It is aeeet does not yet appear to be clearly established. In the ope of provoking discussion and investigation of the subject a brief review of what has been done in this application of the photographic method seems opportune, especially so, consider- ing the extensive use that ma: be made of the method in observ- ing the transit of Venus now near at hand. SS # Read before the Washington Philosophical Society. 26 A. Hall on the application of Photography The first photographs of double stars, made for the purpose of determining by micrometric measurement their relative an- gle of position and distance, were those of Mizar and its com- ~ panion, made at the Harvard College Observatory in April and — May, 1857, by Messrs. Whipple and Black of Boston. Professor — . P. Bond has given in the Astronomische Nachrichten, No. 1105, the results of his measurements of the thirteen photo- — graphic images. The zero of the angle of position was foun y moving the telescope in right ascension after an impression — had been taken and taking a second one on the same plate. This process repeated gave a series of photographic images on — the same plate and the right line passing through the series — gave the son of the daily motion of the heavens. The robable error of a single measurement of the photographic distance of the images was found to be + 0°12, or somewhat — smaller than that of a direct measurement with the common filar micrometer. During the summer of 1857 many more photographs of this double star were taken, and in the journal — above mentioned, No. 1129, Prof. Bond has given an elaborate — account of the measurement of sixty-two photographic images. For this measurement of these images a new and improved micro- meter was employed, consisting of an achromatic microscope wit. a magnifying power of 2200. Under this microscope the star — images appeared as aggregations of minute drops of matter and looked like the result of a great number of vibrating and — momentary impressions. They were generally symmetrical with — a gradual condensation toward the center of the image, and the bisection of an image with the wire of the micrometer could _ be done with great exactness. The probable error of the center of an image was found to be 0-051, and hence that of the distance of two such centers to be +0°’072. Adopting the estimate of Struve, +0°”127, as the probable error of a single measurement of a double star of this class with a filar microme- ter, the measurement of the photographic images would have a relative value three times greater, or = (9:123). The accuracy of the measurement is better shown by the numerical results obtained by Prof. Bond, which are as follows: Mean Exposure. Distance. No, of images. 13° 14°31 + 0°034 7 16 14°19 + 0°035 7 18 14 *18 + 0°033 8 24 14 °23 + 0°035 8 25 14°15 + 0°034 7 30 14 °28 + 0°034 2 33 14°19 + 0°033 8 36 14 -20 + 0°032 10 24-5 14-21 + 0-013 2 to the determination of Astronomical data. 27 proportionate increase in the time of exposure ; work of measuring the photographic images and in reducing the measurements, an i, i ivi ! labor performed, I take the liberty of stating my own estimate of the two methods of observing double stars, viz: the photo- graphic method and that of direct measurement with a filar micrometer or heliometer. In the case of double and triple stars I have no doubt that the better method is that of direct measurement. The labor of setting the circles and finding the star is common to both methods, but during the time required graphic images a practised observer would make and reduc series of direct measurements. It is thus possible by the direct method more easily to repeat the observation under varie conditions of atmosphere, observer and instrument, and in this way to render the final result less liable to systematic errors. Tt is true that according to Prof. Bond’s calculations, the photo- eraphic method is decidedly the more accurate, but some ex- os istrustful of inferences drawn to avoid systematic error, or to give it as much as possible the nature of those irregular errors which in the long run tend to eliminate themselves. Finally, it may be stated as a general 28 A. Hall on the application of Photography rule that, other things being equal, the simpler and more direct the method of observing, the better. In order to justify the interposition of any new process it must be shown that this process gives greater accuracy or greater rapidity of observing or both. Thus the chronographic method of observing transits is justified on the ground that it gives greater ease and rapidity of observing, since the gain in accuracy is scarcely sensible. In the case of groups of stars like the Pleiades or Preesepe there would be a great advantage in using the photographic method provided the plates could be made sufficiently sensitive, so that images of stars of the ninth and tenth magnitudes could be obtained. Mr. Rutherfurd, who has done so much in as- tronomical photography, has made photographs of both the groups mentioned, and from his plates Dr. B. A. Gould has deduced positions of the stars. Dr. Gould’s memoir on the Pleiades was presented to the National Academy five years ago, and it is to be regretted that it is not yet published. The first application of photography to determine the times — of contact in a solar eclipse was made by Mr. Warren De la ES ts eee PN Ee NSS ER, to the Determination of Astronomical data. 29 r. De la Rue speaks of having made some observations to iL avieine whether in the process of drying the images had un- dergone any distortion, sa says: ‘‘ The result, however, proved that there was no appreciable onteasthat. except in thickness, and that the soot jon film did not become di storted, rovided Rue in the solar eclipse of 1860, and their zero being seit mined in the same manner. This memoir contains a large amount of interesting information concerning the position and areas of the solar aes but the determinations of position are vitiated in some degree by the optical distortion of the instru- ment. The observers at Rew have made experiments to deter- mine the amount of distortion, but no definitive result has yet been reached. They say that the following facts may be re- peed: as established: “1st, that the image of any object pe tographically depicted is liable to a distortion, which varies at ‘erent distances from the center of the field, and the amount of which may be determined for every instrument by methods similar to that employed by ourselves ; 2d, that in our case the ae of an object is larger when formed near the edge of the than at the center, and that the amount of elongation of a unit of length at the center increases with its distance from the center.” Their conclusion is that the ing is not sufficiently far advanced to justify any corrections of t itions of the Spots on account of the effect of distortion, but they express the al that at last they will be able to give thoroughly scone ga gaan for the effect of displacement in instrumen oe a ont of ae = eclipse of August, 1869, bare not yes so far as I know, but it is | pes | pee Put ee i teey i are affected by distortion will in a measure render the results dependent and un- trustworthy. It is to be hoped, however, that these pho- 30 G. J. Brush on Ralstonite. tographic plates see Pie subjected - a careful examination in may be made of the extent of error to which they are liable. an the case of a solar eclipse, or of a transit of a planet over the sun’s disk the photographic method has very great advantages over the observations of contact in many respects, and the errors to which it is subject are worthy of the most thorough investigation. The observation of a contact — is uncertain on account of irradiation, and it is momentary a aleag as to the soeaibility of ais measuring and oT a the ’ photographic observations of the transit of Venus. Mar, 25, 1871. Art. VL—On Ralstonite, a new Fluoride hse Arksut-Fiord; by | Go. J. BrusH | THE recent exploitation of the Greenland cryolite has igi : ] only led to the discovery of crystallized cryolite, but has given to mineralogical science several new fluorides, two of which, thomsenolite and pachnolite, are found in beautiful crystallized fe rms. I now call attention to another fluoride observed, a few months ee by Rev. J. Grier Ralston of Norristown, ound a mineral in minute octahedrons associated with Begehate, and being unable to identify it, he sent it to Pro Dana, by whom. the specimens were passed over to me for é aminatio G. J. Brush on Ralstonite. 31 planes alike in lustre I cannot doubt that they are isometric octahedrons, and hence that the small plane on the angles is a cubic plane. The mineral is colorless to white, with a vitreous luster, and has a hardness greater than fluorite, equal to about 4°. Specific gravity, taken on 25 milligrams, gave 2°4. 32 S. W. Ford—Primordial Rocks of Troy, N. Y. Art. VIL.—WNotes on the Primordial Rocks = the vicinity of Troy, . N. Y.; by S. W. For 4 In view of the prevailing uncertainty respecting the age of the rocks of that portion of the Taconic series of Professor | Emmons lying east of the Hudson river, I was led several years | ago to undertake the investigation of some of these rocks in my own neighborhood, though I had but few hopes of learning any- thing essentially new about them. It soon became apparent that much valuable information might be obtained from them; and from certain facts which early came under my observation — I was induced to continue their study. I propose here to. notice briefly some of the more noteworthy results thus far’ on te evidently eastward, and at a high angle. They extend eastward about half a mile, and form a hill of cokes forkcshe magnitude - within the city limits. Following the course of this hill north- ward, we find them frequently well exposed in railway cuttings, 7 and before reaching Lansingburgh, which is — miles ci | in a bold elevation several hundred feet i in hei - noutherty, aid a pear to be all construe upon nuke same pattern, having on the west a steep, on the east a more gradual slope. lag. the western ges are naturally exposed. This uniformity of structure is very striking, there are reasons for believing that it has sented largely successive short, sharp folds in the — of which we have @ —— -east of Lansingburgh; but as near! eS er ae ee ae ee S. W. Ford—Primordial Rocks of Troy, N. Y. 33 the whole district is covered with a thick sheet of drift, and the rocks bear evidence of extensive faulting, much further study will be necessary before it will be fully understood. These outcrops generally consist for the most part of coarse red and yellow weathering slates and shales, with occasional thin-bedded sandstones; but the most of them are supposed, and four of them are known, to hold subordinate limestone de- posits. Of these deposits the two western-most individually con- sist of a few courses of thick-bedded limestone, and of irregular, sometimes lenticular, sparry and frequently pebbly masses, vary- ing from one to several hundred pounds in weight, im ed in a coarse, dirty-looking arenaceous matrix; while the others form tolerably compact, even-bedded limestones, with an abun- dance of scattered black nodules, from twenty-five to thirty feet in thickness. So far as investigated, these limestones have been found to be highly fossiliferous, though the fossils are usually in a very fragmentary condition. From two of them—one of the con- glomerates and one of the even-bedded masses—the writer has made frequent collections during the last three years. Witha single exception the same species occur in both. Up to the present time they have yielded eighteen species, which are dis- tributed as follows: Protozoa (Archwocyathus) ..-~.---~---.----------- 1 species. Grachiopods 2. 2 ee 7 ie Lamellibranchiata: i222 2c 320 oe .8 1 e Gasteropoda......_----- oe Sine Pteropoda (Hyolithes)--. -- 2 zi Annelida ( Salterelia) 1 “ DeWRaiite e aes. eek eo 5 - Total, 18 “4 of New York in 1848, from this locality; and two— Conoceph- alus (Atops) trilineatus (Emm.) and Olenellus (Olenus) asaphordes (H.), from Greenwich, Washington county. All the rest are new or undescribed.* : Desiring further information in regard to certain of these new species, I several months since wrote Mr. E. Billings, Paleon- tologist of the Geological Survey of Canada, at the same time giving him a list of the species in my possession from this * Unless one of them should prove identical with the species of Cypricardia figured by Emmons (American Geology, p. 113, plate |, fig. 1.) : Am. Jour. Scr.—Turp Serres, Vor. lI, No. 7.—Juzy, 1871. 3 34 S. W. Ford—Primordial Rocks of Troy, N. Y. quarter. In reply Mr. B. informed me that he was just then en- — aged upon a collection of new fossils from the Lower Potsdam ~ riauon below Quebec, which he strongly suspected to be — identical with my own; and on comparison it was found that fifteen out of the eighteen species from Troy were held by usin ~ common, and shown to be perfectly identical. Such an un- — looked for result of course surprised us greatly. That the Lower — Potsdam formation below Quebec, and the western portion o the Taconic series near hee are of the same age, there seems now but little room for cat 4 a e885 é Fog 3:3 oi - =f =| oa-e-) 5 8 re) ef E. Eg g 8." £R a, F its ala of lateral muscular impressions and two sm er, dor- diating from a point near one side;” the other as “larger, i The former occurs quite Sie aa a in the Troy limestones, and is a very beautiful little © object. It varies in size from a mere point to a diameter of © three lines. Perfect specimens have a rich, polished appear- | ance. The other occurs more rarely. As might naturally be expected, these rocks contain immense numbers of Hyolithes. Indeed, large —— of the limestone are often almost wholly composed of them. ithout scant this formation in New York will yet afford — _ new species. ‘The even-bedded limestones east of Troy, . to which especial attention has been given, as well as portions — of the Oe ent are literally loaded with fossils, and Sabi hly to repay idee ye for a long time to come. — heir associated slates, shales and sandstones lave as yet af forded no fossils. Near Tats ee, however, where what is at present regarded as a lower member of the formation, con-_ sisting of heavy and thin-bedded Bray sandstones with inter- stratified black slates, is exposed, a few obscure Fucoids have been found, but these rocks have been but imperfectly investi- ted. Neither the thickness nor precise eastern limit of this _ ormation has yet been ascertained. Troy, N. Y., May 24, 1871. * These rocks have hitherto been referred, though with some doubt, to the Cale z ciferous portion of the Quebec Group; but all modern investigations in our olde strata have steadily A gate to their higher antiquity; and it is simply justice t0 state that, by several geologists besides those who have adopted Prof. Emmons’ views of their age, this has long been suspected. ere S eS ee ee 0. C. Marsh—Notice of some new Fossil Mammals, ete. 85 Art. VIIEL—WNotice of some new Fossil Mammals from the Tertiary Formation ; by Professor O. C. Marsu of Yale College. In association with the Reptilian fossils collected by the Yale College party last summer, and already described in this Journal,* numerous remains of Mammals were also discovered, and in the following article some of the more interesting new species are briefly characterized. A few species from the other ertiary lake-basins of the Rocky Mountains have been included, as they throw considerable light on the ancient sub-tropical fauna of that region, e€ present notice is merely preliminary to a full description, with illustrations, now in course of preparation. Titanotherium ? anceps, sp. nov. material clears up the question of its exact affinities I'he specimens discovered, which evidently pertained to three different individuals, mainly consist of several dorsal vertebra, the distal end of a humerus, the greater portion of a tibia, and some of the smaller bones of the extremities. They indicate a Pachyderm, much larger than any other known mammal from the same deposits, and about two thirds the size of Titanothe- rium Prouti, from the Tertiary basin east of the Rock Moun- | tains. The anterior dorsal vertebre preserved have both articu- lar faces slightly concave, thus distinguishing the species at once from 7. Prouti, which has in this part of the series the front ver tebral face very convex, and the posterior face concave. Another marked difference is seen in the tibia, which at its proximal end has the femoral articular surfaces contiguous, with no prominent elevation between them, resembling in this respect some of the Proboscidea. ° Measurements. sich of anterior dorsal vertebra, on lower sur- , 2 inches 2 lines. Width of posterior face between rib cavities,.... 3 “ Height of posterior face, ee Ve eee aes Transverse diameter of tibia at proximalend,...4 “ 10 “ Fore and aft POR ene { 4.5 6 Verse diameter at distal end, -_ ---------- tes > En Fore and i s « “ * Vol. i, 1871, pp. 192, 322, and 447. 36 O. C. Marsh—Notice of some new Fossil Mammals The remains were found by Lieut. Wann, and the writer, in the ‘‘Mauvaises Terres” deposits, near Sage Creek, Western Wyoming. The geological horizon is lower Miocene, or per: — haps Hocene. eam minor, ne noy. Measurements. : Antero-posterior diameter of lower molar, 10 lines. © Transverse diameter of front lobe, at summit, . Ses, Bae Transverse diameter of posterior lobe, at summit, ot eae 53.9 e only known specimens of this species were found by the writer at Grizzly Buttes, near Fort Bridger, Wyoming, in the — same deposits as the preceding species. Lophiodon Bairdianus, sp. nov. mains on which this species is based consist of portions of several skeletons, with numerous teeth which show consid- ime e iy moreover, by the enamel of the teeth, which, instead of beimg coarsely wrinkled, is _— smooth, or marked by very delicate, irregular striz. ; Measwremen eras sh —- of upper jaw, oie die the three gue | aaalam ano diameter of last upper molar, eewcds Transverse diameter of same a 1025 = 4 Eee of fragment of lower jaw with three posterior : 25 —e— ee ee eedings Philadelphia Pete of Natural Sciences, 1870, p. 113. t Procestiags Philadelphia Acs ee 870, p. 109. _ ee ae | from the Tertiary Formation. 37 The specimens now representing this : ecies, which is one of sil m the most common fossil mammals in the earlier Tertiary of Western Oe peins were found by G. B Grinnell, J. W. Gris- wold, C. W. Betts, A. H. Ewing, J. M. Russ ell, and the writer, at various year near Fort Bridger, and on the White River, in Kastern Utah. The species is named in honor of Professor S. F. Baird, of the Scateheonian Institution. Lophiodon affinis, is nov. a marked = differoes sr igrinand in the contour of the crown, which has a deep notch in the outer posterior margin of the base, between the external Genes in which the transverse ridges terminate. In the species just described, the margin is here proportions. The enamel, | is s similar to that in the noine ing species. Measurements. Antero-posterior diameter - last upper molar. - ------ 71 lines. Transverse diameter of same,_---- ------------------ Ne Bi Antero-posterior diameter of penultimate upper molar, 8 Transverse diameter of same,----.---------- -------- t2 The principal specimens on which this species is established were found by H. D. Ziegler, in the Mauvaises Terres beds, near Marsh’s Fork, Wyoming Lophioton nanus, Sp. NOV. A small, col marked species, apparels a i poate don, is represented by a number of fossils coll at various localities. The arn e ee m4 ee specimens is a right upper jaw containing a series of four pre- molars, and three molars, and part of the corresponding left j 8m with several teeth of the same animal. The molars differ pecially from those of the two preceding species, in have? a much shallower valley between the two transverse rse ridges, and in having a strong basal ridge, or shelf, at the external posterior corner of the crown. The enamel of the whole series is very smooth. The species was probably about two thirds the size of estus. 38 O. C. Marsh—Notice of some new Fossil Mammals Measurements. Length of portion of upper jaw, Spetaiuing seven pos- ee SOOGD a a ie 49 Sy oP ewe > sens ene ae 26° lines. Length of same, with three last molars,..........---- 138-7 “ Antero-pos arate ee a of last upper a eet as 5: Transverse diameter of same, ---- Soh = The remains now known to represent this species were dis- covered by C. W. Betts, H. B. Sargent, and the writer, in the Tertiary strata at Grizzly Buttes, near Fort Bridger. Lophiodon pumilus, sp. nov. A still more diminutive species, of the same, or a nearly re- lated, genus, is indicated by several specimens, including a frag- ment of a left upper jaw, containing three premolars and the two Rascenntiige molar teeth. The species may easily be ela from the small one above described, by the presence, on the out- side of the superior teeth, of a str ong, continuous, but frregrulas basal ridge, which, at the external angle of the crown, replaces the elevated tubercle present in all the molars of the species al- ready noticed. The present specimen may also be distinguished om L. nanus, by the form of the last two upper premolars, which in the latter have their greatest transverse diameter be- hind the center, while the reverse is true of these premolars in the species under consideration. Measuremenis. Length of portion of upper jaw, with three premolars, Faves Pe NGI oe Soe es ee, 14° lines. ro-posterior opened of penultimate upper molar, 3°25 Transverse diameter of sa: is ee 4° The only specimens at present known to represent this species were found by C. T. Ballard, in the Tertiary beds near Marsh’s Fork, Western Wyoming. Anchitherium gracilis, sp. nov. The Green River Tertiary basin of Wyoming apparently con- tains very few extinct solipedal mammals, one or two fragments only being all our party secured during several weeks of explo- rations. Te the Uintah or southern basin, however, especially near the White River of Eastern Utah,* remains of this group are more abundant, and some characteristic specimens were ob- eerie Among these, were three lower jaws, with many of the preservation. They represent an animal less than one half the size of Anchitherium Bairdi Leidy, and sammie, belonging to the same genus. There are seven premolar and’ © molar teeth, with essentially the same constitution as in ial 4 * This Journal, vol. i, p. 196, March, 1871. from the Tertiary Formation. 39 species. The first premolar has but one fang, and between this and the symphysis there are no teeth. On the inner face of each ramus there is a shallow, sickle- -shaped impression, with the point directed forward, and terminating under the first premolar. Measurements. Length of portion of lower jaw, with six posterior teeth, “ps Z lines. Length of same with three posterior teeth, __._.---- Antero-posterior diameter of last lower molar, = Transverse diameter of same,..-..---------------- 2° The above specimens were discovered by C. T. Ballard and the writer, on the north side of the White River, in Eastern Utah. The geological horizon is upper Eocene, or lower Miocene. “ce “ce Lophiotherium Ballardi, sp. nov. A small Pachyderm, apparently nearly related to the genus Soap yale is indicated by a fragment of a right lower jaw, with the last two molars, and a few less important remains. ci species thus represented appears to have been about two Lo by Dr. Leidy from the same Terti ich these fos- sils were found,* and the teeth, so far as a a nearly the same composition. Those preserved in the present specimen are somewhat worn, showing that the — -_ fully adult. The enamel, especially on the sides of the crown, is muc wrinkled, and thus the external basal ridge is cided strongly serrated. Measurements. as —. of last lower molar, ‘4-4 lines. Transverse diameter of s Bie ew a5 = Antero-posterior Sane of. penultimate lower molar,. 3:2 Transverse diameter of sa Wi oa 2°25 The species is named for ‘se discoverer, Mr. C. T. Ballard, oo the Yale party, who obtained the specimens here deseri ibed a Grizzly Buttes, Western Wyoming. oe “ Elotherium lentus, sp. nov. sence of numerous Suilline Pachyderms in the Green ioe Y Perlar basin was clearly established during the inves- ge of our party by the discovery of _— extinct species, rent from any hitherto descri One of >: — evidently aes Oy to the genus Elotherium, is represented oS single fragm a left lower jaw, with the last molar in fine preservation. This, specimen indicates a species about one half the size of Elotherium Mortoni Leidy, which is comparatively abundant in the lower Tertiary deposits east of the Rocky Moun- * Proceedings Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences, 1870, 126. 40 0. C. Marsh—Notice of some new Fossil Mammals tains. The upper surface of this last lower molar is composed | of two transverse pairs of conical lobes, with a single posterior 7 one on the median line. The anterior inner cone is larger than 7 Measurements. : Antero-posterior diameter of last lower molar,_ 9° lines. § Greatest transverse diameter of same,----------------- 5 oe Transverse diameter between first and second pair of cones, 4°4 “ specimen on which this species is established was found ] | by the writer, in October last, in the Tertiary beds, on Henry's 7 Fork, Wyoming. Platygonus Ziegleri, sp. nov. _The species is named for H. D. Ziegler, of Yale College, who covered the specimens on which the present description 18 _ based. Phe losicy was at Grizzly Buttes, near the base of the » Jrom the Tertiary Formation. 41 Platygonus striatus, sp. nov. A third Suilline species, nearly related apparently to the last, and quite equaling it in size, is indicated by portions of two lower jaws, with a few of the anterior teeth, collected by our party in the Phocene strata of Northern Nebraska. In one of the specimens, the second left premolar is well preserved, and characteristic. It has the same general composition as the cor- responding tooth in Platygonus compressus, but, in addition to its much larger size, it is proportionally broader, and has the basal ridge in front less developed. The posterior basal ridge, moreover, is expanded into two rudimentary tubercles. The enamel is marked by delicate irregular strize, mostly parallel with the base of the crown, and to this ornamentation the specific name tfefers. | | | | Measurements. Length of portion of left lower jaw containing first four teeth ere te wkend - lines. Length of same, with first three teeth,._.-..-.--.---- Re eae: Antero-posterior diameter of second lower premolar,.. 62 “ Transverse diameter of same,.._...-------- ---------- ig Bae _ The above specimens were found by the writer, in July last, in the Pliocene sands, near the head-waters of the Loup Fork River, Nebraska. Platygonus ? Condoni, sp. nov. tially divided into three tubercles. The enamel is smooth, and there is no basal ridge on the sides of the teeth preserved. Length of jaw enclosing last three upper molars, --- --- 27 lines Antero-posterior extent of last molar, ----- Gaccsocs ss 12 Z Transve iameter of same, through anterior lobes,-.- 7° = _ This species is named for Rev. Thomas Condon, who discov- ered the specimen described, inthe Pliocene beds of Oregon. 42 O. C. Marsh—Notice of some new Fossil Mammals * Dicotyles Hesperus, sp. nov. pair of cones. e basal ridge is also more strongly developed, especially on the outer margin, where it is continuous. In © Measurements. Length of part of upper jaw with four posterior teeth, 19° lines. Length of same, with three molars, - --- ------ ier tS he See tero-posterior diameter of last upper molar,_...---. 56 “ Transverse extent of same, 4° Antero-posterior diameter of penultimate upper molar, 54 “ This specimen, for which the writer is likewise indebted to Rev. Mr. Condon, is from the same locality and geological horizon as the species last described. Hypsodus gracilis, sp. nov. oming, and supposed by him to indicate an anl- r? allied to the suilline family.* It may readily be : * Proceedings Philadelphia Acad. Nat. Science, 1870, p. 109. From the Tertiary Formation. 48 : Measurements. Length of part of lower jaw containing first molar and ~ two premolars, -....-.-.--- 5:1 lines. Ad cc lob “ 1°6 “ce Antero-posterior diameter of last lower premolar,.... 16 “ The specimens representing this species at present were found by the writer, at Grizzly Buttes, Wyoming. Limnotherium tyrannus, gen. et sp. nov. A somewhat larger pachyderm, but distantly allied appar- ently to the two small species last described, is represented by the anterior portions of two ynited lower jaws, with several teeth, and a few other fragmentary remains. These specimens appear to indicate a genus quite distinct from any hitherto known, but additional remains will probably be required to de- termine its exact affinities. The teeth of the lower jaws are twenty in number, and form an uninterrupted series, which may be divided as follows:—Incisors 2-2, canines 1-1, pre- molars 44, molars 8-8. The incisors are small, and crowded together. The canines are large, nearly round at the base, and evidently formed most. efficient weapons. The first and second premolars had but a single fang. ‘The two anterior molars are in excellent preservation, and have their crowns composed Measurements. Length of dental series of lower jaw,---------------- 18° lines Antero-posterior extent of three molars, . ------------- 75 z Transverse extent of four incisors, . - ngth of symphysis, _... ._.----- ioe a! Depth of lower jaw below last molar, ae IS . Depth below last premolar: 22.220 oes Sigs ee Antero-posterior extent of first lower molar, ---------- 2°5 zi TanSverse diameter of same, . i... ...---. +4: == +54 -<- 2 The specimens here described were found by the writer near Dry Creek, Western Wyoming, in deposits which are probably of Upper Eocene age. : Limnotherium elegans, sp. nov. _. A diminutive mammal is represented in our collections by Portions of two lower jaws, with several teeth, which have so st Rk. H. Lee—Atomie Weights of Cobalt and Nickel. a transverse pair, and are not oblique as in the larger species. — e posterior pair of tubercles, also, are nearly on a transverse 7 ne. q Measurements. Length of fragment of lower jaw, enclosing last premo- 4 ar and three molars, _------. 75 lines. Antero-posterior diameter 0 e second lower molar, ----- o- 6 oe Transverse duimeter of fanic,. <5. 5 a. css a ea The only ao Spo of this species now known were ~ found by the writer at Grizzly Buttes, near the base of the Uintah Mountains, in Wyoming. 4 Yale College, New Haven, June 5th, 1871. Art. [X.—Contributions to Chemistry “aioe the Laboratory of the Lawrence Scientific School. No. 16.—On the Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel; by RicHarp H. ee THE atomic weights df cobalt and nickel have long been sub- jects of controversy, but though much time and labor have been spent upon them, the results arrived at are not as satisfactory as_ could be desired. Under these circumstances Prof. Gibbs suggested to me a — ee of the subject. — oo and results, I wi on and as but a aes Pet at sions : neue can hardly be soumdoned as deserving 0 confiden Ld Poses haaiee vol. viii, p. 194-5. — der Pharmacie, vol. xxxii, p. 76. } Poggendorff’s Annalen, ci, p. 387. : * £ R. H. Lee—Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel. 45 Pure metallic cobalt was prepared by igniting chloride of purpureocobalt in hydrogen. ‘The metal was then dissolved in chlorhydrie acid and precipitated by sodic carbonate. The carbonate was washed, and then digested with oxalic acid, the resulting oxalate again washed, burned in a current of oxygen and the oxide reduced by hydrogen. In other portions of the oxalate the carbon was decried by combustion with cupric oxide. The following table gives a summary of the results obtained : Oxalate taken. Cobalt found. Carbon found. Equivalent €o. Ae ase 32°552 pr.ct, 'B0?4P% — o9.998 ered 32-619“ ee 30°015 3. ae 32°528 aOO8: 30-014 en 2 oe ee eee : Mean, 30-003 Determinations of the atomic weights of cobalt and nickel were also made in 1 y Marignac.* Cobaltous sulphate was purified by repeated crystallization and a weighed quan- tity of the salt heated so as to expel the acid. The resulting oxide was then heated with a known weight of silicate of lead so as to expel the excess of oxygen over and above that re- quired to form cobaltous oxide €00. The results obtained varied between 29°32 and 29°38. Crystallized cobaltous chloride dried at 100° was found to retain one atom of water. Three determinations of the chlo- rine in this salt by means of silver, gave for the atomic weight of cobalt 29-42 to 2951. Anhydrous cobaltous chloride was obtained by heating the crystallized salt with sal-ammoniac, in a current of dry chlorine or dry chlorhydric acid gas. The salt almost always however left a slight residue insoluble in water. Five analyses of the anhydrous salt gave results varying from 29°36 to 29-42. ; In 1859 Dumast turned his attention to the subject. Per- fectly pure metallic cobalt was dissolved in nitro-muriatic acid, the solution evaporated to dryness with frequent additions of chlorhydric acid, and the cobaltous chloride submitted to a red heat. In a second preparation from a different sample of metal the chloride was dried in vacuo. In this manner the following results were obtained : * Bibliothique Universelle de Geneve, Nouvelle series, vol. i, p. 373. + Ann. de Trae et de Physique, 3d series, vol. lv, p. 148. 46 R. H. Lee—Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel. CoCl,. Silver. Equivalent. 1 ( 2°352 3°9035 2 4°210 6°990 29°54 3 3°592 5°960 29°59 4 | 2°492 4°1405 29°50 5 } 4°2295 7°0255 29°51 The mean of these five determinations is 29°54. In all cases | the chloride was dissolved in boiling water and the solution al- _ lowed to cool before precipitating with AgNO,. The argentic _ chloride was reduced in hydrogen. The method employed for _ the eke less of pure cobalt is not stat - * determined the atomic weights of cobalt and nickel | in 1863. Pure metallic cobalt was prepared by igniting chloride _ of purpureocobalt in hydrogen. ‘The metal was dissolved in nitric acid and the solution evaporated and strongly heated. — The black oxide obtained was ignited in a current of carbonic © di-oxide, by which it was converted into light brown cobaltous — oxide €00, which was then reduced by pure hydrogen. Omit- 7 ting two trial experiments, the results obtained were as ‘follows: t €o00. Cobalt. Cobalt pr. ct. First sample, 1 2°1211 1°6670 78°591 2 2°0241 15907 78°588 3 2°1226 1°6673 _ 78°550 4 1°9947 15678 78°598 5 3°0628 2°4078 78614 First ce twice purified— 1 2°1167 16688 78°603 2 i Sab G 1°3924 78°591 S 17852 1°4030 78°591 First specimen three times purified — 1 1°6&78 1°3264 78°588 2 2°2076 1°7350 78°592 Mean, 78°590 Second specimen—- 1 2°6851 2°1104 78°597 2 2°1461 1°6868 78°598 . Mean, 78°597 Third specimen-— 1 3°4038 2°6752 78°595 2 2°2778 1°7901 78°589 3 2°1837 1°7163 78°596 Mean, 78°593 * Annalen der Pharmacie, vol. exxvi, pp. 322-336. R. H. Lee—Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel, 47 The mean of all the results is 785926, from which we find for the equivalent of cobalt on the old system 29°37. I the subject was taken up by Sommaruga,* who de- termined the amount of metallic cobalt in chloride of purpureo- cobalt by reduction in a bulb tube with hydrogen. His results were as follows: Salt taken. Cobalt found. Equivalent. 1 0°665 0°1588 0°002 1:0918 2600 29°929 3 0°9058 2160 29°982 4 1°5895 3785 29°926 5 2°9167 6957 29°992 6 1°8390 "4378 29°916 7 275010 5968 9 : Mean, 29°965 Winkler,+ in 1867, determined the atomic weight of cobalt by heating a known weight of the metal with perfectly neutral so- lution of double chloride of gold and sodium. The cobalt was obtained by the reduction of chloride of purpureocobalt. Salt taken. Gold found. Equivalent of €o(/Au=196.) i, 0°589 1°3045 29°497 2 0°3147 0°6981 29°451 3 0°5829 12913 29°492 4, 05111 1:1312 29°518 5 0°5821 1°2848 29°522 Mean, 29-496 Finally, in 1869, esos 6: made a new determination of the atomic weight of cobalt by finding the quantity of metallic cobalt in weighed quantities of cobalticyanide of aniline-am- monium and of ammonium. The results were as follows: Cobalt salt. Cobalt found. Equivalent. 1. 08529¢r, ——01010 29°44 rae OCit: — 0°0723 29°38 3. 0°7140 “ 0°0850 29°59 4 0°9420 “ 0°1120 29°54 ‘io 0°7575 “ 0°1160 29°46 2. 0°5143 071130 29°55 3 Mean, 29°48 The first four analyses were made with the anilin, the last two with the ammonium salt. These are the only determina- tions of the atomic weight of cobalt which I have been able to find, and I will therefore pass to my own analyses. * Sitzungsberichte der Wiener Akad., vol. liv, p. 50. Zeitschrift fir Anal. . 1B. ¢ Berichte der Deutcshen Chem. Gesellschaft, 1870. 48 R.A. Lee—Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel. Commercial cobaltic oxide was treated in a large porcelain | crucible with enough strong sulphuric acid to make it into a stiff paste. The crucible was then placed in a muffle furnace © and heated for some time, at first gently and afterwards to low redness. The sulphate obtained was dissolved, filtered and sub- mitted for some time to a current of sulphydric acid gas, by © which copper, arsenic, &c., were removed. The filtrate was 7 Weselsky and Sommaruga. I first formed cobalti-cyanides of | alkaloids having high atomic weights and formin it by the walls of the crucible. The hydrogen was int duced by a tube passing into the bored cover and the eruct kh. H. Lee—Atomie Weights of Cobalt and Nickel: 49 In my first series of experiments I employed only the cobalti- cyanides of brucine and strychnine, the corresponding salts of morphine, narcotine, chinine and cinchonine having been found difficult to prepare in a state of purity by recrystallization. The brucine and strychnine salts were prepared by decompos- ing the sulphates of these bases with cobalti-cyanide of barium, and repeatedly recrystallizing the salts formed. The brucine salt crystallized in beautiful white, barb-shaped crystals with a high luster. It was but slightly soluble in cold water, and erys- tallized with remarkable facility. The strychnine salt was in beautiful, nearly colorless needles, and like the brucine salt erys- tallized almost completely from its solution on cooling. Six analyses: were made with each of these salts. Of the strychnine salt— 0°7084 gr. dried at 115°C. lost 0°0392 gr. of water = 5°53 p. c. The formula, €o,Cy , (Cy, H,2N202),H,+80H2, requires 557 p. ec. water of crystallization. : he following are the results of my determinations of the amount of cobalt in this salt: No. Salt taken. Cobalt. Cobalt, p.c. At. weight. i& 0°4255 or. 0°0195 gr, 4°583 59°22 0°4025 “ 0°0185 “ 4°596 59°36 3 0°3733. “ 0°0170 “ 4°554 58°83 4 0°4535 “ 0°6207 “ 4°564 58°96 5 0°2753 “ 0°0126 “ 4°57 59°14 6 071429 “ 00065 “ 4°549 58°76 Mean, 4°5705 59°05 The probable error of the mean is +-0-012, and the atomic weight of cobalt 59-05, with a probable error of +156. In the - case of the brucine salt, three determinations of the water of crystallization were made. 0°4097 gr. gave 0°0465 gr. water at 117°C. = 1135 p.e 0°3951 gr. “ 0°0453 gr, “ - 110° C, 2. 20s6 p. 6. 06653 or, “ 00752 gr. “198° GC. Se 1400 pp. «. The mean of these three determinations is 11:37 p. ¢. The formula €0,Cy , o(Cs3H2_.N20,)¢He+200H, os igs 11°39 p. c. water of crystallization. € results of my determinations of the amount of metal in this salt are as follows: t taken. Cobalt. Cobalt, p.c. At. weight. I, 0°4097 gr. 0°0154 gr. 3°759 “41 2. 03951 “ 00147 “ 3°720 58°76 3. 0°5456 * 00204 3°739 59°08 4, 0°4402 “ 070165 “ 3°748 59°22 5 0°4644 * 0°0174 “ 3°747 59°21 6 04027 * 00151 “ 59°24 74 Mean, 3°7437 59°15 Am. Jour. Sct —Tuirp Serres, Vor. II, No. %.—JuLy, 1871. : 3 50 R. H. Lee—Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel. The probable error of the mean is here -+-0°0088, and the sgt weight of cobalt 59°15, with a probable error of +'146. method of analyzing the chloride of purpureocobalt has already been described. The results of my analyses are as — follow No, Salt taken. Cobalt. Cobalt, p.c. At. weight. 0°9472 gr. 0°2233 gr. 23°575 59°07 2. 078903 “ 0°2100 * 23°587 59°11 3 06084 ‘ 071435 “ ' 23°586 59°11 £ 0°6561 “ 071547 “ 23°579 59°08 5 0°6988 “ 0°1647 “ 23 ed 59°05 6 07010 “ 0°1653 “ 23°5 59°09 Mean, 23° S708 59°09 The probable error of the mean is here +0°004, and the cal- culated atomic weight 59°09, with a probable error of +0146. The mean of my eighteen determinations of the atomic atcha of cobalt is 59°10. For the sake of comparison I give here the — results obtained by other observers, in tabular form, reduced to the modern scale of atomic weights : Rothhoff, 59°10 Dumas, 59°08 Winkler, 58°99 §& Schneider, 60°00 Russell, 58°74 Weselsky, 58°96 F . 58°84 to 59°02 Marignac, 58°72 to 58°84 Sommaruga, 59°93 Lee, 59°10 F EI) Nickel—The atomic weight of nickel was also first deter- 7 82 mined by Rothhoff* in 1826, by determining the amount of chlorine in a weighed quantity of nickelous chioride. A single ex _ gave for the equivalent 29-60, a number which is _ probably too high, in consequence of the imperfection of the processes known at that time for the separation of nickel from cobalt. Erdmann and Marchand ees up the subject in 1852.¢ — Nickelous oxide prepared by various processes was reduced in — a current of hydrogen and the sdb weighed. No data are given, but the authors state that their results varied between was obtained by reducing ‘the oxide with pure hydrogen. In this manner Schneider obtained as the mean of four analyses the number 29-02. Marignac,§ in ath determined the atomic weight of nickel facials precisely 'similar to those employed by him in the Pogg. Amn., ci, p. 387. Bibliothique Universelle de Geneve, Nouvelle Series, vol. i, p. 373. R. H. Lee—Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel. 51 ease of cobalt already cited. His analyses of the sulphate of nickel gave results varying from 29-2 to 29°5, while those of the chloride gave results varying between 29-4 and 29°64. Marignac does not give his method of obtaining pure salts of nickel. The subject was next investigated by Dumas,* who deter- mined the quantity of chlorine in nickelous chloride, and ob- tained for the equivalent of nickel as a mean of five analyses the number 29514. The author does not give the process by which the nickel was obtained free from cobalt. Russell+ took up the subject of the atomic weight of nickel, together with that of cobalt, in 1868. Pure nickelous oxide was first ignited in a current of carbonic di-oxide, and after- ward in pure hydrogen. His results were as follows: lst specimen, mean of 3 determinations 100 parts of oxide, gave 78°596 Ni. > ee “ “ “ “ “ 78584 3. “ “e ts ‘“ “ 78598 “ 4.4 ‘“ “ “ “ “ 78592 * The mean of all the determinations gave for the quantity of nickel in 100 parts of the oxide 78°5925, and for the atomic weight of. ni¢kel 58-74. : In 1866, Sommaruga§ determined the atomic weight of nickel by ascertaining the quantity of sulphuric acid in pure crys- tallized double sulphate of nickel and potassium. The mean of Six analyses gave for the equivalent of nickel the number -29°018, with a probable error of +0-079. Winkler,| in 1867, employed the method of reduction already ~ described. The mean of four analyses gave for the equivalent ____ 29°527, with a probable error of 0-056. _ With these preliminary statements I pass to an account of ty own methods and results. Metallic nickel of commerce was issolved in nitro-sulphuric acid, and the nitric acid eee by e traces of copper and arsenic removed by a long continued current of sulphydric acid gas. The iron in the filtrate was then oxydized ; € vy I nickelous sulphate then converted into nickel-cyanide of potas- * Ann. de Chimie et de Physique, 3d series, vol. lv, p. 148. + Ann. der Pharmacie, vol. exxvi, p. to 336. Second purification. : ' Sitzungsberichte der Weinen Akad., vol. liv, p. 50. | Zeitschrift fiir Analyt. Chemie, 1867, p. 18. 52 R. H. Lee-—Atomic Weights of Cobalt and Nickel. the quantity of water in each of these salts, and afterward the 7 percentage of metallic nickel. This last determination was ef- fected by first carefully heating the salt in a platinum crucible, employing the ring-burner of Dr. Gibbs so as to apply the heat at the rim of the crucible first, and afterward in successive zones _ until the bottom of the crucible was reached. The remaining ; carbon was then burned off in a current of pure oxygen, and | the oxide of nickel finally reduced by igniting it in carefully | purified hydrogen. The f strychnine were prepared by double decomposition, the salts being but slightly soluble in cold water. They were then re- peatedly recrystallized, and when tested by the spectroscope | were found to be absolutely free from potassium. All of these 7 salts crystallized in very pale yellow needles. : : My analyses of the brucine salt led to the following results: | 0-4496 gr. dried at 120° C. lost 0°0258 gr. OH,=5°738 p.c. | water. | The formula Ni,Cy,.(C.,H,,N,0,),H,+100H,, requires — 5°929 p. c. No. Salt taken. Nickel. Nickel, p. e. At. weight. ss 0°3966 0°0227 5°724 7°92 8 0°5638 0°0323 5°729 57°98 3. 0°4000 070230 5:750 58°20 4, 0°3131 0°01795 5733 58°02 5. 0°4412 0°0252 ye 24 57°79 6. 0°4346 0°0249 5°729 57°98 vi Mean, 5°7295 57-98 The probable error of the mean percentage of nickel is +0°008, and the atomic weight of nickel 57-98, with a probable error of +0°089. Six analyses of the strychnine salt were then made: 0°3399 gr. dried at 112° C. lost 00178 gr. water = 5-24 p. c The formula Ni,Cy,,(C,,H,.N,0O2),H,+80H,, requires 5°45 p. No. Salt taken. Nickel. Nickel, p. c. At. weight. 1 0°5358 0°0354 6°607 1 2 0°5489 0°0363 6°613 58°21 3 0°3551 0°0234 6°589 57°98 4 0°4495 0°0297 6°607 58°15 5. 0°2530 070166 6°561 57°72 6. 0°1956 0°0129 6595 58°04 Mean, 6°595 58-04 The probable error of the mean percentage of nickel is +0018, and the atomic weight 58-038, with a probable error of +0°119. The mean of all my determinations of the atomic weight of uble cyanides of nickel, brucineand | - C. A. Young—Spectrum of the Corona. 53 nickel is 58-01. The following table gives all the determina- tions made : Rothhoff, 59°20 Dumas, 59-028 Hrdmann and { 58°20 to Russell, 58°74 Marchand, | 58°60 Sommaruga, 58°026 Schneider, 58°04 Winkler, 9-054 Marignae, 58°40 to 59 Lee, 58°01 In conclusion, my thanks are due to Dr. Gibbs for the selec- tion of the subject of my work, and for his advice during the course of my investigation. Cambridge, May, 1871. Art. X.—WNote on the Spectrum of the Corona; by Prof. C. A. Youne. Ty an article upon the Solar Corona, which appeared in the May number of this Journal, I wrote, “very perplexing also 1s the fact that the faint continuous spectrum, which must be in part produced by this polarized component of the corona’s light, shows no discoverable traces of the dark lines of the ordinary sunlight-spectrum. Probably they exist, but are in some way masked so that they are not easily detected.” : : On further reflection, however, I believe the matter is readily explained, and that on the other hand it would have been re- markable if we had been able to bring out the Fraunhofer lines. The truth is that the reflected photospheric sunlight forms only one small fraction of the total coronal radiance, the other Constituents of which so far preponderate that it becomes very difficult to detect in the general spectrum the characteristics of this reflected light. ; The spectrum of the corona is, in all probability, composed of at least four superposed elements. : Ist. A continuous spectrum, without lines either bright or dark, due to ineandescent dust—that is, to particles of solid or liquid meteoric matter near the sun. For although I am not able to admit with Mr. Proctor that the whole explanation of the corona is involved in the presence of such meteoric particles, must: become incandescent and give such a spectrum as de- scribed. 2nd. A true gaseous spectrum of the second order, consisting, like all such spectra, of a more or less bright continuous back- gro ith well marked maxima or bright lines. In this one bright line (1474) certainly exists, and perhaps several. So 54 C. A. Young—wSpectrum of the Corona. exposed to illumination from the prominences and upper _ _ portions of the chromosphere. This hight from the terrestrial — atmosphere, like that reflected by particles near the sun, is evi- dently partially polarized in radial planes. nd if there is between us and the moon, at the moment of © eclipse, any cloud of cosmical dust, the light reflected by this would come in as a /i/th element. It would, however, only dif- fer from that reflected by our own atmosphere by including a — greater or less modicum of photospherie sunlight. urthermore, in instruments like those employed by Messrs. Abbay and Pye, the chromosphere spectrum overlies that of the — corona, and increases the complication. + would seem, therefore, that only a small percentage of the — light which falls upon the slit of the spectroscope during a total — eclipse contains the Fraunhofer lines at all, and it ought not to be considered strange that they are not readily observed. 3 Chemistry and Physics. 55 In the same article I have stated that the photographs, taken by the American party in Spain, appear to differ essentially fessor Winlock and myself, between a copy of the American photograph and a drawing* of Mr. Brothers’ photograph, which (drawing) he had himself sent to Mr. Lockyer. ere was a general and even striking agreement between the two in respect to the position of the ‘gaps’ and the distri- bution of the luminosity, yet there certainly were, as Mr pointed out, very noticeable and important differences, and of a character to suggest that the extensive outside radiance might probably be of a less permanent character than the leucosphere, and of a different origin. But I understand that when photographic copies of Mr. Brothers’ and the American negatives are made to a common scale then these differences disappear and the agreement becomes nearly absolute in respect to all essential particulars. If this be so, it certainly bears very strongly in favor of those theories which assign a purely solar origin to the whole phenomenon. Dartmouth College, May 10, 1871. SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. IL CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS. 1 M y Ph.D., Assistant in the University laboratory, Tibingen, Germany. —In my former note, (volume i, page 462), I stated that when or- tassium salt that had been made use of for the first exper- : c : is was accomplished red an ac izing with carbonate of barium, dividing the solution into two equal parts, precipitating the barium from the one exactly with ‘Sulphuric acid and then mixing the two again. On evaporating this solution, it became filled with beautiful needles on cooling. *TIam not sure but we had a photographic copy of Mr. Brothers’ drawi a fad of the drawing itself; but we did not have a photographic copy of the original negative. No such copies had then been made, oe ee Pigs 56 Scientific Intelligence. These did not possess the pre resemblance to the crystals of the known acid barium salt of sulphobenzoic acid. They were filtered driven of at a temperature lower than 250-2 "The salt has the — Hien (x H,,5,0,,) Ba+3H,0. The ee gave the fol- lowin bers : a H,O 8°95 pr. ct. and 9°38 pr. ct. B 25°34 pr. ct. and 25°38 pr. ct. Calculated, H,O 9°10 pr. ct. Ba 25°41 pr. ct. The mother louse ‘from these needles now evaporated, and in this way a salt of entirely different Soponrai ce was obtaine After being recr ystallized it formed very regular, beautiful mono- clinic er ysta als a resembled the known acid sulphobenzoate of arium in every respect.. This salt was also analyzed and the e formula Spe ‘for it as forthe needles. The water of crystal- estion escaped at o) a 9°34 pr. ct. Ba 25°56 pr. ct. t Calculated, H,O 9°10 pr. ct. Ba 25°41 pr. ct. Although the decided difference in the solubility of the salts and in their crystalline form, which constantly presented itself, made it exceedingly i improbable, it was still possible that two different conditions of the same salt were here under observation and not t isomeric salts, parila as Poe seals had shown them to oot ek rystalline form was the same. It contained water of Sy uiliestioe which was given off at 100°. Its melting point was exactly 210°. The cope were very regularly formed and possessed a rhother-of-pearl lu The nature of the salt that erytalizs in needles is thus ex- plained. It is a salt of para-s ni acid. Acid para-sulphobenzoate of g ee ett: is difficultly soluble in hot water (much more so than the known med Ser salt of meta- sulphobenzoic acid), and almost insoluble in cold water. When aa it crystallizes from a hot solution Bava the process of filter- If it be now redissolved and allowed to stand quietly, beau- ned needles are found*in the solution, which fill the en-— ee rel on op to tom, Geology and Natural History. 57 The newtral potassium salt is very easily soluble in hot, as well as in cold water, and crystallizes from its concentrated solution in needles, Owing to a want of material it was not analyzed. The potassium salt, obtained from the monoclinic barium salt, on being fused with hydrate of potassium, yielded only oxybenzoiec acid, as anticipated. f t r s may be seen from the experiments described, there are condi- para succeeded in meeting these conditions, notwithstanding the fact that a large number of experiments were made with this object. I the properties of para-sulphobenzoic acid better. Although its and these may be recrystallized repeatedly without effecting their Separation into their components. : ‘ ntinuing my experiments with the object of discovering i e same time properties more exhaustively. Tiibi 16. 7 r. SA eTONE many limestones from different localities, to obtain further facts which might serve to throw light of Eozoon. A remarkable example of a similar pheno- menon has been found by him ina limestone from the collection of he late Dr. Holmer, marked Llangedoe (Wales), and preserved in = Museum of McGill College. The rock is granular erystalline, had made up of i i i west Sex infiltrated by a silicate similar to that from Pole Hill, New Brunswick. The only perfect fossil detected by Dr. Dawson * Meta=1°3. ' 58 Scientific Intelligence. is a small coral-like —s referable to the genus Verticillopora, an Upper Silurian form, The limestone includes besides, a ae ry fragments of brachiopods and of a sponge-like asec: with square meshes. All of these fossils are more or less penetrated with a greenish sweat — fills = cavities of the oe of ee are solid and calcareous throughout, in which respect the specim n differs from that from New Brunswick, described in this Pee SI a eo . Dawson, to” whom we owe thane observations, supposes that in both cases ae infiltration took place while the remains were still recent. Decalcified surfaces of the limestone show similar oo to those presented by the New Brunswick specimens ; the casts of — small fae like Mirschisonia, two millimeters in length, are in s perfect. The limestone is nearly pure, with the excep- tion fe a Tittle fine valldw ochreous mud, which is insoluble in dilute ydrochloric acid, and remains suspended in the solution, but is = This equals about three per cent = the weight of the limestone. n Is analysis by Mr. Sterry Hunt in the manner described for the ew Brunswick mineral shows that it scarcely differs from this pike in being more hydrated and almost identical with jollyte. It gave, after deducting 21-0 per cent of insoluble sand, the fol- — lowing composition for one bundred parts: Silica 35°32, alumina 22°66, protoxide of iron 21°42, magnesia 6°98, potash 1 ‘49, soda 0°67, water 11°46 = 100-0 00. teeth already ‘Abate is sidejasine of two or more individuals; — little hope is entertained, however, of finding a perfect skeleton. 3. Fucoids in the Coal measures of Towa.—Prof. Wurre, in his “ Geology of Towa” (vol. i, p. es notices the occurrence of forms — identical with or allied to Cau ulerpites marginatus, in the Lower — Coal-measures of Wapello county, Lowa, and of other forms, more — - i indistinct, in the higher portions of the series (see p. 281, _ F. H. B. 4. Phosphatic Sand in South Carolina.—Prof. C. U. SHEPARD — = described a deposit of sand over the phosphatic nodular bed — f£ Stone River, which has resulted from the wear of the latter by angie waters, and in some places is at least six feet thick. A portion 3 Geology and Natural History. 59 of it, after drying in the air, was found to contain 27 p. ¢. of th phosphate of lime, with 63°5 of fine er sepa oN and coarse sand, 3°0 of carbonate and sulphate of lime, 6°5 moisture an — satis: By agitation in water the lighter floceulent art may be napa off, and the phosphatic portion thus saa tented to 37 cent of the remainder. Prof Shepard observes that this pry deposit appears to be very extensive. He suggests that it may require, after washing, to be treated with sulphuric acid, at the rate perhaps of 100 pounds to the ton; the * Ee vA a ° a. fon) & Qf _ =). 4 ° o — for) et eo S mn = ® orf ia") io) 5 ® ~ i95) 4 go os Ss 2 = m 2. = om — i") = ® 5, CouEs on Antéerpodecior pclae Tha t ey anterior and posterior limbs of vertebrates are homologous is now ad- tropy,” the latter, ‘ ‘Antitropy3” a nd the advocates of these ideas, Sh ropists ”” and “ Antitropists » respectively. latter have lately been joined by a vigorous ally, to whose work attention has already been called ;{ and the accession is the and the primus of os (little finger). The propriety of this view is a admirably presented by Wyman,§ together wit the ob- vious objections thereto and the grounds upon which these objec- tions may be removed.% by * Ante sterior ial refi to the Museles of the Bee) Euuiorr Cour ae ‘Assist, Surg. U.8. A.; New York Medical 18, ke pp. 149-152, se Sane 999-294 272-274, 297-299, 370-372, 390- tone “Danis Foltz, Wyman and the writer. t American area 5 1871. Symmetry an and Homology in Limbs, Piet . Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., June 5th, 18 The general and special questions here —— roa pes discussed ot by me at Several times since ig a re first sug o me erbal communication ones oie ‘aoa t Soc. Nat. Hist, Jone ty 1900: and I attention, and the absence of all secondary sonaideldl es Coues has accepted roe oleh the view of the normal posi- tion of the membra for comparison which was first proposed by Wyman, and adopted by Foltz, Folsom and or ag this view is based fring position ee it is quite potable that ae and. en might have followed ay in the a that it is their normal change in my n t int was one of the chief mo- tives for the preparation o ie the bare pats referred to, since do- * Owen, Wyman and the Pe ©} Ae for ra sale = ag ebirg i * is ined with “‘ biarticulated creat toe,” p. 193; and in a few cases there is seta, to in “ morphologically homologous” — and “ teleologically analogous,” p. 194. Geology and Natural History. 61 ing so involves a concession, though not essential one to the idea of syntropy. inally, Dr. Coues has accepted from the writer a nomenclature of ideas, (Antitypy, &c.,) which was itself based upon ian ‘ . GW. . Supplement to “ Annélides chétopodes du Goife de Naples.” —Claparéde has published a Supplement to the Annelids of the b] pelasgica and Heteronereis grandi wing ¥ lute identity, with the exception of the peculiar foliaceous append- eggs in this presumed agamous Heteronereis stock, he came to the conclusion that, herels were onl orms in series of generations still un- hereis were only sexual forms ‘ Nereis, and interprets these facts in favor of a metamorphosis of N ereis into Heteronereis. This was the condition of the problem when Claparéde resumed the subject and showed conclusively (from the study of living Annelids) that there is a genetic relation between Nereis and : ms) we have first a sexual form as Nere ‘ forms as eteronereis, and a fourth hemaphrodite form discovered = Scientific Intelligence. = Meeznikow. Lage full grown specimens of Nereis Dumerillit Pe are all transformed into Heter onereis, while the small diminutive — individuals alone become matured as Nereis: Of the two sexual — can arrive at maturity in all stages of growth, may subsequently : lose all traces of its sexuality, increase in size and in number 0: segments, to take on late again sexual characters and be trans formed into Hetéronereis, Absolute certainty of the sequence of — these — can only be obtained by tracing them in an aquari he worked so » long and so sterner re 7. Diapensiacew.—To the account of this small aD of plant as given paper entitled: “ Reconstructio Diapensiacee, presented to the American Aeihign on, and which exhibits the peed Rg sii, meer! son i Ja ate the same publication Dr. Maximowicz characterizes a re bis new Japanese genus, Ellisiophyllum he named from jp RES Astronomy. 63 r. Maximowicz, moreover, has ascertained that our Huodia ramiflora is Thunberg’s Orixa Japonica, of which only male owers were known; and he restores that genus, referring it to the neighborhood of Huodia. A. G. culpture of Seeds,—Prof. Lange of Copenhagen Species. He treats here of Pyrolacew, Droseracece, Cerastium, and Ww them ; consequently the primary axis is here arrested. Soon a nassiform thickening is formed underground at the junction of the IIL Astronomy. 1. A remarkable Meteor ; by R. H. Tuursron, U.S. N. (Com- mMunicated.)— While standing on the deck of the steamer “ Electra,” ning, m-Providence to New York, I was led by a sudden flash of bright blue light which illuminated the Whole heavens and was instantaneous! by an equally intense red flash which again gave pines to blue. Turning sud- denly, I saw a falling meteor, which was, so far as my knowledge extends, unique. _,it exhibited a nucleus of blue, with a long flame-like train also blue in color except on the south side where a portion, equal to perhaps one-third of the whole, was of a brilliant red. 64 Scientific Intelligence. The height of the meteor, at disappearance, was about 29° above | the horizon, its bearing nearly due east from Watch Hill Light, Stevens’ Institute of Technology, Hoboken, N. J., June 15th, 1871. IV. MiscELLANEOUS SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. On the —— a, a —_—- sa Snow on Climate ; Py = enon Member the Imp. s. Geogr. Society. (Co municated).— he santo of a os er of snow, resting on the earth’s surface in the colder a of the earth during winter, — has, to my knowledge, never been considered in its general bear- — ing on the climate and the epuiiaue! of the population living in ~ these countries The first and most apparent influence of snow is the protection — it affords to our crops from the cold of winter. Where the snow- | mantle appears emer sieannie hoa are always sure, ie the cold — ever so intense. In the steppes of south and east Russia, where § little snow falls in waster; and this small quantity is often blown — away by the strong winds, w inter crops are — Ss at all. On the northern coasts of the Black Sea, summer wheat a tndinn corn are very good, but winter wheat is a servi pee while to the north, in “Podolia, it is the principal crop. There the — _ forests afford a protection against the wind, the snow falls more | caradperd and cannot be blown aw : s a bad conductor of heat, its snow isolates the warmer soil from the cold air ote and there is no doubt that it renders also paths winter cold more intense, as the air cannot receive heat from lov he — and a cold, dry wind is more severely felt than a cold | nae The : phat relative ee of the air is a most ap ieny fou 4 ture of the countries covered with snow in winter. It i eas to account for it as for the humidity of an island in the middle of the ocean or of a place situated in an extensive swamp-tract. — The wind may come from every side ; it has always to pass over 3 — rie evaporating surface, and absorbs moisture if it was originally — In co oe where nr — winds predominate, as in the f N, Americ: d Eastern Asia, this will be less — the ca od winds, expidly passing over the land, have not the _ time for teaiog mueb 1m moisture, and the dryness of the air in the United States is felt by Europeans going there. But - - countries situated like —— and Western Asia, where the cold Miscellaneous Intelligence. 65 winds are usually weak, and only the warm southerly winds strong, the air will be always nearly saturated, when the soil hasa snow-covering, as the cold winds, in their slow progress, have the time for absorbing moisture. This feature of climate is extremely important in the examination of storms. It was one of vapor in the origin and progress of storms, and this is now gene- coast of Europe into the interior of the continent, but the baro- metric minima rise even more, so that for example, in Nertschinsk, ric minima are the other seasons. This shows that the storms of the Atlantic take their course over our country. Speaking generally, the path of storms is from N.W. to S.E. in winter, because they cannot advance in an eastward direction as they began, being arre must turn to the southward, and th e more the case in January than in November and March, when the storms of urope § imes advance into the interior of Sibert above, the heat is employed in melting the snow, or im the lan- Barnaul, in Western Siberia, has a winter temperature lower than St. Petersburg, by nearly 18° F. Yet the thermometer sometimes rises as high as in this last place in winter, because Barnaul has the Kirghi-steppes to the southwest. As they are seldom covered with snow, warm winds can across them and without losing Am. Jour. Scr—Tutrp Serres, Vou. II, No. 7.—JULY, 1871. 5 66 Scientific Intelligence. their heat, while before arriving at St. Petersburg, they must lose — much of their heat in melting the snow over an extensive track. The result is, “that seldom a winter month passes without tempera- thermometer does not rise above 39°, while at Barnaul a tempera- ture of 42° may occur at that time, (for example on the 4th, 5th and 6th of February, 1855). have mentioned alread pe — of the snow in checking the rise of temperature, and employing more abundant heat in melting. This is most felt in pee and lowers much the tem- perature of this time of the year, as for example, while in Central urope, at some reat of the sea, April has nearly the same temperature as October, in the same latitude; in Russia the warmth of the sun’s faye cannot raise the temperature of the air so much, and April is generally 4° F. colder than October, while May has the same temperature as September. As soon as the snow is melted our climate assumes its true continental character. mber. I ante now state a last point, the neseeseet of forests in equaliz- ing the layer of snow and giving to it all its beneficial effects. Wichowt the Serene a a great mass of snow is often a check to all munication, as for example, at this moment in South Russia, “are most of the e railways are stopped. The u alana great m round. Geneity speaking, effecta of a thver of snow are beneficent té man. The pr ‘opor- tion of the crops is of enormous economical worth. The greater at of the air is also good, and even the = of spring aused by the melting of snow, has its good s The rapid advance of vegetation in early spring is botkak by it, at pro ed to a time when the vegeta les have less to fear from night frosts. Northern Europe, for example, suffers much less | from this curse than the south, where the returns of cold in — cause great damage every year. are sometimes felt, the interruption of communication in snow oad and the great floods of spring. But both of these drawbacks can be avoided by the foresight of man, as forests arrest the progress of winds and cause a slow melting in sprin ring, 0-08 to store s grt quantity of water to supply our rivers. St. Petersburg, 20th February, 1871. t | | Miscellaneous Intelligence. 67 2. Scientific Expedition from Williams _College.—The scientific expedition from Williams College, consisting of five members o the present senior class, under the charge of H. M. Myers, which to the museums by the expedition to South America, in 1867, give the college a most valuable collection of tropical birds. Amon the additions to the archeological department are two interesting Statues exhumed at Corosal, in British ae ninety miles south of Belize. The work upon these ima om limestone ck. preservation, they are valuable and interesting relics, marking the advances in civilization made prior to the occupation of the country by the Spaniards. Although the table-lands and the Pacific coast of these Central American States have been frequently visited by collectors, the low coast-lands of the northern slope have been al- most entirely passed by on account of their unhealthfulness. Col- = from these comparatively new fields 4 eager Be valua- i i n of the tube being sufficient to allow the elastic bag to be always submerged at the lowest stage of the tide. e bag is supported by a suitable shelf, or cage, and is filled with elycering, which is poured in ge the top of the tube. When insure protection from — ice, and Se Sacelatan within ie =~ tube, Seg in the pe Bt if left fe ~ level of this liquid. The length of the central tube is a little er than tide. the whole range of the ti 68 Screntifie Intelligence. Near the upper end of the outer tube, there are three spiral Soeligs: fixed at the top and united at the bottom by a plate or disk, from which the central copper tube is suspended. Froma stem fixed to the center tube or float, and moving with it, a string or chain leads over a single pulle ind ewes horizontal motion to the pencil carriage of the recording apparatus. The distance that the central tube is to move, vertically, is ad- justed to agree with the required range of the pencil upon the record Rogen ab placing within it suitable weights. As the glycerine falls or rises in the annular space between the iron tube and the central float, the spiral spring at the top is more or less extended, the extension being uniform on account of the cylindrical form ‘of thre floa It is not necessary that the India-rubber bag be enclosed in a perforated box for the purpose of preventing oscillation: as it is always submerged, and the pressure upon it is equal to the weight of a column of water, having —- ~ at the bag, and its summit at the mean level of the surface This instrument has been opabeeadted by the United States Coast Survey, and is now in operation at the tidal station in the Boston vat ard, 4, American Weather Notes ; by Puy Harte Cuase. (Read before the pete rican Philosophical Society, March 3, 1871.—The signal service observations of o Tar Department have already shown the value both of Buys Ballot’s law and of Capt. Toynbee’s Somes in predicting changes of wind, page if due regard | pa e barometric variations of the t o previous days. thers seem to be explicable by natural c 8 of position and - sical configuration, which must be seerative at all seasons. inds varying like the land and sea arena, are often trac differences of tem mperature in the n neighborhood of the great lakes, and of mountain peaks and ridges, (2.) The wind, especially in the Southern States, often blows di- rectly in the line of the greatest barometric gradient. But even - in such cases, after a few hours continuance, it tends toward the acinnuth i indicated by Buys Ballot’s law. (3.) The isobaric lines are, jaacte ie —— of less relative impor- hye Currents with an coset Breer wang’ controlled by areas of high barometer, are notably common. Keversals of wind, as from N.E. to S.W., are, therefore, frequent after the passage of Miscellaneous Intelligence. 69 an anti-cyclonic rilge or center, as well as after the passage of a cyclone. (6.) Our recent storms have been anti-cyclonic, and there seems some reason for supposing that “— clones are the usual “weather-breeders,” even of such of our land storms as become loped. -) clones, which, however, may be easily ied peily overborne by the e grand anti-cyclonic whirls of a half million miles or more in (8 .) These and other peculiarities, point to a probable origin of storms in the blending of polar and equatorial currents, near the latitudes at which the general tendency of the winds changes its ection (9.) Mr. Scott has observed that when polar (E.) currents are blowing at the North, and equatorial (W.) currents at the South, (10.) iF the progress of a northerly or agente! current toward the equator is impede by an intervening southerly or ete current, the disturbance not only speedily follows, as indicated by Mr. Scott, but it is also, commonly, like most shower s, S.E. storms, and other marked cyclonic ee” of briefer Aation than those eins are primarily oe cloni 5. European and Am paler me by Prny Eare Cuase, “(Bead before the ! amerlost Philosophical Society March 3, 1871.)—There is still a a te Sl skepticism on the part of some skeptic wh regarding the moon’s influence on the weaned a Skepticism which i Seen has eli r. Scott, the Di- rector of the British Matentels ical Office, has mioticed an opposi- tion — the solar (or temperature rain-falls in Western Europe vaste: i ts of my previous investigations, strengthens the presumption ; In our Atlantic States, si signs of fair weather may be most confidently trusted duri ring the ten er | pee , signs of rain 70 Scientific Intelligence. record of the quarterly rains at Lisbon for sixté€n years, which is have embodied, together with the observations at eat Hospital for the same pee = — following tables. urements are given in millim: I.— Quarterly Rain-fall at Lisbon. Years. Winter. Spring. Summer. Aw 7 870 305°7 hand 275°2 It 197 2 the lightest at Philad 8'5 a for) = 27-9 tumn. Total 5 104274 599°1 599° 6769118 557-2 550° ‘91869 753° 4 ‘Mean Q14°6 appears, therefore, that the heaviest rain-falls elphia, are usually in Il.— Quarterly Rain-fall at Philadelphia. Years. Winter. 1 1865 1866 1867 1868 225 870 the Autumn and “Win at The m Autumn. Lisbon Total. 1056" 925'1 1160°3 1038:9° 9 15016 11245 12076 54:1 1173°6 115073 ter semester ; the heaviest at Philadelphia and the lightest at Lis a bon, in station, it was below the average at t T. 6. Discovery of the Animal of the Spongiade confirmed ; By — J. Carter, FR. C. n. ce oe | 45). Just S. a line to tell you what e Spring and Summer t you will the sponge-cell, and much m It is, : ‘Anuals’ now all confi a — I have not only fed the sponge with snipe, so fed w ow shows all the cells “(onociiated) with the cilium pico id the indigo still in the 4 This, I think, will break gis Sastre on which is a8 inative and incorrect as it i “ Magosphera,” the moment, afterward, an Ima in. 1857. rmed ut the In ten years out of the aixtea s when ‘the rain-fall of the entire year was above the average at on be d I am astonished n sponge too, is an put int spirit g lad to learn, viz. that I have confirmed all that Prof. James Catt of Boston, has stated about — too. after all, onl what was published ~~ illustrated in the n at the accuracy and detail of that porct ree Ultimate Structure of "Spongilla, ” &e.)s by an examination of a marine caleare and bears ee all at directly in the ‘ Annals’ (808), and o a8 the ameeboid cell which inhabits th ous ucus” Miscellaneous Intelligence. , 71 7. A new attachment for the Lantern.—It is often desirable to throw upon a screen the images of objects which must be preserved in a horizontal position; such for example as liquids, or solids im- mersed in liquids. Various devices have been tried for securing this end: all of them more or less imperfect. Recently, however, President Morion, of the Stevens Technological Institute at Hobo- ken, has devised a form of apparatus for this purpose which is an quite simple and ingenious, and whic This beam enters the apparatus a A, is received upon a mirror in- clined 45°, which reflects it verti- cally through the third lens placed horizontally at C. This lens con- back in the ordinary way with pure silver, yet there is no want of defi- nition in the images produced, and the color is too slight to be appre- ciable by an audience. We wit- nessed the performance of the in- strument a short time ago tr be red by Messrs. Hawkins & Wale of Hoboken. It is exceedingly creditable to them in the excel- i G. F. B of its construction and finish. 72 Miscellaneous Intelligence. 8. Report on Barracks and Hospitals, with descriptions of Mili- — tary Posts. 4to, pp. 494.—Under the modest heading of “ Circular No. 4,” the Surgeon General’s office of the U. 8. War Department at Washington has issued a valuable document with the above title, containing a great amount of valuable information respecting distant outposts but little known, geographical, topographical, meteorological, sanitary, &c. an appendix are “ Reports on Examination of Air in Barrack rooms,” giving the results of chemical analysis of the air at night Tabular Statement of four Analyses of Air in Military Barracks, made by Capt. Lorenzo — Louvain, assisted by Lieut. John Pitman, and reported by Surgeon V. B. Hubbard. EB FI Contents: | Betination of carbonic) ne cia rea =| Time of ob- | =| Apart- et Ae 3 servation. | 3'| ‘ment. Cubic feet | Volume of recon eae on a000” bf op . 4 # & Men.} ofair. | airexam-| foundin | amined | c.c. of the time — S ined in c.c.} 10,000 vols.| inc.c. | air. | infeet. 7 1 ze rtillery a 1) July 22, 70.|81°| barrack.| 19/13,016-25| 3700 9°58 34:091| 00440) 131°75 3 ALM., Cavalry 2) July 22, 70./78°| barrack.) 16/16,803°36| 4340 9:30 | 34°092| 00292) 111 12 AS M., ngineer 3 July 26,’70..85°) barrack. 9} 6,296 fee 9:37 ....| °00343| 63 AM, ade 5°68 4 4\ July 28,’70..77°| hospital.) 4! 4,480 es 552 _.-.|°00187| 73°35 © in barracks occupied by sleeping soldiers. Assistant Surgeon V. - Hussarp reports four analyses of air from the apartments of the U. 8. Military Academy at West Point, N. Y., made by the Captain and his assistant, which we have arranged in a tabular form for convenience of comparison. B. S. 9. Captain Hall’s Arctic Expedition The Polaris, the vessel for the Arctie Expedition under Captain Hall, is now in New York (June 15), at the Navy Yard in Brooklyn, where she will results warrant, the voyage may be still farther prolonged. From Disco — i : _ Miscellaneous Intelligence. 73 one flde to the other whilst among the field ice. The chief of the scientific corps attached to the expedition is Dr. Emil Bissels, who was a member of the recent Prussian expedition to the Nort ole. He is a young man with a high reputation as a scientific — and is a graduate of the famous University of Heidel- expedition, are the Esquimaux man and woman, who have been with Capt. Hall since his first essay in Arctic explorations.—Vew ork Times, June 15. 10. The so-called “ Cardiff Giant.” —It will be remembered that, two or three years since, a considerable excitement was created b the alleged accidental discovery upon the farm of a Mr. Newell, had the matter brought home to our own doors through a visit of ve to New Haven, and although we had sup- posed the fraud had long since ceased to be capable of exciting 74 : Miscellaneous Intelligence. telligent witness who was cognizant of the origin and progress of | the statue The block of gypsum, from which the Cardiff Giant was carved, — was quarried near — - Dodge, in Iowa, where — is an inex- | haustible supply of massive gypsum of Mesozoic ag It was — aoe to Giese o in : Tikinoss, where it was sg in he work- | . Burckhardt, a well-known marble-worker of that city, who retalsi with the oviginatons of the scheme for a not very considerable sum of money, to produce a gigantic recumbent figure — of aman. His position, resting with the left arm under the body, — the right : arm thrown across the body over the pelvis, and with the — legs slightly flexed at the knees, was measurably a necessity of the ” form of the block of stone at the artist’s comm and, Th was first modeled in clay by or under ra diveesion of Mr. Burek- — hardt, and was then transferred to the stone. Our informant states a 4 aa 4 a i a that he saw the gure more than once during its preparation. The — appearance of age was given partly by treating the surface with — ; look acids to remove the tool marks and the raw of a recently tooled ee and this effect was subsequently heightened by the grime and soil of a seven months’ interment. epared, the new srl ae antique was transported by rail point near th engaged in the work of removal and interment were taken —_ 4 furtively, and thus no one at or near Syracuse but those engage in the sues knew of its existence. By a singular accident, : une 8th. The part g an astron- raphical engineer, ete “)s five wagons, two ambulances, mateeiohe mules and horse @ proposes to connect with the belt under arphinstisn he fi eerie ing, and then spend the 7 remainder of the season about the sources of the Yellow Stone — * Missouri rivers. He has a boat and sounding apparatus for making a ay ae # the Yellow Stone, etc. A company of cavalry is ordered as an escort from Fort Ellis. He expects to return to ones ane: the 1st of ihackr Congress made an appropriation of $40,000 for the explorations of the season. * See Dr. White’s report on the Geology of Iowa, vol. ii, p. 299. Hipdowcat under Dr. Hayden.—Dr. iasa onan 4 sa fe a etter from him in orms us) were at Ogden, Utah, on Miscellaneous Intelligence. 75 12. Survey of the Great Lakes.—We take the following notes on this survey from Harper’s Weekly of June 10th, a periodical which has in each number one or two columns of recent scientific the very first rank. The work is at present under the charge of General “The data already collected have been of great value, and have done much toward supplying accurate information.” 13. Geological Survey of Canada: Atrrep R. C, SELWYN, Director —Report of Progress from 1866 to 1869. 476 pages 8vo. | Accompanied by Geological and Topographical Maps. (Dawson Bros., Montreal ; B. Westermann & Co., N. York).—This volume contains a report of Sir Wm. E. Logan on a part of the Pictou Coal-field, 50 pages; of E. Hartley on a part of the same coal-field, 52 pp.; of R. Bell, on the Manitoulin Islands, 9 PP. : o J. Richard- P- 3 o _ Robb of N. 27 pp.; of T, Sterry Hunt, on the Goderich Salt Region and Notes : ich ; ? Ores, . : of R. Bell, on Lakes Superior and 2 eee 52 pp.; of E. Hartley, pring: Greenville, N. C., mentioned in this Journal, last volume, on page +768, is, according to Dr. Leidy, the Z complicatus, a Miocene ea that lived with the Z fraternus. The Mastodon from hg aa (p. 469) is the MZ Americanus, and was from Quaternary Stavel overlying the Miocene mar 76 Miscellaneous Bibliography. 4 4 15. Voleano of Kilauea, Hawaian Islands.—A recent letter from Rev. T. Coan states that the crater is at present in an un- usually ene state. Even the region of the great South lake, 4 fo i) foot te 5 = a €t = oO © 6 ce) =. 3 a 2 es o ~ oO ~ M fe) pe) Bi ® &, “4 Pe) oj - 5 ch R = mR ce VI. MiIsceELLANEOUS BIBLIOGRAPHY. 1. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge. Vol. xvii. 4to, pp. 590, with 14 plates.—This volume is devoted to an elaborate a American Oriental Society, consisting of Messrs. Hadley, Trum- Se and recs ary apitord a critical examination, re orted that 2. Manual of Geometrical and In ssfeniteotindit es by Prof. B. Sesrm. (Murphy & Co., Baltimore.)—In th e brief space of © reached in the study of Physical science. AD "Noe ta on the Principles and Science of Geometry. By Lawrence S. Ben- son. New OL 3 le %y chalet cig gos 8vo ay & + to the value of and interest in the reports. Copies of this map were regularly sent to the telegraph offices in Chicago and New York and elsewhere, everywhere meeting with favor. In May, observations was secured, but the subsequent year was incessantly occupied with the Weather Bulletin and a subsequent absence 6 ine tion and publication of our observations. By means of a very fine six-inch achro- — matic and favored by a remarkably clear atmosphere, interesting and novel obser- vations were made upon the corona, of which a brief notice was at once commu Abbe on Weather Telegraphy in the United States. 87 of a more extended and ultimately of a national system, such as those that had long been known in op o this end I, in August, 1869, in behalf of the Cincinnati Chamber of Commerce, had proposed to the Board of Trade of Chicago a | general plan of codperation by which both organizations would share in the advantages expected to result from the Weather Bulletin. That body, however, through a special committee, preferred not to engage in such an enterprise, alone sensible of its feasibility, unless the Dearborn Observatory should give it the weight of its authority and name; but the other duties of Professor Safford seemed to forbid this, and I was forced to forego the advantage of such codperation. An editorial in the Chicago Evening Journal of August 13-17, served, however, to call attention to the Cincinnati enterpri _ In November, 1869, occurred at Richmond the annual meet- ing of the National Board of Trade. Several of the Cincinnati delegates (and especially Mr. John A. Gano, President of the in ever, anticipated by that of the Hon. C. D. Holton of Milwau- kee, who preeniad: Lapham. This distinguished observer, to whom I had for some of Trade and Commerce and by eminent scientific authorities. To M of Professor Lapham, “papers and maps in reference to the 88 T. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. the continent, and at other points in the States and Territories — of the United States, and for giving notice on the northern | akes and on the sea coast by magnetic telegraph and marine | signals, of the approach and force of storms.” < By a general order of March 15th, Brevet Brig. Gen. Albert J. Myer, the Chief Signal Officer of the army, was charged with the duty of the execution of the preceding law, and has there- fore organized in connection with the Army Signal Office, the | “Division of Telegrams and Reports for the Benefit of Com- eree;" m . 4 Washington, May 1, 1871. Art. XIL—Injusorial Circuit of Generations ; by Turon. 0. HILGARD. [Continued from page 25.] A DIRECT onward evolution of Vorticella I had occasion to realize on the fetid scum cuticle of a putrescent aquarium. All the Vorticellae which, in dense clusters, lined thé under sur- face of that membrane, or animal pellicle, were found to elongate — into a sort of roughish, but very hyaline, cucumber-shaped — form; each “ cucumber ” at first crowned with a true vorticellan limpid, empty and now entirely flattened, ligulate or sandal- shaped body tears loose as a young fluttering, pallescent Oxy- tricha (Pelionella), or so-called “hackle-animalcule:” darting by the jerks of its stiffish marginal bristles, and by the constant “plying” of the long-barbed, ciliate slit effecting its slower progress. It never revolves, but often crawls; (both in con- tradistinction to the fleeced, revolving and vacuole-propelled — “Paramecium ” form. This is probably the “ short-line” development, of Oxytricha, directly from the germinal clouds or the parasite of Chlamydo- coccus, through Vorticel I have no good figures to refer to, since even the detailed ones of Ehrenberg, in Trans. Berlin Acad. ey oe 5 1 >, a great ma ecies Sap. sat. We have naturally to reject all, of which the mode of developm remains unknown, as indicating a false standpoint. T. 0. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. 89 Se., 1833, Tab. III, figs. 11, 1, and Iv, which belong here (as well as Tab, XXIV and XXV of os Pritchard’s Hist. Inf. 1861), are too onto to serve as a guide, or to be rea dily identifiable even by those see with the real, natural object- aiaiseiat 3 itself. At first the bristles of the (tongue-shaped, flat and elongate- _ — Oxytricha are fluttering and tremulous; - as - and rapidly increases in bulk, all the well- known of the complete ‘Oxytri richa,” its stiffish darting- beissiae its grumose, obscured body, irregularly replete with granular olks, and very frequently cross-dividing, become typified. en thus cross-divided (a process well-known and abundantly figured) the front part alone retains the barbed mouth, which, from the apex, switches down like a moustache on a longitudi- nal slit about a quarter of the whole length. The blunt rear- part, on the contrary, separates with an incurrent angle which Soon contracts into a new mouth; whereby the rear-animal takes a blunter “ge (like the cetydideai of an almond, the flat side downw ard). Seen to “copulate” or adhere lengthwise, or in any other fashion, to one another, except in the process of self-division. Nor does it readily divide by longitudinal fission, in this state. T have seen this scan once. Crawling, and darting by an ay rly ’ coos cape in the rear - portion, sr a great number of an and smaller granular Law its body So a e dle a large, clear and granulate ‘“ germinal spec cleus, which j se ’ often observed to swell, protruding globalary over th the pair ae below and above, when seen crawling, in pro: Oceasion nally it is seen to extrude, suddenly, that turgid germinal nucleus or yolk (vitellus), which, as in all these cases, Is itself coatless, but hung around with divers jerking molecular fragments, torn loose from the parental body a ch is rup- ed on the spot, but readily “ re-cemented,” as it were. * The transformation of the “rear-part” of Oxytricha, as given by J. Haime m Ann. Sci. ee ee tom. Gua ie (and So erage in C: Micr,. p. 447 oe I have not been able to verify myself; it m y pd means be confounded with the encystoncats ( ) of ‘rorticela, “producing wafer- ; (2) of the non-pulsating, “Paramecium I grub, pa ducing tree Oxytricha; nor (3) with "thal ot the “ oyster” or porte manne er, producing paramecium-like gregarina-fashion ; nor either (4), wi Some large Oxytricha “ currants,” containing the revolving “ crucible. 90 T. C Milgard—Infusorial Cirewit of Generations. The larger of these coatless, granular yolks—(constituting the original pseudo-genus, and species “ Zooglaea Termo ” jar ard.” mostly consist of two parts, viz: a general “albumen” of a — granular and evidently trabecular texture, enclosing one or two distinctly coated, quite hyaline and perfectly globular vesiolel The latter resemble in $ ape a very clear white currant, as it were, by having a sharply defined sc pA inscribed near one side, that is caused by a local inversion of contents (some- what like the air-vesicle within a hen’s eg; These “currant ”-yolks enlarge in size “and soon at. the | (darkening) circlet, or rim of the introversion, reveal a rapid — rotation and “ciliary motion ; "and, still la ter, a contortion | and volubility of contents, really perplexing to the attentive beholder, who in vain attempts to determine its form, or at least to detect it in the moment of hatching, “ anxiously wasting whole nights and half days” veers as Hhrenberg has ex- — himself on a similar subject. At last the membrane ursts and extrudes a globe or halo of gelatine, containing 4 crucible-shaped body, gently moving, which, when finally set free by the rupture of that gelatinous halo, at once elastically extruding the inverted part, takes a pune resembling a rice-palea or the fore-wing of a thunder-fly (Thrips) ; traveling broad- end foremost with great velocity, and steady as an arrow. er a while a somewhat ludicrous scene ensues, when the little ani- mal, b ees its feeomed skin or scabbard, is seen violently to disentangle its large jerking bristles hidden in the veins of the sheath, and its small body. It thus appears like a little dwarf, frantically floundering about in a Spanish cloak, spurs and sword too large for their owner. It now represents a very small Oxytricha with comparatively very long, stout, but as yet softish bristles This formed the more direct evolution, from the Oxytricha pellet, viz: out of its circular “‘ currant-vesicles.” Its envelop- ing ose mass of “trabeculated albumen,” however, keeps — still increasing to the pie ge of a loose snow-ball, as it were} _ and each single trabecular joint assumi §-form, and a jerking penne commotion, they at last tear loose singly, and escape each as a lanceolate, warped and finely- tailed “ Vibrio Termo Dujard.”+ In consequence of its twisted — * As represented by Cohn in “ Nov. Act. cas Curios.” 1854, Vol. I, Tab. XV; _ fig. rx. In se sana researches on Cholera, the term is rnd : engorged join ae pe corruptive fibrils (or, Oidium lactis ”) re’ with bacterial daushitorc : ” (repuev, a boundary-pole or — probably reteriee d seipticaly. a father ws the robe Ma “ battering-rams,” extrude m diffuent “cur rant ”-vesicles (or ame@ba) of the paramecian cloud- senchicens, b as : talon hor : The albuminous Oxytricha-pellet is pretty well ‘represented in A. Pritchard’s “A History of Infusoria,” tab. xvi, fig. 69. The indistinct §-shaped ipeverensge 2 ; icles, ; i ; y shading w! , conveying a false impression of their shape and T. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. 91 in likeness of ‘‘ginned” cotton-seed. This feature is absolutely overlooked in most of the figures from Ehrenberg up to the present day; otherwise, the former's ‘ Paramecium Kolpoda”* would seem to represent a few of its onward developments. 2 body now commences to disect, at first crosswise ; becom- Ing waisted, across the mouth, so that each half has a part of the old one. After assuming the form of an 8, they, after long struggling and toiling, bisect, often spinning out a long gelatin- ous thread (as of a limpid gum) and jerking each other most lustily ; but after disruption, they presently round off. In this condition, and the following, the bodies contain one larger and a great many smaller granular pellets,—“ yolks” or germinal specks,” which I have not distinctly seen discharged. But now the surface of the water becomes clouded with such aed amorphous, most delicate but cohesive pellicle (as of become hquid (like fusing lead), with an immense Int he of parts, and bodily dissolve into such cloud-molecules. * Abhandl. Berlin Acad. Wiss., 1834, Tab. IIT, fig. 3. 92 T. C. HMilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. thin but chemically homogeneous organic substances being im- permeable to certain gases, while permeable to others, a good | deal of physiological interest is involved in the study of this protoplasm-membrane, and its relation to the swamp-gases. The particles of the nubecula are uniformly globular. 4 _ After repeated cross-segmentations, these undulate fimbriate — bodies, always revolving about the long axis (while evidently traveling onward by the action of the ciliate mouth) divide lengthwise, from below upward; thereby becoming somewhat urse or tear-shaped; the mouth being split in two, so that th stand “plying” mouth-to-mouth, while yet connected at . as it were. ese finally tear asunder by indentures, after which each has the shape of a crooked glass- te en more adult, and about ;'; of a line long, the im- ternal yolks and designs have disappeared ; the sarcode assumes a uniform yellowish tinge; its mouth forms deep cavities, while its front is toppling over like the hood of an Indian turnip — (Arum triphyllum) or of a Sarracenia leaf. It now contracts — to a globe and encysts. When a smooth, transparent crust 1s formed, gradually an inward gyration of cilia (as of an enclosed centipede) which ultimately becomes very violent, is observ- able; and at last the excessive fatigue of watching this tanta- izing gyration may be rewarded by seeing the inmate emerge, — either as quite a large but excessively limber, fluttering and transparent, full-size, single Oxytricha; or else several smaller, mostly narrow, triangular slips)* escape, with the same exceed- | ingly restless volubility ; the marginal bristles not yet bemg | stiffly extended in a plane, but ruffled up and down like the | bristles on the undulating borders of a thistle-leaf. As they — feed and the tissues become scatent, the entire form of an Oxytricha is presently acquired. 7 I have observed still another development of Oxytricha; 18 first source, however, being as yet unknown to me. ere appear on the field of action numbers of quaint-looking, big- eyed balls, about ;3; line thick, snouted, as it were, with @ rt of “hair-lip” resembling a duck’s bill; the stiff bristles within the bill-shaped mouth quivering with a sort of expres sive smirk, and looking aopdtand odd. : hey come full-sized and booming upon the stage, and m -* The figures L and M, p. 447, in Carp. “ Micr.” seem to belong here. T. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. 93 it dropsically flattens out into a pretty well-sized Oxytricha,* Y asimilar sort of internal fluxile commotion of particles as when the animals dissolve into molecular “ sauce.” But Oxytricha is not a perfect animal. It has no mem- branes, an evidently no fibrous tissues at all. The entire tex- ture apparently remains in an embryonic, vitelline condition, as yet. have in a single instance witnessed what appeared to be the moulting of a perfect Oxytricha. The front border was somewhat removed from the body, which it crowned like the crest of an ancient helmet, and within each rigid bristle (“style”) as within the fingers of a glove, was containe but thicker, upper flap (‘lorica”) containmg one clear germinal speck. is animal opens like a book, undoubling its flaps; re ~ is thus that it devours its prey (such as conferval spawns. This somewhat resembles fig. F, turning, by fiuid expansion, into fig. E, (Carp. mages ibid), Fig. F, avers, Raclfiee to be duck-billed, as it were, and fig. E be lop-sided and the nucleus more central. _ ions and figures, however, “ ee ; | Perhaps the “ Euplotes” of authors. Their ae ot wb ey tifiable, : 94 T. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. copulation, seeing that in the first place they neither develop =a eggs; nor, in the second place, do they even extrude | yolks; but their onward development is by encystment. Within a few minutes such a full-grown “oyster-grub” is — seen contracting its big flap, so as to present the shape ofa | at with a warped rim and hemispherical crown, the latter | lar is exuded. The speck or “eye” itself now becomes dusky and granular. It increases. It bisects “Gregarina-” fashion. — ach pear-shaped segment again acquires a clear speck oF — * eye.” They elongate, being connected by the blunt ends — each one tapering toa very soft apex; and these very large — germs or pseudo-Gregarinas at last become liberated, probably as “ Paramecium Aurelia,” which now appears full-grown on the — scene. | It is about the length of the Oxytricha, about three times — the length of the revolving wool-fringed grubs of the Oxy _ tricha, and by all means more complexly organized than either. It has the shape of the (shoemaker’s) /ast for a very elegant — ladies’ shoe. From one side it therefore gives the figure as of 8 | foot-print (without the toes); but viewed on edge has a poin rear end, and in this profile it “takes the name” of Parame cium caudatum! The ankle of that “last,” however, is beveled — away leaving the instep a ridge. Its oral aperture, not clearly — distinguishable, is in the middle, slanting almost longitudinally — for about one quarter of the length of the body. It seems circular a pulsatory vesicle, wherewith it — itself, and around which — = it is often seen spinning li os eB rm or bulbous vessels radiating around the pulsatory vesicle; | — as the vesicle expands, and vice versd, as is well-knowD; an av we body is turgid with rather small germinal yolks. These att | mals I have never seen bisecting either lengthwiset+ or across; 7 nor copulating sexually. The latter, however, seems to (tween else, sewn bell apr) qn preserve ron ezncaton. betwe ips, somewh: 7 iccation. t Barasbergs Rguiaay Mowueds, show it in that process (if not a mistake). © The Aacz T. C. Hilgard—Infusorial Circuit of Generations. 95 some of the smaller ones are being propelled by adherent motile granules (probably the “ Acineta” Auet.), the larger ” Its contents are a visibly and rapidly circulating so-called ‘‘ rotat- ing protoplasm,” composed of mostly very transparent individ- jie “ie onie particles, partly bulky, but mostly very small. on (red or ‘ssenah) vibrionie dots are also dis- cernible, It now takes the form which has been called “ Ameeba.” This form, however, likewise occurs, when similar yolks or “aci- hetee,” are expelled from vorticellan bodies. In either case the tumbling-sac ” lastly attains a versatile-campanulate star-shape oe odia,” from which break forth volumes of mini- mal vibrios, and quite large, cylindric bits of rods, or ( pseudo)- bacteria.” The latter here are thicker than fungine bacteria, and are neither coated nor ellipsoidally shuttle-shaped, but qluntly cylindric, like cartridges or butting rams. They possess ta 2 96 4H. S Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. and the Vorticello Oxy-trichans (through the mediation of the 7 “oyster” or ‘ porte-monnaie-grub”), there occur frequently | some analogous forms, such as “ Kerona” and “'Trachelium. t The last form of all to appear in infusions, etc., seems to be | the well-known Rotifer, the developments whereof are perhaps — related to some of those above detailed. It is, however, most — robable, according to the observations of Prof. L. Agassiz Art. XIIL—Tornadoes of the Southern States; by HAMPTON WHITFIELD, Professor of Mathematics in the University of Alabama. Tur tornado is a storm which has two distinct movements, the one progressive along the surface of the earth, the other gyratory, like that of a top spinning on its axis. It whirls a it goes and its force is so great that no structure of wood, brick in this country is very narrow. I have not yet found traces any one exceeding two hundred yards in breadth _* This is no doubt what g d describe as the “adult Parameciv? the impression that which I had formerly frequently observed : it was this fc a H. S. Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. 97 up to a considerable elevation. I have seen a pine tree, six- teen inches in diameter and sixty feet long, float out from the black -vortex of one, at the height of a quarter of a mile, and sail round, to all appearance, as light as a feather. In May, 1868, a very destructive tornado originated in the extensive flats on the Bigbee river, south of Columbus, Miss., and crossed Pickens and Tuscaloosa counties, Ala. A few days after its passage I visited the wreck of a large, two-story, framed house which had stood in its way, twelve miles east of Columbus. The timbers were soaiterel? for miles along its 9 and all the family, five in number, were killed. Thei ies were found at some distance from the site of the house, Weighing sixty pounds. It was transported more than a hun- dred yards. Jy To produce such results required a pressure of at least one poun every square inch, a force fearful to contemplate as possible for the wind. Some idea can be formed of it when we reflect that this house, being fifty feet long by twenty-five in . ary O J direc- ton of gyration coincides with that of progression. Should the \dvancing speed of the storm just equal the velocity of rotation, then on one side the effect would correspond with the sum of as the tornado would go forward. ble Sesmestiue accurately the average speed of __ ‘Me to fix upon forty miles per hour as very near the truth. Am. Jour. 8c1.—Tu ep Series, VoL, II, No. 8—Aveust, 1871. 7 8 AS Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. This must have been about the rate of one whose formation and rogress for several miles I witnessed, but the spectacle was so absorbing that I entirely forgot to time it by the watch. another occasion, in the night, I listened, in company with several others, to the roar of one passing at the distance of two miles, and we all agreed upon forty miles as about its rate. In May, 1840, a part of Natchez was destroyed by a tornado, the most dreadful that has ever passed through the Gulf States. It crossed the river at two o’clock, P. M., and at 9 o’clock burst — upon west Alabama in the shape of a rain storm, pouring un- stationary objects, would be one hundred and sixty miles per hour. Subtract forty on the north side and it would be eighty. Now, wind moving eighty miles an hour will not nece y throw down trees and wreck buildings, but at a speed of one hundred and twenty or one hundred and sixty miles, it will level all obstructions. The most destructive energy, then, is devel 2 in the south semi-cireumference of the whirl, and the diameter — of the gyration must be, in most cases, much greater than the parent path. The aspect of the wreck along the path of these storms is in conformity with the above analysis of forces. Where they traverse forests, by far the greater number of trees is the black column or spout, extending from the cloud dow? — ra ——— ! | H. &. Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. 99 to the surface. It precisely resembles a column of black smoke, such as pours from the pipes of a steamer burning pine wood ; it isin fact condensed vapor or cloud, intensified in blackness by the dust and rubbish carried up from the ground. The tornado is a shell or hollow cylinder of air, and all its energy lies in its rotating rim which is powerfully ee by two antagonistic forces, centrifugal and centripetal. The rapid whirl draws the air from the center toward the circumference where it is met and opposed by the in-rushing winds. re is, consequently, a rarefaction, a great reduction of temperature by expansion, and condensation of vapor within the shell. e spout does not hug the earth continuously, but rebounds or ricochets along the uneven surface, often skipping the valleys but generally desolating the hills. It is disposed, however, at every recurrence to strike at the same points. It is not an established fact, but it is commonly believed, and with some rea- son, that the tornado does, in the course of years, return along its beaten path, and that it is unsafe to build where one has ever passed. The house in Pickens county stood on a hill from . Which a log cabin had been blown away some thirty years be- ore. I witnessed the last of three, which have passed along the same track. Near Hernando, Miss., three have followed an unvarying line. It is probable that there are some localities more favorable than others to the generation of these storms, and if this is true, then the law of direction, hereafter explained, accounts for their progress along the indicated path. _ uch an opportunity, as fell to my lot, of witnessing the formation and course of a tornado is rarely enjoyed, and the phenomena observed on that occasion are of great value in illustrating the origin of these whirlwinds. On the 29th of Apmil, 1867, at 10 o'clock a. m., I was approaching Tuscaloosa, on the yton road, the general direction being east and west. | Weather was hot and —— while a perfect calm prevailed slight angular projection, like an inverted cone, at its lower I St saies 4 ascertained that it was at this time about five miles distant from me, and a calculation, based upon the estimated angles, fixed the elevation of its base above the sur- 100 HS. Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States, face at about fifteen hundred yards, and its diameter, consider- ing it a sphere, at about six hundred. It was entirely at rest. e first view of this cloud suggested to me the possibility of a tornado, and I watched it closely as I drove along in my buggy. While I was driving, leisurely, more than a quarter of a mile, it maintained its position and outline unchanged. At length a farm house with its shade trees intercepted the view for about a minute, and when I came again in sight of it, the projection beneath the cloud appeared in violent commotion. There was now no longer any doubt of the character of the ibited, and satisfied, from a knowl- near me, I leaped from the buggy and released the horse as quickly as possible, in order to give him a chance for his life. This did not occupy more than a half a minute, and when I turned to look again, the black column was formed, reaching from the cloud to the ground. A few moments showed that it was rapidly approaching. I remember noticing small frag- ments of cloud moving toward it from the north, but there was no perceptible breeze where I stood. When about a mile | distant I saw that it would go south of me, and at this time I 1. The gyratory motion was distinctly visible. When a little farther on, it became so enveloped in douse as to be no longer distinguishable, but I knew, by the now frequent peals 0 thunder, that it was increasing in violence and levelling all things in its path. is tornado was formed about a mile and a half southwest cen refuge within on its approach. e are other like instances well au- H. S. Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. 101 thenticated, and it is commonly believed that a log house is the | safest retreat. The direction of this tornado was east by 20 | degrees north. After its passage the air was cool and pleasant, . and, at 4 o’clock in the afternoon, heavy rain came from the north, followed, for the next few days, by clear weather with | northwest winds. | he most remarkable fact, disclosed by the phenomena of | this storm, is the inherent power of progression which it un- | questionably possessed. After the gyration was established it ) began at once to travel eastward, not driven by any wind, but | ploughing its own way through the tranquil ciao with ; j ; tremendous speed. Here is presented a problem, which, so far as I know, has not heretofore been propounded. Its solution 1s important to the science of meteorology. The fact that tor- nadoes invariably move from the southwest to the northeast is Well established,'as also the fact that, by an impulse acquired from the earth’s rotation on its axis, they gyrate from nort west to south. This backward gyration is thus explained: A parallels of latitude decrease in diameter, and therefore in cir- cumference, as we go toward the poles of the earth. As they all revolve in twenty-four hours, it follows that every one, ap- proaching the pole on either side of the equator, moves around more slowly than the one preceding it. Therefore, a current moving southward, to the vortex of a tornado in the northern emisphere, finds that vortex rotating eastward with a superior Velocity, and is left behind, or, projected to the west, while, for eminent writer on the subject, maintained it. ox I believe, long been settled in favor of the latter. from west to east is effected by the earth’s rotation on its axis. ch 102 =. S Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. the earth without heating, except slightly, the atmosphere through which they pass. The surface warms the air near it, while, at the same time, radiation more easily takes place from the superior strata, thus reducing the temperature of the upper regions. Since air expands and grows lighter with increase of temperature, and contracts and becomes heavier from diminished heat, it follows that, under this influence, “the atmosphere is | in a state of unstable equilibrium, and the lower strata tend con- tinually to rise and take the place of the upper.” The ascending — air, coming under diminished pressure, expands, and therefore — cools, t a variable height, depending on the dew point, or the quantity of vapor, the cooling causes condensation or cloud. Condensation of vapor sets free latent heat. This liberated Owmg og to the “ unstable equilibrium,” caused by surface heat and rad | ‘The lower strata tend continually to rst — and take the place of the upper.” Here he has stated the effect for the cause. The fact is, that the upper strata tend continually to descend and take the place of the lower. : Espy, endeavoring to establish a favorite theory, makes the quite untenable assertion “that the air of the upper regions specifically hotter than the air at the surface ;” which means f it means anything, that a pound of air in the upper regions contains absolutely more heat at a given pc oleae than 4 ‘Sap at the surface. All this belongs to a philosophy which as been long since exploded; and in fact, every sound philoso” ) | EH. §. Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. 108 pher must at once perceive that, under such conditions, no cur- rents could either ascend or descend ; the “ specifically ” hotter, and therefore lighter air, at the top, could not possibly come down, because it would become sensibly hotter, and therefore lighter than the air below; and the “ specifically ” colder air at the surface could never rise, for a corresponding reason. €xpansion in the vortex, its temperature is reduced ten fold, so that the vapor of the air rushing in from below is mstantane- ously frozen, storms and secondary tornadoes many leagues distant from its Path. Its hodissitnin force is due to the concentrated momen- of all the currents moving to the common center; is the 104 HLS Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. sum of the Ree of all the centripetal streams set freeina | contracted are : It is a well- catablish ed fact that tornadoes are translated from west to east. It is also admitted that they are generated in a calm atmosphere. It 18, os surprising that Espy and | other advocates of the cending column” theory, did not — perceive that their Piectga. ae cial. be translated in the opposite direction, or from east to west. As the earth rotates to the east, carrying the atmosphere along, it follows — that the greater the elevation or distance from the axis, Z greater must = : e velocity eastward. Hence, an ascending — column, penetrating the upper and more rapid strata, is left — behind or Sepsis! to the west. Overlooking this principle, — however, they assign as the cause of the direction of tornadoes _ an elevated and constant eastward wind, maintaining that he seizes the top of the tornado and drags it as a ship anchor. But there is no cohesion in eriform columns, as iD cables, and it is, therefore, raat for a force applied at 7 af summit to pull the base along. Espy contradicts his theory frequently by asserting that the tops of rising colomal where cumuli, are “shaved off” by upper currents. Itis — evident that if a strong wind from the southwest should — 3 ‘a way easily explained, cause a deflection. t has been shown that a column of air ascending in a calm must be deflected to the west by the earth’s rotation. For the same reason one descending must be bo abel eastward. bis a tel a fh ura at the surface, - H. S. Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. 105 above. The descending stream, fed by oblique tributaries from all points of the compass, begins to gyrate. From centrifugal force result rarefaction, cooling, and further condensation. The center of the vortex is a partial vacuum, and from below a e two columns meeting, vas mi thrown off by centrifugal force in all directions, and the cloud this is the termination of all these storms. They are of varia- ble duration and extent, continuing until the equilibrium of the atmosphere is restore Loomis has explained, but not to entire satisfaction, the cause of the northward inclination of tornadoes. He nightly ascribes it, however, to the decreasing diameters of the succes- Sive parallels of latitude. If a tornado should form on a par- lel of 45 degrees, its vertical axis would make an angle of 45 degrees with the earth’s axis of rotation. It follows, then, as Would readily appear from adiagram, that the currents descend- Ing obliquely to the vortex on the south side, would approach : axis be greater than that of the latter, and, consequently, velocities _ Corresponding, there would result a greater centrifugal tendency bag northeast than on the southwest of the vortex; and the : = lect Increases with the latitude. 106 A. S. Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. This will plainly appear from a diagram. Let a circle be de scribed representing the rim of a tornado. Then let two lines — be drawn, one representing the resultant of the forces of the southern currents, and the other the resultant of the forces of the northern currents, each deflected as it approaches the vortex, — but the former more than the latter. Each will maintain its owes a TE gee ee cloud-formation. In the Tuscaloosa tornado the gyration had | formed and travelled three-and-a-half miles when the first flash | occurred, | n is due, at any time before June, to the effect of the solar rays in our own latitude, and therefore answer the necessary condition of a stratum heated uniformly over a large are& Our tornadoes consequently do not grow out of the heat ray that penetrate our latitude, but ceili from the heat of tropics, transported hither in the winds; and this is the reason of their appearance either in the daytime or night. We never witness them in the hot summer, because then the lower atmos phere is warmed by direct rays, and a uniform temperature — over a wide extent, is impossible, from the fact that the cleared lands and forests, hills and valleys, are heated unequally, giv ing rise to ascending columns and moderate storms. If the theory of Espy were true, then July, August, and September * H. &. Whitfield on Tornadoes in the Southern States. 107 would be the tornado season with us, for in these months moist ful top of the atmosphere sinks freely into the stream. The case is precisely that of a heavy body descending an inclined plane ; but the heavy body is here a great ocean of air superimposed upon another abnormally elevated in temperature, and there- fore abnormally rarefied. The tornado is a process by which the one seeks to settle beneath the other, and is not unlike what would occur should an opening be made through the bottom of some great reservoir of water. On the other hand, when the transposition begins in conse- quence of the movement of a definite column, ascending from elow, the earth’s surface presents a limit, and the tributaries cannot, as in the other case, flow obliquely in straight lines without leaving a vacuum beneath, and that is impossible. They must, therefore, though ever seeking to mount upward, still trail along the surface until they converge at the center. An impediment of this nature would find adjustment in many uprising columns of limited power, capped with cumuli and resulting in showers, but no one vast, absorbing vortex, could ot ad es whole movement, and shake the firmament 1 t. the front and rear of the mm, gyrating at a right angle with the row, and every house must wer of resistance. Or, is is not so remarkable gyration is three hundred ond—and it may go far beyond that—which is greater On the track of Ww. ens county tornado a rafter of a house was found driven 108 A. S. Packard—New North American Phyllopoda. The whirling sand storms of the desert are probabl torna- _ does without the accompaniment of clouds with thunder and lightning. .The great desert of Africa presents an uninte: | rupted surface of sand to the sun’s rays. The lower strata over its broad expanse are heated uniformly, and this first requisite | is answered. But the dryness of the air fixes the dew point at | an extremely low degree, and there can consequently be no — condensation or cloud. Yet the vortices may form as in other localities, and vast quantities of sand take the place of cloud. | y information is too limited, however, to justify any post © tive theory in regard to these desert storms. 1 merely conjet | ture that they are formed like the tornadoes of our States, but | that, unlike them, they are generated from direct heat rays _ absorbed by the surfaces immediately under them, and there ~ fore appear generally in the daytime, and in the summer months, | as well as at any other period. : a . Art. XIV.—Preliminary Notice of New North American Phyl , lopoda; by A. S. Pacxarp, Jr., M.D. ‘ 7 APODID#. The known species of Apus may be for convenience divided into three sections, im part by the length of A. S. Packard—New North American Phyllopoda. 109 shield, or carapace, the highest forms having the shortest cara- pace, ‘those with the longest shields, as the European Apus cancriformis, a in this and other characters to the genus Lepiduru ction a lite tock fe longicaudatus, Lucasanus, Newberryi, and probably Domin ection 6 comprises sign equalis, and Gurldi: ion ¢ comprises A. caneriformis and porate rt Apus longicaudatus Leconte, Ann. N. Y. Lyceum. Prof. Dana’s type specimen, which is now very imperfect, was labelled ‘Rocky Mountains, near Long’s Peak.” Four speci- mens from ‘Texas, J. H. Clark, No. 3.” Three specimens from “pools near Yellowstone river. Dr. Hayden, No. 6.” ag Chicago Acad. Both sexes occurred, the females having e. James's A. obtusatus (Long’s Expedition) is probably this ome A. Numidicus Lucas, from Algeria, in the form of the carapace = to be avet. to A, longicaudatus. us Lucas n. sp.— 6 closely allied to A. longicaudatus. Thee: funtal 4 cout rather longer than in longicaudatus, and hy ostoma a little smaller. Maxillipeds shorter and smaller, telson longer than in the preceding species, with three ss Fak pe above. Anal stylets less spi ny, segme ae behind posterior r edge o shield 33; no. hea Y spined. sie 29; no. based oui air of ‘feet il; Seth th of P bol ay 3 carapace along the middle 80; total length of carapace, “40 length of te as peataeyS distance from front end of carina to a mene” of carapace ‘16 (stylet broken); diameter of egg-sacs One € specimen from “Cape St. Lucas, John Xanthus, No. 4,” o Acad. Apus Ralenn n. § —tThis fine species agar seer we A, ca maxillipeds nee smooth telson with 3 instead of 4 eee ae sand in 110 A. S Packard—New North American Phyllopoda. carapace along the middle -75; total length, 1-00; length of ter gal carina, ‘50; distance from front end to front edge of cara pace ‘80; length of caudal stylets, 1-05 inch. ; Two specimens from “ Utah, J. S. Newberry, No. 1.” Mus — Chicago Acad. : . equals, n. sp. 6.—In this species the carapace is much — longer than in the preceding species, the eyes are larger, the t ae behind them is smaller, and the gills reach much nearer the telson. : 2 e° =] 3B S B mn > ° B = = % 8 : ey 5 s, S 5 a B pace, the smaller eyes, and round “eee ene tr the less styiets, and the ma, A. Himalayanus, n. sp. ¢.—Frontal doublure and hypostom merifora illipeds are of about as in A. cancriformis; the first pair of maxi as 1 : e are 50. The iS | number and arrangement of the spines is the same, as is the A. 8. Packard—New North American Phyllopoda. 111 under side. The stylets are scarcely as long as the body, while in cancriformis they are considerably longer, and the fine spines are a little stouter. No. of segments beyond the hind edge of carapace 19 (in cancriformis 19); no. behind last pair of feet 7 in cancriformis 6); length of body 1:00; length of carapace along the middle 64; length of carina, 45; distance from end of carina to front edge of carapace 86; length of caudal stylets 95; diameter of ovisac ‘15 inch, ovisacs situated on the 11th air of maxillipeds as in all the other species of the genus to m own to “Collected from a stagnant pool in a jungle four days after a shower of rain had fallen. For five months previous to this rain there had been no rain upon the earth. imalaya Moun- tains, North India, near where the Sutlege river debouches into the plains. April, 1870.” Mus. Comp. Zoology, Cambridge. Two specimens, BRANCHIPODIDA. Streptocephalus Texanus, n. sp.—The male differs from S. sim- ils Baird, from St. Domingo, to which it is otherwise set allied, in the longer branch of the inferior antennz being muc teaches to the penultimate segment of the abdomen, while ac- cording to Baird’s figure it scarcely reaches to the end of the 4th segment from the end, and the second antenne are repre- sented as being much larger than in our species. The male organs arise from the 8th segment from the telson, and the 15th of the body; and are sim le, unarmed, slender, cylindrical, very long, and curled around (in aleoholic specimens) so as to touch at their insertion. Total length, male, 65; length of longer See stead, including the telson; 15 pairs of feet. Antenne th 8 joints on sh branch, the 7th and 8th joints subdivided fach into two subjoints; the sete slightly plumose on the basal 112) A. S. Packard—New North American Phyllopoda. joints. Telson with 16 fine teeth, not including the terminal — acute spine. Caudal lamelle long and slender, cultriform; under edge slightly curved, fringed with long hairs, those at the — base slightly plumose; the upper edge straight; end blunt Carapace valves rounded oval, pure white; 5 lines of growth; shells minutely dotted, the markings being coarser at the pos terior end of the shell, and about the region of the adductor — o me 5 ie) > | @ = o Ler } S . 3 S = =, 5, e 3) 5 rE : (=) 0g o > ® 4 = ma _ One specimen, Waco, Texas. ‘Quite common in many places in western Texas in the early spring. It occurs in mudd s are redu . single row on the edge. Length 30; breadth -23; thicknes 15 ine It differs from E. Mexicana Claus (Grube’s figure) from Zima pan, Mexico, in the umbones being much more prominent; G. B. Grant on a new Difference Engine. 113 and in front of the umbones, instead of being straight and sud- enly curved downward, is regularly rounded as in E. Dunkeri. Behind the umbones the shell is narrower than either in Cald- welli or Dunkeri; the dorsal edge sloping rapidly downward, without the well marked angle of Caldwell, or the continuous, curve of Dunkeri. Coarse punctures between the ribs, rather coarser than in Caldwelli, there being on an average between the ribs in the center of the valve. Length 50; th ‘33 ; thickness -24 inch. Six specimens from Dubuque, Towa, collected by Rev. A. B. Kendig. Dedicated to Prof. E. S. Morse, who ‘has indicated to me that the species was un- described, Lymnetis gracilcornis, n. sp.—This interesting form may at Once be known from L. Gouldiz Baird, recently found by Mr. E. the front edge, while in Gouldi it does. Shell of the same form but much larger than in Gouldiz. Length of shell 17, breadth -16 inch. Peabody Academy of Science, Salem, Mass., May 20, 1871. Ant. XV.—On a New Difference Engine; by Guo. B. Grant. THE great labor and expense involved in the construction of teliable astronomical and veaeial tables by mental computa- i mee . . | he English government appropriated eighty-five AM. Jour S$ct—Tutrp Serres, Vor. II, No. 8—Aveust, 1971. 8 114 G. B. Grant on a new Difference Engine. thousand dollars for its construction, on the strong recommen- ation of a committee of the Royal Society, containing some of | the most eminent men of the time, but after years of study and — labor had been spent on it, the appropriations were stopped on | account of the indefinite expense. Though never completed — as a working machine, it proved the feasibility of the scheme. — Babbage’s idea was ‘carried out more successfully by Edward — Scheutz, and the two machines constructed on his plan are the only ones ever built for this purpose. One of these was bought — for the Dudley Observatory at Albany, but has been but little — used. The other was built by the British government in 1862, — and has since been extensively used in the calculation of life insurance tables.* he idea of contriving a machine for ae tables first — occurred to myself while laboriously computing a table for — excavation and embankment. Having never heard of either — Babbage’s or Scheutz’s engines, I imagined it an easy matter, — oe gave it a in disgust after some study. Last yea Ss heard f Babbage’s engine, became interested or and d ed a ss i Ne i i th lam indebted to Mr. John N. Bachelder of Cambridge, %& well as to Professors Eustis, Winlock and Whitney, of Harvard College, for encouragement and help — _ ~_ had charge of the Scheutz engine when owe and is one of AY few who have had dpc experi ine or this ¢ third, sage Pe the first order of differences In the same Accounts of Babbage’s engine may be found in the Edinburg Review, J 1804 ees Fae Memoirs, v. 3, and in the inventor's work, “ Pa ssages from the Life of a Philosopher ;” short articles on the same in Tomlinson’s the ny iences ; ag! a Mag., 1865; Manufacturer and Builder, Timb’s Stories of Inventors, &e. Scheutz’s engine is described in “The Swedish Machine,” by Charles Babbage, in ‘The Manufacturer and Builds? ae 1870, and in detail in the British patent specifications, Oct. 17, 185 G. B. Grant on a new Difference Engine. 115 a second order can be formed from the first, a third from the second, and ultimately an order of differences will be reached, which is: constant or nearly so. For example, take a table of the cubes of the natural numbers, and forming the several orders of difference, it is found that the third order is invaria- Six. Table. 1st order, 2nd order. 3rd order. l 7 12 6 8 19 18 6 27 a 24 64 61 125 It is plain that with nothing but the first terms 1, 7, 12 and 6, the table might be constructed to any extent by simple addi- hon. A difference engine is nothing but a machine to operate this method, using several orders of differences, and a large number of decimal places. In logarithmic, trigonometrical, and in fact in the greater n h start must then be taken, and the table completed by a number of such operations, _ This engine, like both the others, consists of a calculating and a printing part. In the printing part, the calculated results are stamped into a sheet of lead, wax or other plastic substance, from which a stereotype plate is taken for printing the table, thus avoiding constant error in copying the numbers and set- Ung them up in type from manuscript. No description of this Part is given, as it contains nothing new of importance. ; , The calculating part consists of the main wheels, A, on which the first terms are set up, the additions made, and from which the five inches in diameter, all turning on the sam ), in t a direction independently of each other, the axis being 0 They ‘are arranged in sets of two, three or more, according as the first, snehal ca higher order is designed to be constant. There are as many of these sets as there are decimal places in the largest number to be used. Hach wheel is furnished one edge with twenty teeth, and on the other with two cams, 2 and a’, which project a little farther from the wheel than the ps e spaces between the teeth are stamped with the ten Tumerals, zero to nine, twice in succession. 116 G. B. Grant on a new Difference Engine. : opposite each wheel ae the constant ones. They consist of | a catch 6 and hook c. ‘ the teeth of the wheel and — . carries it along. The catch prices over its wheel far enouge 4 to strike the cam on the next wheel when it gets to it, and De — lifted out of the teeth by it, having added to its wheel the num ber of spaces that the cam is distant from F. As it is 2 up, the back catches in the nick h, and prevents it falling back — on the wheel, so that it moves the rest of the stroke an : without moving the wheel. As the carriage comes back, the jection on the hook strikes the rod e and the hook is lifted out of the catch, letting it onto the wheel again. 2 It is n that while one wheel is being added to, the © next wheel should not move. For this purpose the first stroke adds the first, third and odd orders to the numbers on the table, second, fourth and even orders, the odd orders being held firm by a clamp not shown. Meanwhile the rod e has been moved, G. B. Grant on anew Difference Engine. 117 that the drivers belonging to the even orders are not released as the carriage comes back, but those belonging to the od orders, so that at the next stroke the even orders are added to draw it out when it springs back. As each nine on the wheel 1 E the slip fis pushed out, and the catch P to the next place B drawn; and as the zero comes to E, the searing, ete., are omitted from the accompanying sketch, whic 'S Meant merely as an outline drawing showing the principal arts only. _ The size of a completed machine would v with the capa- city. An engine of the sane capacity as that of Scheutz, Would be three feet long, twelve inches high, and eight inches Wide. The cost is estimated at from two to three thousand Cambridge, June 5, 1871. 118 J. Trowbridge on a new form of Galvanometer. Art. XVI—A New Form of Galvanometer ; by Joun Trow- BRIDGE, Assistant Professor of Physics, Harvard College. of I=tan 9, or = sec?S. When the ratio of the length of the needle to the diameter of the coil is a very small fraction, the tangents, however, are closely proportional to the corres- ponding intensities. In Gaugain’s galvanometer where the plane of the cur rent is placed at a short dis tance from the axis of the needle, the intensities are di ne ae this position the needle is un sg affected by the current, and 1s acted upon merely by the earth’s magnetism. We now turn t plane of the current about a horizontal axis passing through _ the center of the needle as in the figure; A B representing the od. Trowbridge on a new form of Galvanometer. 119 plane of the coil in its new position, inclined at an angle of 90° —S% to the horizon. It will be readily seen that if A O represents the intensity of the current passing through the coil, OC will be the component & that will deflect the needle; but OC= 3 AOcos$=Icos $. The intensities @ will therefore be proportional to the co- sines of the inclination of the plane of the current, measuring the angle from the vertical OC. he instrument with which I experi- mented had the following dimensions: The diameter of the circle around which the current passed was twelve inches, and the length of the needle 1-4 inches; ; it was provided with long aluminum pointers. The inclinations of the plane of the current were tead from a vertical scale perpendicular to both the plane of the current and to the plane in which the needle moved. The manner of experimenting was as follows: The resist- ance of the battery—one Daniell’s cell—having been determined with care, and also the resistance of the circuit, the instrument Was used as a tangent galvanometer with the plane of the current vertical. . ae ee s a 090 | -014 oe 078 | -002 at =; 158 | -016 a 139 | -003 sage 16° - 226 | -026 al 195 | ‘005 Se ree, 354. | 021 4 342 | -009 ne = 428 | 028. | ak 422 | -022 ee ° a 542 | 013 os 544 | “O15 bias = a 701 009 aS 672 | -020 eae 3 ee 325 | -015 a 785 | ‘025 120 0. C. Marsh—Fossil Mammals and Birds Tt will be noticed that with large deflections the ratio of the cosines is nearer the ratio of the intensities than the ratio of the tangents. With smaller deflections, however, the ratio of the tangents is nearer that of the intensities than the ratio of the cosines. In the expression Icos $=CO=tan 9’, CO _ tan 9’ cos3~ cosS’ tiate I with respect to S we obtain dl _ 9 d. tan $’+sin $ tan S’ asa Tae cos? S It will be seen that the delicacy varies inversely as the cosine of the inclination decreases, or in other words, as the angle of the plane of the current with the vertical increases; the ver- tical component of the intensity increases whi orizontal component decreases. This vertical component thus renders the needle less sensitive to the horizontal component and dips or. I= if we differen- it. By diminishing the length of the needle, and providing it’ with long pointers, and also increasing the diameter of the cur cle around which the current passes, the effect of the vertical eye ee can be lessened. ith large deflections, therefore, this instrument appears to give closer results than the tangent galvanometer ; and therefore pa Es a deficiency in the latter instrument. By the cosine galvanometer many determinations of the intensity of the same — current can be made by forming a table of the values of the cosines of different angles of inclinations in terms of the deflee- tions of the needle, which currents, with a known resistance in- terposed produce. In the tangent galvanometer but one deter ~ mination can be made. Irrespective of the accuracy of this method, the instrument can be viewed as supplying a break in the literature of the subject. We have now in addition to the tangent galvanome ter and the sine galvanometer, a cosine galvanomete My thanks are due to Prof. Cooke, of Harvard the generous use of his apparatus for electrical measurem = Art. XVIL—WNotice of some new Fossil Mammals and Birds, Jrom the Tertiary Formation of the West; by O. C. MARSH. r. : College, for ents. rae Sea ae a. ay Jrom the Tertiary Formation. 121 preliminary notice of the more important specimens is included in the present article. Arctomys vetus, sp. DOV. Fork river. This species was only about one-third the size of the modern Arctomys monaz Gm., and may at once be distin- Measurements. Length of lower jaw from condyle to base of incisor, 17°75 lines. Antero-posterior extent of four lower molars, - ------ 6G Depth of lower jaw below first molar, ee eee 2 4°5 se The specimens on which the species is based, were found by . J. W. Wadsworth and the writer, in the Pliocene beds, on the Loup Fork, in northern Nebraska. Meisor, there is a second, very fine, sharp groove. The external front angle is rounded, and the lateral face but slightly convex. he premaxillary suture forms externally an obtuse angie, with the apex forward, near the posterior face of the incisor. both jaws, the incisors are deeper than wide. Measurements. : qransverse diameter of upper incisor, ---------------- 1°6 lines. D Mte-posterior extent, ©. <2. 2222. - =. -=++-=--- 2° . en ~ of skull at premaxillary suture, .-------------- sa Tran h of lower incisor on are of curve,---------~---- 7. = y verse diameter at apex, ----- Fs a wie vues one * = Depth of lower jaw below first molar,....---.-------- 50: ¢ Antero-posterior extent of first three lower molars, - - -- - 3°5 422 O. C. Marsh—Fossil Mammals and Birds The only known specimens representing this species were found by the writer in the Pliocene strata, near Camp Thomas, on the Loup Fork river. Sciuravus nitidus, gen. et sp. nov. vuride, and hence the present fossil may be referred pro- visionally to that group. The genus is apparently distinct from any known, and will be more completely defined in the description. The upper molars are composed essentially of two pairs of tubercles, with a minute intermediate cone on the outer edge. ere is a strong basal ridge in front, and the inner margin is bifid. The species was about the size of the common brown rat, Mus decumanus. ' Sciuravus undans, sp. nov. The present species was somewhat larger than the preced- ing, but probably a near ally. A single specimen only can now oh ot Ag J. 4 Bing: c fo in question is part of a right lower jaw containing the incisors and nce smooth, and somewhat, convex, and the inner face, where ine two teeth meet, is mar y a succession of delicate wave-like — impressions. The tubercles of the molars are more prominent than in those of the last species. : Measurements. Length of portion of lower jaw, containing first three molars. Transverse diameter of third lower molar,......__---- ae Transverse diameter of lower incisor, 6 This specimen was found by the writer at the same geological the same locality Johan: and near the same that afforded the species from the Tertiary Formation. 123 Triacodon fallax, gen. et sp. nov. less be necessary to determine its true zoological position. The resent species was probably about two thirds the size of the Measurements. . Antero-posterior diameter of lower premolar, . ---- ---- 2°25 lines. Sverse diameter of same, -- - ; Fe oe) eas Height of anterior tubercle, ERE GE oy, Height of posterior tibercle,....cs0- conse- Seocen--- 16. * Height of inner tubercle, ce aR OS All the specimens supposed to pertain to this species were found by J. M. Russell and the writer, at Grizzly Buttes, near the base of the Uintah Mountains. Canis montanus, sp. NOV. The presence of a large Carnivore in the fossil fauna of the Green iver Tertiary basin, which could with comparative Viduals, differing somewhat in size. These various remains Species is robust, has a short compressed crown. The principal cusp is conical, with sub-acute edges, the anterior being about twice the length of the posterior, Behind the main cusp there 18 a large triangular tubercle, with its apex exterior to the fore 124 0. C. Marsh—Fossil Mammals and Birds g ei ip 4 ie 4 | and aft axis of the crown. In the canine tooth, the base of the crown forms a broader oval than in most of the recent Canide. Measurements. Antero-posterior diameter of last upper premolar, . --- --- 9° lines. Greatest transverse diameter of same,..-._...-.-.----- = iF Seetoe GF PINT CUED no enna te he ss Cee ‘ weGrgns OF postenor tulela. 3: 75 “ Antero-posterior diameter of canine at base of crown,--- E ‘ o-. Transverse diameter of same, .--. a e above sposimens were eionnd by H. B. dere a the Bes at Grizzly Buttes, Western Wyoming one palustris, gen. et Sp. Nov. Qu hee S a B ct ® 2 7 . 40 'S ty * et 5 = ° 4 5 Pha eS o ao A eS fa) ie om iq?) i. ° La | wm hte ay Measurements. Length of portion of jaw containing last three upper mo- TER oo ae Sa had a .--- 10°5 lines. Antero-posterior es a second upper molar,.... 2°35 “ Transverse diameter of same,._.___.._.........---- 4° e The ore now fiutodiiing this species were discovered by Dr. J. V. A. Carter, and the writer, near Fort Bridger, Wr yensag Amphicyon angustidens, sp. nov. Another extinct carnivore, about as large as the nso a a species, and perhaps related to the same group, is represen by the anterior portion of a right lower jaw, containing the — ree premolars, and the canine. The ramus is slender, but — rather deep. The premolar teeth are low, and unusually com- — the posterior tee oe core developed het | in that species. From the Tertiary Formation. 125 ements. Length of part of lower jaw containing four premolars,. 9°5 lines. Depth of jaw below last premolar Bisset 2 Width of jaw below last premolar, . 21." Antero-posterior diameter of last lower premolar, - - - - - - Mees Transverse diameter of same, -------- -- 1-25.“ ORL 0 C1OWi 6 iron ca di ke enn eek ani ee ree is is species was found by the writer, in the Miocene Shale, at Scott’s Bluff, on the North Platte river, Nebraska. Fosstn REMAINS OF BIRDS. Aquila Dananus, sp. nov. An extinct species of Eagle, nearly as large as the modern Golden Eagle (Aquila Canadensis Cass.), is indicated by the d portion of a left tibia, discovered during our explorations in the Pliocene beds of the Loup Fork river. The specimen shows, at its lower extremity, the peculiar fore and aft flatten- ing, and the oblique, tapering supra-tendinal bridge over a deep canal, so characteristic of the recent birds of prey belo to this genus. From the tibia of the Golden Lagle, eg raee a 1 istin- hearly related species, the present fossil may » disti guished, aside from its inferior size, by the less concave inferior and posterior trochlear surfaces, and by the more prominent me well defined tubercle at the center of the ento-condyloid ace, Measurements. : Width of condyles in POM coca os swear nero 8° lines. Antero-posterior diameter of inner condyle,---------- 525 Antero-posterior diameter between condyles,-.-- ---- 3°3 f Verse extent of outlet of canal below bridge,---- 2° * This . ee i Shiladelrbes peg Sciences, 1870, p. 11, and American : Philadel J Naturalist, vol. iv, p. 317. $ Synopsis of Extinct Batrachia, &c., p. 236. 126 0. C. Marsh— Fossil Mammals and Birds. This unique specimen was discovered in July last by Mr. A | H. ing, in a Pliocene bluff on the Loup Fork river. The tt species is named in honor of Professor James D. Dana. Meleagris antiquus, sp. nov. species is at present represented only by a few fragments of the | ong skeleton, but am Measurements. Greatest diameter of humerus at distal end, 12° lines. Transverse diameter of ulnar condyle,_.........__-_- Ks Vertical diameter of same,....________. Ae sa Transverse diameter of radical condyle, 4:25 © The specimens on which this species is based were discovered a by Mr. G. B. Grinnell, of the Yale party, in the Miocene clay | ie : | y : deposits, of Northern Colorado. oo to the same bone in the Strigide, or Ow! family. he near resemblance is rendered es cially striking by the et dinal bridge, which is want | in this group, and in a few other birds with eo a tire absence of the osseous supra-ten W. M. Gabb.on the Vegetation of Santo Domingo. 127 Measurements. Length of portion of tibia preserved, 15° lines meee 06nd vies in fronts. xcwscashnmbane~ ino ben Transverse anterior diameter of inner condyle, yee Transverse anterior diameter of outer condyle, --- ---- Se: ee This specimen, the only known representative of the species, was found by the writer last autumn at Grizzly Buttes, near Fort Bridger, Wyoming. Yale College, New Haven, June 12th, 1871. Art. XVIIL—WNotes on the distribution of the Vegetation of Santo Domingo; by W. M. Gass. Mucu has been said and written on the singular phenomenon, exhibited on a grand scale in our western prairies as we South America and elsewhere, of large treeless areas, strongly circumscribed, and covered with grass. Innumerable theories have been advanced to account for the absence of forest growths over these tracts, and the entire absence of even isolated ay tered savannas, as will be de- scribed thier ie Third, the south side of the island, outside The ea half of the valley is covered in part with a very deep black ley, lignum vite (Guayacan) abounds, and logwood (Campeachy) 4 frequents the moist bottom. Throughout the Cactus and Acacia — ts, grass grows sparsely. : The mountains approach the coast, west of Santo Doming® — city, leaving small sinine only, until near the great bay of Oco® Kast of this broad spur is a strip of plains nearly thirty miles — wide extending to the eastern end of the island. The underly: | than at present. This stream runs rough a region of h rocks; and its débris, now spread over the country like a fan, ee a ee a ee W. M. Gabb on the Vegetation of Santo Domingo. 129 is consequently a coarse gravel, gradually changing into a clay or sand, as the distance from the old mouth and coast line in- creases. Still further, where shore influences fade out, the same strata are continued, but instead of appearing as a loose gravel, they become calcareous, and, in the then deep sea, change to beds of coral limestone. puntia, a small Echinocactus is most common here. _ Here — reappears the lignum-vite with considerable quantities of Stic. 130 A. E. Verrill on Starfishes and Ophiurians. Art. XIX.—Brief Contributions to Zotlogy from the Museum of Yale College. No. XV.—Descriptions of Starfishes and Oph — urvans from the Atlantic coasts of America and Africa; by A. HK. VERRILL. HE genus, (foniasier, as restricted by Dr. J. E. Gray in 1840, includes several beautiful species of starfishes, which are stil very rare and imperfectly known. Dr. Gray named three spe- cies, without giving descriptions sufficient for their identifica- tion, all of which were from unknown localities, and two of them were apparently known to him only from the rude figures of | Linck and Seba. I am unable to refer the two following species — to either of the species named by him. : Goniaster Americanus, sp. nov. Form pentagonal with deeply and regularly concave edges Radii as 1:1°8. Rays considerably less than half the diameter of the disk, triangular, tapering, with slightly incurved sides The disk is somewhat convex, especially at center, and covered — with rather large, polygonal plates, which are separated by lines of pores, and on the rays by small groups and circular clusters of granules. The plates, unless supporting a spine, are closely covered with small polygonal granules, with a well-marked lar ger series around the edge; those that bear spines have t arginal granules and two or more series of the smaller ones | around the base of the spine. In the center of the disk is single spine, around this are five larger ones, each of which 8 | the first in a row of 4 to 8 spines extending along the middle | of the ray, but usually interrupted by plates destitute of spines; — bordering the middle of the central row, on each side, there#® | a row of 5 or 6 similar spines; outside of these a row of 3 or? — smaller spines; and beyond these usually 1 or 2 spines; thus 4 the middle region of each ray has a broad-oval group of spines; | broadest toward the center of the disk. -t Sai madreporic i takes the place of these. The upper marginal asa are 1410 — aa A. E. Verrill on Starfishes and Ophiurians. 131 ginal plates 22 to each margin, the median ones smooth, con- vex, nearly twice as high as wide, the lateral edges straight and im contact; those toward the ends of the rays become rounded, about as broad as high, and the last four or five plates bear sin- gle, stout, blunt tubercles. The marginal plates are surroun y either one or two rows of granules. The plates of the lower surface are closely covered with polygonal, round-topped granules, smallest toward the edges of the plates; a few plates near the mouth bear one or two stout central tubercles; others have a smooth central area, perforated by one or more small = 4°] s, = 0 5 Qu = Mm S bes] esr fae) B E oe) oo aed @ ey & @. eae 5 ah y- tronomical material Sort, to which the photographic eto is specially adapted Sob ew toe be out it i e * ured, can sd elaborated at any eubsequent time and the work repeated ri tors. 138 Scientific Intelligence. SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I. CHEMISTRY AND PuHysics. was less refrangible than F'; that in the green was near E. a Huggins has observed the spectrum of this planet with a 15-inch — =r =] o ° Laur) = _ q io) rs 5B n = o ° =I ite) 8 oh fo © 3 ° S ae = = ® er 3 a eS) 5 Qu 7) —) 2 2 > or =) ot cI 3 act ng Matters—Vierorpr has sue roscope to erminy | To determine the |_ Chemistry and Physics. 139 cial use in examining faint positive* spectral lines. : In another paper the author points out a method of applying one of the slits, for example the upper, has a colored glass or ese absorbing medium placed in front of it, the spectrum of the light will gradually diminish until it becomes exactly equal for the two halves of the spectrum at a given part or region of once for all. The author promises hereafter a work on the appli- cation of the spectroscope to quantitative chemical analysis.—Die Anwendung des Spectral-Apparates fir Messung und Vergleich- ung der Starke des farbigen Lichtes, Tubingen, 1871; Berichte der Deutschen Chem. Gesellschaft, 4ter Jahrgang, No. 6, Pp. a. * To avoid cireumlocution, it seems desirable to employ the terms positive and negative, to denote respectively bright or dark lines or bands.—w. 6. 140 Scientific Intelligence. 3. On the heat of neutralization of organic and inorganic | bases soluble in water.—J. Tuomsen in Copenhagen, has published | the principal results of a recent investigation of the quantities of 7 heat evolved in the neutralization, of different bases of the same | acid. ‘These researches have led to the remarkable result that the | is 18750°; that of Ag,O 14040°. The author infers from this result that the chemical character of the process of neutralization — is different in different cases. Thus the first named eight bases with am analogous to an alkaline hydrate. In conclusion, the author prom ises an investigation of the thermic relations of the organic base® — Berichte der Deutschen Chem. Gesellschaft, 4ter Jahrgang, P 308. we Il Grotocgy anp Natura. History. 1, Currents o the Oceans,—Mr. James Crott, in the Philosopht eal Magazine for 1870, volume xxxix, sustains the view that the o L. think rightly, that the superficial action of the trades is not cient cause for v rent year by the Royal Geographical Society. from which we «ite his Bho fee Fig after stating 4 siggest it principles on which be Geology and Natural History. 141 A vertical circulation is maintained in the Strait of Gibraltar by the excess of evaporation ‘in the Mediterranean over the t a) the two, so that a deep inflow must take place to restore the equi- ae assumed to be the case in the Bo sam phorus and Dardanelles. A vertical circulation must, on the same principles, be main- tained between polar and equatorial waters by the difference of their temperatures; the level of polar water being reduced, and Ww lve, since it extends to the whole depth ot the water, while the sec- ond effects, in any considerable degree, only the superficial stra- tum.) Thus a movement will be imparted to the upper stratum of Oceanic water from the equator toward the poles, while a move- ead not m Which cannot be accounted for in any other way than by an under- = of polar water toward the equator. Further, under particu- br circumstances, a yet greater degree of cold is brought by gla- Cial currents into the Temperate zone: thus giving ‘inet indi- Cation of a general movement of deep water from the poles toward ua oO . toward it being not so much propelled into it by the Gulf Stream, 48 drawn into it from an area of which the or ; oo. if at all, above the normal. On the other hand, the Gulf 142 Scientific Intelligence. North Atlantic, of which the Trade Wind constitutes the primum : mobile: a large part of its flow returns directly backward into — The view which Dr. nrncerest phi that the movement of — the ocean affects the whole body of dei to its very bottom, is recognized by the writer in his Report on Crustacea of the Wilkes 7 Exploring Expedition, (4to, -1618 pp., 1852, this Journ., Il, xv, 7 sere and the general system in this circulation is there pointed i 3 —this system according with the views previously held by the — Getic meteorologist, W. C. Redfield. The conclusions are 7 sustained by facts relating to the temperature of the ocean ob | served in the course of the cruise of the of i mentioned, and others from various sae presented on an isother- on S) i} Q e = et o ® ii 5 . Qo +o —_ Be QO ag, a8 las] y Dr. Carpenter. Giv 4 and south movement, advoonted ay fs nd ter” the revolution secondly, whenever, in the flow of sa ee they approach the continents, where the de epth diminishes, the rate of flow will be F- Seana in abetted (approximately) to the decrease % depth; . = mes the stream east not only of Nort rica and q and of Australia; and also that in the higher lat: nose west ‘of South America. ae Gulf — and all these is an Indian ocean current the origin of ¢ t in the South Atlantic up the west side of Africa, though contributing to It r. Carpenter also combats Mr. 8 n, with regard @ the “thermal work of the Gulf Stream.” J. D. D. 2. On the“ Benches,” or Valley Terraces, of British Cote by Marr. B. Beecstz, Chief Justice of British Columbia,— lowing extracts from this paper are selected from the Proce of the Roy. Geogr. Soc. for Feb. 27, 1871.—It is perhaps scart possible for any person who has never seen Fraser River, or ob Geology and Natural History. 143 tained an accurate description of it, if any verbal description can be accurate, to form an idea o ser River so soon as the delta is left, as far as I have traveled up it, i, e, full 400 miles, and then the benches are seen running on, miles ahead. Wherever the formation has a chance of showing it- self from Hope upward, i. e. wherever it is not interrupted by Thave traveled, viz: Fort Shepherd to Fort Colville, the formation 18 Just as distinct and striking as on Fraser River, an am in- € benc the direction of the nei hboring stream, But I suspect that they . h rm- oy its general inclination—it mi id, incline * confo 1 wi stream, as a general rule. For instance, it 1s very l ru eae for ditches—which, of course, always have some fall, . oe their fall varies extremely from an — in a mile to an 144 Scientific Intelligence. striking. Speaking from memory, I should say there were at least five or six different benches, apparently as level, green, and well defined as billiard tables, on the east bank, and a still greater neighborhood, which I should say is on the east side, and which I should judge to be 500 or 600 feet above the Fraser. : There are, I should think, on the fort side (west bank of the and from their regularity and contiguity—being generally narrow, and differing only a few feet i and striking appearance : the hillside gradually. * . of the continent,” raisin s and mountain: Da al ie i ba i aa ae alu Ss Se ee Le ES AER ery se ae n excavating force of the stream Geology and Natural History. 145 covers a large part of North America, north of the Ohio, and exist- ing i i ar ornot); and thus such flats, while the sea has its present level, a single river at all heights, from a few feet above Stream and being such very nearly as actually exist between flood level and low-water level. art of the continent be raised 50 feet, the abrading or s would be increased; the low- Water channel would be accordingly deepened by abrasion, and a Ww ground or lower flat would also be produced with the t the nature of the bottom, etc.; thus with a single eleva- tion of 50 feet, terraces may be made at all heights above the se 50 feet to or more, according to the height of the head- j Incidental to such a system of river changes. They are evi- shees that the stream has excavated its bed to a lower level Team in its diferent parts, an : : a have put a limit to omaiaten or occasioned intervals of on, Glaciers,—The Philosophical Magazine for June, (pp. 485- 8) contains a translation of a valuable paper on Glaciers from ne oendorii’s Annalen, by Arserr Hum of Zurich. T he follow- "8 Paragraphs are from pages 495, 496. AM. Jour, Sci.—Turrp Serres, Vor. 1, No. 8.—Aveust, 1871. & 10 * 146 : Scientific Intelligence. M. Grad ascribes to the freezing of the infiltrated water in the capillary fissures, not only the enlargement, but also the “ crys- tallographic orientation” of glacier-ice, discovered by Bertin, and by MI crystalline structure; amorphous glass can yield the same phenom- enon through strains forced upon it by external pressure. It sophical Magazine Sir John Herschel conjectured a parallel pier ment of the optic axes, but not on grounds corresponding with M. en sufficiently considered in the calculation. One of these ree inary britt Geology and Natural History. 147 i : gree perfectly. : planation of glacier-motion given by Mr. Moseley (Phil. Mag., Jan. Ney eRe a a Tele Pe NEES aN Ne ee fos ae ae e et =. B : = B ee ag bo] <_ oOo m oO 9°] =) Sit 8 aaa eemirg: GA Fae, 1a ed Ie eee Res A= ee ages ion. vm ave not the remotest intention to summarily reject Mr. Mose- €y’s views; but I thought it admissible to state what at present yents of the interior temperature of glaciers, give his views better foundation. 8 On Sigillaria, Calamites and Calamodendron.—Dr. J. W. eon, in the Q. J. Geol. Soc. for May, 1871, discusses the pon. e tissues of the Sigillarie, and the character of the 8 (Trigonocarpum and Cardiocarpum) which very often pa “ (8) Mm: ‘ el ing over the interval between the higher Acrogens ai mites on one side and the Lepidodendron on the other) an 148 Scventifie Intelligence. the Gymnosperms. The Calamites, according to Dr. Dawson, are face of the stems. . But other fossils marked externally like Cala- : : ‘ jong Calamodendron. The Calamoden often have a considerable thickness of woody sg about the pee? jointed internal axis, consisting of woody tissue in wedges separated by interven ing tracts of eilgiant tissue (medullary rays according to William- son); and they are therefore classed by Dr. Dawson with Gymnos- perms. Padi makes the line from Sigillaria to Lepidodendron to order, Lepido ees. Syringodendron, Clathraria, Seek Rhytidolepis ; y and the line from Sigi illaria to Equi- setum to in — er Calamopitus (of Williamson), Bornia, Calami 6. Le piedene and Sigillarie.—In a paper read before the Royal Society, June 15, Blinc W. C. Wi. LIAMSON es the structure of specimens of. nd appears to make good the conclusion ri it has an imperfect exogenous struc- ture. He observes that it has a a — a axis, which is vessels, but of smaller size, and arran me vertical radiatin g lami which are separated by short vertical piles of cells believed 2 be medullary rays. In a transverse s section the intersected mouths of the vessels form radiating lines,” and the structure is pro nounced an early type of an exogenous cylinder. rom ae alone the vascular bundles going to the leaves are given He describes Stigmaria (“ well-known,” he says, “ to be a root of Sigillaria,”) as having “a cellular pith without any trace of a two distinct sets o rimary and secon ars medullar rays.” Other facts stated tend to show that these plants are of the Lepr dodendroid type, and Prof. Williamson therefore includes t Lepidodendroid and Sigillarian plants in acommon family, making them, along with the Calamitee, to constitute an Zeogenous divr sion of the vascular Cryptogams, while the Ferns belong to > Endogenous division, “the former uniting “the ee with the Exogens, through the Cycadex and other Gymn ; and of He sdererg corals in Littleton, N. H. New ampshire of a peauieis character. Professors H. D. and W. B. Rogers sup- Kroon at one time they had found Silurian fossils in the ountain Notch, but afterward withdrew the opinion. Geology and Natural History. 149 The limestone containing these corals has been traced for about cis the and appears to be duplicated by a Si, aed fold. It — the Fuvosites a and a poser sater4 The wal phremaog and its supposed continuation into The ew Hampshire gen is fifty-five miles southeasterly from the Canadian. As the associated rocks are somewhat similar, it is om that the two iabetonea are of the same age. Mr. Billings ponds with the — Hteterbeng series 0 fossil m Owl’s Head, wn to Professor Hall by the writer sev- eral years since, _ sree to be the peculiar Atrypa reticularis of the Upper Helderber erg. With our present information it is om 3. to say that Helderberg fossils have been pe ~ in + maps Fossil Coal plants from the Aliat ; by Dr. res Gan ee om Cotta’s “ Der Altai,” in course of publication).— The coal plants here noticed were brought by Dr. Cotta from the Museum of Barnaoul, They are mostly of described species al- teady recognized there by Eichwald and others. The species ous d ec are Equisitites Socolowski Eichwald, Anarthro- a delig ns Gipp., Cyatheites Miltoni Artis, An wlaria longifolia Bist, Cyclopteris orbicularis Brgt., Sphenopteris an- a Sa hon Lepidodendron Serlii Brgt.; fa Pterophylium species is not a solitary case. — 1 trated by three Tishogtaphie plates. Dr. genre remarks in ing that the 22 names are not Permian, and that they belong to the i Feliminan ner ort on the Vertebrata discovered in the Port Kenne dy Baus Cece by. Prof. E. D. Core, (Proce. Am. Phil. sep Pril 7, 1871). —This p r, mention of which is made in vol. i, Page 384, of this J a7 Chee 1871), contains descriptions ‘of 8 agg of Megalonyx, MM. loxodon, M. Wheatleyi, M. dissimilis cays; M. sphenodon , M. tortulus, aan 2 Hirani, bards cinus Cope, Juculus? Hudsonius Zimm., Hesperomys ——— = Arvicola Giccthon Cope, A. tetradelta id., A. didelta id., A. in- (Pluie id. A, pacdee id ; A. hiatidens id. ; Brethizon cloacinum 150 Scientific Intelligence. id. ; Lepus sylvaticus a poe esha (a genus near Lepus, Cope) palatinum ; Sealo ?; ? Vespertilio : Americanus ; me "Us Americans, , T. Haysii Leidy; Equus ; Bos } In al can tropical fri 3 Nort erican ‘Arctic, 11 are common to both hemispheres; and 9 are of uncertain regional relations. Prof. Cope concludes with a discussion of the relation of the species to the earlier American fauna, the geographical and other changes of a 1. Winknoort and the origin of the cave. orthite ; Prof. How.—Winkworthite is a borate oc- ink H 18:00, whence the ratio, 88, i, 4B, 11¢ Ulexite has been found in Nova Bent tia, in gypsum, at Clifton rry, Windsor ; acne Trecothick’s Qua Three Mile Plains; Winkworth ; Newport "Station. Cryptomorphite, in Y Glan ber salt in gypsum ae Clinton n Qua arry. eee) in ne m al Sora, and Noel.— Phil. 7 on April, 1871. Trinkerite.—A fossil resin, described by TscHERMAK, CoD crtis over 4 p. c. of bem oh from an Eocene coal be d, at Car- pano in Istria. This sulphur-bearing resin has been sbeerval also, by T. Niedzwiedski, at Gams, near Hieflau in Styria, imbedded in a dark colored rock of the eae pSareege formation.— Bulletin of the K. Akad. Wien. a 87. 12, Arran _— ment Jor ©: Toss artzntion of the es wers = able ened so as to pater 2 to the gorge of the peor at the base of the ext ps: jee back of the now withering stigma; _ the t 1 The transve sana dehiscent anthers are now widely open. Geology and Natural History. 151 of Chlorococcus has surface of a liquid, name of Huglena; a third, ormin slime upon old walls, fth, Vaucheria ; a sixth, Sehid- rie products, and a study of their life-history, leads to some a that they are all (more or less) stag “a "te common source, which it is the object of the present Which ha; ss as the monad, or pin-point, source of life, Test ag .been pointed out by Dr. Bastian and others as the ear- Test. which we recognize living matter. : bservati r to commence this investigation I will append a few ‘vations I have made on various forms of Paramecium, and A deayor to show that it constantly transforms to Vorticella, 0 passes to Callidina elegans, thus tracing Some ¢ growth by development from the simp me of the more complicated animaleule or Entomostraca. 152 Scientific Intelligence. sects may be considered as composed of but four segments. This memoir is illustrated by two plates and several wood-cuts. __ V- 15. Seaside Studies in Natural History ; by Exzzazetu ©. A assiz and ALEXA Agassiz. Second edition, 1871. (James R. of the subject. , moreover, the only popular work many of the most interesting marine animals of our shores afe described and It is, therefore, gratifying to s at work has been so we In this edition but few changes have been introduced. These are names have been added. , 16. Keport on the Brachiopoda obtained by the U. 8, Coast Survey Hep of L. F. De Pourtales, with a Re vision of the Craniide and Discinide ; by W. H. Datt.—Bulle- tin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, Vol. iii, No. 1, Cam paper. v. 1%. Arrangement of the Families of Mollusks ; e THEODORE Gitt. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, February, 187 1,—In ? * view of the wide diversity of opinion among zodlogists concerning t t an scheme that can be proposed at present will be generally adop Yet we are constantly approximating to a true natural classifica- _ gations that have recently been undertaken. The author of the Se the Tee from the condensers u: Miscellaneous Intelligence. 153 — work fully acknowledges the provisional character of the angement which he has adopted, and anticipates many changes ft some six months before its actual publication. It is; never- has been published hitherto. It gives in a very convenient form has been followed. But suc imperfections are of compa ratively small i importance i in view of the uses for which this “ arrangement” is intended. It is accompanied by a useful list of authors ak an alphabetical index to the names of the classes, orders, and ree! ill admits 27 orders and 356 6 families New, (Proc. Ac. N. ‘So. Philad., 18 ae. Liodon perc Cope (a oe d from the N. Jersey Cretaceous) ; Zygorapha micro- 9ypha id., (of the family Adocide) from the New Jersey Cretace- nisi atapleur a ponderosa Cope, Cretaceous of N. Jersey ; the bed of Grote er estan macrorhynchus Harlan, from the upper 19, ie oe a Fron ges.—Mr. H. J. Carter, whose researches on Sponges, confirming the observations of Prof. ames-Clark, hed ny ean on Bee e 70, has an extended art. rticle on the sub- ject in the Annal d Magazine of Natural History, for July, sah (LV, so = iustrated by two plates a omologies of some of the Cranial bones of the Da, ti on the systematic arrangement or the class ; by E. D.Corx. (Proc. Amer. Acad., xix, 194-247.) II. MISCELLANEOUS ScrENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. 1. Note to the Article on a new attachment to the Lanteri, on page 71, From a letter to the Editors dated, Hoboken, N. J. —s the rays to the screen ee a silver A enenadag 154 | Miscellaneous Intelligence. summer, aie in the instrument which you have des ribed I have ours, &e, ENRY Morro Note to the Article on the he of rhe fice? to the detterniss Steen of Astronomical data; by Asapa Havi.—Mr. Da- vid Trowbridge of Waterburgh, New York, hae called my atten- the photographic method t o determine the times of contact ina solar eclipse as early as 15 854. Professor Bartlett’s observations were published in Gould’s Astronomical Journal, vol. iv, p. 33. . HL 3. On the Color of Fluorescent Solutions ; by Henry Morrox, -D.—We have from Dr. Morton a pa per for the next number this —- describing experiments of his which — the nium, e oo Soa blue, identical with that developed by acid Salts of qui Indianapolis Meeting of the American Association for the Advancement of Seience, Aug. 16, 1871.—According to a circular issued by the Local Committee, the first session will be ‘held at the Academy of ay at 10 o'clock a. m., when a reception will = to ie by his Excellency, Conrad Baker, ‘Governor of upon their arrival, egister pie names at the office of t Psat at the State House, where th be furnished with member’s tickets, and such beri ime eng y be desired in regard to a modations, e e citizens their desire to extend hospitality to the members re are like- wise ample hotel accommodations, and sial arrangem' be made with hotel and boar house — sige for reduced rates. It is therefore pecan aga eg that persons ing to be present, will notify the J te is wes rman tics. oe as pie as practicable, and when possible, soe ae iiber die Fortschritte der Chemie, ete. Unter Mitwirkung yon = 7. Bh Al Naumann, F. Nice, F. Rose, herausgegeben von Adolph a — i - Erstes Heft. Giessen, 1 871. 3 AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS. [THIRD SERIES] eee Ant. XXI.—On the Testimon : ‘mony of the Spectroscope to the truth of the Nebular Hypothesis; by Professor DANIEL Kirkwoop, of Bloomington, Indiana. ere and that of Andromeda have been the last stronghold a os nebular theory ; that is, the idea, first thrown out by the et Herschel, of masses of nebulous matter in process of con- pe. The. Ww tury would have been bold enough to fe : physical constitution of the heavenly ination of the elements of which they are composed, d € med a scientific enthusiast. This, how- ‘ver, and more than n actually accomplished. In AM. Jour Sct.—Turep Serres, Vor. II, No. 9.—SePr., 1871. il 156 T. C. Mendenhall on the Sensorium. the hands of Huggins, Secchi, Young, and others, the spectro- scope, that marvel of modern science, has yielded satisfactory testimony not only in regard to such stars as are reached by our unassisted vision, but even respecting the ete nebule, apparently on the outskirts of the visible crea A detailed account of these wonderful achievements ae not compat our present purpose. Such results, however, as bear =] i¢") > od be] = = ag Pied a 4 io beds Q = 3 a = Be et a (a) =) a) 5 ® > fu 5 ta) 5 =" 7 was but recently believed, oe remote sidereal clusters; but their light undoubtedly emanates from matter in a gaseous form. orm. 4. The spectroscopic analysis of the light of several comets reveals a constitution similar to that of the gaseous nebule. The spectroscope, then, has demonstrated the present existence of immense nebulous masses, such as that from which La supposed the solar system to have been derived. It has shown, moreover, @ progressive change in their sires structure, 2 accordance with the views of the same astronom In short, the evidence afforded by spectrum analysis in Padé of the neb- ular hypothesis is cumulative, and of itself sufficient to givé this celebrated theory a high degree of probability. tienen i % XXII.— Experiments on the time required to communieale : grein ref to the Sensorium, and the reverse; by T. ©. MEN DENHALL, Columbus, Ohio. I PRoposE in this paper to give : few of the results of somé experiments, carried bur during the last fall and winter, i Us * Monthly Notices of the R. A. S, yol. xxv, p. 156. T. C. Mendenhall on the Sensorium. 157 to watch this opening, and to close the circuit, by preae pe a e card. € Sponse are registered upon the band of paper by two dots, sep- arated by an interval approximating perhaps to one-fifth of an meh, Now by carefully measuring this interval and comparing r the time occupied by the somewhat complex operation of S perceiving the object and acting in response to that per- on. I introduce the exercise of judgment by giving 1m wa hand, and when a red ecard appears he is to close with his + Dan figures, ; in . 1 a8 much as possible, as a circle and a triangle, operating : with them in the same manner as in case of two colors. To os eg the time intervening between the appea . . . b which if they exist, however, are destroyed by in z determinations concerning the exercise of 158 T. O. Mendenhall on the Sensorium. : blow upon the head, face or hand, as I might desire. The of the instrument which came in contact with the skin consisted example following, that it required less ti the blow was received upon the forehead than when it was t& than usual; that in his occupation—that of a chemist—he cor tinually used it as a means of testing the fineness of powders With different persons as many as two thousand individual trials have been made and the errors of experiment eliminated; as far as possible, by the method of averages. I give below? table of the reduced results in one case, in which each number is the mean of the results of from forty to eighty trials. As was anticipated, different individuals furnished in some case strikingly different results, but with the one exception give? above, they all followed, I believe, the order of the following 0. N. Rood—Amount of Time necessary for Vision. 159 Case of A. G. F. Time in seconds. Response to appearance of a white card, ia gO voles = electric spark, . -- 203 bee & ROUNd. ka cows ee ee 138 “ “ touch upon the forehead,. - -- Pag tee ie ee 17 anid sce eer ee when required to decide between white and red,.. °443 nape aia Seas circle and triangle, -494 : Se “ tones C and E,..- 3 * 5 a oe ve “ CandCabove, *428 pe penmente of a similar nature to those which I have here recorded have been made by several European experimentalists, but none, I believe, in exactly the same manner; and as subject seems worthy of attention I hope to pursue it further. Columbus, Ohio, May, 1871. Arr. XXIIL.—On the amount of Time necessary for Vision ; by Ocpen N. Roop, Prof. of Physics in Columbia College. ’ssume, in optical and physiological experiments, that the dis- charge of a Leyden jar is an instantaneous act; but at the same ume, by the determination of the greatest suitable resistance, it "ul be possible to limit the discharge to its least possible dura- fon."* Th d = Subjective optical phenomena: for example, for the _ Meognition of Loewe’s rings (using cobalt glass); also the _— lhe Stucture of the crystalline lens can be detected when the : tis suitably presented to the eye. * Pogg. Annalen, Band exiii, p. 453. 160 O. N. Rood-—Nature and Duration of Hence it is plain that forty billionths of a second is quite sufficient for the production on the retina of a strong and dis- tinct impression ; and as the obliteration of the micrometric lines in the experiment referred to, could only take place from the circumstance that the retina retains and combines a whole series of impressions, whose joint duration is forty billionths of a second, it follows that a much smaller interval of time will suffice for vision. If we limit the number of views of the lines presented to the eye in a single case to ten, it would result that four billionths of a second is sufficient for human vision, thoug the probability is that a far shorter time would answer as well, or nearly as well. All of which is not so wonderful, if we ac cept the doctrines of the Undulatory Theory of light; for ac- cording to it, in four billionths of a second, nearly two and 4 half millions of the mean undulations of light reach and act on the eye. New York, June 30th, 1871. Art. XXIV.—On the nature and duration of’ the discharge of 4 Leyden Jar connected with an Induction Coil; by OGDEN N. Roop, Prof. of Physics in Columbia College. PART SECOND. In the first part of this paper* I described certain results obtained with a Leyden jar of moderate size connected with at induction coil; measurements of the total duration of its dis charge were given, and it was shown that the luminous effects were mainly concentrated in the first act, which was found 80 short as to be quite immeasurable with the means then at my sposa s one main object in these experiments was the production of an illumination as nearly instantaneous as poss! ble—the intention being to employ it hereafter in a totaly different investigation—it occurred to me that the desired end might be still more perfectly attained by the use of a quite small electrical surface. In the set of experiments above meh — tioned, the coating of the jar was 114-4 square inches, so this was now replaced by a jar with a coating of only eleven square — inches. The sparks it furnished, when connected with the same — induction coil, were perfectly satisfactory as regards illuminat ing power; and I at once proceeded to measure their duratio? employing the means and apparatus already described. For : the mirror I used silvered glass, the polished silver side reflect ae light; its size was half an inch square. The rod fi removed, with of course great advantage to the ¥© * See this Journal, vol. xlviii, Sept. 1869. the Discharge of a Leyden Jar. 161 locity ; and as several discharges occurred in a second, it was seldom that the weight ran down without at least one good observation being obtained. ith this mirror making not less than 800 turns in a second, I was greatly surprised to find that the image of the spark on the ground glass, as viewed by the naked eye, was quite un- aifected in appearance, looking about the same as though the muror had been stationary. This experiment, which was re- daily, gave uniformly the same result, and proved that the total duration of the discharge was incomparably shorter in the case of the larger jar. When the paper with the black lines ruled on it was used, they were seen equally distinct with the highest as well as with the lowest velocities; and all the evidence went to show that the discharge of this small jar consisted of a single act, whose duration was immeasurably short. Knowing well the inestimable value in certain physical inqui- nes of a source of illumination of this character, a series of mo deliberate experiments were now instituted for the purpose of examining in detail its nature, and, if possible, duration. _ The mirror was made to revolve 300 times in a second, the mage received on the ground glass, and viewed with the naked eye, platinum wires ,', of an inch in diameter being used, with a striking distance of five millimeters. The result was as above given, the spark-image being totally unaffected—once only at one of its ends a very small and faint streak was noticed. Re- is Previously employed. The platinum wires were replaced + ot assum by th p } s though for practical purposes the duration of this faint gs or of iny : ve the mi- int to be gained was Someter always eR. to the object to be measured; the ‘Park. must carry its own micrometer—must In some way “<-Image be made as it were to measure itself. 162 0. N. Rood—Nature and Duration of Micrometer.—Let the spark be generated at S, fig. 1; its light, fallmg on the stationary mirror M, wi oe form a spark-image at I, in the plane of the observing plate. If at the same instant a s second spark be generated at S’, its im will fall at I’. Let us suppose that during e simultaneous production of the two sparks, the mirror is rotating so rapidly as to be able to draw 2. artially out into streaks, then we ye = ® = 3 oe) _@® a ® a 4 “o & 3 9 Bb oe, ues < 5 S 5 oQ tj! > ° = joy Qu Comal © S m ct ag ia") re B QO o =) or ee) Q ct 4 ely > et ay fas) ® Qu gg fay) e, This paper was supported by a moved till the right distance had been attained. Total duration of the discharge. As was to be expected, this was found subject to some varia- . * the Discharge of a Leyden Jar. 163 Although with the improved micrometric method above de- scribed an interval of time as small as one millionth, or half a millionth, of a second could, as has been seen, be directly meas- still with its aid I never detected any sign that the dura- tion of the great body of the spark was other than absolutely instan- taneous ; as, however, all the light of the spark is due to incan- descent material particles, we must suppose that an infinitesimal portion of time is required for attaining its maximum bright- Rees, owing to the same reason its disappearance demands another distinct period however excessively minute. Hence, We may represent the luminous effects of the discharge by a A 7 2 curve conforming more or less to that here figured, in which intensity of light is measured in a vertical, time im a horizontal, tion. This curve then, (the unbroken line), serves to give “harge practically separates it from what follows, practically *onstitutes it a first distinct act, and renders its measurement aK os : 'e cr, 3 > - Show that the curve really has a form substantially like that dott May instead of some such one as is indicated by the : ine, a _ For the ose of measuring, or at least setting, a limit at — side o de ininitctnal ae of time involved, I employed 164 O. N. Rood—Nature and Duration of neous spark. If, however, the illumination of the ‘spark last to the left till superposition has been attained), then, owing to 4 e retention of impressions on the retina, the ES distinction between the black and white lines [aes will be exactly obliterated, and a tint of gray ¢ _ produced, as can be shown by a construction. Be In fig. 4 the first and last views only are ee B but as the action is an unbroken one, we mu reverse. nd in general, if we set the number of views equal to some odd number greater than unity, we shall obtain for the interior por acs pt of white, tions parts of black, with the Discharge of a Leyden Jar. 165 tors, inclosing between them a white sector of equal breadth, are painted on a white circular dise of card-board, and viewed in a mirror through an uperture cut in the same disc, when it sh far) = mM oO by J =) iQ pa] S a § Ss Lox | oD = $9 wm iy oO oO oO = 4 oa [ory oO =] fa) for mM (2) > i) et o a m o 2 S ~_ B Instead of using only two lines, the same result can far more easily be attained by ruling paper with a large number of fine black lines, equidistant, and inclosing white spaces of their own oth i d a glass plate with lamp- ecordingly I covered a gla oa a nebo like a slight cement, enabled me to rule lines on i i Afte trials and micro- magn : ed that the breadth of the zs of a millimeter. time required for their obliteration, with a velocity 166 O. N. Rood— Nature and Duration of _ of 840 per second, was ninety-four billionths of a second (000000094) ; still, on experimenting, it was evident that the duration of the discharge was less than this quantity, as the lines were always plainly to be seen. Duration of the first act of the discharge. Before finally abandoning the attempt to determine the ac- tual duration of the discharge, another effort was made; a second lamp-black plate was prepared, in which the breadth of the image of a line, black or white, on the observing plate was zz Of a millimeter. These lines were viewed with the terres- was between forty-one and forty-eight billionths; and when the striking distance was increased to ten millimeters, it was be- ti discharges take place in a given time as with points; hence, the : The evidence from twenty-six observations, gathered in not less than three hours, _ went to show that the duration with a striking distance of five millimeters was between forty-eight and fifty-five billionths of a second. Tt has thus been shown that the duration of the first act of the electric discharge is in certain cases only forty billionths of @ the Discharge of a Leyden Jar. 167 AB, fig. 8, which has been measured; and as we are ignorant of the true curve, it might be objected that the real curve might just as well’ be supposed to be like that given with dotted line. There is, however, experimental evidence to show that this is not the case ; for on this supposition, the blurring of the image would begin to be visbile far earlier, i. e., with lower velocities than has been observed. In point of fact, the image remains visibly as distinct as with a stationary mirror till a certain stage, a8 much time. Duration of the first act, with a Leyden jar having a coating of 114-4 square inches. ers were employed in connecti coarsest of the three lamp-black’ plates; but when the mirror urns i = duration of this first act was 000000175 of a second, or sees nd the same striking our times as great as with the small jar a distance New York, June 29th, 1871. 168 J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelter. Art. XXIV.—Memoranda concerning the introduction of the Manufacture of Spelter into the United States ;*by JOSEPH WHARTON. SPELTER, as crude metallic zinc is called in commerce, had never before the year 1859, been produced in America upon such terms as to give hope of its manufacture becoming a set tled industry in this country. Mr. John Hitz in 1838 made enough zine from the ores of the New Jersey Zinc Co., to supply material for a set of stan- dard U. S. weights and measures in brass, but the quantity pro duced was small, and the cost extremely high, The Lehigh Zinc Co. caused to be erected in 1856 a spelter furnace at their mine near Friedensville, Pa., upon the Silesian plan ; this furnace, though apparently well constructed, failed to yield any zinc, mainly because its builder, Mr. Charles Hoof The present paper proposes to give some particulars, which even at this late day may possess interest, concerning that at ich rea ufactures in their struggle against European competition. | ee Having acquired some practical knowledge of the properties zinc, by several years experience as general manager of the Lehigh Zinc Co's. mines and zine oxide works, and having 48° — gathered such information as was possible from books and other sources, I made various trials during 1857 and 1858, ® — invent some form of furnace which should effect the evolutio? — and condensation of zinc vapor in a larger and more conti — ous way than was practised in Europe, and which should thts _* The first sheet zine made in America was rolled by Alan Wood ~& Sons Philadelphia, from an ingot of Mr. Wetherill’s spelter. oe : . . J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelter. 169 single 1 ae furnace of about 45 retorts, upon the Belgian only conveniently accessible and cheap American materials should be used, the fuel employed was exclusively Pennsyl- Vania anthracite, the retorts and condensers were made by our- selves, mainly from the fire clay of Perth Amboy, New Jersey, and the ore was hydrous silicate of zine, from the Lehigh Zinc Co.’s mine near Friedensville, four miles south from Bethlehem, Pennsylvania. results of the last three of those periods, and show the expen- The price of ore was here assumed at rather more than the Cost of mining and hauling to the furnace; the price of coal Was that actually paid for the small sizes employed, then rela- tively less valued than now ; the wages were of course high, Pecause but a single furnace was operated, and we were learn- 4304 Ibs. raw zinc ore at $2.50 per 2,240 Ibs.,------------ $ 4.80 7,813 Ibs. anthracite coal be $1.75 per 2,240 Ibs.,---------- 6.11 ages, including manufacture of retorts, &c.,------------ sated Clay, &e., and the preparation thereof,------------------ 1.75 Repairs of furnace and tools,....-.--------------------~ 6.00 a re ee ae 1.00 ~ Rent ao eerie 60 ee ee nt of buildings, (Superintendance, office expenses, &c., not counted), 170 J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelter. The entire cost of this experiment, including the importation of workmen, construction of furnace and tools, and all collateral expenses was $3,795.89. The quantity of spelter produced was 34,063 Ibs. That report naturally excited in the minds of the Lehigh Zine Company, a strong desire to engage at once in the manu- facture of spelter, since not only were the technical difficulties in the way of this great prize overcome, and the product of excellent quality, but the cost was within the market price, and there were apparent margins for economizing in several particulars. On the other hand doubts naturally lingered as to the possibility of attaining the expected results upon a large scale, and the financial position of the Company was at that time such as to enforce caution. Both funds aac Ultimately, however, an agreement was entered into betweel that Company and myself, on the 18th of December, 1859, by which I engaged for the sum of $80,000, to convey to them a suitable piece of ground in South Bethlehem, Penn., and 10 erect thereupon by July 1, 1860, a complete Spelter W orks, of sixteen Belgian furnaces, each containing fifty-four working retorts ; the furnaces to be enclosed in a suitable stone or brick building with slate roof, 155 feet long and 40 feet wide; the establishment to be provided with steam engine and boilers — steam pump drawing water from the Lehigh river, blowers, oF crushing mill and store room—all these latter to be enclosed 12 a suitable stone building with slate roof—also to be provid | with pottery fully equipped with clay mills and apparatus @ | make all fire bricks, retorts, condensers, etc., needed in the business, ore-roasting furnaces, air flues and water pipes, Tal road into yard, coal bins, etc., and to be in all respects capable of making from the Lehigh Zinc Co.’s selected or lump ore — average price which had been theretofore received for se considerable lots of similar ore, sent by the Company to Eng J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelter. 171 This arrangement offered to the Company as nearly absolute certainty as the nature of the case permitted, that they should at small expense and without risk or trouble to themselves te into possession, after two and a half years, of a complete actory and an established business, while meanwhile deriving a fair profit from the sale of ore, which at that time cost about $2 per ton delivered in the factory yard.* pon my side, relying upon the correctness of my own esti- mates and upon my ability to establish the business, and assum- ing that the average price of spelter in this country for the Es twenty-five years (viz: about 6} cts. per lb.) would be about maintained for the ensuing two or three years, I could fairly count upon a reasonable profit even after making some allowance for mischances. ; A severe winter prevented much progress in building until the spring of 1860, though one block of furnaces was actually put up under cover of a tight temporary wooden building; a freshet in the spring destroyed the foundations of some of the Which I had taken of importing a number of train works were completed. As the factory worked irregularly in the year 1860, and the furnaces were brought into use gednely one block after another, as they were finished, I give no detai of the operations for that vear. ae : To indicate what manner of difficulties lie in wait for the Tansplanter of an industry into this country, I may here re- mark that though the factory as at first planned and built was ‘Substantially right in all important points, and my estimates of °est of production were justified in practice, yet a number of Adaptations to circumstances or partial changes proved to be iinet e Lehi: i any, as General Manager of their . Ferny cha T td aoe oat ciarubecdetvteed in the yard of — Zine : for the m*s in South Bethlehem, which adjoined the Spelter ae som bea and fo year ending April 1, 1859, $1.66 9-10 per ton of 2,24 hes ee ae tote year ending April 1, 1860, $1.72 3-10 per similar a cake at. smalyses tative specimens of the ore delivered to ~ Farlous times, shows 26°60 per cent zinc oxide. Aan Jour, Scr—Turp Series, Vou. 1I, No. 9 —SEpr., 1871. : 12 172 J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelter. facture became very scarce. e factory was, however, driven unremittingly, operations during the year 1861 were as follows: Days work of 1 furnace, 41414 Days work of 1 retort, 223,548 Retorts consumed in 1861, ~ 12,986 3:14 "085 Condensers “ - 34,425 8°31 "154 Rawore “| ut 11,994,794 Ibs. 2,897Ibs. 53°66 bs. Roasted ore “ “ 9,879,000 “ 2,386“ 4419 lcoal “ (including steam power, - pottery, &c.,) 18,948,273 “© 4,577 * 84°76 © Charge coal consumed in 1861, 3,709,350 “ 896 “ 16°59 © Spelter produced, “ 3,158,630 * 763% 1417" Per centage yield of ore counted as raw, 26°33 p. Per centage yi f ore counted as roasted, Ed tes Loss in weight of Raw ore by ng. 7 I of Coal consumed to Spelter made, T1T tol Average duration of Retorts in days, 172 Average duration of Condensers in days, The total amount of wages paid for the year, for all pe except the office expenses, a $44,113.54 or per 1000 lbs. of spelter produced $18.96. The total cost of spelter in 1861, including not only ore, coal, materials and wages, but also rent, repairs, contingett tenet Z and office ex outlay in fact except selling &” penses—every pense—was $34.70 per 1000 lbs. at the factory. e net average price received for spelter sold in 1861 was $42.97 per 1000 Ibs. J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelter. 173 In the year 1862 the supply of ore was of somewhat inferior quality, yet by the sliding scale of price payable under the contract it cost more per ton than in 1861; these disadvantages nearly neutralizing those economies which greater experience and continual diligence rendered possible. The cost of spelter in 1862, including as in 1861 all items of expense except interest on working capital, but excluding sell- ing expenses or any allowance for my own exertions, was $34.55 per 1000 Ibs. at the factory. The particulars of operations for 1862 were as follows: Perdiem Per diem per furnace. per retort, Days work of 1 furnace, 4,705 Days work of 1 retort, 258,509 torts consumed in 1862, 13,614 2°89 “053 Condensers «“ 47,870 10-17 185 = . 14,209,169 lbs. 3,020Ibs. 54°91 lbs. ore ve 12,532,130 * 2,664 “ 48-44 “ Fuelcoal « (including steam engine, pottery, &c., 26,451,844 “ 56,622 “ 10222 “ Fuel coal“ (in Spelter furnaces alone,) 22,236,164 “ 4,726 * 86-02 “ Charge coal 5,296,256 “ 1,126 * 20-47 “ New refracting material consumed, 1,974,919 “ 439-8 Pe * Old do. 4“ (b g, retorts, &e.,) 1,090,199 “2 99, 400." Spelter produced in 1862, 3,704,676 “© = 787 * 1431 Li tage yield of ore counted as raw, 26°07 p. c Per centage yield of ore counted as r 956 “ Loss in weight of Raw or by roasting, "3 Ratio of C dto Spelter made, 8.57 to 1 Average duration of Retorts in days, 18-99 = uration of Condensers in days, 5°40 The total amount of wages paid in 1862 for all purposes ex- vy office expenses (and for brick-making as below stated) was | P oe ry » fd by roasting but water. Apri} lease of the factory was extended from January 1, to _ “Pr 1, 1868, in order to compensate for certain deficient de- 174 J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelter. liveries of ore. On the latter date I surrendered possession to the Lehigh Zinc Co., and have consequently no later statistics than those above given except for the months of January, Feb- ruary and March, 1863, whose details resemble those of the preceding periods so closely that I will give here only the lead- ing figures, viz: Raw ore consumed in first three months of 1863, 4,184,544 Ibs. Charge coal “ ¥f do. . 1,349,880 “ Fuel coal, = - do. - 7,083,798 “ Spelter produced = 986,080 “ A it to have been in the fraction o 1,100,580 Ibs. ing the year 1861, 3,158,630 “ “6 8 [w) 7 <> oo “ for) ~-I for) a 1862, “ $ months of 1863, 986,080 “ Total, 8,949,966 “ This weight being not that shown by the daily furnace state- ments, but the weight actually sold and detiversd to purchasers. m aware that to give the details here presented their full scientific or technical value, they should be accompanied be! reliable statements of the composition of the ores treated, and of the s thrown out, but no continuous series of analyses was made of either ores or slags, since my duties as superintendent, bookkeeper, and business manager of the estab- lishment prevented a very close attention to its chemistry. Among my analyses, however, are those of 5 specimens of ore at various times in 1859 and 1860, which were of such a nature as to be fairly presentable for samples of the ore treated in the u ' do. 7 resumé of the spelter produced during the entire term shows i 1860, yl spelter works: these five specimens show an average of 36°07 h present, particularly in the year 1861 and the spring of 1862. Nine specimens examined for moisture at various times, and 8, Of slags, I find only two reliable analyses; one made in No Jesbae enc one in Dee aA i imi each other in time, an m working of the establishment, they can hardly be presented 2 representative specimens. It i doubte that the slags were always tolerably rich in zine, since of the ore treated probably at least { was silicate of zinc, only the remaly ing fraction being carbonate of zinc. J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelter. 175 Ordinary red bricks, 13,000 9 inch fire bricks, 11,000 Fire bricks of special patterns, 71,364 Ibs. Cast iron for furnace fronts, doors, braces, &c., 37,320 : Wrought iron for straps, bolts, &c., 1,138 “ Wrought iron for tools (plus 22 Ibs. cast steel) 1,267 1863, and this not only nor principally because I con- ducted the business with asin senate and maintained a h standard of efficiency and discipline among the workmen, t mainly because labor is now much higher than it then was, and because no ore of equal quality can now be obtained so cheaply in a spot so favorable for its manufacture. _ a The quality of the spelter made in this establishment has always been excellent, and has caused it to be Pe aaueane ¢ oth es, . 4 /°t8; the sample No. 4 there mentioned was made by me in ‘he year 1859, in the trial furnace spoken of in the earlier part paper. : & 176 J. Wharton on the Manufacture of Spelier. The Lehigh Zinc Co., since taking possession of the — have maintained the hig character of its product, and the zin rolling mill which they have added to it turns ome sheet we of the very choicest Nae such as could only be made from spelter of the highest s excellence saalia mainly of course from the unusual purity of the ores of Saucon Valley; the silicate particularly, which has always been the predominant ore there, being notably freer from impurities, not o than most ores from other localities, but also than the carbonate which abounded in the pee after roasting, all pieces which from disoolneatiele or rejecting all the first and last products of distillation from eac charge in each retort. The zinc thus made, amounting to seve ral tons, went mostly to various chemists, ‘and is doubtless all consumed except a few ingots which I still retain. It was, however, no purer than that examined by Drs. Eliot and Storer, nor is this surprising, since the latter was made in a new fur- nace from silicate of zinc which had been weathered for a long time, and was thus freed from the ee clay which otherwise might have yielded some impuri The establishment whose origin is a. eat is still im apenas Ne idag ie and Pe its activity is now limited by reason 0 ah ges Hs OPP of ore, there is good reason t0 believe hat this difficulty will be overcome when the magnifi- cent pumping wpparetis now being erected by we eign Zine Company shall enable them to mine at greater The entire spelter and ober | zine manufacture ee the United States, now a large and growi ay: 2 may fairly be said to have sprung from this tector for not only was it the pce in point of time by at least two years, but I believe that neither of the others succeeded until it availed itself of = services of men procured from this establishment. C. G. Rockwood—Motion of a Tower by Solar Heat. 177 Art. XXV.—The Daily Motion of a Brick Tower, caused by Solar Heat ; by Prof. C. G. Rockwoop, Ph.D., Bowdoin College. THE observations which form the subject of the following re made in the spring of 1866. Some recent The walls were, however, made unusually heavy, and in order to have as firm a base as ible for the telescope, the upper Story was arched with brick, forming a solid and pretty firm bric floor, upon which now rests the stone pier of an equatorial. : t. e story below th tory, : beneath the brisk” arches, is occupied by the works of the tower clock, He dimensions of the tower are as follows: Side of the square at ground, ..-- ------------ 164 feet. we “ * top of brickwork, ------- 15 : Thickness of walls at first story,------------- 27 incl es. : «" & top of brickwork, .------ 6 f os “ where the arches spring,--- 20 — . Height to top of turret, _-. ~~. =---~----4---- ¥ eet. : “ a brickwork, ---- - “ floor of observatory room, -- -- ------ 75 178 =. G. Rockwood— Motion of a Tower by Solar Heat. The tower is connected by its north side with the main build- ing for an altitude of about 45 feet. Projecting from the south side of the main building, it has its north wall in a line with, and forming part of, the south wall ef the building. The whole edifice stands in a position inclined to the meridian, the sides of the building, and consequently those of the tower, having the direction N. 28° 30’ E. ‘ revious observations elsewhere (at Bunker Hill Monument) had led to the apprehension that such a tower, besides being subject to tremors communicated from the ground, would have a definite and somewhat regular daily motion, dependent upon the influence of the sun’s heat in expanding the materials of which it was composed. The object for which this investige- tion was undertaken was to ascertain whether this motion would affect the use of the telescope or not. In order to investigate the motion in the present case, two some of the records being afterward rej upon 59 days, included between April.24th and Jul Tt will be 1 oe i is peri C. G. Rockwood—Motion of a Tower by Solar Heat. 179 A third level placed with the others upon the stone floor, and also the levels of a zenith telescope, which was temporarily mounted on a brick pier in the room, were recorded during a part of this time, but as their results were not employed in the discussion, it is not necessary to notice them farther than to say, that in general they confirmed the indications of the prin- cipal levels. et us now examine briefly what would be the probable motion of a tower thus situated, and then compare this theoret- leal result with that given by the recorded level readings First : suppose an isolated symmetrical tower of homogene- ous material, situated at the equator of the earth, and the sun at the equinox. The diurnal circle of the sun then passes through the east and west points of the horizon and the zenith of the tower. In the morning the heat of the sun’s rays would expand the east side of the tower, and cause it to lean toward the west. As the sun rose toward the zenith, and warmed Rormal position. t any station intermediate between the equator and the Pole, the figure described by the tower would be neither a ht line nor a circle, but between the two, i. e, an ellipse, Whose excentricity diminishes as the latitude of the place creases, In the case under discussion, the tower is in N. lat. 41° 19’, 4nd the sun was near the summer solstice. The sun therefore Tose about 80° north of the east point, culminated south of “€ zenith, and set north of west. The inclination of the tower, being opposite the sun, would .-1 1 the morning southwest and west, at noon north, at even- ‘ng east and southeast, and during the night it might be sup- to return in a straight line to its mean position. Since Melination would be less than the westward or eastward, and _ the curye described would resemble an ellipse, with its wept Pat the meridian, and probably somewhat flattened on the 180 € G. Rockwood—Motion of a Tower by Solar Heat. incorporate them in this discussion. The recorded observations give a series of level-readings at certain hours upon 59 days. e most obvious method of any one day. Thus combined, the means are as follows, the levels being designated by the numerals I and II, and the level readings having been reduced to seconds. Mean Level Readings. +East. 48 rT -8""6§ 095 = 157 — 762 10/87 = — 10 +North. 1136 IL +5/"64 +5/1-03 +2/'-97 —0/-37 — 0/78 +S If now we let these numbers be the abscissas and ordinates of a plane curve, referred to rectangular axes in the direction the normal to the plane of the levels or by om vertical line gs the tower. It should also be borne in mind that a south lev : reading indicates a north inclination of the tower, and vice versa, 1, 2, 3, ete., in order, beginning with the ere ing observation. It is seen to be an imperfect fen with i an 7 minor axis coincides nearly with the meridian. It thus pe sponds tolerabl minor axis of the ing has checked the north and south motion, and so C. G, Rockwood—Motion of a Tower by Solar Heat. 181 somewhat the extreme ordinates; as we see that by simply lengthening the hee i ordinates on the Psi ee: oN Dene BRE er SIN et } axis be brought / : = into the merid- { i 4 ian. 2 ee . . ‘ 2 pee 2 But it is evi- seo cee 1 a ae y: of observation, were as follow: Mean Level Readings—Clear Days. +East, “2 50ma.M. 10h88ma.m. Oh59mP.M. 8h 32m P.M. 558m P.M. 10h 39m P.M ot ea ee ee Se 46/520 garages = — 855 — 886 tT EL Mean Level Readings— Cloudy Days. r M. Oh59mP.M. Sh33mP.M. 6hSmP.™M. 10h 47m P. M. T —9'-94 geo 8/65 = —10"15 11/43 11798 TL +592 4676 4.559 + ANA + BOT + BI GS These averages, with the signs changed, being made erage od om ordinates, give the two curves oo B and OC, the obser- ons being indi numerals as before. . 2 epee result was the Separation into two series. The two curves have indeed = _, ls excessive departur : “14: attributed solely 0th connection with the main building, for 182) CG. Rockwood—Motion of a Tower by Solar Heat. any such retarding effect as has been supposed should be greater when the absolute amount of motion was greater, and therefore, should be more evident on the curve for clear days. morning observation (marked 1), may be found upon a curve nearly similar to the one for clear days. And the distorted day. Consequently, when the effect begins to be bet the tained out of its normal position by a considerable amount. ellipse should be to each other as sin 21° to sin 90°, or ass to 100. Now the minor axis is about 7” hence the major would probably also affect this element. : oo The curve deduced from the observations is thus seen exhibit a sufficient degree of correspondence, with what had been anticipated from theoretical considerations, to co firm the truth of the reasoning ; the departures from the perfect ellipse can etrical be ascribed to the unsymm C. G. Rockwood—Motion of a Tower by Solar Heat. 188 powers of absorption, radiation and conduction of the materials of the tower have been left entirely unnoticed. They would undoubtedly have their place in a complete investigation, but no data were at hand for estimating their influence. we may suppose the tower to be equally expanded in all parts of its height, the vertical side would be changed ¢ into a uniform curve, as AB in the figure; and since the | & deviation from a vertical is small, the tangent at would cut the vertical line BC nearly at the middle int between Band ©. Therefore CD is nearly one- major axis of the ayes should be proportionately diminished. Contraction of that side upon which it blew was thus plainly recorded hy the level, na a good illustration afforded of the duct of the observations. _ Brunswick, Me., July 11th, 1871. 184 SD. Hayes on the Distillation of Petroleum Naphthas. Art. XX VL—On the destructive Distillation of Light — Naphthas, at comparatively low srg by S. Dan. Hayes, State Assayer of Massachuse Unper the generic term naphtha, as applied to some of the i eey obtained in the arts from petroleum, is inclu series of hydrocarbons having specific gravities above 0°742, or ecesi 0°625 (rhigolene) and 0°742 (heavy per is - boiling — varying with the densities from F, These naphthas have distinguishing aeent al re! which slicy are easily recognized and which place them in 4 class by themselves; and aside from their odors, densities, boil- ing points, volatility, and solvent powers, a noticeable peculiarity is the absence of oly bodies: they do not leave any Agee stain on common writing paper that has been dipped in them, as do all the heavier and oily distillates obtaine aa f from. petro- leum. The redistillation of these naphthas under different con- ditions produces other hydrocarbons, in which the proportions of hydrogen and carbon are not only changed, but som e of these products are ois that will stain asitien - per like ats and it is possible to produce crystallizable paraffine from these volatile naphthas by properly conducted distillations. the summer of 1861, the writer had occasion to ie Sr ae observed that besides the gases, pew vapors, es a pa di minished volume of naphtha, an unexpectedly ne proportion were finished, large masses of separated carbon noms found in the ae as in — mga esapegestoin distillations of erud@ | wie © | BE *9 ee & ea oe en examining a sample of “ Keroelen,” a iat ot naphthe, that had a ‘specific gravity of 0°640 a 72° Fy and when heated in a flask containing scraps of vlstinw foil, it began to boil at about 85° F. As the more voles three-quarters of the liquid had e evaporated. It co: continuel a boil freely, but the whole was not converted into vapor wy the Boa Soar had risen considerably above 300°. It is ¥ | * This Journal, Sop, 1052 S. D. Hayes on the Distillation of Petroleum Naphthas. 185 in two and a half and three and a half minutes respectively ; and the former evaporated completely in about two-thirds o the time required for the other.” This peculiarity of petroleum naphtha has been so often ob- Within the past year an apparatus has been erected in Boston, Zh: Wi i bottom of each cylinder, ending there and starting out from the top of each again to connect with the bottom of the next; it 1s The cylinders are provided with glass tube guages, so that the changes occurring inside may be watched, and the whole appa- matus and contents are maintained under a pressure of about fifty pounds to the inch when in operation. oe getl this apparatus the steam and naphtha vapors are he ~ sielleny the upper part of the cylinders, above the liquid, — ressure, and at a temperature of about 212 ae re much above the boiling point of the naphtha, but never so Aig: & 300° F.; and the decompositions occur in the vapors Sather than in the liquid, light uncondensable gases and va : - ng upward, and heavy oil falling down into the naphtha ‘teataak The apparatus was operal continuously by pum : Mg in naphtha at intervals as it was consumed, and after 186 S. D. Hayes on the Distillation of Petroleum Naphthas. heavy oil had accumulated it was drawn off at the bottom, the largest quantity being found in the first cylinder. It was found that the longer the vapors were held together in the apparatus, heated and under pressure, the more perfect were compositions; and Mr. Willard obtained at different times from two to ten per cent. of the naphtha as heavy oil. The heavy hydrocarbon oil obtained in this way has a dark yellowish-brown color, and smells of the adhering naphtha when fresh ; but after standing exposed to the air for a few days, it loses this odor and becomes nearly neutral, or comparatively free from offensive odor. Its specific gravity varies from 0850 to 0°860, and its boiling point, after it is freed from the adher- ing naphtha, is above 400° F. It does not evaporate at common temperatures, leaves 4 permanent greas i ood lubricator for » pears are decomposed or “cracked,” first into burning oil an¢ — eavy products, and ultimately into burning oil entirely. Bub — Mr. Willard’s sources, may “cracked” at a temperature below 300° B = Be) os - BB g = pa] S fon é=| ES ro) Bb a + Ou in ct ae oO ae 2 Oo B oe ae a Ee o 5 eS @ pes) er o = A ok a KS It is a memoir that has never been published in any scientifi¢ : journal, containing the results of an extended investigation made troleum are not simply bodies previously existing in the pet” * Report on the Rock Oil or Petroleum from Venango county. Penneylvania ri _ With special reference to its use for illuminating and other purposes. By Prof. # _ Silliman, Jr. New Haven, 1855. - S D. Hayes on the Distillation of Petroleum Naphthas. 187 leam, but that they are new substances formed by heat and distillation. The author says: ‘The uncertainty of the boiling points in- dicates that the products obtained at the temperatures named above were still mixtures of others, and the question forces itself x farther on in the report: “The paraffine, with which this portion of the oil abounds, does not exist ready-formed in the original ployed in the Sarr of distillation, by which the elements are ° the result of an experiment as follows: “Exposed for many °, the o1 ma never exceeding 200°, gradually and slowly diminished, grew oid and finally left a’small residue of dark brown, lustrous- Coking resin, or pitchy substance, which in the cold was hard and brittle. e samples of oil employed were very nearly colorless. This is remarkable when we remember that the tem- perature of the distillation was above 500° F.” : ee Tt is remarkable that in this early laboratory investigation Prof. Silliman should have noted the production of entirely new aye by the destructive distillation of aelaape es such as are W only produced in large quantities in manufacturing opera- tions. The “cracking” of siblaut as a necessary Pa of its distillations in the large way, was not generally recognized or admitted for several years after this report was written, and “ven now there are many chemists who consider these as a Fractional distillations ; but it is only necessary to mix the dis- tillates together again and try to reproduce petroleum, to satis- s rily prove how different the products are from the original bstance, The _doiling poi it had been float- A point above 400° F., probably because 1t een Hoa . water exposed to the sia or because it was thick “sur- 188 R. Pumpelly—The Paragenesis of Copper face oil.” Most of the petroleum, as now obtained from wells in apap Shoes yields by the first distillation, either by steam- heat or otherwise, about fifteen per cent of nen naphtha, such as is miaseiolse called gasolene, benzine, &c., which is entirely free from any greasy or oily constituent ; ae this light naphtha, by distillation at comparatively low temperatures as describ above, yields about ten per cent of its volume of heavy parafiine oil, a new substance produced by heating the vapors sas the boiling points of the naphtha, and not simply an educt. Art. XXVIL—The Paragenesis and Derivation of Copper and its associates on Lake Superior ; by RAPHAEL PUMPELLY. BELIEVING that we can arrive at a knowledge of the laws 1 rough @ IL The e paragenesis, etc., of the mineral associates of coppel tL Conclusions from the facts observed. The second part is the result of a careful study of several thousand specimens. No series was admitted to the list whet there was any doubt as to the succession, except where doubt is indicated by an interrogation point. I. Lithology of the Trappean Series. In the immediate neighborhood of Portage Lake, the a com the “Mineral Range” have a uniform trend of J e eas rm : ie and aay vertical ie of demarkation betwee! — the nes y inclined cupriferous series of rocks and the sand- and its associates on Lake Superior. 189 same age as the sandstone beds, which are comformably super- 5 egg over the trappean series on the west side of Keweenaw oint. hanging wall . to this brown and dirty red. Light and dark green, mottled or speckled with brown ; dirty brownish-green; reddish-gray ; and ark green, almost black, are the usual colors. The fracture is enerally uneven, or hackly, to imperfectly Conchoidal, but in the freshest, and especially in the compact Varieties, it is often highly conchoidal. They have an earthy odor often even without having been breathed upon. | Ms Magnet, while others contain very little of this mineral. parently labradori £ f a ¥ ferent shades of green, while the magnet reveals a very varia- ble percentage of a magnetic iron; and in some of the coarser- 190 R. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper grained varieties small jet black crystals apparently of augite or ernest are occasionally visible. The accessory mine ed, many or all of which are probably products of the i nan of the iene constituents, are : A brick-red foliaceous ee earit had rubellan, occurring as very minute specks some fine-grained v it lends a soft = nk -brown appearance to the weathered surface, and ai nie s the interio! Specular-iron in minute rh seco ation aes ee in the coarser-grained vari- eties. Calcite in seams, and more frequently in grains and amygdules, especially in the f amygdaloidal portion of the beds. Epidote rarely crystallized; most common in the amygdaloidal 1 serienien fre- que : : q which occurs in joey and seams, and also as an indurating medium near the hanging wall of many beds. : ee: in supa ules sai seams, mostly confined to the amygdaloidal portion of beds. ‘4 A inte te mineral, soft, compact, amorphous, greenish- oto sometimes altered to oe ee in grains from pin-head to walnut A yellowish-green soft earthy mineral, ws ipassid a green cities Tauncene and leovbandie in seams and amygdules. Analcite in amygdule: esse in small c ee and mers in amygdaloidal cavities. Nati @ copper sometimes in fine im regnations in the fine-grained rock, Page in thin shoots | in scene geen oe chiefly i m the amygdules, masses, shee ich form the metalliferous deposits in the rE where it en with native saver onally a Datholite 1 massive in the amygdaloidal portion of some a and also in small aggregations of microscopical crystals in the same position! _ We have iba cones several recent analyses of different and ical vari of these rocks, made by Mr. Thomas Macfarlane.* Of one of the coarser-grained varieties which forms vey thick bits several hundred feet west of the Quincy “vel Mr. Macfarlane says: “It is gene 24 a compound nature, but all its constituent minerals are not large enough to be ree! determined. Conspicuotis’ among them is a dark oritic mineral, the grains of which vary from the Sviallbat size to one-fourth of an inch in diameter. In the lattet case they are irregularly shaped, ites on angles, but t are never quite round or amygdalo at They frequet Z consist in the center of dark green ae The mineral ® in seams and impregnations, ee nearly always ass quarts | | * taapia mee Report of Progress, 1863-1866, p. 149. and its associates on Lake Superior. 191 gray. When ignited it loses 3-09 per cent of its weight, and changes toa light brown color. When digested with nitric acid, and afterwards with a weak solution of caustic potash (to remove free silica), it experiences, including the loss Vy ignition, a loss of 46°36 per cent. This consists of WENA oper scr ccereverie tae eros 14°73 : Alumina, 717 PeOTNO OF WOH Dae pics cee ue - 14°87 : ime, 4°47 : Magnesia, _..-_.. 2°03 | ate 3°09 46°36 5 In the undecomposed residue light-red and dark-colored Particles are discernible. On digesting it with hydrochloric acid, and subsequently with a weak solution of potash, it sus- tains a further loss of 10-6 per cent, which consists of | Joe eee 3-48 lng 3°03 : Peroxide of iron, ..------ 1-98 : _ ee eoepe Bere: 1°76 : Moepness, ...5. 5 “35 10°60 _ The ‘undecomposed residue was still found to consist of a light red and a dark-colored constituent. The latter was the tuent, fused readily to a dark brown glass. To judge from its Sravity and fusibility, it would not appear unreasonable to "egard it as either pyroxene or hornblende. In quantity it did rade mrever, exceed one-eighth of the feldspar. The latter Hor xe magnetite, are : acid, it aoe reasonably be concluded that the constituents temoved by the nitric acid are those of the chloritic mineral. On treating the rock previous to ignition, much of the iron 1s _ Temoved as protoxide. 3 ee os eenish-gray feldspar, and reddish-brown mica, some of # 192 ft. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Oopper Although some peroxide is also possibly present, I have cal- culated the whole of the iron as protoxide, and have moreover, added the difference of the weight between it and the iron estimated as peroxide to the loss sustained by ignition, and put it dow ater. In this way the composition of the chloritic mineral, calculated to 100 parts, would be Silica, 31°78 Adami oS eee. MA a I 15°47 Protoxide of iron, = 98°87 ime, peeuoe cies 9°64 Magnesia, -- -- 4°37 Water, .... 9°87 100°00 Delessite, ---- 46°36 Labradorite, . ......_. 47°43 xene or hornblende, 5°26 agnetite, 0°95 100°00 By the same method of analysis, Mr. Macfarlane found the rock underlying the copper-bearing bed of the Quincy mine ® — consist of . Delessite in amygdules and grains,__ _- -- 38°00 Labradorite, 62°00 100°00 This rock is distinctly amygdaloidal. ‘The matrix is fn® grained, but it is crystalline, and is seen to consist of differed! constituents. Its color is dark reddish-gray.” Its cavitil@ rarely the size of a pea, are filled with what seems to be the same chloritic mineral which occurs as a constituent of the’ rock above described. Mr. Macfarlane also examined the rock which overlies th? Albany and Boston conglomerate at the Albany and Bost? mine. “Tt is a fine grained mixture of dark green delessité, and its associates on Lake Superior. 193 lamin of the latter showing ruby-red reflections. Its specific gravity is 2°81, and the smallest trace only of its powder is attracted by the magnet.” He considers the mineralogical com- position of this rock to be Delessite, eS AO'UD Tee ss ..- 20°00 Labradorite, -------- 40°00 100°00 The rocks, to which the above given analyses refer, are repre- sentatives of the three predominating types of the trap of 2°65 Although the name melaphyr is an unfortunate one, having been first used to designate an entirely different rock, an hav- under consideration. “All the trap rocks and associated amyg- daloids of Portage Lake are varieties of melaphyr. tphism, in which the chlorite resulted, largely or wholly, m the alteration of hornblende or pyroxene. In the more ish-gray. It contains generally grains 0 Small tabular crystals of specular iron. aes 2 inée-grained ; the constituents, light-green or see vie clinic feldspar and dark-green delessite, are nage ania stp = le, but more generally they are not so. The usu “to “a q ©.) gave chlorosalylic acid, which, when fused with potash, Spi salicylic acid.— Berichte der Deutschen Chem. Gesell., iv, W. G. 4. On Gallein.—When pyrogallic acid is fused with phthalic ad, hydrous, or better ‘ak pdfs the fused mass dissolved in Water yields a new coloring matter in small edad it with a magnificent blue color, whi - JOUR. Sct.—Tumep Serres, VoL, II, No. 9.—SEPT., 1871. 14 204 Scientific Intelligence. becomes dirty; ammonia gives a violet solution, The author | oo that ‘gallein closely resembles hematein, which by on with caustic potash yields pyrogallic acid. In like manner, i ith reduci may again be oxidized to hematin, so gallein may educed to gallin, a Npiriaaed crystallized substance, which, when moist: | ened with ammonia, again yields gallein. Stuffs mordanted with — ina or "fern ic oxide are dyed red by gallein, the color being fF intermediate between that of logwood and brazilwood. The cor — : 3 Pee | hedrons and prisms. It dyes mordanted stuffs like When gallein is heated with 20 parts of concentrated sulphuric acid to 200° C., a new substance is formed, whic ule urified, pre sents a bluish-black mass, and which Baeyer terms ceerulein. This body dissolves in hot anilin with a magnificent indigo-blue color. The s olution, after adding a little acetic acid, dyes wool indigo-blue. The formula of cerulein is y reduc ion, it passes into rane which dissolves jin ether with ——e 4 oO m i] e a) pod X) al o =, 2. es See a j= a fae) oO os mm ky Se 3 > ge. fe} 8. Qu re = oO 4 z., Ps 4g m 3 oS. ty ory ou son | no a ee: = i= 45 23 > 5. Decomposition of ieigear ia > by R. mecca is one of the pect Hs t minerals to decompose, , altho h there have been ocesses given to effect its analysis, t ey have generally socomplished the purpose rather unsat: tisfactoriy. F. W. Clarke, and published some time ee ago in this Journal, wherein potassic di-sulphate and cryolite meat, undoubtedly effects the decomposition of the or? but an sulphate and cryolite require ired is so great ane t chrculiees ap erate in such a form, that I have never been able obtain tolerable results Py, this method. A number of experiments have cca a me that the ber given below is equal, if not superior, to any I have yet he in accuracy as well as rapidit a Set manipulation. e pro this: place about 0°3 grm. of ina capacious pla Geology and Natural History. 205 poeible, add a piece of ammonic-fluoride about the size of a pea; oisten the whole with a few drops uf se ig ee _sulphurie Ad given. Sometimes this second fusion requires to be repeated, but for practical purposes this is unnecessary if the previous operations have been well conducted. The bulk of all three filtrates need hot be over 200 c.c. The chromium may be estimated by geonnen | acidifying the solution, reducing the chremium to the state o sesquioxide by means of s sulphurous acid solution, and oii by ammonic hydrate. If the Bunsen method of filtration is use ed, the ] moun angan from the alkaline solution. One advantage of this method is, that there i is no troublesome SyAperNe required to separate silicon. sults of parallet analyses 1. C mite = —-2888 per cent Cr,0, 50°450 2868 per cent Cr,0, 50°627 Tam confident that with more experience still better results may tained. be ob II. Gronogy anp Natural History. 1. Address to the American Association for the Advancement A pe soience, by Tuomas Srerry Hunt, LL.D., on retiring from the ce of President of the Association, "Indianapolis, Aug, 16, 1871. ta bp. 8vo.—Dr. Hunt takes for the themes of his address, first the ae, of the Appalachians, especially the history of researches ers in connection wi 4 own, and also the Ame Which he has been led. He first oe the crystalline rocks of the chain into hak series, draws out the distinctive chological ‘teristics of each, pcs aintains sre they belong to differ- ®at geological eras, a Adirondack me Lada Series, = is marked by granitic gneisses, e eddi eisses, often coarse-grain generally — or grayish in "color, . “often — and little —- _ CeOus, » and including reat eds of magne etic re, and tie Raphite but a argillites, or slates caine staurolite, andalusite or cyani 206 Screntific Intelligence. IL The Green Mountain Series, characterized, he observes, pe mica schists and nenereened micaceou 8 gneisses, the latter often light-colored, fine or coarse-grained and sometimes porphyritie; ae mica Ae ie ae in mica than those of the Green Mountain us quartzite ; hornblendic gneisses and schists; aK’ or yatale’ ffitiewtoinds accompani nied by boston Se ido- crase, sphene and graphite, like the limestones of t urentian, ut t often intimately associated with highly eer schists. aining staurolite, andalusite, cyanite and garnet, and some sha highly plum mbaginous. The rocks are ‘ated ed by granite veins containing tourmaline, beryl, lepidolite, and occasionally tinstone and moaned only the ak i ip minerals occurring; as far as known the bau rentian ¢ After thus dividing Lithologie aly ae ack into these t series, Dr. Hunt endeavors to trace them southwestward along the Appalachians, through the ddittiptions of other geologists 5 and is not where upon; neither is the value of lithological a amon stalline rocks in the determination of geolog! equivalency diacnsved, beyond making an affirmation on the oe and citing the opinions of one or two authors he history of the discoveries and views of geologists La 7 with them in the Green Mountain > is next ably ae rg eye pera “Green Mountain Series,” he 84 10 “ Although I have, in poeined with most other American ge i t eastern North Americs are not only pre-Silurian but ‘pre-Cambrias | in age”—a conelusion which all will say should be thorough tested by reference to stratigraphical facts before it is gen@ accepted. Geology and Natural History. 207 The * Origin of Crystalline Rocks,” the subject of the second d. Facts are to part of the address, is next discussed. brought not b oO review of recent observations, and mainly his own, connected with the origin of the minerals constituting and associated with the Specimens of Eozoon; and finally treats briefly of the origin of estones and dolomites, making some great formations of them of chemical origin. € conclusions throughout Dr. Hunt’s address are open to doubts and objections; but their discussion would require as many pages as he has found necessary for presenting them. 2. The distribution of Maritime Plants in North America a Cha BSA a ai No Properly belong to sea-shores, and draws from them the conclu- ‘lon expressed in the title of his paper above given. The argu- went is an important one. But still it may be queried, consider- ing the much greater number of shells and of other kinds of marine animal life that must have existed in those Champlain “eas, whether their absence from the same regions all over the Uni- ted States, beyond a height of 300 to 600 feet above tide-level in ““ More northeastern portions, is not better proof that the sea ste i B &. wR fae) ° fe ad & et S B = 9 = mS Su © 5 er @ cao a ~S 5 Bu ta @ co al —with the exceptions along the borders of the Atlantic, along € River (then Gulf of) St. Lawrence, and on Lake Champlain oe an arm of that Gulf )—without any traces of marine animal shore oe of the continent, in the supposed case, would be b a __* Waters of a great interior sea, having only the very feeble 208 ; Scientific Intelligence. movement that might en from the tides setting in by the south and the northeast, so that the necessities of the iceberg theory but the waters bearin g them must have been fresh wate ers—vit., those of the much ‘expanded Great Lakes, and those of the flood (first appealed to oe this connection by Prof, Hilgard) which pro- ceeded from the melting continental glacier over “the vast funnel shaped Mississippi iter aching from the ee on the east to the far distant Rocky Mountains on the w In a geological paper on the New Haven region » (Connecti) recently piiblished by the writer, it is stated that the Champlain beds of sand and gravel which underlie the plain about the bay, show, by the character of the stratification, that they were deposi- these tipper twenty feet nearly to the top bear unquestionable eve dence of ne tet by the outflowing flooded river. This : ow ocean ahs ng the Champlain era. Some of the Results of the Latest Researches in the Water of dhe ‘Atlantic and Mediterranean.—These results, as set forth in 4 lecture by Dr. Wm. CarPEeNTER, before the Royal ince are fattes > as follow 1.) The waters ‘of ‘the Atlantic between Falmouth and Lisboa are most salt and dense at the surface, as first observed by Forel hammer. The specific gravity ranged from 1°0269 to 1°0268, the by volumetric etic averaged at surface 19°94, at bottom 19° 7 intermediate region 19°85. The maximum at surface was 20° In waters taken on ais same vertical line the chlorine was at st face 20°013, at 10 to 50 fathoms 19-909, at 100 f. 19°805. er excess of saltness at surface is attributed to evaporation. But a consequent aie density is ae to be neutralized by * effects of colder temperature belo at . (2.) The saltness in the Moditerrdtiean ' is greatest below pe a face. In the shallower parts, it is greatest at bottom In “ shallower parts of the western basin (which basin includes all ‘a od Malta, ara a at non fe fe rosses the sea, and which 5% pa “at c gravit ity ‘08 chlorine at surface were 1°0278 and 20°87; at et! tom 1°0285 and 21°38. But the salinity does not increase wit pr be An average of results shows that at 200 to 400 ie : onde 38 ific gravity and chlorine were 1-0287 and 21°53; at 4 a 800 hom, 1-085, “i a at 1,300 to 1,700 f., 1°0283, 21 ‘21. . increase 0 boca ie me distance downward is attributed to * Geology and Natural History. 209 sinking of the surface layer as it becomes more dense by evapora- tion, an effect not apparent in the Atlantic, because the difference of salinity above and below is so slight. (3.) The temperature of the North Atlantic waters near the mar- gin of the basin decreases downward toward 35°, but with an ? perature at 81 fathoms was 53°°5; from which it gradually sunk to 51°-5 at 300 fath.; 50°-5 at 600; 49°3 at 800; and then fell off aters of the Mediterranean Very Nearly uniform, being between 54° and 56°°5, and nowhere lo . and . > e@ te at lot, 71°. ©. at 40 £, 5773; at 50 f, , at 20 £, 61°; at 30 £, 60°; at ade # “'T; at 100 £, ae 54° was found at a depth in one case of 210 Seventific Intelligence. 790 f.; 56° in another at 1,743 f.; 55° at 1,456 and 1,508 f, thee being merely local variations. Hence “whatever the temperature was at 100 fathoms, that was the temperature of the whole mass of water beneath down to the greatest depth explored.” Between Gib- raltar and Sardinia the bottom temperature ranged between 54° and 55°°5, average 54°°9; toward Sicily, between 55° and 56°. Dr. Carpenter concludes that “no amount of surface-heat has ater general temperature at the western extremity of the basin. d the ur orm permanent temperature of the mass of Mediterranean water may thus be considered as representing the mean temperature of deep caves gives another set of data of the like kind, clo i i Thus. orquay, which is farthest from its entrance, varies but little iron . There is a cave in the island of Pantel laria, lying between Sicily and the African coast, which is repated | ss i f Newport, very hot sunshine, its actual temperature, taken by thermomete — was 54°, deposition of this finest silt going forward, as it tends to cover the - surface of the animal and prevent aeration. Thus oyster beds ¥™ Geology and Natural History. 211 not flourish in the range of river deposits. The facts correspond with those observed by Tyndal, who detected the particles in the sirface-water of the Mediterranean by electric light, and attrib- uted the deep blue color of the waters, as well as of those of Lake Geneva, to their presence. e facts are stated to explain to geologists how non-fossilif essrs. King and Rowney is considered in detail, and in closing, the following recapitulation is given of the points they consider as established :— ‘ pass in ariously subdivided states, and etching out the resulting portions ins an 2) 7h ch we hol be the calcareous matrix of the above lobulated grains, &e.) 1s “ompletely paralleled in various crystalline rocks—notably marble Containing i the pre-cited marbles. i i) The “chamber caata” being composed occasionally of loganite and malacolite, besides serpentine, is a fact ore a WO of favoring their organic origin, as supposed, must be held as a z n produce Prescribed order, (5.) Dr. Giimbel, observing rounded, cylindrical, or igri 195 of coccolite and pargasite in crystalline calcareous marbles, 212 Scientific Intelligence. tureless abide (7.) The a Wainainhias layer,” in its typical condition, unmis- takably occurs in cracks or fissures, both in Canadian and Connemara ophite (8.) The “nummuline layer” is paralleled by the fibrous coat vot is occasionally present on the surface of grains of chor drodite. ut 1 on irom another, to the exclusion of the *“intermediate skeleto on ae totally incompatible with the idea of the “nummuline layer” hav 10.) The so-called “stolons,” and “ pass ages of communication % exactly sin, Sepa with those described in Cyeclocly ypeusy” have been shown to be tabular crystals and eatoualy formed : bodies, belon ak to different minerals, wedged cross-way8 % — obliquely i in the calcareous interspaces between the grains s and (11.) The « ‘canal system” is composed of serpentine, or er . : o traced e solvent. 2; “canal system” in its remarkable branching gine is completely paralleled by crystalline e configurations i in the li len; an crevices of a ¢ of ge ashame in a calcitic matrix per Amity, New i. (13. 3.) T he configurations, presum — to so rn the “canal sy eis a pene 26 the argumen nt that as all pe foreeeig £ eoevonal features ” are occasionally found get in 1 ophite, Geology and Natural History. . 213 combination must be considered a conclusive evidence of their organic origin, we have shown, from the composition, physical characters and circumstances of occurrence and association of is paralleled to a remarkable extent in chondrodite and its calcitic rix, 15.) The “regular alternation of lamelle of calcareous and “ intermediate nside to be a “fundamental fact” evidencing an organic ae grt is proved to be a mineralogical pheno he et ar ion oceurs in amphiboline-calcitic marbles and gneissose rocks. ; (16.) In order to account for certain wntoward difficulties pre- gurations forming the “canal system,” and the muline la bundles of the pseudopodia that have emerged from the chamber wall”)—«by a process of chemical substitution before their nd showed this quasi- (17.) The “siliceous mineral ” (serpentine) has been analogued ni &e.) of recent and fossil foraminifers. We have shown that t tes of “Eozoon” have no relation whatever to the sts. ; Dr. Hunt, in order to account for the serpentine, loganite i ling Pe malacolite, bein he presumed in-fil substances of 0z0on,” has co ed the “novel doctrine” that such mineral i is “ fossil” (19.) Having i i £ “chambers” and g investigated the alleged cases of ~ cham occurring “ filled with valeite,” and presumed to be “a ions,” we have shown that there th Dnadense ” in rocks that are ina “ hig. . ge 4} must be accepted as a fact utterly fatal to its organic * Dr. Ca F : lard Reade’s . Dr. Carpenter, unable to defend himself against Mr. T. Me Objection that “ Fozoon ppethirs only metamorphosed rocks (Nature, No. 60), 214 | Scientific Intelligence. (21.) The occurrence of “ eozoonal features ” solely in crystalline or metamorphosed rocks, belonging to the Laurentian, the Lower Silurian, and the Liassic systems—never in ordinary unaltered deposits of these and the intermediate systems—must be assumed as completely demonstrating their purely mineral origin. g apt. The reading of the foregoing paper was followed by a short communication from Dr. Dawson, on “two points,” which it is now necessary to notice :— The authors add to the paper the following postseri i ol &e. The case esting : , ne established fact that foraminiferal shells, corals, and other organisms occur with siliceous in-fillings of the kind—and having and some othe ade known last year by Dr enter) into the present discussion sides, it is altogether gratuitous, Inconsistent with scientific reasoning, to assume that the crinoidal in-filling “is similar to that effected by the ancient serpentine of the Laurentian” (Dawson) ; or, that it is “allied in the mode of n essential “ eozoonal feature” in connexion with a crystal of spinel, from ity. We now learn that Dr. Dawson has had under ex- anadense.” the inference that the specimens “ are po™ tions of a bedded rock, and not a vein stone ”--without taking into consideration that it is suppositional, and based on an examil natio specimens preserved tn collections—it cannot set aside i the plain fact, that in our specimen arborescent configurations— formed of groups of decreted erystals of malacolite, and identical takes refuge under the ad captandum argument, that its ‘ caleareous | ele (‘intermediate skeleton ”) “ show less departure from the shelly texture pire grea ij i le a. rocks of any geological period” (Natwe, No. 62); forgetting that, as the sub- Stance of such fossils has undergone so much cha 4 aa eee 4 pl . ‘ ert +} 1 containing them—“ least altered had they may be—into the “highly crystalline condition” of “ eozoonal ” ophite. But Dr. Carpenter seems to misunderstand the objection altogether; as it is nt based so much on the mineral structure of the “ fe aed occur best preserved in “ highly crystalline ” or metamo er; 1 features,” as on the fact rphosed an. Geology and Natural History. 215 with perfect and the finest examples of what are presumed to be “casts of the canal system ”—are present in calcite, occupying the crevices of a large crystal of spinel. The fact of itself conclusively settles their purely mineral origin. the Oil-bearing Rocks of Ohio and West Virginia; b A. J. Warner. (Communicated.)—In an article on the “Oil- bearing Limestones of Chicago,” in the June number of this Jour- nal, by Prof. T. Sterry Hunt, this author remarks that. “much of the petroleum of Pennsylvania, Ohio, and the adjacent regions, is Indigenous to certain sandstones in the Devonian and Carbonifer- rocks,” It is now well ascertained that the heavier lubricating oils, pro- duced along the well known uplift in West Virginia, are found s of th i same district is principally found about three hundred and fift feet below the Coal-measure conglomerate, or in the Upper Devo- f S$ gravity, is found phage get the sandstone stratum, which forms in emp) contain Calamites e A Why is it limited strictly to these sharp anticlinal belts ? The evi- ence seems abundant, that, at least in the dist lime- t Genesee and Marcellus slates, or the deeper Silurian Stones, may, perhaps, be yet a question ; but facts which Loeercl quire too much space to ask for here, favor the view of the ne Source in the bituminous shales. Marietta, Ohio, July 12. 216 Scientific Intelligence. Notes on some porn in the Mineralogy and ee of Tah: te W. P. Brake. (From a letter to Prof, B. Smiimay, dated Salt a City, J ‘dg 27, 1871.)—I left New Haven hurriedly to reach t mma Mine and examine it. It is a remarkable mine, quartzite, and rest upon th mense masses of syenitic grani which form the picturesque peat peaks of the Wahsatch. These strata are all much uplifted and con torted, some of the harder Pp in color, while the syenite is light gray, and they show the peculiar scale-like crusts seen on the aul weathered Via surfaces ehove the Yosemite. the limestone fo rmation, I have seen ee peculiar and snitercaling = from other parts of the Terri tory. Sal Ammoniae 8 Meader in the southern part of the Territory. It is associated a ain brown dodecahedral garnets, and considerable hort- ote on Coal-measure Fucoids ; by G. C. BroapHEAD.— (Communication dated pets Hill, Mo. July 14th, 1871.) e p. 302, Lesquereux reports the occurrence of Ficoides Cauda gall, in a sandstone of Crawford Co., Arkansas, in the nei, nee hood of the coal-fields. Considering it Devonian, he is puzzled at its occurrence there, and suggests the possibility that it has ~ * i cers than had till now hoon eastern coal- bean of ens aky. the pmeuenerste is sometimes auda-galli.” It Geology and Natural History. 217 that further investigation deta show this Crawford Co, sandstone to belong to the Coal-measur I observed the Ca dulerpites first, about the year 1859, in Ran- dolph Co., Mo., occurring in hard sandstone and sandy limestone of the Coal-measures, and not very remote from the base of the Lower series: it was there about five feet below a four-foot bed of coal. I have observed traces of the same, here at Pleasant Hill, er Coal-measure sandstone and sandy limestone, and at one — locality in Missouri—I think probably in Lafayette Co. In 1868, I discovered Cawlerpites in a shaly sandstone of the Upper iscasarcs in Montgomery Co., Illinois, above the horizon of 13, 8 On oe and Subcarboniferous Fossils in Monon- galia Co., West Virginia ; by F. B. Murex (Report Regents of University, Ww. Virg ini ne aes Meek describes in this paper some hew species, viz Ms omen obsoletus, of the Lower Coal-measures, Nuewla anodonto ides, Yoldia pie sont and Y, a the Che of the Coal-measures, showing, as rema lived on through a great elie of t time, and scene ct that the = ate and other physical conditions of the era must have ne markably uniform the — atigraphie Relation of the Orders of Reptilia Prot Epwarp D, Corr.*—The stra ———. relation of the aes - Reptiles is is shown in the following table: Present—Rhynchocephalia: Crocodilia; Testu - Lacertilia; Ophidia. _ Pliocene—Crocodilias Testa idinata Lacertilia ; Ophiaia, ilia ; Ophidia. "La rtilia; Ophidia. Z : sar seh anergy sare Cocmodiin: Sauropterygia; Testudinata ; Lacertilia ; Pythonomorpha. * th From a Memoir on the ate ac < — road the sags page wii : Reptilia and the the app a 194, “oe preceding page of the memoir the author argues that posed Lacertilia of the Permian are all Rhynchocephalia. 218 Seventific Intelligence, Jurassic—Ornithosauria; Dinosauria; Ichthyopterygia; Crocodilia; Saurop- terygia; Testudinata; Lacertilia. Triassic—Dinosauria; Anomodontia; Rhynchocephalia; Ichthyopterygia; Croc : odilia; Sauropterygia; ? Testudinata. ? ; Permian— ? Rhynchocephalia. It will be observed, by this table, that the most specialized Rep- tilian order, the Ophidia, appeared last in time in the Eocene period ; and that those which constitute the line of connection with the generalized reptiles appeared earlier as they approached the latter,—the Pythonomorpha in Cretaceous, and Lacertilia in sic times. The Reptilian groups most specialized in bird charac ters (Ornithosauria and Dinosauria) appear on the other hand very early ; the first andjmost mammalian also,—the latter of the two, ' in Jurassic beds. The Trias gives us in the Anomodontia and | : derma allied to Sphargis, without carapace, and thus the most lizard-like of the order. The Lacertilia of European Jurassic strata are, some of them at least, acrodont, apparently Pachyglossa (¢ 9» Acrosaurus), and, as such, nearer the Rh chocephalia, which pre hem in time. € position of Homorosaurus an . ay of Wagner. mesosternum of the former refers it to either the Pachyglossa % e Crocodilia of the Jurassic do not possess the ball-and- socket-jointed vertebra of the recent genera, and exhibit the a articular faces of all the Jurassic and Triassic Reptilia. * The identity of these two propositions has not always been noticed by author. Geology and Natural History. 219 re, an approach to the long sacrum of the same orders. The lodon) is a Sauropterygian feature. In the Sauropterygia the shortened vertebral column, and long muzzle (Pistosaurus) in the hosauria display an increasingly Crocodilian character as we The 2208 tylus) loses the bird-like head, and assumes the ill-defined convexity f the Crocodiles; the tibia (Plateosaurus) loses the bird-like ria, of the Trias, than those of the Cretaceous. There are oubtful, owing to the generalized character of the parts we pos- Sess. Thus the Rhynchosaurus of the Trias of England is allied to that order, and to the Anomodontia. The Rhopalodon of the ik es lar ones derived from the study of the Mammalia, that the successional g' ely exhibited by the subordinate contents of the orders than decide that we must look for the origin of the orders in periods Prior to those in which we now know them, if, as some supp they originated in still more generalized t saccords with Huxley’s view of the period of origin of the mammalian orders. It must also be remembered that the above deduction as to Geological distribution is precisely that of geographical distribu- ch ; . Ey a; by F.C CALVERT. (Am, Ma . N. H., IV, viii, 129).—A solution of sugar in which infusoria had appeared, when subjected to 212° F., still contained bod Oo 5 Bees e-8-4 S S a 4 or5 small black Vibrios quite active, and 2 or 3 energetic o of igin of Genera, 1868; Hypothesis of Evolution, 1870. AM. Jour. Sor—Tuep Series, VoL. II, No. 9.—Sepr., 1871. 15 220 Scientific Intelligence. Vibrios. The same, heated to 300° F., was os to contain 2 ordinary Vibrios and 1 or 2 black Vibrios. At 400° F. the sugar was mostly decomposed sie all life had disappea An infusion of hay was similarly treated ; after foutieg to 212°F., there were present a few small black Vibrios ; cscs even. after heating to 300° F., though a less number. None was found after heating to 400°. 212° F, a all the lime matter that was before present in the tu e life in an infusion of guia ne was slightly decreased * 100° ae , very largely at 212° F. and had wholly disappeared at 300 The infusoria in putrid meat fluid were but slightly affected at 100° F. ; at 212° F. a small part remained alive but inactive, the liquor becoming turbid and coagulated ; at 300° F., a few Vibrios were alive, the small — ones the most numerous ; at 400° F. all ag had ang In each case the Ellie were examined 24 days after the heatin ss The ‘Sapalte show that infusorial vegetable life of some i ae Mey survive a temperature of even 300° F., but not of At 15° F. the infusoria became languid, but with an increase of aerperamre ane they were as active as ever. schnikoff on the affinities of Crinoids.—Metschnikot, to ae we owe so many valuable embryological investigations, has published preliminary notices* of the early stages of Coma tula which are of the utmost importance, as they throw an ei had been previously written by Busch, Allman and Thomson, °? the early a sh of Comatula, giving no data whatever bearing has always been homologised with the water-system 0 Echinoderms is Gevslooad in a Sig 5 different manner. In the free omatula larva the bag-like digestive sac is the 0 organ developed, it omes the digestive cavit the adult after the larva attaches itself to the ground. He noticed the tentacles as diverticula of the digestive sac in th rior of arva ; these subsequently force their way through to the exter! at the time when the di ve ba further tiated, and is preriien with a mouth opening in the center of oval disk, and an anus opening not far from it on the or * Bulletin Acad. St. Per tad Xv, p. 508, amas 1871. Geology and Natural History. 221 tentacles at their base, forms the so-called circular canal, while ow it, and connecti ing with it, we have a large cavity form- cular ring and of the perivisceral cavity Mec ie that ob- served in Ophiurans, Starfishes, sh bys and Holot the Seay and position of the digestive organs and tentacles with similar organs of Bryozoa. However that ma th conclusively that the larva of Comatula has apparently nothin ommon with other Echinoderm | Wait for his figures on this intricate subject before we can decide if the position he assigns to Crinoids is true to natur A. AG. 12. Chinese Botany.--W e have received, through fe kind atten- = of the author, a curious pamphlet, of ’50 pages, On the Study : Value of Chinese Botanical Works, with Notes on the History of Plants and Geographical Botany from Chinese Sources ; by Physician of the Russian Legation at chow. The preface bears the date of Dec. 17, 1870. In it the author declares that he is “neither a Sinologue nor a Botanist ;” his “knowledge in Chinese as well as in botany being very lim- ited.” ut his enquiries on the spot under advantageous condi- Hons, and the use he has made of “the splendid library 0 of the Russian Ecclesiastical Mission at Pekin ng, where are to be found hot only all Chinese works of importance, ais also most European fruit or the source of introduction is treated of by the aid of Chinese ents, some of th high antiquity. Cotton appears to e of a or of ea rly in ne n, and the question of nativi : | me Cane ie) not pass — China to India, but the reverse, and as farly as the second century B, C., although it was several centuries - later ¢ that a native of India taught the Chinese to make — ‘Sar, or “stone ho oney.” A. 18. Plants killed by Frost : do they die in Freezing or n Thaw ing? That. in certain cases plants die in freezing, is a Ag pyeerehide, notably the milk-white blossoms of Calanthe vera- ia, produce ably th but only upon a chemical reaction, which - 222 . Scventifie Intelligence. takes effect upon the death of the parts. When crushed, or the cells in ne way destroyed as to vitality, they turn blue immediately. N xpo t III. Astronomy. Scintillation of the Stars.—Prof. L. Respraut has published an extended and very interesting paper upon this subject, it being an extract from the proceedings of the Accademia Pontificia de uovi Lincei, at the session held Febr. 14, 1869. It gives the results of a great number of observations made with the spectro- a the like. The first portion of the paper is a reswmé of an earlier one giving the results of a series of observations made previously to May 1868. The conclusions arrived at, although incomplete, were ‘so important, that Prof. Respighi made a more extend series of over 700 observations, which were continued from October, 1868, to February, 1869. The corey eee employed was an equa torial by Merz, with an aperture of 44 inches, and provided with a oe th prism i Hoffmann, with a oplindvioal lens betweeD the prism and ed e 0¢ other, passing from the violet to the red, when the a. — in the east, and in the opposite direction when it was in the characteristic phenomena, as summed up by Prof. Respight are a8 (1.) In normal atmospheric tee the motion of the bands #8 from the red to the violet for stars in the west, and from the violet to the red for stars in the oon 5 a fae) =) et 26 oO ae oO te (@>) nm eS Sas 4s p] mR ; Oa —e Lar | 2O Sf oO Qu ae a ® 4 Ps] = oe “9 'm > 7H 5 2 ~ e | a oOo oe : - rav (3.) The motion of the bands is more piesa and less rapid nea! ra r 4 ) When the instrument is so placed that the spectrum is vertl eal, es motion of the bands is the same as when it is horizontal but th nds are less definite, and nearly transversal, up . altitude of “a | while - eater ee they become sncee imes fits mere movi ing masses either bright or obscure; not rarely resulting in mere changes of poe genes : ie ome bright bands are more rare and less regular than the occur only near the horizon. fake? Se in Be ee ee ee eee ee ae ee FR he Sonn: aL yee aR been ee cee ae ity Astronomy, 223 (6.) Not unfrequently, in the case of stars of low altitude, besides the bands which are regular, there occur other series o ? (7.) Under normal atmospheric conditions, neighboring stars all present the same phenomena. ‘ Under abnormal conditions of the atmosphere, the bands are more feeble and more irregular in form and movement. _(9.) When high winds prevail, the bands are very faint and in- distinct, and sometimes appear as mere changes eigen in ep gui even when the stars are near the horizon, and very 10.) When the images of the stars are very diffuse, the bands are most feeble and indistinct. ; (11.) When the bands are regular in form and movement, there is generally good weather; and it would appear in general that regularity in the phenomena of scintillation is a reliable basis for predicting the continuance of fair weather. 12.) The phenomena of scintillation are most distinctly marked on evenings of greatest atmospheric humidity. Prof. Respighi then discusses the cause of the scintillation as regularity and con- earth, by which the luminous rays are carried through atmos- pheric strata of varying densit 224 Scientific Intelligence. the violet end of the spectrum ; as its refracting power is changed with its density, the violet rays will be deflected. will thus be thrown out of spectrum, causing a dark band, ing to which it is due to interference, and that of Montign . under favorable circumstances, recognized the same phenomena #8 — A. We We, Astronomy. 225 2. On the recent Solar Eclipse; by J. Norman LockyEr.— Mr. Lockyer closes an interesting lecture on the Solar Eclipse, pik told you that M. Madler, in summing up the observations made ; ut : i : fp ; : E ‘ & 2 food E ee S ct ee Lae) = | = 2 GQ fas) i} ™m = i, SS mn Oo 5 chal oO wm = 5 na J 28 Ow 2 E poo It is a great fact that we are sure, as far as observation can make a Sure, that there is a glare around the hydrogen which ne us e cli : layer of the chromosphere gives us a glare around ie < €xactly what was to be expected, and that it 1s true 18 soe sede the observation—a most important observation made In Sp 226 Scientific Intelligence. may be anxious to attempt to elucidate this subject, that probably if they would consider all the conditions of the problem presented bad weather, the observations made by the English and Ameria! our knowle increase of knowledge generally comes a. necessity il no exception to this rule. A few years ago our science was 3 fied with the terms prominences, sierra, and corona, to OPT 2 0 sverra was employed, and aptly so, when it was imagine of t ecg. the constituent materials of these strange things; we know that Seis eee eee [ARES i Ai rs a EN pn SY ae ae es ere ee Dost Me SRR ele ae = ke comes re a MRL BS) ON an ss ise aed sioha Sa Sere Sa a a Astronomy. 227 we are dealing with the exterior portion of the solar atmosphere, and a large knowledge of solar meteorology is already acquire zoe e also know that of the corona is not at the sun at all oa the terms Ava iS and halo have been suggested to designate in the one case the regions where the general 1 nessa a. owing to a reduced pressure and temperature, is no longer subor- dinate to the selective rometiee and in the other, that pert of the corona which is non-solar. N either of these terms Js apt, nor ed tha doubted solar portion the term Chromosphere—the bright-line re- gion—as it was defined in this theatre now two years ago, Rago expresses its characteristic features, and hepencates it from Peeper and the associated portion of the solar neephits ourse would end, if it were not incumbent on me to friends whom we found wherever we went, and who welcomed us as if they had know us from gs childhoo 3. Sasrad Stars of August 10th-11th. sare Sherburne, N. Y., six persons watched for the August meteors on the night ' of the the oats of the month. Between 11" 40™ and 12", forty- eight were seen, In the next hour one hundred and forty-three were counted, and ty the first eighteen minutes of | the nex t hour, wo. ok ; The latitude of the radiant was one and one-half ir less than that of the nebula in Perseus. Its length was at least two degrees, extending gues a point 2° or 3° to the left of that star to one 8° or 1 to the left of Zia. Ne or quite bite 0 of the meteors Were judged to be sondarinn Bis to the above line as a sem $6 ee On a Meteor seen at haa ce N. C., July 19; ‘by C + Es S. Martin.—On Wednesday night, July 19th, between 8 and 9 o'clock, we were very ee startled by a blaze of light, followed 228 Miscellaneous Intelligence. IV. MisceLLANreous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE. 1. Deep Sea Dredging, under the direction of the Coast Sur- vey.—The U. 8. Coast Survey Steamer F. R. Hassler, commander . C. Johnson, U.S. N., now approaching completion at Wilming- ton, Del., will be dispatched as soon as ready to the coast of Calt- re Harvard College as physicist, Assist. L. F, Pourtales of the Coast Survey in charge of deep sea dredgings, Dr. Steindachner as icthy- ologist, Mr. Blake as draughtsman. Some of the officers of the Be muda, Trinidad, Rio Janeiro, Montevideo, the Falkland Islands, the Straits of Magellan, Juan Fernandez, the Gallapagos. : he ship is fitted out with a special view to deep sea soundings and dredgings, and will probably be ready for sea in the latter part of September. ( y (4.) Analogies between the “Terramarres” and the Kjek _kenmeedding. ( Chronology of the first substitution of bronze for iron. ing things, including various portions of the hind limbs of the Mos* saurs, and some more remains of the Pterodactyl found last seaso . Miscellaneous Intelligence. 229 4, British Association.—The meeting for the current year at Edinburgh commenced on the 2nd of August. Sir William Thom- son, the President, oe ered his inaugural address in the Music Hall. The Em mperor te) associate? s tickets, and £910 from ladies’ tickets. The whole income of the year was a little 0 over £5,239, or more than twenty- six thousand dollars 5. American Association.—The meeti ing was Spetel’ at pen apolis on the 16th of August. The address of Prof. T. Ste Hunt, the retiring president, was delivered to a large audience i in n oe this n er. 6. American sbi brags —The press of the American Natural- ist, at Salem, Mass., will issue, according to a recent announce- ment, a number citarndiig abstracts of papers read at the meet- ing of the American Association = ‘Tadinapols and the address of Dr. Hunt, the retiring Preside OBITUARY. Epwarp CLaparzpe.—One of the most industrious and learned of the younger zoologists of Europe, Edward Claparéde, has lately (J une, 1871) died at Sienna, at the age of 39. fis me- = ipal _ Annelids In all his papers, his thorough physiological and anatomical training is pe eee ar his detai ; os a di cussed in all their general bearing. Living in Gen Pupil of Johannes Miiller, he ‘wrote with cea faoility. ‘Gieck dGerman: an admirable draughtsman, his many papers, which in the principal German and Fre nch scientific peri- Seen in his larger memoir on the Annelids of the Gulf of Naples, and his o aie on the Anatomy and more Seb 2 of the bsery t rencrtebrates made on the coast of Normandy. His style was puarkably clear and his information very extensive, 2s is — from his scientific reviews in the Archives de Genéve. tas independent in his scientific opinions, he never allowed him be carried away by weight Be pe and no as 7 ‘an protected by eminent names was owed to pass curren 230 Miscellaneous Bibliography. reviews and criticisms were often sharp, but always just, and never personal. The Academy of Geneva, where he was Profi of Anatomy, will find it difficult to fill the place of one who, in spite of his failing health, showed an enthusiasm for his science rarely equalled. . AG EXANDER Keir Jounsron, the geographer, died at Edin burgh, on the 11th of July, aged sixty-eight. VY. MisceLLANEOUS BIBLIOGRAPHY. straits, in humble homes; both of English lineage, of an ancestry and parentage yeomen on the soil on either continent, without dependence upon inherited means, or patronage, or even good for- tune ret i i unselfish spirit, and both succeeded in doing what has been for the good of a common humanity, “without distinction of class, an without a view to any personal ends of thrift or glory. at that age are wont to trouble themselves with; this brief note dated “ Woburn, August, 1769,” will serve as an example:— * Memoir of Sir Benjamin Thompson, Count Rumford, with notices of his Daugh : ter. hy pacing Etus. Published in connection with an edition of his wor merican Ss, emy by Claxton, Remsen, & Haffelfinger, Philadelphia. 680 pp. 8vo, 1871. The Complete Works of Count Rumford. Vol. 1. Boston: Published by ¢ American Academy of 9 : if Miscellaneous Bibliography. 231 “Sir: Please to give the Nature, Essence, Beginning of Existeuce, and Rise of ind in General, with the whole Theory thereof, so as to be able to answer all Questions relative thereto. Yours, BENJAMIN THOMPSON. Dr. Ellis copies from the old memorandum book of young Thomp- son, which has fortunately been preserved, a number of very curious things; among them, “ An Account of what expence I have been at towards getting an Electrical Machine.” Commencing “1771, July 1, ‘t pd. brass wyer,’ and giving item by item over ‘iron wyer,’ ‘Pewter to make bullets,’ ‘ Old brass,’ ‘1 Book Brass Leaf, ‘Oil bottles,’ ‘Cop- per Filings,’ ‘ Silver Brons,’ ‘ Shellac,’ ‘ Laquer,’ ‘ Varnishing brush,’ aided him in his memorable researches upon heat, in i the wind’s direction. During six months of the year, viz: fom October to March, inclusive, this diurnal change\is small, ut dur- ing the other six months the diurnal change 1s very great, an 232 Miscellaneous Bibliography. assigned seems adequate to account for all the facts at present known in this vicinity. It is much to be desired that a similar series of observations should be made at New Haven, for the pur- pose of developing still more precisely the laws which govern the | diurnal and annual changes in the wind’s direction The Wallingford observations also show the mean force of the wind, together with its diurnal and annual chan nee , but in a manner less satisfactory than they show its direction he same article furnishes the fall of rain and snow at Walling- ford for a period of twelve years, from which it appears that the hits ann a prea en at Wallingford is fifteen per cent w Hav The results of such observations are only important in their bearings upon questions of pure selec: but they are > intimately connected with the interests of every individual, with the sp Matteucci ; on the Pittman of Flight in the ‘Agia ‘King om, with many illustrations, by M. Marey ; ; on the Northern Seas, by M. Babinet; Report of the Trans. Soc. Phys. and Nat. History of Geneva; Coronado’s March in Search of the “Seven Cities of Cibola,” and x rma of their probable location, by Gen. J. H. Simpson, U. 8. A.; on the Social and Religious Condition ‘of the tea eres of Men, by Sir - ohn Lubbock ; on the Principles and y, by 7. . Huxley; "Remarks on the “ Casa Shaitsac a” ucatan, by Dr. A, Schott; Forests and their Climatic jade by M. Bec uerel; on a Meteorite, from S hi cane 3 on Co. Wisconsin, by Dr. Fr, Brenn de an Rem arkable . Abi Volsané ie Colima Cc 8. 4, e der Ate von Dr. Carr Frrepricu Nat MANN. sth. ines ged an ved edition, with 836 figures; ities and its mention of chemical ¢ compositio soyetale are numerous and excellent. AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS, [THIRD SERIES] Art. XXXIL—On the Connecticut River valley Glacier, and other examples of Glacier movement along the valleys of New England; by James D. DANA. propose now to give more regard to the Connecticut valley movement; and, further, to show that Pson; for eastern New York, between New England and Hudson river, from the volume of the New York Geological 234 J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. Reports by Wm. W. Mather, an assiduous laborer in this field of research. We learn, first, from the scratches on the rocks outside of the larger, valleys of New England—that is, over its higher lands— that the general course of the continental glacier covering New England was between S. 20° E. and 8. 50° E. The true course, _ deduced from the sation is to given, and so throughout the following payes. On the high region of western Connecticut (1000 to 1200 feet above the sea), about Warren and Litchfield, the author found the courses of the scratches S. 29° E.; more to the west, east of Kent, on Kent mountain, S. 19° E. ; to the south of Kent, about Newtown , >. 38° EH. Percival observes that over this western part of Connecticut the direction of the transfer of drift was to the S.S.E. (probably meaning S. 20°-25° E.); and he cites as ty, Conn., near r Norfolk, S. 20°-25° E., and Hitchcock, for that on Mt. Tom, the highest elevation near Litchfield, 8. 17°-92° E. West of the State of Connecticut, — it and the Hudson river in Dutchess county, not far t of Arthursville, I ob- tained for the course of scratches (tick were common over the region) S. 24° E. Mather found in Putnam county (south of Dutchess), near Patterson, S. 17° E. to S. 22° E.; in Dutchess county, mostly betwee n 8 15° E. and § 30° E., bits in some places S. 35° E.; and ‘hott oF Dutchess county, in Columbia any to S, 80° B, top of Tom Ball in Alfo na +: Sor north of Mt. Washingto®, =| S. 48° E.; on the east slope of the Taconic ridge near Pittsfi tisfield = | (in same latitude nearly with the Shaker village above alluded 2 to) and at Egremont, on the west slope, about S. 50° E.; 4 7 little south of the latter, on Lenox mountain, near the road from} Richmond to Lenox, 8. 38° E. Scratches observed by the we ter on Mt. Everett: tiended S. 27° E fs Again Dr. H. obtained for the course in middle Granville, 20 | miles west of the Connecticut, S. 38° E.; between Otis 4 and > | Becket, 30 miles west of the Connecticut, and farther north | as i the average directio tion S. 24° E. vite obtained in Royalstom y 20 miles west of the Connecticut, S. 18° E. to S. 88° E- J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. 235 ton, S. 29° E and S. 39° E. (intersecting); in central Ver- mont, in West Hancock, S. 50° E.; in Ripton, Ss. 60° E. In. the northern half of the State, on Camel’s Hump, 4088 feet above the sea, S. 55° E.; Mt. Mansfield, 4430 feet high, S. 55° E.; on Jay’s Peak, north of the latter, S. 50° E.; in Stowe, in the valley east of Mt. Mansfield, S. 35° E. Judging m the map in the Vermont Geological Report, which gives some observations not registered in the text, the average course on the higher lands away from the valleys is about S. 50° EH. ; and the same is not far from the course for the higher lands of New Hampshire, according to Prof. C. H. Hitchcock’s map. The facts show plainly that on the higher lands, both east and west of the Connecticut, and even over the elevated ridges t. 1. First as to the Connecticut river valley ice. a Ange ed Conn, and taking thence a south ' Ih the following table, the courses of glacial scratches along the Valley are given for comparison with the course of the valley. It commences with localities at the south. 1. Commncrr arses. E. of New Haven 3. dernier W. many Jee) De North of Meriden, a: ; J. D. D. New Britain,” 8. 15° W. Beseiyal Wads oh Mather. 'worth’s mountain, Southwesterly . _ 2. Massacuuserts. Maney, 7 m. K. of Conn, R. South nearly operon South “ : Mt. Holyoke, South, S. a few degrees Ww. 236 J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. MASSACHUSETTS. Courses. Observers. Sunderland, E. side of Conn. R. South nearly E. Hitchcock. Deerfield, 8.E. p South “ i oe ontague, E. side of Conn. R. South ‘“ * Greenfield, W. “ 4 South “ Northfield, E. “ fi South ‘ i ys ONT, Vernon, for 2 m. W. side of Conn. R. C. H. Hitehek Guilford, 5 m. W. of Conn. R. 8. 8° E.-S. 13° E C. B. Adams. Bratt] / fe g ip part 1 gC R S and s. 8° CG: B. Ae Dummerston, near Conn. R. : 0, H. ey, S. 5°-12° W. C. B. A. Rockingham, S. to 8. 2° W. 0. H. H. Norwich, 2 m. W. of village, : C. H. orwich, S. 15° E. and §. 39° E. Thetford, W. part of town, peo: Ee. 0..55.E East Fairlee, 8. 6° E. C, H. H. ord, : S. 19°-30° E. 0: i. & . 30° E. C. B. A. Newbury, 8. 12°-30° E. C. B. A. Waterford and Barnet, 8. 5° E. many; also S. 8° E. Now the average course of the whole Connecticut river fee. Le CSR S. 50° E., like the scratches over the higher lands; and ~~ erence between the general coursé more of westing. 5 Connecticut, in which the average course of the va. yoke and Tom, or in part at least, as stated by Hitchcock; and af as these are much the highest points in this s of the V: af (their tops 1126 and 1211 feet above the sea level), they 1" J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. 237 consequently the best evidence of the average direction of the movement in that region. n Vermont, where the course of the valley for the more southern half is S. 12° W., the scratches trend S. to S. 13° E. But north of White River Junction the course of the scratches varies between S. and S. 30° E., yet many scratches at the pe ay near the mouth of the Passumpsic, are 8. 5° E. In the part of the Connecticut valley south of Vermont the scratches conform closely in direction to the trend of the valley, and are the only scratches; while to the north there is a general southerly course in the scratches of the Connecticut river valley, yet at the same time about 15° less of westing than in the aver- age trend of this part of the river. Moreover, in this upper part of the valley there are often, besides the valley set of scratches, another set having the southeasterly course of the great glacier. The width of the region bearing the north-and-south scratches of the valley is generally twenty to thirty miles, but sometimes more. Going east or west of this there is a change more or less gradual to the course of the great glacier, and often also other scratches conforming to its course occur. In Massachusetts, in Heath, 15 miles west of the Connecticut, the course of th scratches given by Hitchcock is south with some westing, and the same on Mt. Pocomptuck in this town, 1888 feet high ; and i Rowe, 20 miles west of the river, the course is S. 2° W. In | southern Vermont, in Halifax, west of Vernon, and 10 miles | West of the Connecticut, the directions given by Hitchcock are mostly S. 12° W.; but also, in West Halifax, 16 miles from the Connecticut river, S. 53° E.; in Marlboro, north of Halifax, S. 20° E. on high land; and also, at another locality, two ' Courses, S. 7° W. and S. 58° E., intersecting. __ 3 The facts show beyond question that the abrading 2 i ve and also of the region on either side of it a little distant from € river, 238 J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. hall, a distance of 40 to 50 miles, is very narrow, and occupies a proper valley, and here the scratches are parallel mostly to the trend of the lake—which trend is nearly north and south, excepting for the southern part, where it is about 16° west of south (S. 16° W.). Along this more southern portion, in Ber- son, the course of the scratches, according to the Vermont Re- | port, is S. 8° E.,S. 12° W.,S. 15° W.; and in Orwell, just north, S. 8° E., S. 12° W. Farther north, in Bridport, the course is S. 20° W.; in Addison, S. 17° W. and S. 18° E.; at Larrabee’s Point, S. 4°-12° E.; at Crown Point in New York, | opposite to Bridport, S. 2° E. on the west side, and S. 27°E. | on the east. In Putnam, N. Y., west of Benson, according to Mather, S. 10°-15° W. The conformity of the course of the 20° W. and S. 15°-20° EB. , Along each of these valleys, the glacial scratches are closely parallel to its main trend, as shown and recognized by the Ver mont geologists. It is strikingly exhibited on a map of the State accompanying the report. On the Lamoille there are the courses 5. 55° E. to S. 85° E.; on the Winooski, the courses S. 60° E., S. 80° E., and even east-and-west in one case. 4. Otter Creek Valley. Otter Creek flows northward along : f ; e Champlain. Its general course is about N. 1 : and S. 15°-20° E. The glacial scratches in the valley have the E., 8. 20° E valley is but a little east of south, and the same is true of thé scratches. We have thus evidence of the existence during some part of the era of ice not only of a glacier movement in New England J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. 239 along the Connecticut river valley, but also of one along the upper Champlain valley, the Lamoille valley, the Winooski valley, the Otter creek valley, and probably the Merrimack valley ; and many of the courses of scratches observed in other parts of Vermont and New Hampshire have divergences from the normal course of the great glacier, which are probably due to the valley-depressions of the surface. Among these smaller valleys are perhaps those of the Queechee, Black, Middlebury and White rivers of Vermont and the Deerfield of Massachu- setts; for the existence of an independent glacier in each of these valleys is recognized as probable by Prof. Hitchcock, on the ground of the conformity between the direction of the scratches and the valley, although the iceberg theory is ado ted by him for all the rest, even the Lamoille, Winooski and Con- hecticut. The writer has elsewhere mentioned the evidence in favor of a Hudson river glacier movement, and of another in ¢ Mohawk valley running easterly through central New York; and further, of one along the St. Lawrence valley, the scratches a following its course according to the observations of Dr. awson. The facts are sufficient to prove that examples of valley movements of glacier ice must have been common over the continent in the Glacial era, or rather the rule for all the larger valleys. Itis hence evident that no observations on glaciers ection, in his view, was that of icebergs. Besides the argu- ment against the iceberg hypothesis elsewhere presented, New “ngland affords another in the fact that if there were, at the time, a submergence to the depth required to overcome the Obstacles to a southeast movement offered by the poatnerly to have worked their way along them to do the scratching, atfords another strong argument against it. Continental clacier still had its continental, or at least its New tng rpscariso a, In Massachusetts and Connecticut the 240 J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. seems to prove that the direction of movement thereby indicated characterized the ice of this part of the valley through the whole of the Glacial period. 6. Again, if a local glacier occupied the valley having a thick- ness of say one, two, or three thousand feet, or such as wou lie below the level of the Green Mountain summits, the glacier would have had through its breadth a nearly southerly course corresponding to the trend of the valley, and in that case south- erly scratches should have existed over the whole surface, evel localities remote from the Connecticut river—where they are not found. In another place I have sypposed that the southeasterly course which occurs in the scratches to the west of the Connec- ticut river might have been a resultant between the tendency to a southerly movement down the valley, and that down the slope into the valley. But this was so only to a very sm egree. For the ice, after passing over the valley, resumed on the east its southeastward scratching. c. In the part of the Connecticut valley north of Massachu- setts, the course of the scratches is not that of the valley, but differs 10° to 15° from it to the eastward. This greater easting shows that the southerly movement of the ice induced by the valley was modified by some force pressing it eastward, and : t the valley ice of the Con- necticut had through its southern half (across Massachusetts and modifications in the valley movement just pointed out, and acier. If the southeasterly westerly scratches were the oldest, but admits that there ® much doubt with to it. This movement of the bottom of a glacier six or eight thou sand feet thick along a different course from its main ™ wherever it lies in + valleys, is an result of m& J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. 241 ing surface in which there are a few large groovings would move, the mass following the general surface, and the portions in the grooves nearly or quite the course of the grooves. The thickness of the ice that followed the course of the valley was at least 2000 feet; for the southerly scratches occur not only on the summits of Mt. Tom and Mt. Holyoke, but also on the top of Mt. Pocomptuck in Heath, 15 miles west of the Connecticut, the low country to the place. As Dr. Packard observes, such facts show that icebergs were not the transporting agents. It is, however, possible that each of these three valleys ar . and this subsidence having been at least 242 J. D. Dana on Glacier movements along valleys. circumstances the ice along the valley would have lost all mo- tion. The same condition of rest would have belonged to the and Win and Maine (94 pp. 4to), published in Volume I of the Memoirs of the Boston Society of Natural History (1867); also by Professor In the foregoing pages the facts from the State of Maine have Tred to. ese are well discussed by Dr. Packard in the memoir just referred to, in which he recognizes and ap- plies the principle discussed in this and the writer's former p* pers on the valley glaciers. He observes that of the eighty * In order to deduce the amount idenc river from the ay of the highest Sireceuee sas “apie eect it is neces i ive fo ait ; ctual ; height of the terrace Po amount of excavation that has taken place since the land V el; ] ss tl n th ount of elevation. Sr ER Abe Biier —e fk. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper, etc. 243 localities of scratches that have been noted in Maine, the scratches in sixty-two have a southeasterly course; that the southeasterly course of the glacial grooves and striz is espe- cially marked in the interior of the State on the high lands and low mountains; but, approaching the coast, the evidence shows & more north-and-south course, and at times, owing to local trends in the depressions, were even deflected so as to flow in a direction a few : ic west of south. The facts in Maine are Just such as are general to New England. he same principle is recognized by Prof. N. S. Shaler in the Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History, for 1870. Other similar facts have been recently pointed out in States to the west of New England. When the applications of the prin- . ciple are studied out over the whole continent, we shall under- : stand better than we now do the sources of the varied move- ments in the great glacier. Art. XXXII.— The Paragenesis and Derivation of Copper and us associates on Lake Superior ; by RAPHAEL PUMPELLY. II. Paragenesis of the Minerals associated with Copper. | No. 1. Capen Vern.—This is apparently a true fissure vein. : It occurs in a compact and very tough melaphyr, which is exceedingly chloritic near the vein. All the joints within a distance of several yards from the vein are covered with a coat- ing ;'5 to $ inch thick, of dark-green and bluish-green chlorite, having a combined fibrous and foliated structure egg bee to the Joint surfaces. The melaphyr is rich in magnetite. heet cop- Per was found in mining, but not in paying quantity. - Laumontite, in thin seams. ; 2. Prehnite, in seams which cut through those of laumontite , also between symmetrically arranged bands of laumontite. 8. Chlorite, ‘as destroyer and replacer of prehnite, and as ng of cavities in the latter. : : ; 4. Analcite, in clear crystals on the prehnite and chlorite. alcite : No. 2. Huron Minz.—1. Laumontite, in thin crystalline . oa on the sides of a cavity; the free ends of the opposed. tystals nearly meet. : 2. Prehinite filling the space between the bands of laumontite. _No. 3.* Copper FaLis Minz.—Fissure vein. 1. (?) Natro- - 2. Laumontite. 8. Analcite. : No. 4.* Saw vern.—1. Apophyllite. 2. Copper. 8. Orthoclase Noy ee from alist given by Hilary Bauerman, Quart. Journ. Geol. Society, be that the glaciers moved down the river valleys, and thus assumed « Fd 244 R. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper No. 5.* Bay Srare Minz.—1. Prehnite 2. Quart. 3, Copper. 4. (?) Laumontite, No. 6.* PHa@yix Minz.—Fissure vein. 1. Lawmontite. 2 Quartz. 38. “ Green- Earth,” No. 7.* Bay Srate Minz.—Fisgure vein, 1. Quartz, 2. » Apophyllite. 3. Calcite, No. 8.* BoHumian MInE.—1l. Anakite. 9, Copper. 3. Orthoclase. No. 9. AMyepALoID Minz.—Fissure vein, 1. Prehnite, 10 its characteristic reniform shape. - uariz, in small erystals on the prehnite. 3. Analcite crystals, covering the quartz. 4. Orthoclase crystals, on the analcite and quartz. No. 10. Bay Srare Minz.—Fissure vein. On the soft brown gangue. 1. Analcite, lining part of a vugg. The erys- tals are } inch in diameter, often white and transparent, but very much fractured. Near the contact with the rock they are often reddened internally and much altered, and then sur mounted by the next member. : 2. Orthoclase, in the usual minute crystals, some of which are scattered over the altered analcites. Bi 0. 11. Amye@paLor Minz.—Fissure vein. 1. Prehnite, iD the characteristic reniform shape, forming the body of the spe cimen ; fresh-looking on the free surface, but on the under bro- en side somewhat porous, with earthy fracture, and’ then rather intimately associated with datolite and a soft green (chloritic ?) mineral. 9. : Scope appear to consist of sheaf-like clusters of minute rhol- ’ ith difficulty. : _ & Datolite, in microscopic crystals on No. 8; others, one line m rs ameter, rosy, with suspended flakes of copper, lie upon the prehnite. No, 12. Amyapatom MINE.—(Fissure vein.) On the gangue—here chloritic—lie, 1. Culcite, imbedded between thé gangue and No. 2. : a 2. Prehnite, forming the greater part of the specimen, a2 having a tolerably fresh luster. 3. Copper, in grains, flakes and threads conforming to the radiating cleavage planes of the prehnite. and its associates on Lake Superior. 245 4. Datolite; compact amorphous, white translucent mass, covering the prehnite with a layer of which # inch thickness, still remains. The copper threads do not penetrate it. o. 138. PEwABIC COPPER-BEARING BED.—This specimen— about 24 inches by 84 by $—is evidently from the interior of a druse, to whose wall it was attached by only a small part of its surface. The body of the specimen is copper, very cavernous, much of it pseudomorphous after laumontite. The copper is very thickly bestrewn with small green crystals of quartza— prisms terminated at both ends,—which are however older than the copper. On the sides and around the edges of the speci- men there are beautifully modified scalenohedrons of calcite. The successions are: . The rock or mineral to which the laumontite was originally attached, and which has disappeared. : aumontite or leonhardite; has also disappeared ; the — were } to 4 inch long, terminated at one end with a hemi- ome, mineral ; laumontite crystals occur frequently enveloped, except the base, in calcite 4. both ends. They occur on parts of nearly every one of the ported only by the copper which is younger. The asiisin do petels couihla minute, brilliant particles of eop- pe oe in describing other specimens. ical forms, with radiating structure, scattered over the quartz 246 h. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper atolite, in exceedingly minute crystals, lying on_ both the chlorite and calcite ; they are less than 51; inck in diame- 2. Laumontite, of which only the form now remains. 3. A mineral, now gone, which seems necessarily to have been present to support the isolated crystals of quartz. — f 4. Quartz, in minute prisms, containing brilliant particles 0 copper. 5. ? Calcite, represented only by impressions in the copper This calcite may, perhaps, be older than some of the foregomg members. see above). 7. Chlorite? the same mineral as the 6th member of No. 18; and occurring in the same manner. — 8. Calcite ; a few small sealenchedrons planted on the copp@ in the impressions of the older calcite = 5th above. No. 14a. Copper after laumontite, from the Pew asic COPPER i [eeiatareg who Fast f a partially filled € upper face of this specimen is of a cavity a cupriferous _ highly iatsred amygdaloid ; es lower, or broken face, is a portion of the altered amygdalot i e general appearance of the specimen at first eee is that of a Sy cavity, nearly filled, except in the middle, with broken erystals of calcite, whose interiors contain many thin plates and threads of native copper. th The amygdaloid is a soft compact brown and rock wi earthy fracture—an altered amygdaloidal melaphyr. Th aS small amygdules near the wall of the larger cavity are of calcite. ey a CEST TI ie Bon et 7 Oe PE ae ee ON a ae and its associates on Lake Superior. 247 The pseudomorphs of copper after laumontite are prisms } to 4 = angles are often sharp, though in some instances the j two faces of a prism presents something of the appearance of a copper cast made in a mould whose two halves fit only imper- fectly together. Sometimes, under a strong glass, the joining is clearly imperfect, and the pseudomorph has the effect of a prism built with four badly-soldered plates of metal. atlas Minute prisms of quartz (colored green by the chlorite-like mineral mentioned in specimens No. 13 and 14) project from the interior of the pseudomorphs, through the copper, to 735 of an inch above the surface. ; j In one place I cut to the depth of ;', of an inch in solid cop- per; but a cross fracture in another prism showed that the copper was, there, a mere superficial film, while the.interior was u porous mass of quartz Se a Oe ee et ee tn eae EEE. 2 a en 8 ee @ a avo = Q =) 5 =} BD ® ov = B eu rt Sy & ® ri often perforated with holes, but it often shows flakes of copper Nising on edge to a height of yz of an inch above the face. marked signs of change to datolite. The transparent crys pearly lustre on the cleavage Planes, and a little farther away this mba a Pai ss insensibly into a lustreless white mass composed of an 5a tion of exceedingly minute crystals, which exhibit the d lite form under the microscope, and fuse easily with the characteris- tic green flame before the blowpipe. The same change Had Visible, in places, on the fees 5 of calcite enveloping t Pseudomorphs after laumontite. 7 The relative ages here appear to be, 1, The amygda F% though probably not in its present condition ; 2, Laumon rg 3, Quartz; 4, Copper, chlorite-like mineral; 5, Calcite; 6, Datolu | 248 Re. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper th hollow shells, scarcely as thick as paper; the angles are = and the faces tolerably smooth, but often pierced with ho o The hemidome of one of these is studded with the ends 0 this specimen also, some of the pseudomorphs <—_ bedded in scalenohedrons of calcite, which sparkle with bril No. 16. “Eprmors Lope,” Sr. Mary’s.—In a onvity ae quartz-epidote rock, which forms a frequent feature of t pe lie: 1, Prehnite crystals, disposed as a reniform lining 0 cavity—2, Quartz, in transparent prisms on the prehni sae Analcite, crystal $ inch in imatie slightly opaque and so what cavernous internally, planted on the quartz. ol 4. Orthoclase crystals planted on the prehnite, quartz analcite. ae The prehnite is ially altered, containing cavities re filled with a soft green mineral, chlorite or green-earth. 1 is also a greenish-yellow chlorite-like mineral, which incrusts and has eaten away the surface of the quartz va 0p _No. 17. Auyepatorp on THE KEARSARGE LocaTION. the rock lie: 1, Prehnite—2, Quartz on the prehnite. and its associates on Lake Superior. 249 0. 19. ALBANY aND Boston AMyGpALomw.—The rock of this bed is a wholly irregular mixture of hard light-green amygdaloid and soft brown amygdaloid, in which the vesicular form is frequently lost from the fact that the cavities contain- ing secondary minerals have extended and become merged together, forming a confused patch and vein structure: 1, Prehnite, amorphous and altered to a slightly cavernous appear- ance on the surface—2, Quartz in pri , Orthoclase in minute crystals chiefly on the altered prehnite, with which its formation is probably connected, and also on the quartz, 0, 20. Same BED.—On the amygdaloid, which contains quartz amygdules, lie: 1, Prehnite penetrated with strings and films of copper—2, riz in prisms; chlorite-like mineral in hemispherical forms, with radiating structure—Orthoclase in, minute crystals; all these lie separately on the prehnite—3d, Calcite covering all the above mentioned members. No. 21. Same Bep.—1, rtz, in prisms—2, Chlorite-like mineral in hemispherical forms, with radiating structure; Wherever it is in contact with the quartz it has pitted it and faten into it—8d, Calcite, : 0. 22. SAME BED.—On the amygdaloid lie:—1, Prehnite crystals in reniform masses—2, eit in prisms on the Prehnite crystals—8, Orthoclase; Calcite; the orthoclase is in Minute crystals on the prehnite and quartz. __ : No. 23. Samu Bep.—The amygdaloid on which the following Succession occurs consists of quartz and chlorite, and is wholly altered—so much so that the quartz which now composes a large a of it is evidently of- the cates age as ae which fol- Ows the prehni rehnite, in © e reniform masses prehnite—1, Prehniite, eager 28 ior tral a. par crystals occur in the cavity thus formed as well as on '€ outer surface of the analcite. 0. 26. Same sep.—l, Prehnite—2, Quarte—3, Copper, M threads often moulded to the quartz—4, Orthoclase in Minute crystals planted on the prehnite, quartz and copper. Am. Jour. Sct —Tarrp Serres, Vor. I, No. 10.—Ocr., 1871. 17 250 ft. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper 27. SAME BED.—1, Prehnite, penetrated with copper thirenddés-3, Quartz in prisms—8, Chlorite-like mineral men- tioned in Nos. 20 and 21; here also it has eaten into the faces of the quartz crystals—4, Analcite crystals, much fractured and eaten ste and sometimes quite hollow. N AME BED.—1l, Prehnite in places cavernous—2, Quartz in prisms in the cavities in me altered prehnite—d, Orthoclase crystals pienier on the quart No. 29. Same —1, Prehn ite9, Copper traversing the prehnite in ‘the en of threads, ete. , ending in crystals — wart themselves to the crystalline surface of the prehnite. AME BED.—1, Prehnite—2, Analcite—8, Copper, in flakes 0 on the analeite—4, Orthoclase ; oes like muneral. No. 31. Same BED. ad, Quartz in prisms—2, Orthoclase age pees on the quartz, No, 82. SAME BED.—1, Prehnite—2, Copper in crystals whose a surfaces are moulded : the crystalline surface of ak Caper ee o. 83. Huron Minze.—On the amygdaloid containing smaller solsertules of delessite and quartz, lie :—1, Laumontite, a crystalline layer with projecting crystals—2, Calcite orysial- ized upon and wholly enveloping the laumontite crystals. No. ESTERNMOST ADIT ON THE “SourustpE.” 1. Anal- cue, in opaque.crystals 4to4inch in diameter. 2. Orthoc crystals planted on the analcite. (The rock containing this is chocolate-brown, and filled with small amygdules of Ist Lav montite, 2d L Calcite). No. 85. “Ragcep Awyepator.” Sr. Mary’s. This is @ soft brown amygdaloid with brown streak, in which the cavities have assumed the most irregular sha ‘and merge into eac ober in @ manner which gives to the rock a highly brecciated ap nee. The cavities are generally partially open at their wider points ; and the minerals occupying them are chit} the following, often sonneee by a fs clay. On the rock lie, 1. Analcite. 2. Orthoclase crystals on the analcite. 8. Cal cite over both the foregoing members. On the No. 36. Same ie rock lies Calcite. Orthoclase — on the saleiee 7. SAME BED. On the ou are scattered, 1. Analcile No. 38. SAME BED. 1. pam in large crystals; much altered. 2. Orthoclase crystals planted apn thes outer surface of, and in cavities in, the analcite. 0. 39. PEwaBic CoppEr- ee BED. On the amyete loidal rock sao re 1, Calcite; copper. 2. Datolite in a granular mass incrusting the calcite crystals, a : . ei ; ; ; and its associates on Lake Superior. 251 No. 40. SAME BED? 1. Calcite in scalenohedrons, 2. Dato- and perceptibly eaten into. The calcite crystals rest upon a granular mass of the same variety of datolite, which is per- haps the result of a displacement of calcite. No. 41. “ EvERGREEN Buurr.” 1. Quaré prism. 2. Ortho- “oe in minute crystals. 38. Calcite in simple and twin scaleno- edrons, _No. 44. Locaniry Unknown. 1. Prehnite in its characteris- tic form. 2. Quartz in prisms on the prehnite. 3. Analcite surface highly crystallized. The crystals are transparent ; 1 ppe ; to be confined to it. 2. Calcite, four small slightly yellowish semi-transparent rhombohedrons, modified with steeper scaleno- hedron faces, lie upon the datolite. 3. Orthoclase, yellowish crystals, ,!, of an inch long, are scatte: dae specimen, some lying upon the calcite and some upon the I green to a slight — from the outer oo of po amygdule, Without any line o i hnite often - nterior the pre: eg porade st Prehnite is characterized by a radiating structure, starting from 252 R. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper a single center. It is along these planes of radiation that the change begins. Every possible gradation is observable. The more generally it is an amygdule of compact chlorite, ex- hibiting in its fracture the same radiating structure as the prehnite. No. 48. SHELDEN AND CoLumBIAN Location. 1. Prehnite which is the general filling of the cavities in the upper part of the amygdaloid of this locality. 2. Feldspar, red. It is quite an exceptional occurrence in this neighborhood, and it is in- timately associated with the prehnite in a manner that makes it seem to be pseudomorphous after it. Crystals of epidote and of quartz occur on this feldspar, but the specimen gives no insight into their relation, as regard age, either to each other or to the feldspar as a secondary product. . South Pewasic Mine. In this bed a frequent form of the rock is a compact amygdaloid, of which 50 or 60 per cent of the volume consists of amygdules from the size of a i The trix in a specimen @. contain, 1. Quartz, clear and filling the cavity. 2. copper. The chlorite (apparently delessite) appears to displace the quartz; in some amygdules it me : of the quartz, giving to this a green color; in others nothing remains but a cavernous mass 0 i well charged with copper; indeed the copper occurs here only with this chlorite. 6 a B et o 4 E. = ot =e o Bs °$ J oe in 3 3 = oe 7 3 Ee fas] preend a to Ay ee thick, much altered and in places changed t0 and its associates on Lake Supertor. 253 No. 52. SHELDEN AND CoLUMBIAN MINE. In cavities in a brown and green amygdaloid lie, 1. Quartz in well shaped prisms. 2. Calcite; Quartz. This second quartz is in small and very much distorted crystals, which are often partially im- bedded in the calcite, and are also often planted on the older quartz, from which they can be easily removed without fracture. o. 58. Huron Mine. 1. Quartz with more or less crys- talline structure. 2. Copper moulded on the quartz and filling cracks and interstices in it. No. AGGED AMyGpALorD. Sr. Mary’s. In the rock (see No. 85), some of the smaller cavities contain, 1. Orthoclase as a thin crystalline lining. 2. Calcite filling the interior. 3. os agg mineral penetrating and apparently replacing the cite, In a larger cavity occur the following : Se No. 55. 1. Analcite crystals inch to 2 inches in diameter, much reddened. 2. Orthoclase; small crystals on the analcite. . Clay? a soft white mineral, apparently the result of con- tinued decomposition of the analcite under conditions unfavor- able for the formation of new silicates as feldspar. No. 56. “ Anctent Prr” BED. Dovenass Location. 1. Epidote forming a crystalline lining of a cavity. 2. Quariz filling the interior. o. 57. SuLPHURET (Fissure vein) HURON sien The < = o do i =) © = & . Qu & S : a 2) uae) e S — ° = < 3 each side. 2. Quartz in two symmetrical comby bands on the dolomite and in thin seams in the dolomite connected b cross- Seams with the quartz-comb. 3. Chalcocite, black—bluish-black with distinct cleavage. Tt resembles the pseudomorphous chalco- cite of the Lac la Belle mine. Bornite occurs sprinkled th ough the chaleocite in minute specks; in places it predominates, — ese sulphurets form the central member, and bunches of them are often surrounded by the older members, giving the Note.—It is in another portion of this vein that the arseniurets, whitneyite and domeykite are found. have attempted to bring the foregoing observations into serve for a check upon the imper Copper anp Caxtcire.—In many of the ms Calcite crystals are found enclosing copper, ub instances in which is difficult and * a Capen Vein, <...../ Weumontite| ....- Prehnite | .-.-- Die) ooo Chlorite | Analcite | Calcite] .... | ---. | ----.- i, Huron Mine,-........| 2)/Laumontite} -.... Prehnite | -~=~..- “ae ae yay gee wneees fs Lt fe aes [eee ee Copper Falls Mine,*- a > Racal ae PY Welpaoy) he eee eee CP emesee fo Sonera Analcite oh ae ele an + by ou eee os oe ke | eee eee cee Paes a Ss ie ipa rate Apophyllite} --- | Copper | -.-. | Orthoclase| ___-_ : Bay State ot ie piee | ekeee Prehnite | Q | eee SOODOT bin cinae ol oxuneee --- cane BP ae ere: tee ceed Phoenix Mine,*.....-.- Bipomontite( 22000 22... uartz Sf ease Green-earth.| ... .. : --- ae SMM ay cee Rens. Bay State Mine,* ._..- ees bade vs uekeo Quartz sie ian oe eames Apophyllite! Calcite a eee ha tee cae pee Rene ee eB | eee hh cee ee PPR ewe. baad wae Analcite -+- -| Copper’ | = ... oclase| .... ee as a east th Scessee | uke s Prehnite | Quartz Wer Geet or Wy oe ee. Analcite ee fae ---- |Orthoclase} ... pe I coca | ewes | conten, Ee Buea eee | oaewwe: | Seal Analcite He cae Bebe Orthoclase pee resent: eo | Ra or dee nite,Cu) ..... Hee eV aca eee tL ir ees ae ---- | Datolite; .-.--. ie L === [18 ini Calcite |Prehnite,Cuj ---.. ities ea wenene~ || eeneee aes Gt GOES oa) aoe ey Pewabic Lodo, ....-.- 18 Laumontite} ..... | ...... Quartz |... Copper | Prinses! Sea Give cot tA Diatoltle oc. 2. ae ie oe | ene nS mnmontite) 25. | ole Quartz | Calcite | Copper | a sat phd Mee Calcite| _.._ ---- | Orthoclase| ...-. Alb. and phan Ragged elec ea he cece Prehnite {| --.-. Bey oe ht Fe eae Belle a sen ee «<<. | Orthoclase | .... “Hpidote eTeaa” "St. Ma- i hlorite or ; , ee 0 ae Prehnite | Quartz gD Ue pea gt { senor Analcite i Beat ae eg a eae Amygd. Kearsarge, .../17) -.-.-. | .---. Prehnite | Quartz ie i tecasam, fo me a ee x eh decd we depe le Huron Mine.......... Rees Fe OE Guess) Po eek PEM Peckeue Sb those t. Analcite | Calcite}. _... pect ee pee a” & Bost. er -- ed Wanese --- - | Prehnite | Quartz eines ee cur Bs sam oe een Ot thes om ace. ----. |Orthoclase| --. ge ee eee Prehnite | Quartz BS NE foe WIC | ance ees abe cot. ---- | Orthoclase| Calcite sh Pe AaIMN wwewae | jcnoeer’ fr bhasse Quartz pee a ow | Pcgecgone § bee oes ae aoa ieaar peo euiees Calcite Ns " & eeiael Sonu wecue Prehnite | Quart: gee PO et wae AT Sec ee ep ih ase, ace cee he 4 > POrthoeclage po 0% 4 Oe eae Avie 4 ee Peehaite sonar Onl occ ie oe fo Se oe. nas ten 4 se, Se wx . an 24 Geena 28 Histological Preparations by Sunlight. 261 ag obj diminished ; but I have convinced myself by trial that puree 8 good pictures can be produced without it, even with very hig powers, a circumstance of considerable interest where motives — with regard to the selection of objectives suitable for otographic work of this kind. The power of the objective to e used will depend of course upon the details it is desired to 1-8th objective may be conveniently employed to obtain r si dred diameters, & 1-16th Suitable amplifiers or even eye-pleces May be in either with great increase of the wer, and often rtain of definition. Still such amplifications may sometimes be ad- Vantageously resorted to, especially in the case of objects which ower. : . +he objective, selected deus of course be unexceptional in , 8 jally corrected. for aa aphy. It has been erroneously stated by Moitessier,* : in . 3 es . > . * S ee eet Appliquée aux Recherches Mi phiques, par A. Moites- 1866, p. 180 et seq. 262 J. J. Woodward on Photographing dispensed with. This proposition, which has been adopted by many other writers, appears plausible, but a little consideration will show it to be quite erroneous. Every one knows that a good objective must be free from spherical, as well as from chromatic, aberration. Of course the use of monochromatic light disposes of the chromatic trouble. Not so with the spherical aberration. Now this aberration, like consideration, t ' he sees is left to a happy chance in the selection of his objectives. For even those makers who profess to prepare objectives with the problem. If they would’ test their objectives, while , ight, we should have better results; for photography. "It is only necessary to test their performance when illuminated by sunlight, which has passed through an ammonio-sulphate cell. Now it fortunately happens that the mto consideration the principles involved in the foregoiig remarks, ~ condensing lens above described, This lens, it will tated us. ne convergent pencils proceeding from the first let ia and a burning Bi F ’ ‘ Histological Preparations by Sunlight. 263 focus of heat, as well as of light, is produced, which is damag- ing to the preparation as well as to the balsam cement of the objectives used. If, however, the rays from the first lens are permitted to come to a focus and to begin to diverge before striking the second, this latter can readily be adjusted so as to bring the illuminating rays to a handsome focus, while the heat tays, after passing the second lens, become parallel or even light ; an 3 consequently, the rays of heat, after passing rough this lens, will become parallel, abile the rays a light converge 4 a second focus. I have approximately measured the heatin Power of the thermal rays of the second cone when rende in the second focus, did not reach 90° Fah., while ie Same time the heat at the focus of the first cone was sufficien d ”? * The British Journal of Photography, Dee. 16, 1870, p. 590. 264 J. J. Woodward on Photographing time may ily be given with a piece of velvet, or a card- board screen held in the hand. For shorter exposures some mechanical contrivance is indispensable. That alluded to above | seems to answer every purpose, and is arranged as follows: A ) wooden screen is fixed between the microscope and the sensitive | plate, as close as convenient to the microscope. To prevent | side lights reaching the plate, the screen is connected with the window shutter by velvet curtains, which can be turned aside to manipulate the instrument, and be let down at the prope’ = | time. circular hole, three inches in diameter, is made in the screen opposite the tube of the microscope for the transmissioR | of the image. In front of this a light yee slides loosely UP and down, held in place by a cleat of wood on each side, 1 design being to permit the x area to fall edge foremost with 8 =} little friction as possible. The shutter may be made of thit metal, of wood, or even of card-board. i : Vv of slit, from a fraction of an inch ten inches, can be ein ae art of the shutter below _ = rture through which the im e passes when fixed in place before the Sst is made. 02 Histological Preparations by Sunlight. 265 4 | venient velocity is attained for a magnifying power of two to five hundred diameters, arranged as I have described. For still “= shorter exposures, necessitated by lower powers or other cireum- | _ Stanees, it would be best to start the shutter from a greater } height, which would give greater velocity to the passage of the | Slit, and any available fraction of time desired might thus con- | Yeniently be obtained. The whole arrangement is inexpensive, d may be manufactured in a few hours by any one, out of a deal board, a few pieces of card-board and a yard or two of Cotton velvet. Seo course the fractional measures of time obtained in this way are not absolute, since the friction must be variable, unless the apparatus were made in a more costly manner of meta But I have found that the variations thus introduced are so small that they may be disregarded, and that while the start- Ing point remains the same, the width of the slit in the falling ‘Shutter indicates fractions of time which may confidently Counted upon to give proportional photographic results. € next subject for remark is the arrangement employed When the heliostat is dispensed with. or this purpose the contrivance usually employed for the A circular dise of brass, : is turned by a small toothed wheel, to which a suitable : button or milled head is attached. Through the center of the carrying the mirror or right-angled prism, to w. Melnation can be given iy a rod passing through the ese by the side of the tube. The whole arrangement is vaio : _ © motions of the mirror or prism can Jour. Scr.—Turrp Serres, Vou. I, No. 10.—Oct., 1871. 138 266 J. J. Woodward on Photographing, ete. pencil obtained from the prism gives b d by the double pencil reflected from escri the management of the plate-holder, the apparatus for focussing, and other accesso arrangements, need only say that I employ for the solar light the same simple Reiss and Stiibel—Barometrical Measurements in Eeuador. 267 work at night or in unfavorable weather. j € memoir is accompained by photographic plates of tissues, magnified 400 to 500 diameters, as examples of the results obtained in the manner described, and concludes with descrip- tion of the preparations. | Sa ART. XXXV.—Barometrical Measurements in Ecuador M4 by W. Reiss and A. Srijpen. Translated from the Spanish by Professor OrTon, Vassar College. \to, as determined by the able North German Expedition in 1870-1. Schmidt’s a of the vara, given below, differs from the standard in the U. S. Office of Weights and Measures by ~ ‘0015 meter. I have reduced the meters to English feet. R. and S., 15,704 ;—of the crater by Wisse and Moreno, 13,600 ; Orton, 18,800; R. and S., 18,175.] | Norr.—The altitudes are calculated in meters above the level of the sea, one meter equaling 1°1963 Spanish vara. ing gnats Part of the observations were made with the barometer; but trig 268 Reiss and Stiibel—_Barometrical Measurements in Eeuador. onometrical measurements were taken of some notable points.’ The letters B and T indicate these different means, and the numbers show the times of observations. As this work is provisional, the authors reserve the privilege of making corrections in the future, ca however, will be insignificant. emg? Meters Tulcan, plaza (ieetveats frontier), 2,97 7 Chota bridge, 1,532 Isambal, foot of Yanaurcu, 4,041 Top of Yanaureu 4,556 El Fuyafuya, north summit, 4,294 uth 4,279 Caricocha, 8,711 Tabacundo, 2,889 as, plaza, 1,639 Hatuntaqui, plaza, 2,407 Cotacachi, orice 2,453 alo, plaza, 2,581 Hacienda of Cuicocha 2,747 Border of the Lake Cuicocha, 3,118 Top of Cotacachi, S.E. 4,960 N, wee 4,966 ts “ N. 4,829 Snow-limit on Cotacachi, Ss W. side, 4,620 E. 4,694 San Pablo, — 2,726 lak 2,697 Top of 7 4,012 La Esperanza, plaza, 2,344 Top of Curilche, 3,882 Lake within the crater, 3,801 Top of Cerro C ; 3,338 Lake in the crater. 3,317 Yaguarcocha, 2,253 arra, plaza, 2,225 Imanta, “ 2,422 Peguche, Seow 2,556 aillabam a, pueblo, : 2,106 Alchipichi “ar ridge, 1,719 Pomasqui, plaza, 2,507 es _ * 9,802 t ‘se 1,830 Colicals’ pueblo, 2,792 3,133 Mindo, hacienda of San Diep 1,264 = hina ofa, N.E. summi pee Function of of Rio Blanco with Rio del Volcan, 2 ors ‘Hacienda of San José in in Lloa, Top of Rucu-Pichincha, : ee Feet. 15,540 l,m ee ee ee bo or) =) Address of Sir William Thompson. Altitude. Place. Meters. Feet. Method. Cundurguachana, 4,090 13,254 1B. Top of Guagua-Pichincha, 4,787 15,704 fv Bottom of the crater, 4,016 13,175 1B. Top of the mound in the crater, 4,087 13,408 1 “ ‘Top of Panecillo, 3,050 10,006 2 * _ Machangara, hacienda de las Monjas, 2.648. 8687. 1% ___ Bridge of Guépulo 2,545 8349 1 “ Church . 2,690 8,825 2 Tumbaco, plaza, 2,390 7,841 38 * embo, “ 2,484 8,149 2 * Hacienda of Guachala, 9,601 9,189 4 * ayambe, pueblo, ; 2,852 9,357 Ba Top of Atacazo, edge of crater, 4,539 14,891 2 “ Arenal within crater, 4,949: 18,916- 2 Tambillo, tambo, 2,802 9,193 7“ Aloac, pueblo, t PO8e 7 SSO: 28S Top of Corazon, 4,787 15,704. 2 * Machachi, tambo, 2.935 9699-4." sallocantana peak on Rumifiagui, 3,839 12,594 2 * » Bottom of the Caldera, 9,756 49,819. 1.4 eak between Capacocha and Sachacocha, 4,192 13,752 1 “ Hacienda of Pedregal, $601 11 Aat. 1 Top of P: 0a, 4,255 13,959 2 “ alé, 3,161 10,870. 2 * Alangasf, plaza, 26st RAST 1 Hacienda of Sir. Jijon, Chillo, 2,518 8,261 1“ Arr. XXXVI—Inaugural Address before the British Association at Edinburgh, August 2d ; by Sir Wi~LtaAM THoMPson, President of the Association. Kew Observatory. os : a Sse ne of the most valuable services to science Which the British Association has performed has been the es- ry. e Royal Meteorol eculiar is c ually t¢ : : ial phenomenon of .“") 60 repair to it when any celestial phen : still pera duced 270 Address of Sir William Thompson. maintenance of such an observatory; but, happily for science, the zeal of individual fellows of the Royal Society and members of the British Association gave the initial impulse, supplied the necessary initial funds, and recommended their new Institution successfully to the fostering care of the British Association. Physical Observatories and Laboratories. The success of the Kew Magnetic and Meteorological Obse™ vatory affords an example of the ‘great gain to be earned 10? tories for experimental research, to be co : ire whose duties should be, not teaching, but experi nen hether we look to the honor of England, as a nation whic ought always to be the foremost in promoting physical sciene® _ OF to those vast economical advanta — : such establishments, ‘Wwe cannot but feel that experimental ci Address of Sir William Thompson. 271 search ought to be made with us an object of national concern, and not left, as hitherto. exclusively to the private enterprise of self-sacrificing amateurs, and the necessarily inconsecutive action of our present governmental departments and of casual committees. The Council of the Royal Society of Edinburgh has moved for this object in a memorial presented by them to the Royal Commision on Scientific Education and the Advance- ment of Science. The Continent of Europe is referred to for an example, to be followed with advantage in this country, in the following words :— _ “On the continent there exist certain institutions, fitted with instruments, apparatus, chemicals, and other appliances, which c sophical instruments and apparatus, access to which is most lib- erally granted by the directors of those schools, or the teachers of the respective disciplines, to any person qualified, for scven- hific experiments. In consequence, though there exist no particu- lar institutions like those mentioned in the memorial, there will scarcely be found a town exceeding 5,000 inhabitants but of fers the possibility of scientific explorations at no other cost than reimbursement of the expense for the materials wasted m the << naaapgad rther, with reference to a remar t effect that in respect to the promotion of science, the British gations, that they are to be relied upon for the advancement of a) Versities is at the same time profitabl The ph sical laboratories which have grown up in. the Uni- Versities of Glascow and Edinburgh, and in Owens College, . re h; but it, being absolutely destitute of means, material or personal, for advancing science 272 Address of Sir William Thompson. except at the expense of volunteers, or securing that volunteers shall be found to continue even such little work as at present is carried on. chester) requires two professors of Natural Philosophy—one who shall be responsible for the teaching, the other for the eirancemens of science by experiment. xf of Cambridge with a splesiiit laboratory, to be constructed l under the eye of Prof. e tings | the British Association], I hope, will be the means of impressing on the Government the conviction, that the love of scientific and they remain permanently useful as landmarks in the history of science. Some of them have led to vast practical results; others of a more abstract character are valuable to this day ® trate the two kinds the . . Address of Sir William Thompson. 273 rendered superfluous for any one who desires only the essence of these investigations, with no more of detail than is necessary for a thorough and practical understanding of the subject. Terrestrial Magnetism. : Sabine’s Report of 18388 concludes with the following sen- ag and honorable undertaking.” An immediate result of this re- port was that the enterprise which it proposed was recommended 0 the Government by a joint Committee of the British Asso- Clation and the Royal Society with such success, that Capt. ss was sent in command of the Erebus and Terror to ting and simplifying the correction of the marl rob] ree ‘a become one of vital impo 274 Address of Sir William Thompson. afforded to them for codperating in their work on this subject Lloyd, Phillips, Fox, Ross, and abine made magnetic observa tions all over Great Britain ; and their results, collected by Sa ine, gave for the first time an accurate and complete survey of terrestrial magnetism over the area of this island. [am u formed, by Prof. Phillips, that, in the beginning of the Assoc ation, Herschel, though a “sincere well-wisher,” felt doubt to the general utility and probable success of the plan and pur ose proposed; but his zeal for terrestrial magnetism brought im from being merely a sincere well-wisher to join actively and cordially in the work of the Association. ‘In 1838 he gan to give effectual aid in the great question of magnetical tables of the values of the magnetic elements deduced from observation are Ps a at once to make use of them,” and that he intends to take into account terms of at least one order ban fe vig included by Gauss. The form in which ot! Te. - quisite data are to be presented to him is a magnetic ¢ ni the whole surface of the globe. Materials deigaiciat © trav- Fe eh Tae NS eS oS a ee ee ee = E ee ae ae ee se he = < Address of Sir William Thompson. 275 elers of all nations, from our home magnetic observatories, from the magnetic observatories of St. Helena, the Cape, Van Diemen’s Land, and Toronto, and from the scientific observa- tories of other countries, have been brought together by Sabine. Silently, day after day, night after night, for a quarter of a cen- tury, he has toiled with one constant assistant always by his side, to reduce these observations and prepare for the great work. At this moment, while we are here assembled, I believe that, in their quiet summer retirement in Wales, Sir Edward and Lady Sabine are at work on the magnetic chart of the world. If two years of life and health are granted to them, science will be provided with a key which must powerfully conduce to the ultimate opening up of one of the most refractory enigmas of cosmical physics, the cause of terrestrial magnetism 0 give any sketch, however slight, of scientific investigation on the present occasion. A detailed account of work done and knowledge gained in science Britain ought to have every year. h notable for Something new. But nearly all the grandest discoveries : science have been but the rewards of accurate measurement an 276 Address of Sir William Thompson. discovery was made. It was by a long train of mathematical calculation, founded on results accumulated through prodigious toil of practical astronomers, that Newton first demonstrated the the Earth. Then first, we may suppose, came to him the idea of the universality of gravitation; but when he attempted to present at a meeting of the Royal Bacistys he heard Ra i icard, whic Earth's radius. This was what N ewton required. He went a friend: then (and not when, sitting in a garden, he saw aa apple fall) did he ascertain that gravitation keeps the Moon ber orbit. : _ Faraday’s discovery of specific inductive capacity, which maugurated the new philosophy tending to discard action at a distance, was the result of minute and accurate measurement of electric forces. : Joule’s discovery of thermo-dynamic law through the regions Andrew’s discovery of the continuity between the gaseous and liquid states was worked out by many years of laborious and minute measurement of phenomena scarcely sensible to the naked eye. element. He showed the relation beween electrostatic and ele _ Womagnetic units for absolute measurement, and made the Address of Sir William Thompson. 277 ; beautiful discovery that resistance, in absolute electromagnetic sé c conferred by its application to promote the social and material those who perilled and lost their money m € original Atlantic telegraph were impelled and 0 by a sense of the deur of their enterprise, and of the world- Wide benefits which must flow from its success; they were, at loftiest regions and subtlest ether of natural philosophy. Long may the British Association continue a bond of union, and a 278 Address of Sir William Thompson. 5 medium for the interchange of good offices between science and the world ! Kinetic Theory of Gases—Atoms. refractory enigma. The deeply penetrating genius of Maxwell brought in viscosity and thermal conductivity, and thus completed the Pes such comprehensive molecular theory had ever been evel imagined before the nineteenth century. Definite and com lete In its area as it is, it is but a well-drawn part of a great : in which all physical science will be represented with evély a tek of matter shown in dynamical relation to the whole. is based on the assumption of atoms. But there can be 10 Lt manent satisfaction to the mind in explaining heat, light, ¢ tism in gases, liquids, ferent states of matter to one another by statistics of great nu? bers of atoms, when the properties of the atom itself are simpl : assumed. hen the theory, of which we have the first inst® ment in Clausius and Maxwell’s work, is complete, we are but brought face to face with a superlatively thas question,-—what is the inner mechanism of the atom ? at In the answer to this Beets we must find the explanatio? not only of the atomic icity, by which the atom is 4 chrom ometric vibrator, according to Stoke's discovery, but of chemical affinity and of the differences of quality of different chemical _ Address of Sir William Thompson. 279 elements, at present a mere mystery in science, Helmholtz’s exquisite theory of vortex-motion in an incompressible friction- less liquid has been suggested as a finger-post, pointing a way which may possibly lead to a full understanding of the modern doctrine regarding atoms. > t that article one other short passage, finely describing the pres- ent aspect of atomic theory :—“The existence of the chemical atom, already quite a complex little world, seems very probable ; and the description of the Lucretian atom is wonderfully ap- Plicable to it. We are not wholly without hope that the real Weight of each such atom may some day be known—not merely the relative weight of the several atoms, but the number ina siven volume of any material; that the form and motion of the parts of each atom and the distances by which they are sepa- rated may be calculated; that the motions by which they pro- duce heat, electricity, and light may be illustrated by exact seometrical diagrams; and that the fundamental properties of the intermediate and ‘possibly constituent medium may be ar- rived at. Then the motion of planets and music of the spheres will be neglected for a while in admiration of the maze in which € tiny atoms run.” = liven before this was written some of the anticipated results had been partially attained. Loschmidt in Vienna had shown, and not much later Stoney independently in England showed, how to deduce from Clausius and Maxwell's kinetic theory of ity & superior limit to the Stes of — ina ake geen urable space. as unfortunately quite unaware | L Loschmidt and Stoney had done when I made | a similar esti- mate on the same foundation, and communicated it to Nature, M an article ‘On the size of atoms.’ But questions of person Priority, however interesting they may be to the gm ee _ +eerned, sink into insignificance in the prospect of any a 0. | Geeper insight into the secrets of nature. The triple coincidence _ of independent reasoning in this case is valuable as confirmation — of a conclusion violently contravening ideas and opinions Which had been almost universally held regarding the — _ Sons of the molecular structure of matter. Chemists and ot oe _‘aturalists had been in the habit of evading questions as to the 280 Address of Sir William Thompson. hardness or indivisibility of atoms by virtually assuming them to be infinitely small and infinitely numerous. We must now no longer look upon the atom, with Boscovich, as a mystic point endowed with inertia and the attribute of attracting or repelling with those who have attributed to the atom occupation of space with infinite hardness and strength (incredible in any finite body); but we must realize it as a piece of matter of meas- urable dimensions, with shape, motion, and laws of action, in- telligible subjects of scientific investigation. Spectrum Analysis. The prismatic analysis of light discovered by Newton was estimated by himself as being “the oddest, if not the most con- siderable, detection which had hitherto been made in the opera- 7 who first showed how through it the old “ blowpipe test,” fro olors W they give to flames, can be prosecuted with an accuracy and @ minati the color the summer of 1852. The observational and experimental as obs a by Fraunhofer of a det Couble dark line D of the solar spectrum and a double brig line which he o sae tie gee lige artificial a Address of Sir William Thompson. 281 (2) A very rigorous experimental test of this coincidence by Prof. W. H. Miller, which showed it to be accurate to an as- tonishing degree of minuteness. (8) The fact that the yellow light given out when salt is wn on burning spirit consists almost solely of the two oat identical qualities which constitute that double bright ne line D to be absent in a candle-flame when the wick was snuffed clean, so as not to project into the luminous envelope, and from an alcohol flame when the spirit was burned in a watch-glass, And, (5) Foucault’s admirable discovery (Z’ Institut, Feb. 7, 1849), that the voltaic are between charcoal points is “a medium which emits the rays D on its own account, and at the same ra absorbs them when they come from another e . quarter. € conclusions, theoretical and practical, which Stokes hich el Observations made by Stokes himself, which showed the bright flame wh lic lectures in the University of Glasgow, were :-— (1) That the double line D, whether bright or dark, is due to vapor of sodium. 4 (2) That the ultimate atom of sodium is susceptible of reg- ular elastic vibrations, like those of a tuning-fork or of stringed musical instruments; that like an instrument with two strings d to approximate unison, or an approximately cireular elastic disc, it has two fundamental notes or vibrations of ap- proximately equal pitch; and that the periods of these vibra- Hons are precisely the periods of the two slightly different yel- low lights constituting the double bright line D. (3) That when vapor of sodium is at a high enough tempera- rich light from another source is propagated, its atoms, ac- Cording to a well-known general principle of d are ‘0 vibrate in either or both of those fundamental modes, if some 5 wept i : d stellar (5) That Fraunhofer’s double dark line D of solar and ste Spectra is due to the presence of vapor of sodium in atmospheres Aw. Jour. Sci.—Tuiep Series, Vo. II, No. 10.—Oct., 1871, 19 282 Address of Sir William Thompson. surrounding the sun and those stars in whose spectra it had (6) That other vapors than sodium are to be found in the atmospheres of sun and stars by searching for substances fii ducing in the spectra of artificial flames bright lines coinciding with other dark lines of the solar and stellar spectra than the Fraunhofer line D. The last of these propositions I felt to be confirmed (it was, perhaps, partly suggested) by a striking and beautiful ig 225 ment, admirably adapted for lecture illustrations, due to Fou- cault, which had been shown to me by M. Duboscque Soleil and the Abbé Moigno, in Paris, in the month of October, 1850. A prism and lenses were arranged to throw upon a screen al a piece of brass, compounded of copper and zinc, was put into the cup, the spectrum showed all the bands, each precisely 2 the place in ho it had been seen when one metal or the other had been used separately. It is much to be regretted that this great generalization was not published to the world twenty years ago. I say this, not » because it is to be regretted that Angstrém should have the ‘hom of having, in 1858, published independently the statement a a5 . ¢ . n incandescent gas emits luminous rays of the same every kind of ray; or that Kirchhoff also should have, in 1859, might now be in possession of the inconceivable riches of ast? nomical results which we expect from the next ten years 2 rred im. : Kire hoff belongs, I believe, solely the great credit of ving first actually sought for and found other metals than sodium in the sun y the method of spectrum analysis. publication of October, 1859, inaugurated the practice of soli! ce and stellar chemistry, and gave spectrum analysis an impus® od ___ which in a great measure is due its splendidly successful cut “ Hse Address of Sir William Thompson. 283 tivation by the labors of many able investigators within the last n years. To prodigious and wearing toil of Kirchhoff himself, and of owe la mgs of the British Association is well illustrated by the fact that it was through conversation with Pliicker at the Newcastle substance gives a continuous spectrum—that an in gas under varied pressure gives bright bars across the contin- e sharp, hard and fast be spectrum, some of which, from th 284 Address of Sir William Thompson. Tn contemplating them we feel as if led out from narrow waters of scholastic dogma to a refreshing excursion on the broad and deep ocean of truth, where we learn from the wonders we see that there are endlessly more and more glorious wonders still unseen. Stokes’s dynamical theory supplies the key to the philosophy of Frankland and Lockyer’s discovery. Any atom of gas, when dense that each atom is always in collision, that is to say, never free from influence of its nike ciara the spectrum will generally be continuous, and may present little or no appearance of bands, or even of maxima of brightness. In this condition the fluid can be no longer regarded as a gas, and we must judge of it relation to the vaporous or liquid states according to the critical conditions discovered by daidaceey : Spectroscopic Research in Astronomy. While these great investigations of properties of matter wel going on, naturalists were not idle with the newly-recogn2 a of the spectroscope at their service. Chemists $00? ollowed the example of Bunsen in discovering new metals? terrestrial matter by the old blow-pipe and prism test of Fo% Jomed their forces. An astronomical observatory has to appended to it a stock of re-agents such as hitherto was only f be found in the chemical borstony: A devoted corps ° Volunteers of all nations, whose motto might well be Uogq" Address of Sir William Thompson. 285 More of the lines in the spectrum of the star, with a line or in the spectrum of sodium, or some other terrestrial sub- stance, and then (by observing the star and the artificial light Simultaneously by the same spectrosco parisons between the positions of the dark lines in the prisma- Ue spectrum and in his own debaran, a Orionis, 6 Pegasi, Sirius, @ Lyre, Ca lla, “ Mirus, Pollux, Castor (which they had observed rather for the rov great a velocity as 315 es per second to or from the h, whi ° “ corrected for the velocity of the Earth at the time of the obser- vation, gave a velocity % Sirius, relatively to the Sun, amount- 286 Address of Sir William Thompson. tion extremely difficult. Still, with such great skill as Mr. Hug- gins has brought to bear on the investigation, it can scarcely be a cording to the laboratory results of Frankland and himself, go far toward confirming the conviction that in a few years al the marvels of the Sun will be dynamically explained according of weather. It seems to have been proved that at least some sensible part of the light of the “corona” is a terrestrial atmos- pheric halo or dispersive reflexion of the light of the glow hydrogen and i helium ” round the Sun. (Frankland am Lockyer find the yellow prominences to give ery decided bright line not far from D, but hitherto not identified with an confidently trusts to our Government exercising the same wIs¢ berality as heretofore in the interests of science. Sola~ Heat. The old nebular hypothesis supposes the solar system and other similar systems through the universe which we see at 4 “ance as stars, to have originated in the condensation of fiery nebulous matter. * This hypothesis was invented before the dis rovery of the thermo-dynamics, or the nebulew would not have 3 been supp to be fiery; and the idea seems never to have ae occurred to any of its inventors or early supporters that the Address of Sir William Thompson. 287 Sary to suppose the nebulous matter to have been originally fiery, but that mutual gravitation between its parts may have generated the heat to which the present high temperature of the Sun is due. Further, he made the important observations * Te ® ae eR ee Se ee om i) Qu z ot oS we] ct ect = bee io) } o =) oe) oO =] mM pe) sf, =) & 5 oO pa) B ° 6B 7 oy — — io) 4 marl S = ° g. =] ag oo) p Qu on of the very approximate constancy of the Earth’s period of revolution round the Sun for the last 2, years, to con- assumed to circulate at any consi t 1 the Sun must be very small; and therefore, “if the me- ¢ influx taking place at present is enough to produce any reciable portion of the heat radiated away, it must be sup- 288 Address of Sir William Thompson. clusive against it. Each meteor circulating round the Sun must fall in along a very gradual spiral path, and before reaching the Sun must have been for a long time exposed to an enormous heating effect from his radiation when very near, and must thus have been driven into vapor before actually falling into the Sun. Thus, if Mayer's hypothesis is correct, friction between vortices of meteoric vapors and the Sun’s atmosphere must be the m- mediate cause of solar heat ; and the velocity with which these vapors circulate round equatorial parts of the Sun must amount to 435 kilométres per second. The spectrum test of velocity applied by Lockyer showed but a twentieth part of this amount as the greatest observed relative velocity between different ich I had objected. But a solution, which seems to mee the highest degree probable, has been suggested by Tait. ur ed gas : J t ) observed in gunnery trials, such as those ® Shoeburyness, when iron strikes eodtat iron at a great velocity Address of Sir William Thompson. 289 but varied by substituting for the iron various solid materials, metallic or stony. Hitherto this suggestion has not been acted upon ; but surely it is one the carrying out of which ought to be promoted by the British Association. Nature of Comets. published), until, in 1866, Schiaparelli calculated from observa- tions on the August meteors, an orbit for these bodies which he found to agree almost perfectly with the orbit of the great comet of 1862, as calculated by Oppolzer; and so discovered and demonstrated that a comet consists of a group of meteoric ent ears, since the year 902, there have been excep- fliant displays of the November meteors. It had ve : 3 a splendid problem for the phy- Per annum, Here, then, was a splendid p: ees < sk iful meth Adams, by the application of a beautiful met ewton just one permitted the motion of the 1 (eer ne influ f Jupiter, Saturn, and by ma igrsboh ee: influence ae ’ is, 334 290 Address of Sir William Thompson. years. The investigation showed further that the form of the orbit is a long ellipse, giving for the shortest distance from the able to identify the comet and the meteoric belt.* The same 18 therefore, thoroughly established that Temple's Comet I, 1866, consists of an elliptic train of minute planets, of which a few thousands or millions fall to the earth annually about the 4th of November, when we cross their track. We have prob- having been correctly predicted by Prof. Newton), we have passed through a part of the belt greatly denser than the avel- age. ‘The densest part of the train, when near enough to us, 18 while its “tail” is merely a portion of the less dense part of the train illuminated by sunlight, and visible or invisible to us * Signor Schiaparelli, Director of the Observator: . te culate jai e supposition of the orbit being a very elongated ellipse, agreed very f rei b. same r Schia relli gives elements of the orbit of the No of any known com On the 21st of January, 1867, M. accurate elements of the orbit of the N ovember meteors, and in the Nachrichten of J of Al i Address of Sir William Thompson. 291 profound secret and mystery of nature concerned in the pheno- ‘menon of their tails. “Perhaps it is not too much to hope that future observation, borrowing every aid from rational specula- tion, grounded on the progress of physical science generally (especially those branches of it which relate to the ethereal or of avoidance.” “In no respect is the question as to the mate- riality of the tail more forcibly pressed on us for consideration Sun in perthelioin a manner of astraightand rigid rod, in defiance of the law of gravitation, nay, even of the received laws of motion. “The projection of this ray ... . t ! : single day, conveys an impression of the intensity of the ting to produce Pr g st =) Og a se B ie) — 8 ot oo et Ss § =~ g e , & S 5 ~™ = 3 = >. > 3 ~ 5 > as we conceive it, viz., possessing mertia—at all, it pe sid the dominion of forces incomparably more energetic — tation, and quite of a different nature.” ca : ; = l, : th of the admirable simplicity with which se 8 beautifal “ sea-bird analogy,” as it has been called, can expiain all these phenomena. ing i ogic itions very pressing it that, under meteorological condl erent care e peer dead matter may have run together, 292 Address of Sir William Thompson. a teaching of science as the law of gravitation. I utterly repu- diate, as opposed to all philosophical uniformitarianism, the ect contravention of what seems to us biological law. I am prepared for the answer, “ our code of biological laws is an €X- ression of our ignorance as well as of our knowledge.” the most careful and laborious experimenting. I confess 10 being deeply impressed by the evidence put before us by Prof Huxley, and I faith, true throug ceeds from life, and fr there was no living thing on it, There were rocks solid and disintegrated, water, air all round, warmed and illuminated by a brilliant sun, ready to become a garden. Di pie and flowers s nto existence, in all the fullness of mpé beauty, by a fiat of Creative Power? or did vegetation, grow or years it teems with vegetable and anim ; originated by tlie transport of seeds and ov4 Address of Sir William Thompson. 293 and by the migration of individual _ creatures. When a voleanic island springs up from the se and after a few years is found clothed with vegetation, we do ae hesitate to assume that seeds has been wafted to it through the air, or floated to it on rafta Is it not possible, and if possible, is it not probable, that the beginning of vegetable life on the earth is to be similarly explained? Every year thousands, probably sabe of frag- ments of ~ matter fall upon the earth—whence come these fragments? What is the previous — of any one of them ? Was it created in the beginning of time an amorphous mass? This idea is so unacceptable that, tacitly or explicitly, all men discard it. It is often assumed that all, and it is certain that some, meteoric stones are fragments which had been broken off from greater masses aie launched free into space. It is as sure that collisions must occur between great masses moving through space as it is that ships, steered F without intelligence ted to prevent collision, could not cross and _ re-cross the Atlantic fo. ghounsade of years with immunity from col- ions. When two great masses come into collision in space, itis certain that a large part of each is melt ut it seems also quite certain that in many cases a large quantity of débris must be shot forth in all oie sala much of which may , other oar ae com Pobre in ieeseto to itself, be when it is still clothed as at present with vegetation, many great and small ents carrying seed and living plants and animals would undoubtedly be scattered through space. Hence and because We Jay vag eA believe that there are at present, and have immemorial, many worlds of life besides our own, wemust regardit it as = pobable in the highest degree that ae throug a sera Fpaeait no life existed upon this ~~ one Marach, son e falling upon it might, by what we blindly call na fu vais to its becoming covered with vegetation. Iam lly pe a the many scientific objections which may tae pomp one hypothesis, but I believe them to be all sine, Sa taxed your patience too severely toal “ ~ a think of discussing any of them on the present occasion e hypothesis that life originated on this earth through moss- — fra ents from the ruins of another world From the earth stocked with such vegetation as it could re- ceive seeotieallys Ae to the earth teeming with all the endless lety of plants and animals which now inhabit it, the step is ea 294 Address of Sir William Thompson. have all been produced by laws acting around us.”. . . + “ There is grandeur in this view of life with its several powers, ations. Reaction against the frivolities of teleology, such as are to be found, not rarely, in the notes of the learned commen tators on Paley’s ‘ Natural Theolo porary effect in turning attention physical or scientific, turn us away fro 2 Page Meek on new Silurian Crinoids and Shells. 295 Art. XXXVII— On some new Silurian Crinoids and Shelis ; by F. B. Mzrx. Derenprocrrinus Caser Meek. Compare Pentacrinite Christy, 1848; Letters on Geology, Plate IT. eral pentagonal outline, the upper side being longest and deeply excavated for the reception of the comparatively narrow tree ra- wn : Ventral extension of the body more than four times as long as readth ; 296 F. B. Meek on new Silurian Crinoids and Shells. Height of body to top of first radials, 0°39 inch, greatest breadth at top, 0°32 inch. Length of incomplete ventral extension, 1°95 inches; breadth of same as flattened, near upper end, 0°65 inch; breadth of arms below the first bifurcation, 0°12 inch, ures of t will be given in the Ohio Geolo ical Report. F Loe fity and position.—Mr. Catch sped was found by him | at Richmond, Indiana, in the upper part of the Cincinnati ee : : and those belonging to Mr. Dyer were found at about the sam 7 horizon between Cincinnati and Oxford, Ohio. | y as good specimens. Fig f the species, with a full description, LEpPocrintrres Moorsr Meek. of irregular form and size, two on the anal side being longer Spal wide, and extending up to form the lower margin of the princl} j= aad 5 : g cs ° 4 ot 2 8 et g = & e & tively ‘atge, one situated at the suture between one of the | pieces and the contiguous piece of the next range above, on ‘a anterior side of the body; another on the side to the left of * Now, since we know the nature of the vault of Cyathocrinites (see F sais Acad., N. Sci., Dec., 1868, p. 324and 336), it seems to me that Paleocrt “a8 a distinct genius from that group. : F. B. Meek on new Silurian Crinoids and Sheils. 297 Recumbent arms short, or confined mainly to the upper side, one extending down nearly to the opening on the anal side, another to the two rhombs to the right of the opening, a third to that on the left, and the fourth to the anterior side, the direction of all being thus nearly or quite at right angles to each other. Column thick at the base of the body, but tapering rapidly below; as usual, Cc y composed of very thin pieces. Surface of body plates marked b e Shell ovate, rather compressed or only moderately convex, the greatest convexity being a little above and slightly in advance of the middle, extremities more or less beaks only moderately prominent, somewhat obtuse, and not very convex, & fo more fice one-third the length of the valves from Le 959 inch ; convexity, 0°30 to 33 inch. Am. Jour. Sc1.—Tuirp Series, VoL. II, No. 10.—Ocr., 1871. 20 ‘ this, 1 would #6 inclined to refer them to the family Crassatellide, instead of to the Mytilide, Which Pr - McCoy associates Anodontopsis, 298 F. B. Meek on new Silurian Crinoids and Shells. ways describe the same hinge exactly in the same way, I have concluded to refer our shell, for the present, provisionally to Ano- dontopsis. If a new genus, however, it may be called Orthodon- tis Prot. McCoy described the hinge of his genus as follows: “hinge line shorter than the shell, with a posterior long slender tooth or cartilage plate extending just below it (double in the right valve), and another similar but shorter one in front of the then adds that there is “ occasionally one small cardinal tooth be- neath the beak.” . lve. , ne is certainly simple, and the muscular impression erlor one being larger than the other, a? e = “The Specific name is given in honor of §, A. Miller Esq., of Ca nati, Ohio, who sent on to the Smithsonian Institute the fits _ * From all of the known characters of such extinct shells as F. B. Meek on new Silurian Crinoids and Shells. 299 specimens of this shell I have seen. I am also indebted to him for some broken valves showing the hinge. For the use of a good specimen showing the hinge of the left valve I am likewise under obligations to C. B. Dyer, Esq., of Cincinnati. Locality and position—Forty miles west of Cincinnati, Ohio, above the middle of the Cincinnati group, of the Lower Silurian. ANODONTOPSIs ? UNIONOIDES Meek. nearer the anterior side, and its dorsal margin is not declining on the posterior side of the beaks as in the last. It likewise differs in having its posterior umbonal slopes more convex on a line from the beaks to the posterior basal margin. : : ength, 1-73 inches; height, !*11 inches; convexity, 0°63 inch. Locality and position, same as last. The only specimen I have seen was kindly loaned to me for description and illustration, by Mr. §. A. Miller, of Cincinnati. Remarks on the genus Lichenocrinus; by F. B. Mex. Perhaps of all the remarkable types of that protean order of animals known as the Crinoidea, there are few more curious and interesting forms (if really the 6o0dy of a Crinoid) than that for which Prof. Hall baste | the name Lichenocrinus. Having re- on Some interest to paleontologists, especially as this fossil is little known, and the specimens now obtaine afford the means of giv- ing a more extended description of its characters than that al- ready published. ees rof. Hall’s generic description of this crinoid reads as follows: Bodies parasitic on shells and other foreign substa ces. Form i rising from the centre. Disk composed of an indefinite number o: polygonal plates, and apparently having no distinct mee of _ Tangement. Proboscis perforate, and in the known species, age of five ranges of short plates alternating and interlocking at the Margins,” a From the specimens now known eseripti ‘this fossil ma iven: ; i Bal or iepaaeed slaneeonves bodies, growing firmly a tached to shells, corals, trilobites and other marine objects, an , the following more extended 300 F. B. Meek on new Silurian Crinoids and Shells. arated, presenting no sutures or openings, but in some conditions, showing numerous, distinct regularly arranged, radiating striz, corresponding to radiating lamelle that oceupy the whole internal cavity from top to bottom. _ Among the more remarkable features of this fossil, may be men- tioned its very curious system of radiating lamelle occupying the In diameter, and sey ches inlength? Is it homologous wi the so-called proboscis or ventral tube of other crinoids, or with the colu of. Hall evidently entertained the mens than those from which his diagnosis was written, he inclined to the opinion that it is a column. at one or the other of these views 18 correct, would almost necessarily seem to be the case, ling free, and if viewed as a column, apparently useless ? Again, if a column, connected with the free side of the body of an at- tached crinoid, how are we to account for the fact that no traces ; ing oreign bodies, and this long appendage in all cases be left dang- rs In size inward, and pass b e lations into those forming the base of this long nate” e F. B. Meek on new Silurian Crinoids and Shells. 301 f a crinoid, t hich grew at the free end of the long column-like ap age. This suggestion derives Some support tro the fact that the disk, although usually growing on the flat surfaces of shells, etc., is sometimes found growing upon the side of the col- mes umns of other larger crinoids, as well as on other uneven surfaces, : and in such cases, it is bent around to conform to the curve of the ‘Surface of attachment, just as we see in crinoid roots: es ° situated ; while its whole interior is so filled with radiating lamel- as figured the root of one type ( Cleiocrinus grandis), apparently composed of an accidentally folded expansion © minute polygo- nal plates; and it is worthy of note, that the column attached to a such system of radiated lamellz being connected wit > 4 crinoid ; but this objection would doubtless apply with ier eater force against the conclusion that this disk is the body o One of these animals. : __ Onthe other hand, among the strong object tion that these disks are roots, may be menti 302 F. B. Meek on new Silurian Crinoids and Shells. the stages of development of some Crinoid, which, if known in its adult condition, is supposed to be an entirely distinct type. ‘The other is that the disks, as we now see them growing fast to other down to others less than a tenth of an inch in diameter, all alike growing fast to other bodies by the side opposite the column-Hxe appendage, seems to demonstrate that this is their mode of growth from the first.* Tn view of all that is now known of this curious fossil, it seems i inion on be prepared for the reports of the Ohio Geological Survey. ped > _ . * L cs Cincinnati group of the Lower Silurian, near Cincinnati, Ohio. _,. Ina few very rare cases, the disk has been found detached, and showing a flat side marked by very regular radiating striae. pon which they grew and that the radiating lize within posed by wea’ ring, as we also Some specimens, Peters—A new Planet and the 114th Asteriod. 303 Arr. XXX VIIL— Discovery of a new Planet, and the Elements of the 114th Asteroid ; by Dr. C. H. F. Perers. (From a letter to one of the editors, dated Litchfield Observatory of Hamilton College, Clinton, Oneida Co., N. Y., September 11, 1871) On the night of the 8th inst. a new planet was found, which probably will receive the number (116) of the asteroid. group. The weather has — me, and I have obtained the three follow- ing observations ‘ Ham. Coll. m. t. A.R. (116). Decl. (116). 1871, Sept. 8. 15" 33™ 34°* 0" 147 65" —3° 44’ 38” S41. 47 31 0 13303 —3 48 48 i.” 19 30. ao 0 1241°7 =~8 64 19 These positions = be slightly modified by — more cor- tect places of the stars — parison. The planet is somewhat brighter than 11th magni 114th asteroid “which has been named Cassandra), I sare “8a sna 7 oe elements, from observations of July Epoch: bed Ms ¢: oi ae Berlin m. t. pin igs 29 es O = 163 53 32°3 ‘sa Equ. 1871, 0. ion. 3 2 8 51 32°14 = 81754 saat gal bela peared | 8o in its present a sition. For - the remoter part of its orbit, near its aphelion. ‘Waa SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I. Puysics. 1. Researches in Electricity :-—Inaugural- Dissertation for the Attainment of the Degree of Doctor of Philoso, phy at ~~ = August- University, Gottingen ; ; by Tuo s. R. Baxer, of Pennsy Vania, U.S. A—The prominent part 0 2 goat researches was the the Lane discharging jar, the scb, and a large multiplicator 304 Scientific Intelligence. electricity is determined by the efforts of a charged magnetic needle (a small magnet) against the horizontal intensity of the The jar combined with the multiplicator served for the second s of the jar were placed at fixed distances apart; and then the electrical machine, also con- meee with the apparatus, turned until the appearance of the spark. The examination of the relation was made by seeking the straight line or curve whose equation the expressions for the ele- ments of comparison in question regarded as coérdinates most nearly satisfied, | rom the results obtained it is concluded that the relations a in both parts of the investigation most nearly appro t ] at the same time. In the latter it was shown that the needle when in motion lost its electrical charge considerably sooner than 2. Water unfrozen at a temperature of ~18° C_—Bovsstncavit finds that by preventing the agente of water, it may be kept unfroz : 18°C. He experimented with a gun barrel of steel, into which a steel ball was dropped before filling it with wate ring the cold days of December 26, 27 and 30, last, the tem and —18°, and yet on shaking the tube - all was found to move freely, showing that the water was not frozen.—L’ Institut, July 12, Il GroLtogy anp Natura. History. 1. Glaciers.—Canon Moseley has a paper entitled, “On the “ chanical ssibility of the descent of glaciers by their welg ; e for August. aS : Aine hh — och.—Lieut.-Col. Drayson mre ‘ altho e Syoin iety the “probable cause, da oo et the Glacial epoch,” starts head the fact that the pole _ of the ecliptic would be the center of polar motion as the pole ia ia eG eS Tote ieee | Stes Sa ees Re Tn Geology and Natural History. 805 varied its distance from that center. He indicated the curve which the pole did trace, and this curve was such as to give for the date 13,000 B. C., a climate very cold in winter, and very hot in sum- he Gurvrrz ist Part. L The Sea Sponges of the Lower Quader. 2 pp. 4to. with 10 haat ae 871. (Theodor Pree — Th valuable memoir b init notices or describes and = Amorphospongia vola Michelin, Spar. a Chie se Se ner ge 5 0 (d’Orb.) pulvinaria Go Goldf’ « sp., Tr. Klieni Gein., Cupulosp ongia (Orb) inf infundibuls ‘ sp. oemeri ein., Stellispongia Plauensis Gein., St. Reussi Gein., St. Goldfussiana Gein.., 754. Micheliné f nos ce .s. 18 contained in the Canadian Naturalist, No. 4 of Vol. V. ear notices of 29 species, 5 of whi oh are riiwicaied is 13 gur 6. On the catty cones = Terebratulina septentrion atl Epwarp S. Mor h.D. p. 4to, with nisi plates. ry pa te pita packard Pal he Me Mem mar go t the Boston Sccioty of Natural History, Vol. II, Part a. Gl ee Senaichene along valleys. toe ndix to Art. XXXIL) ~-Prof. mmons, in his N. Y. Geological Report (1842) at page NS ee 8 that the direction of the glacier scratches im northeastern ork “conforms to that of the great valleys; in the wirraeg ie Neng it is sortt and south; in the St. Lawrence valley, Southw: The particular localities where his observations were Made tne not mentioned. a distance of ten miles ; << states that the scorings of t Il , which here run : hie cern are parallel id the valle it not published in this White i his to nd of Dr. Newb 306 Scientific Intelligence. 8. Anthers of Parnassia,—In the Journal of the Linnean Society, vol. xi, Mr. A. W. Bennett published, two or three years ago, an able to examine of this species confirm any departure in this respect from the ordinary type of the genus.” ‘ It is easy to show that Dr. Torrey’s observation, at least, 18 independent and original. In his Flora of Northern and Middle States, published in 1824, p. 326, he described the anthers of P. aroliniana as “incumbent ;” in his New York State Flora, 1843, as “fixed by the base, introrse.” The first volume of the Genera N. Amer. Illustrated appeared in 1848. This season I have, for the first time, had the good fortune to see both P. palustris and P. sity, the former blossoming at the beginning, the latter at the close of August. The difference between the two species “in this re Vv n P. palustris, the anthers are certainly extrorse as to insertion ; but the line of dehiscence lateral, with introrse rather than extrors tendency. ; In P Caroliniana, the anthers are quite as much introrse as extrorse as to insertion, and truly introrse for dehiscence. = ress to be posterior, and the anther to be as truly nh as possible. » Ge 9. Journal of the Linnean Society (Botany), No. 65, com Hance, but very near Roxburgh’s A. calearata. the export of it is increasing ; 112,000 pounds, valued at ture of the oak silk-worm i oa Bovey Set on foot and fostered.” Mr. Hanbury contribu torical Note Radi. tee eee that its introduction into Europe was due 0 as Might take the place of ginger, yet it is still largely consume™s bee We To ets a et oe ee fa Seo Miscellaneous Intelligence. 307 especially in Russia, where it is used for flavoring the liqueur called nastvika, as a cattle-medicine, and by the Tartars it is taken ea, _ Dr. Masters gives a Note on the Genus Byrsanthus Guill., and its floral conformation, suggesting an explanation of the singular arrangement of the glands and stamens, and indicating that two species have been ¢ ‘ ev. 8. Matier discourses on Tamil Popular Names of Plants. he same as at Troy, Salem, and Chicago. The titl entered are fewer, having been 78, against 143 at Troy, and 150 each at Salem and Chicago. G e Indianapolis meeting, under the presi : ——— ‘RAY of Cambridge, appears to have given much satisfaction to those esent, among whom were many distinguished workers ™ science. His Excel Governor Baker welcome dency of Dr. h, to which the retiring President, his usual appropriate and grace- delivered on Its subject, e Geognosy of the Appalachians and the origin of Crystalline Rocks,” and its general scope, are stated on page 205. 308 Miscellaneous Intelligence. An interesting feature of the Indianapolis meeting was an ex- cursion on a grand scale to the coal fields of Indiana, The ex the way to the town of Brazil, where they were welcomed by the citizens at Masonic Hall and dined with the usual complimentary c est scientific interest in the excursion, This coal is used on raw state in the iron furnaces, and is said to be remarkably oo : from both sulphur and phosphorus. The excursion rested a | erre H xhausted every means to render the visit of the sociation 1 delightful and profitable. Here they passed the night, bi ee | train to Indianapolis. or n excursion to Mammoth Cave in Kentucky was the wee act of the Association, after the adjournment of the Indianapo | | meeting, ~ audience ; and after an early dinner, the party returned by spec: The Association, after enjoying the public and private ho ties of Indianapolis and of the sections of the State include i the excursions, adjourned on the 21s , having voted condiinaee P to meet in San Francisco, California, in J uly, 1872, the final dee = ion having been left with the Standing Committee. a _ The officers chosen for th | J. I NCE § Prof, JosEpH Loy Ine, of Cambridge a ER BB. : Prof. E. 8. Morss, of Salem, Mass. ; Treasurer, Wirias §. of Philadelphia, e following are the subjects of the papers presented, and of the public lectures : 1. IN Generar Szsston, 1. On Pterosauria; by B. Waterhouse Hawkins, 2. Fertilization of Flowers by Insect Agency; by Asa Gray. 3. O1 Musi Intonation; by J. D. Tillman. 4 The Earthquake of October, 1870; by Charles Whittlesey. 5. On the Iron and Coal Interest of Indiana; by T. Sterry Hunt. 6. An Examination into the Laws of Devel i f Organic Typ 2. In Secrion A.— Mathematics, Physics, and Chemistry. ; 1. The Daily Motion of a Brick Tower caused by Solar Heat; by 0. G Ro! P 3 bi __2. On the use of the Zenith Telescope for determination of Time; by J.B. Bik Miscellaneous Intelligence. 309 3. On the construction and verification of Metric Standards for the United States; by J. E. Hilgard. 4, Organic arco of the eo: and coop Nei of Seeds; by T. CO. Hilgard e Influence of the Moon on the Crust of the Earth; by Clinton Roosevelt. 6. On Chemical quirainatey by 8. D. Till 7. On the Transmission of Heat; by 8. D. T ody Relation between the Distances and cree Motions of the Stars; by T. ff 9. On the fe rege ero of October, 1870; by Charles Whittlesey. 10. An inquiry co — = e Physical Relations between the Masses and Mean scghe of the Minor Planets; by Daniel Kirkwood oa . On the Distribution of he Mean odoraint of the Minor Planets; by Daniel 12. Note on the nbc LS the Solar noe by Daniel Kirkwood. 13. On sane probable age of tin! ’s Comet; by Daniel Kirkwoo 14. Longitude Dete saan gs across the Cor tinent; by George W. ‘Dean. 15. On Je Mutual ee of Electric Currents; by E. B. Elliott. 16. tion; F. Walling. 17. The | Chemical Equivale nt of Aither; by H. F. W 18. The co-relation of Electricity and Ch coat Hee Walling. = On a form of Boomerang in use among the Mogni oe’ Indians of North ; by C. BRT An pmprovement of Eggertz’s Method of determining Carbon in Steel; by 1. The Yo ur Great Eras in Modern Astronomy; by Jacob Ennis. 22, “spade ; by Jacob Ennis. 23. The cause of Stellar Heat and Light ; 24, The tnaachas and ——- omposton ott ms arent that fell on May 21, near Searsmont, "Main ; by J. Lawrence Sm: A deseription of the e exact locality ‘of the 1 alo masses of Meteoric Iron in Cohahuil , Mexico, with the eR HT of one recently discovered; by J. Law- Tence Sm oe 26. A co nvenient rtain method of ae a constant level of Water in hatte oF etn tory; by J. La ith. het aos on the Onuiaber and other ‘Minerals from California; by J. Law- ce Smith. “+ A new and ready method of making Platinum black ; by J. Lawrence Smith. bys : ih ready mee of separating the Alkalies, on a large eek from Lepidolite site rence ew nate pa enient apps Gravity Flask; by J. Lawrence Smith. 31 On — Evha harmonic Scale of 31 tones in the octa ave, and a new practical key- ponding the accepted musical notation ; by P. H. Van der babii 32, On ¢ Oblique Microscopic Examination, and a new, simple apparatus fo a by P. H. Van der Weyde e ~ ; the lines or bands in the same: we H. ve der We de. y P. an y' On a new and more ‘perfect fire test of illuminating Petroleum, without the P, yde. 36. An application of an ex fibers function; by J. E. Hilgard. : 37, To find a general Proton Ag for the length o: of “Gurves of Pursuit ;” by Joseph 38. Steam boiler Water and Incrustation ; by Jos. G. Rogers. 3. Ly Section B.— Geology and Natural History. 1. The Mon, on the Universal Type of Seeds; by Thomas Meehan. eee Classification of Echinoderms from their Microscopic Structure ; by Alex- . . 3. Mechanism of Flexion and Extension in Birds’ Wings; by Elliot Coues. 310 Miscellaneous Intelligence. . On the Morphology of the Osseous System; by T. C. Hilgard. . On the Geological ag cwaibe of the —— Gulf; by E. Pe: Hilgard. 6: Seas ates on the Common Groun orm ; by James J. H. 7. Obse ms tes bs Geology Physical te and Rotman of Niagara trae: iby George W e Qu estions Surface a Gooleey by Frank H. er . oe the Entozooa peculiar to Swine; by William B. Flet a On the Development of ‘the Tarsal and Carpal Bones in Binds: by Edward 8. Mor: i ie the Characteristics of the Primary Groups of the Class of Mammals; by Theodore Gill. 12. On the Natural System of Fishes; by Edward D. Cope. ; The Embryology of at and its poate on the classification of the 8. A. 5S. Packar n the EKozoon Gaindeaioe i in the Crystalline Limestones of Massachusetts; by L 8. 'B urban 15. On the relati of Anomia; by Edward S. Mor 16. Ooatetbetioes es Phy siographe and Dynamical pf a by Ri < yparently one-ranked phyllotaxis of Baptisia perfoliata, and on 1% 0 phyllotaxis of Cucurbitacea; by Henry W. Ravenel. 18. On the Geology of Northwestern Massachusetts; " —— Tenney. 19. Western Coal Measures 2 Indiana Coals; by KE. T 20. peowks on the Geology of the Mississippi Bottom ag % ra: mith. 21. Account of a Dust Storm which occurred in Clinton county, y, Indiana, Dee 24, 1870; by J sal Tingley. 22. Remarks pon the Catiskil Red a Group as it occurs upon the bor ders of sed Tonk aud Pennsylvania; by James Hall. et Views of Nature: of the Organizing Principle, and of Life and Intellect; bY Sea: niet 24, Vitalisin, Spiritualism, and Materialism; by E. C. Seam e 25. The Eozcon Limestone of Eastern Si cccainaelias a Perry. ahi y . 26. Remarks on the Geological Map and Section of Missouri pee by 4 wallow. 8. Remark on the Abies Douglassii, and a new species, or a pe culiar variety of the Abies bilsamifera, of the Rocky Mountains; by G. U. Sw low. tks on the Snow Line “ the Mountains of na by 6.0 0.8 In Sussection E.— Archeology and Ethnology. A Theory on the Nature of the ieicews in the Mental Capacity of High - ioe Races of Men; by Renas Davi Hilgard. 2. Note on the Distibution of Popilation in the United States; by J. E. “3. io; arles Whittlesey. + On the Extinct Tortoises of the New Jersey Cretareons; by Edward D. in | 2 E 4. An Ancient Mount to the Poa River, Geo by Charles Whittlesey: On the rates gins — realized to investors rage Securities of the United States; by E. B. Law :—W hat is —s “ind what are its Functions and Limits; by E. C. — In Sussecrion C.— Microscopy. = cael on Photographing Histological Preparations by Sunlight; by J +. Riaakc on a new form of Achromatic Condenser, applicable to low and ae dium powers; by E. Bicknell. 8: On a new form of Micro-Telescope; by R. H. Ward Ward. on recent improvements in Achroma ie Condousers ea sy dr Wa leat . I Wi 8 Ae i ‘ lumi: le A Ste OTE a he Wop me*ew Se Miscellaneous Intelligence. dll On some observed changes in Vorticella; by A. H. Tuttle. Remarks on a Standard of Powers for Microscopical Objectives and Eye Pieces; by R. H. Ward. 10. On the Microscopic Structure of Eozoon Canadense; by E. Bicknell. $2 99 3. On the relation of the Auroras to Gravitating Currents ; by Pury Earze Cuase, Professor of Physics in Haverford College. ___ (Read before the American Philosophical Society, May 5th, 1871.) —Prof. Loomis’s observations of the number of auroras in each : month of 1869 and 1870 (Amer. Jour. of Science, III, S., i. 309), are ; specially noteworthy, both because of the careful accuracy of the rver, and because they are the first published observations which furnish satisfactory data for an approximate determination f : festations of terrestrial magnetism, it seems reasonable to look to hem for some additional evidence upon the question of the rela- i it e between hyetal and magnetic curves (see Proc. A. P.S., x, 368), eS =a nm Se * — ° ye | S 7) ede 5 co a foe] ee i] a = =) et fe) 4 ta ot a 5 o SS ic) is3) 3 or m ma in the morni g e ed gitud : tween Philadelphia and New Haven being less than 23°, It 1s no likely that there is any material difference in the daily ram-curves at the two places. : G order to make the curves fairly comparable, both in regar to the times and the magnitudes of deviation, I treated the auroral SE cat 312 Miscellaneous Intelligence. “retiree in the same manner as those of rainfall (Proc. A. P. | 8., x, 526). Both in the toncupre and in the hyetal B prec | panying curv e given in the ich aler table. I presume ee one will doubt’ that the Satta sation of vapor, which 1s ern \ The auroral so caetls iat ae the normal ordinates, of the accom’ Comparative Table of Auroras and Rainfalls. . ql rf | ee ee ee ee z a ee ee ee oe... amoney SES 32 4 4 oH tg ee ---38 re 7 Nebrusy...31 95° 3 93! sngust .....34 ae 15 ee we ow Apit..-44 109 $ UE ostoter....38 NBs Mie TS rie | November...27 ge 21 a Miscellaneous Bibliography. 313 TV. MISCELLANEOUS BIBLIOGRAPHY. o the great battles which have occurred in Europe during the past century, making a total of 137 cases. The author thinks that if these facts are insufficient to convince, it would be vain to expect to,do so with a greater number of cases. o this argument it may be replied that throughout the region co ap influence in the production of rain. : . the simplest mode of making the comparison may _ ing: Determine for alZ the battles occurring within be the follow- a particular “oad ne preceding a battle and the ok regio xt following it: rmine for the same owing it; and then dete hen no battle has tw e former interval should be found sensibly less sete some influence in accelerating the fall of ram. facts collected by Mr. Powers are not digested in any such manner ; 314 Miscellaneous Bibliography. that Mr. Powers has established his proposition in a satisfactory manner. With regard to the mode in which a heavy discharge of artillery might cause rain, we differ widely in opinion from the author of pleased if Mr. Powers, or some ot ther r person, would resume the TT on of this subject in accordance with a truly us 2. ‘aeoduns ‘tory Text-Book of Meteorology; by ALEXAN bei Buonan, M.A., F.R.S.E., Secretary of the Scottish Meteorological Society. 218 pp. 12mo, with 6 isa Edinburgh and London, 1870. (Wm. Blackw ood & S ons).—Mr, Buchan takes the lead among the meteor logiats and meteorological investigators of Scotland. This small ‘and convenient text- book takes up in order the history and scope of Meteorology ; Atmospheric pressure an its distribution over the globe—a subject which has been much and hail; winds; storms ; peta cist eiitiwinde, aed waterspouts ; aurora borealis and a mag- ns ozone ; optical phenomena; meteors; weat and storm 3. Dominican Republic. Report of the sea 1 of In fra to Santo Domingo, with the toe om ory Message Me the 4. Sun-Pietures of Rocky Mountain Scenery, with a desc tion of the Geographical — Geological features and some account of the Resources of the t West; containing thirty phoe great graphic views along the line of the "Paxitie Railroad, from Omahe to ento. By F V. Haypen, M.D., U.S . Geologist, THE AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS, [THIRD SERIES.] Art. XXXIX.—On some Phenomena of Binocular Vision; by JosepH LEConTE, Prof. Geol. and Nat. Hist., University of California.* VL. So-called “images of illusion ;? and the theory of binoewar relicf, ; In a very elaborate paper on binocular vision published in the Archives des Sciences+ for Feb., 1871, which is itself but a succinct resumé of a much more extended memoir soon to be the former theory by showing, first, a priori, the consequences u of this theory; second, - that the visual results of certain experiments are precisely what _ % priory reasoning leads us to expect; and third, that this theory, in the form in which he maintains it, explains all the more ob- P. 33, and vol. ii, nae ‘f Arch. des Scien., nouv. per tome xl, p. 105. _ AM. Joun. Sot—Tamrp Serres, VoL. II, No. 11.—Nov., 1871. : 21 316 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. a true image produced by the luminous impr of one eye, the other an “ image of illusion ‘spectral Image—reflected fr J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 317 . po image or object. . It is true this may be regarded as really a single image and Superpose them, and if they be similar, unite them so as to ap as one object, it is better, because it more easily explains 318 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. Of course, by this shifting of the two fields all objects are simi- larly doubled. middle visual line. : : 8. In turning the eyes in any direction without altering their Y a cular space ; this dal untary and habitual, and would of itself double all objects id tonymously ; 2d, in ocular convergence, a rotation of each fie J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 319 ly ; (b) that all objects (different objects) lying in the visual lines, whether on this side or beyond the point of sight, have two of their images (one of each) superposed ; so that the two visual lines under all circumstances are combined to form a binocular visual line passing from the combined eyes, through the point of sight, and onward to infinite distance. uet us now, in the light of these facts, examine M. Pictet’s experiments. I will pass over for the present what he seems to his crucial experiments, and take up first the general phenomena of double images, as a proper understanding of the nature of these will make all that follows clear. sees the wall behind it by means of an illusive image propagated from the right eye. Now owr explanation is entirely different ; and we cannot but think that the —— double images Mage nothing from the left eye, and therefore the parts covered by these images must be seen, by the corresponding eye, by ltt 320 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. seen by each eye, either by true or by illusive images; we say, every part of the wall is seen, not by each eye, but by the &- nocular observer ; not some parts by true and some by illusive images, but only by true images. ~ ; If instead of a finger we use a screen several inches wide (wider than the interocular space), then the double images wil not entirely separate. They will slide over each other hete- ronymously through a space equal to the interocular space (2). The overlapping area will be opaque because it covers a portion of the wall concealed from both eyes; the rest will be transpar- ent. ‘The visual result is repre- $ s’ , sented by fig. 1, in which SS 1s the right-eye image of the screen, S’S’ the left-eye image, and 8’S the overlapping area. These facts are more completely repre- sented by my method in figs. 2 and 3, of which fig. 2 represents the actual relation of parts, and fig. 3 the visual result. In fig. , Hand L are the right and left eye respectively, n the nose, ‘ ae) S Ss! m the median line, »v the visual lines, SS the screen. Fig. 3 will readily explain itself if the reader will call to mind that in | : figures representing visual results capitals represent combined images, small italics right-eye images, and dashed italies left-eye images, If the optic axes be gradually converged, as already explained (3), these heteronymous imag® will slide over each other homonymously, making the opaque area larger and larger, and the transparent margins smaller and =} J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 321 smaller, until when the point of sight is at the screen, fig. 4, then the images will completely unite, and the screen become en- lirely opaque. This is shown in the visual result, fig. 5. wr: = e | ? | eee = If next we use fwo fingers, one of each hand, and gaze again at the wall, we will see four images all transparent. Now approx1- mate or separate the two fingers until the two middle images unite; we will have three images, the middle one opaque, the other two transparent. The reason is obvious. he middle one is opaque because a portion of the wall is concealed by it from both eyes. This portion of the wall is concealed from the he principles (1, 2, 3) laid down in the early part of this paper, together with the explanation of transparent double images just given, furnish, we believe, the key to all M. Pictet's experiments. We will make the application only to those which he thinks most conclusive of the existence of illusive images. We will first give his experiments and his conclusions as fairly as we can, and then will proceed to give our Own expla- nation. The following experiments M. Pictet thinks eee : ace an opaque screen S (fig. 6) agaist the nose n 1n a median plane of sight, in such wise that the object A may be 822 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. seen by both eyes. Now place a second screen C across the visual line A R of the right eye, so as to intercept rays from 6. the object A to the right eye. Neverthe- ’ less, the object A will be seen apparently through the opaque screen C, which will therefore appear transparent, and may even be drawn in outline with accuracy on the screen at b exactly where the visual line of the right eye pierces the screen—exactly where, if the screen were transparent ground glass, we would see it with the right eye, and might trace its outline. M. Pictet thinks this ab- solutely explicable, except on the assump- tion that an illusive image is actually seen at A by the right eye; and that it is this that we draw in outline on the screen at 4, the screen being transparent because the il- lusive image is seen beyond. But M. Pictet gives another experiment which he thinks still more conclusive. a sheet of paper lying on the table place 4 piece of money; then place a screen upright on the right side 2 oO piece of money, we see that the vertical screen appears transparent throughout, and that 77 perms the right eye to distinguish the prece, as if through a very diaphanous sur face.” “Tf now we give to optic axes a direction more paral- lel, we see the image of illusion ol he right eye move gradually ward the right, traverse the line of intersection of the screen and thé table, and come to project itself OB the other side upon the pape! where we may trace its outline correctly.” To brent these facts more clearly I give the n directing the regard upon “ a et ? = look at the piece of money. through the screen, Rd the visual line ol 3 ye A and seem to see it J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 323 the right eye when the optic axes become parallel, and 4, exactly where the visual line of the right eye pierces the paper, the place where the outline of the piece may be traced. The image moves to the right or left according to the position of the optic axes, being always where the visual line pierces the paper But “the most eee eous position of the optic axes,” says _M. Pictet, “is parallelism, for it is that which removes the farthest the image of illusion from the real image.” I wonder that M. Pictet did not reflect that, being on corresponding points, by his own principle the image of illusion, if any, cannot be separated from the real image ; and that there is in fact but one image seen. __ But furthermore, if a convex lens be placed across the visual line of the right eye Rd, the image at 6 will not be affected, but the tracing we make of the image will be found as much smaller than the money as the lens magnifies ; showing that the nap is not magnified but the drawing is magnified, and therefore, M. Pictet thinks, that the image of the money is ilusive or subjective, while the image of the paper and of the tracing is real. If, how- ever, the lens be placed before the left eye, the mage 1s magnt- fied because, thinks M. Pictet, this image is the dlusive raght- eye fac-simile of the magnified real image of the left eye. One more step of M. Pictet’s proof. By keeping both eyes Open, objects in the microscopic field may actually be drawn with accuracy on a sheet of paper placed on one side of the microscopic tube. Or, still better, if a stereoscopic card, having a picture on one half and the other half blank, be placed in the Teoscope, we may trace the picture on the bl half The investigation I now undertook was to see if a similar base of iridium could be prepared. Various considerations, ammonium in solution, and, passing a stream of chlorine through to break up the chloride of ammonium, to then conduct ethylen gas into it, was unsuccessfu The method which suc ceeded most perfectly was to act upon iridium chloride. This er experiment, to see i Upon the rCl,, a it and uniting at the same time, was Unsuccessful. : _ It will thus be seen, that the only method of ig agar the iridium-base is by the reducing action of alcohol on indium chloride, according to the reaction :— IrCl, Ohape fe Wigs es =sTyOls OH + 2101+) +H,0 — <2" 6,08" bn,\0H H Hr cermin Mg? ; : 7 produce of which are iridium-ethylen-protochloride, hy _ drochloric acid, aldehyde and water. dikes The purifying of the necessary iridium was foun be prey iene aa Codes operation, the last traces of platinum 340 S. P. Sadtler on Iridium Compounds. sticking very pertinaciously to the iridium salt. The processes in use also leave much to be desired in the way of completeness and expedition The method selected for separation was the method of Birn- © iridium oxide went very readily into solution in the fused ¢ ide of potassium. Taking, th i d applied to get the mass into full fusion. - Another modification oxide and finely pulverized cyanide of potassium to it, in smal oesieea at a time cyanides does not oceur so readily. It is true, that adding the the compound is kept in the fused sta nee, however, leads me to prefer this latter y us ae excess of free KCy. This is meee & solution ice cece ie Aine abe Roe eae eer ea Sede Ray ae nh Sees sa ee hb ad ast TF aye ee ee ee Oe ee ce Or ae oe, ee ae ae S. P. Sadtler on Iridium Compounds. 341 trary to my expectations, not the ethylen salts pure and alone, but there was a simultaneous formation of what appear to be n e-salt lated tolerably pure, yet, in the majority of the analyses, I had to 0 wi i ifficult to separate even under the lens. The Teadiness with which these compounds decompose when sub- Jected to recrystallization, even although one observes the pre- caution of keeping the solution distinctly acid, eine any Successful purifying that way. The preparation, t pre and then over H,SO, or at 100°, according as I wish sisted of three Cl determinations 42°13 pr. ct., 42°07 pr. ct. Cl, showing them to be simple IrCl, the percentage of Cl is 42°08 pr. ct. nus I next got a crystallization of fine, rea rage monoclinic crystals of a reddish-brown color, which I think the analyses, although not perfectly conclusive, still go to show to be a new 342 S. P. Sadiler on Iridium Compounds. compound, Several different crystallizations of it were analysed. Tt could not always be entirely separated from the slight crust of decomposed KCl which separated out along with and among the crystals, Preparation No 1. Large well-formed crystals, with but very little foreign matter adhering to the sides. ‘1567 grms. dried over H,SO, lost by heating to 100° 0170 grms. = 10°85 pr. ct.: gave ‘0525 grms. metallic iridium = 33°50 pr. ct. : gave also 2275 germs. AgCl = -0563 grms. Cl = 35:92 pr. ct. 1610 grms. dried over H,SO, lost by heating to 100° 0172 grms. = 10°68 pr. ct.: gave — Ir, determination accidentally spoiled : AgCl = same. Nor do the percentazes agree with the simple potassic- ethylen iridium protochloride IrCl,C,H,KCl1+2H,0 where the Ir. = 48-45 pr. et. and Cl = 26-19 pr. ct. : If we reckon out the ratio of iridium to chlorine, we find it as 1:6, showing it to be an iridium-chloride compound. The large pr. ct. of loss on heating, the small Ir. and Cl pr. cts., when com- pared with double iridium and potassic chloride, and the lumr nous flame when burned, all go to show that an organic con- ing itself on, we can expect from the consideration of analogous compounds met 3 atoms of the bivalent radical C,H, would hes We would have on this supposition the formula IrCl,(C,H,)s (KCl), + xH,O. Now this formula with 3 atoms H,0 gives Ir. = 32°93 pr. ct., Cl = 35°61 pr. ct., and with 2 atoms H,9, Tr. = 33-95 pr. ct., Cl = 36.71 pr. ct. ; anhydrous it gives In = ce With the rest, as must be the case here, a partial decomposition of the salt enters at 100° alread In another preparation, also well stallized, 1822 grms. dried at 100°» . Ae essen gave 0678 germs, metallic iridium = 37-21 pr.-ct. ; Fave also 3063 grms. AgCl = 0758 grms, Cl = 41°59 pr. as rae. preparation, indistinctly crystallized, 0502 grms- gave 0172 grms. metallic iridium = 34°26 pr. ct. a (Probably low from HCl mechanically ssl ang S. P. Sadtler on Iridium Compounds. 343 In ‘another preparation, also indistinctly crystallized, 3207 grms. dried at 100°: gave ‘2125 grms. AgCl = 1268 grms. Cl = 39°53 pr. ct. It will thus be seen the determinations, all things considered, agree close enough with the theoretical pr. cts. of the formula to make it very probable. The want of enough sufficiently- well crystallized material prevented me from making an organic combustion which might settle it definitely. Several individual crystals of the first crystallization were very sharply and clearly formed, and I subjected them to examination under the microscope with a power of about 50 diameters. The faces were clearly to be made out. ey be- long to the monoclinic system, and their prevailing habitus in crystallization is a combination of the two lateral pinacoids with positive and negative pyramids accompanied by one mac- todome on the ends. The faces observed in an examination of five distinct crystals were (according to Naumann) «Po. ePo +P.—P.4¢P.-¢P.4+Pa.-Po In considering the compounds of the iridium-base with NH,Cl, we find again a mixture of crystallized salt: Preparation No. 1 consisted of sharply crystallized needles that looked almost black, and only by transmitted light showed a brownish-green color. ey were also monoclinic. _ On analysis they prove, I think, to be the sought-for ethylen- indium compound. i ‘0713 grms. dried over H,SO, lost on heating to 100° 0029 r. ct: gave “0850 grms. AgCl = 0210 grms. Cl = 29-49 pr. ct. or = 28°98 pr. ct., H,O —'4-89, or anhydrous 30°47 pr. ct. Cl. Parton ‘No 2 was of much smaller needles and of lighter color. c Analyses show it to be of very similar composition to the potassium salt described above. ‘1207 grms. dried at 100° C. : gave 0495 grms. ie Age i. = Fe = pr. ct. = ve also -2068 germs. AgCl = ‘0512 grms. Ul — il, (C my, (NHL.Cl), = 502 gives Ir. = 39°20 pr. ct. and Cl = 49-43 pr. ct., and supposing it to lose s thi aoe hos 100°, as stated above, Tel (C.H .) (NH, Cl), would give Ir. = e other two preparations of the ammonium salt — appeared under the lens to be mixtures of the iridium proto- 344 J. Henry on the Construction of Laghtning-rods. chloride-ethylen salt and the iridium chloride-ethylen salt given above. The results were— ‘1322 grms. dried at 100°: gave 0609 grms. metallic iridium = 46°07 pr. ct. 1715 ere. dried at 1 ‘0784 grms. Ses iridium = 46°95 pr. ct. el, ( (C,H (NH, Cl) + H,O gives Ir. = 53°61 pr. ct. IrCl, (Cl, H,), (N NH ,Cl), gives Ir. = 39°25 pr. ct. The existence of the base iL TU EL). I ae to settle definitely by renewed analyses of larger quantit While engaged with the preparation of the ethylen and iridium compound, the thought of the possibility of acetylen (C,H,) ‘uniting with PtCl, or IrCl, led me to make some experiments in that direction. After 2 number of endeavors to form a platinum salt and analyses of the abate (a detailed account of which is given in the original paper), I obtained : negative results only. The existence of such a salt is highly = improbable. Art. XLV.—Directions for Constructing Lightning-Rods. From Essays on Meteorology; by Prof. JosspH HENRY.” to very combustible eae et fire to ed. It “Te should be, through its whole length, in aptiret ol continuity; as many pieces should be joined together by yee ing as practicable, and, when other joinings are unavoidab 6 me they sig aes be made b screwing the parts firmly pe. y cae a coupling ing taken to make the upper ©? tion hy ae tase stony with the rod water-tight by cement, solder, pai | 3d. To secure it ee rust, the rod should be covered win ae cite of black pain . 1S ee J. Henry on the Construction of Lightning-rods. 345 4th. It should be terminated above with a single point, the cone of which should not be too acute, and to eee it from the weather, as well as to prevent its being melted, should be th. The shorter and more direct the rod is in its course to the earth the better. Acute angles, made b bending the rod, and projecting points along its course, should be avoided. 6th. It should be fastened to the house by iron eyes, and may be insulated by cylinders of glass. We do not think the lat- ter, however, of much importance, since they soon become wet by water, and, in case of a heavy discharge, are burst asunder. 7th. The rod should be connected with the earth in the most a buried in the moist ground. Pit should, before it descends to the earth, be bent, so as to pass off nearly at right angles to the side of the house, and be buried in a trench, surrounded with powdered charcoal. a. a 8th. The rod should be placed, in preference, on the west side of the house, in this latitude, and especially on the chimney from which a current of heated air ascends during the summer Season, 9th. In case of a small house, a single rod may suffice, pro- vided its point be sufficiently high above the roof; the rule 346 J. Henry on the Construction of Laghtning-rods. - being observed, that its elevation should be at least half of the distance to which its protection is expected to extend. It is safer, however, particularly in modern houses, in which a large mou we a inclosed, as it were, in a case of iron rods so connect e earth, would be safe from the direct action of the light- ning. 10th. When a house is covered by a metallic roof, the latter h ning rods; and in this case the perpendicular pipes conveying the water from the gutters at the eaves may be made to act the es better, with the gas or water-pipes of the city. In this case, : ns} A ores survey should be made, and the best form of protection og which the peculiar circumstances of the case dmi R. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper, ete. 347 Art. XLVIL—The Paragenesis and Derivation of Copper and its associates on Lake Superior ; by RAPHAEL PUMPELLY, [Continued from pages 188 and 258.] Chalcocite, Bornite, Whitneyite, Domeykite.-—Two fissure-veins | e 0 a perficially ; but it is a remarkable fact that the amygdaloids traversed by these veins contain only native copper. One of the fissure- short distance. The gangue of these veins is quartz, calcite and a carbonate of lime containing some iron and magnesia— ankerite ? The only other instance I have observed of the occurrence of copper in combination with pea og is in the fissure-vein of erever this vein has been opened or uncovered, along the greater part of its course, north of the Mendota property, only nave copper has been found; but when it enters a bed of con- glomerate on the north flank of Mt. Bohemia, the little copper it contains is combined with sulphur in a very pure chalcocite. Where the vein passed from the conglomerate into the underly- mg amygdaloid, a fine deposit of chalcocite with calcite was found whave been formed, for a short distance, on both sides of the vein, between the two beds. _ Still farther south the vein enters a mass of syenite, consist- ing of a pink triclinic feldspar, some hornblende and much chlorite, as an alteration-product of hornblende, and containing bornite, Excepting the syenite, wherever copper 1s found in traps and amygdaloids on the Mendota property, it is in the Phe sacurhinss of the sulphides and arsenides of Copper in this isolated manner and in fissure-veins traversing * Prof. , after a casual examination of this mineral, suggests that it is domorph of chalcocite after ite. ; — Serres, Vox. II, No. 11.—Nov., 1871. 348 R. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper rocks more or less impregnated with metallic copper, seems to show a diversity of origin for the sulphur and arsenic on the one hand, and the copper on the other. It does not seem unreason- able to suppose the copper to have entered the vein-fissure from the gute rocks in solution, as carbonate, sulphate or sili- cate, and to have been then precipitated by sulphureted hydro- the Mendota vein traverses syenite, cuprite must have been formed by the oxydation of chalcocite or of native copper, and the oxide must have been subsequently decomposed by sulphu- reted hydrogen. ; The Huronian formation, which probably underlies all this region, contains in its upper members large amounts of carbon- aceous matter in the form of graphite; the gases may have orig- inated in a reduction of sulphates and arseniates by the carbon of these beds. pear cavernous, 10 per cent or more of the substance being This is the BOR Pei of this porphyry in the freshest pebbles. I have before me a pebble 4 inches in diameter, broke through the middle. It was the same variety of porphyty a have just described—the same brown matrix, with the sam grain : often enclosing crystals of triclinic . fiss the surfaces of the fissures are covered with a soft light and its associates on Lake Superior. 349 visible in the holes in the altered feldspar, and the cleavage planes often glisten with flakes of copper. As we go further chloritic mineral, which whitens before the blow-pipe, and fuses on the edges to a grey glass. A little further from the center there is no longer a trace of the porphyry matrix: it is altered wholly to chlorite. The feldspar crystals are somewhat more altered here than they are in the middle of the pebble, but the quartz grains seem to have been in part replaced by chlorite. The change to chlorite is accompanied throughout by the pres- ence of a large amount of copper. While in the interior of the pebble, the flakes of copper are confined to the cleavage planes of tne feldspar, and the orphyry matrix exhibits scarcely a ce of the metal, the oe which has replaced the matrix contains in different parts of the specimen from 10 to 60 per cent, by weight, of copper. : tn another pebble of the same porphyry, not only is the ori- ginal matrix gone, but the usurping chlorite has been almost, if not wholly, replaced by copper; and we have as the remark- able result 4 quartz-porphyry, whose crystals of feldspar and Stains of quartz lie in a matrix of metallic copper. There is still a very small amount of chlorite resent, but it seems to have come from the change of the feldspar crystals and quartz and dirtier brown than in the previous cases, which may be due to the — of manganese in the alteration product t Zatio _ The entire pebble is permeated with minute —s threads and plates of carbonate of lime. The lighter-col portion ©ontains considerable copper, while nearer the surface of the Pebble it is largely replaced by that metal. Pebbles showing the various alterations described above are by no means rare. Many of them, from 1 inch to 1 foot in diameter, are found every day. é IIL Conclusions. : We may be permitted to draw a few conclusions from the | facts brought out in the observations thrown together in the _ “Fegoing pages. 350 he. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper taining the most chlorite, and occurring both diffused and con- centrated in seams, appears to have been formed either contem- poraneously with the chlorite, or as the next step in the rocess, The next step appears to have been the individualization, in amygdaloidal cavities, of non-alkaline silicates, viz: laumontite prehnite, epidote respectively, according as the conditions favored the formation of one or the other of these. ; Following these came the individualization of quartz in these cavities. s Perhaps we may be warranted in considering these minerals, together with the lime of the calcite that more rarely occurs 12 this portion of the series, as chiefly due to the decomposition of the pyroxenic ingredient of the rock. So far as we may infer from the tabulated results, the con- centration of c in the amygdaloidal cavities does not ap- pear to have begun till after the formation of the quartz. _, In this part of the series falls also the formation of a chloritic or green-earth mineral, which in some manner has displaced prehnite, quartz, calcite, and with which copper, when preset! appears to stand in intimate relation. Subsequently to this came the individualization of the alkaline silicates, viz: anal cite, apophyllite, orthoclase. Here also seems to belong the formation of datolite. BC The alkaline silicates represent the period of decom pares ary minerals, is proof that carbonic acid was very gene nA present throughout the whole period of metamorphism ; It cit probably the chief mediating agent in the processes, without ing sufficiently abundant to prevent the formation of alice : change of pyroxene to chlorite, as illustrated 02 the oe scale na on e formation of the melephyte a __by sp ent of fe and quartz—quartz-porphyty chlorite as exhibited tie pabbice ot the pi pase pont & an ssoanaay Mi oma line of Oe ag for the rane geologist. alteration of the pebbles appears to have and us associates on Lake Superior. 351 | seem that the direction was determined by the presence or re- | lative freedom from free carbonic acid. The deposition of cal- | _ cite, if formed from the acid carbonate, would set sufficient ‘) carbonic acid to prevent the formation of silicates of iron and | ‘Magnesia and there in the less amygdaloidal melaphyr in minute specks * nd impregnations, or even in a more concentrated form as thin __ Sheets occupying the joint-cracks. ee These occurrences increase in frequency in proportion as the rock is more amygdaloidal; in other words, the copper is more concentrated in those portions of the beds where the chemical change has been greatest. Where the rock has not passed be- yond the strictly amygdaloidal stage, the copper occurs in the amygdules traversing these in flakes, or coating them ina film of greater or less thickness, to such an extent as toform from % per cent to 3 per cent by weight of the rock over considerable areas. Finally, in those beds where the ——— has proceeded such an extent as to wholly replace large portions of the amygdaloid by secondary minerals, epidote, calcite, quartz, chlorite, laumontite, etc., there the copper occurs in masses of many pounds, and sometimes of several tons weight, and in forms equalled in their irregularity only by those of the masses of secondary minerals accompanying the metal. ee In each and all of these positions we find that the deposition of _ the copper took place subsequently to the decomposition and Temoval of a portion of the rocks, and subsequently to the de- Position of laumontite, epidote, prehnite, and quartz, where nese accompany it. ; n all this we have direct evidence of the movement of Some salt of copper in wet solution, and the concentration of the metal by accumulating deposition in places where the preci- Pitating agent exis _ The Quebee group, to which these rocks belong, and whic Consist in various places of undoubted sedimentary strata ex- hibiting every degree of metamorphism, 1s as strongly charac- = by copper as the Galena limestone is by Except in th — e melaphyrs of Lake Superior, the copper, so widely diffused in the crab of the Quebec group, exists either 352 R. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper in the various suphurets, or as oxidation products of these. Indeed we cannot well suppose the copper to have been deposit- ed in submarine formations in any other condition than as sulphuret. Nor can we suppose it to have taken any other form permanently, so long as unoxidized organic matter remain s. An oxidation of the sulphuret would be followed by reduction of the resulting sulphate to new sulphurets around the organic remains. In this way we may suppose the simplest and most common form of concentrated deposits _ —the impregnations—to have originated, as well as the farther enrichment of particular beds or zones—fahlbands—which may represent strata which were originally richer in organi¢e sub- — or which may have retained these longer than the other s. e But the general diffusion of copper through the varied rocks of the Quebec group, speaks for a marine origin for the metal in these traps. It should seem probable that the copper the melaphyrs was derived by concentration from the whole thick- ual processes association of sulphur with copper in crystalline rocks, rende it See probable that this was here also the combination ™ which the ially C00 trated. Traces of sulphur detected by Mr. Hochstetter and its associates on Lake Superior. 353 was effected, should seem to be limited to silicates, carbonates, and sulphates of copper. Probably all of these combina- tions took part in the process, but while we may consider the translocation of the copper to have been initiated by the sul- phate, this salt must have been so soon decomposed by the abundant acid carbonate of lime* as well as by the alkaline sili- cates, that we cannot readily suppose the sulphatet to have generally effected the final concentration of large deposits. It 18 more probable that this was accomplished by the more per- _ manent solutions of carbonate and silicate of copper respectively, . as the circumstances favored. e position of the metallic ~ before those which were formed by the destruction of the ‘8 a A per could not, therefore, take place until the esa had so ar disappeared as to leave a relative excess 0: pared with the amount of ferrous salts exposed to a higher oxi- dation. Throughout its deposits the copper exhibits a decid- edly intimate connection pr favored by copper. This association is so invaria intimate that one is forced to the conclusion that there exists a close genetic relation between the metallic state of the copper and the ferric condition of the iron oxide in the associated sili- cates; that the higher oxidation of the iron was effected ugh the reduction of the oxide of copper and at the expense of the oxygen of the latter. : As regards the green-earth and that variety of chlorite or del- €ssite which is intimately associated with the copper, they either immediately follow the copper in point of age or are contempo- 3 very thin sheets of copper from the jointing- * A coating of gypsum covering : Cracks of the ae we contiguous to the conglomerate, may be due to this decomposition, followed by the reduction of the coppe: Compare Bischof u, Phys. Geol., I, p. 52, i ) oi and III, p. 716. a ; The result of this oxidation is seen in the brick-red color of the amygdaloids in the brown color and spots of many of the melaphyr beds. 354 h. Pumpelly—Paragenesis of Copper, ete. raneous with it, and they may be looked upon as having been formed under the influence of this reduction. Where cop predecessor, as in the pseudomorphs after some mineral (clay?) after laumontite. e , and in some places, as in portions of the Hecla — sare umet mines, it is wholly replaced by it; copper forming “shiel 50 per cent, by weight, of the rock. In these instances ¢1 ckel, etc., from the deposits of the trappean series, while they are present in the less metamorphosed rocks o ted; an intensity which m vy t which the process of concentration has been carried. pa tration is a process of removal relatively speaking and wee nid trated deposits are accumulated masses of material arres : the drainage channels of rock masses by the action of compe hoe th s . Hf. Morton on the color of Fluorescent solutions. 855 Now, copper and silver belong to a class distinct from the | _ baser metals in that, by reason of their smaller affinity for oxy- ! gen, they are more readily reduced to the metallic state, the condition of greatest permanence in presence of the usual rea- gents to which they are exposed. If the arresting cause of these metals was, as we have supposed, their reduction by pro- _ toxide of iron, it is a cause which would have been powerless as regards the salts of the baser metals, and we may suppose __ these to have continued in solution till they reached some re- gion where they were arrested by the presence of organic mat- ter, or of sulphureted hydrogen, ete. Arr. XLVIL— Observations on the color of Fluorescent solu- tions—No. IL; by Henry Morton, Ph.D., President of the Stevens Institute of Technology. SINCE the publication of my article on the above subject, in the August number of this Journal, I have discovered a curi- ous action which, while it in no respect affects my general con- clusions, nor the main observations on which they were founded, Ws out one of the corroborative experiments by which I thought that they might be established when a spectroscope Was not at hand. Obtaining some very anomalous results of late, I was led to mistrust the action of the Geissler tubes in which the solutions been examined. Late experiments have, however, proved that this was not so. Any liquid, however devoid of fluorescent properties, gives all - “Re of fluorescing in these tubes, and on a little Tn passing from the glass to air, most of the light will suffer tal reflection at the oer surface of the glass, but if water or 856 HI. Morton on the color of Fluorescent solutions. any other liquid is substituted for the air, its greater refracting power (approaching that of glass) will diminish the above named action, so that much more of the light will reach the eye. The truth of this explanation was supported by the ob- servation that the nearer the index of refraction in the liquid came to that of glass, the brighter was the light seen through it, while a liquid of higher refraction, like carbon bisulphide, seemed a little to weaken the effect by diffusion. his fact renders of no account the observations before made on filtered and diluted solutions of turmeric, but a fresh obser- vation with the spectroscope on tubes free from fluorescence has fully confirmed my former conclusions as to the true color of fluorescence in this liquid. creasing, however, the quantity of cosmoline oil until its color begins to take effect, the tint of the fluorescence gradually changes to a ric By a little care a blue solution may be superposed on a green One in the same tube. _ Another semi-solid preparation of cosmoline, which has a very light color, gives a solution with benzine fluorescing of a mag nificent blue. I have this substance now under investigation, and hope soon to be able to make some further observations upon it. h Returning to the solutions of turmeric, I have found that yet fluorescent body in that substance is not its essential oil nor ™% brown coloring matter, but either the yellow coloring es itself, or something so closely allied to it in solubility that have thus far been unable to effect an separation. — ts In connection with this, let me say that Iam much indebted en Mr. Robt. F. Fairthorne, of Philadelphia, who has aided a greatly in the preparation of the various constituents of turmeM’ In a state of purit ee ‘1 my former paper I mentioned that uranium nitrate in 8” lution gave a very faint fluorescence. re ___*Mr. Houghton tells me that “cosmoline ” is prepared from crude petroleum chennie nin vacuo and filtration through animal charcoal only | a Se RT te ees Oe ae ee eee Oe ee ee A. E. Verrill—Distribution of Marine Animals, etc. 357 This appearance I now find was due entirely to the above explained action of the tube, and a number of carefully con- Art. XLVIIL.—Brief Contributions to Zoiilogy from the Museum of Yale College. No. XVI.—On the Distribution of Marine Animals on the southern coast of New England; by A. E. VERRILL. IN connection with the investigations concerning the fisheries under the direction of Professor S. F. Baird, U. S. Commis- sioner, thorough explorations of the adjacent waters were undertaken in order to ascertain the character of the bottom, and the distribution of the lower animals, especially of those that furnish food for certain fishes. ‘The Fish Commission had its headquarters at Wood's Hole, Mass., situated on the point of land between Vineyard Sound and Buzzard’s Bay. In addi- Hon to the shore collections, extensive and systematic dredging a adapted to soft muddy bottoms; an iron ch un- Taveled ropes, or “tangles,” were attached for use on bottoms; a trawl-net; surface towing-nets for swimmin * The dredgings in the first part of the season were made under the direction of eS Seats pnd lene rid saben J. E. Todd, Professor A. Hyatt, Dr. A. S. and the writer, all more or less aided at various times by other naturalists, and especially by Dr. W. G. Farlow, who : t Some st Ouse Gnkremtates it be described in a future number of this Journal. 358 =A. B. Verrill—Distribution of Marine Animals od, are occupied chiefly by southern forms, or the Virginian fauna, the deeper channels and the central parts of Long Island out much change in the depth. And equently there must if Vuelos: dis middle of Stream, as shown y the occurrence of southern forms of pelagic animals in their waters. si which is rarely found north of Cape Cod. But in nearly 7 other respects the littoral fauna is very similar to that of the Tr “a oy, and especially for the absence of rocks south of New ork. In Vineyard Sound and Buzzard’s Bay the water is every- where shallow, usually from 8 to 8 fathoms deep, and rare é exceeding 12 or 14 fathoms, even in mid-channel. In Vie yard Sound i species of compound ascidians, growing in large m One of tl which forms large hemispherical or a masses, made up of an tion of long slender colonies; ‘United together at their bases and usually thickly covered SS ee ae eS ee a oe ete te > ee Ieee ee ee agen Se on the Southern Coast of New England. 359 throughout with sand, is very abundant, ae entirely filling the dredge with masses up to six inches in diameter. This is the Amouroucium pellucidum Verrill. Keaas one, nearly as abundant, forms smooth, cartilaginous masses in the form of flat lobes, crests, and plates, sometimes two feet long and about an inch thick, the surface covered with stellate colonies, while the color of the masses is of a delicate bluish or sea- green tint by reflected light, although yellow by sransmnsitep light. This is oa eg stellatum V., described wit e last in a for- mer number of this Journal. A_ third ae of the same ale is also common, although still undescribed. This forms ooth gelatinous masses, varying from light orange to pale Glowict in color, with beautifully stellated colonies over its upper surface. With these were several simple ascidians, chiefly Cynthia partitat Stimp., and Molgula Manhattensis V., while creeping over them was a beautiful green species o f Pero- phora,t which is the first representative of the social ascidians discovered on our coast. This species also occurred in abun- dance on the piles of the government wharf at Wood's Hole, associated with the three last named. In the interstices of A. pellucidum were numerous annelids of several species, and grow- ing upon or with the ascidians were many species of hydroids, bryozoa, and sponges. Among the sponges a massive sulphur- yellow species (Spongia sulphurea Desor) is very conspicuous. While young this species perforates and destroys dead bivalve shells, but later in life grows up into hemispherical or irregular masses, Span sh the same bottoms were found the common south- iculata, L. dubi ‘1, Eupagurus pos E. etn and many other less ore on species. On rocky and stony bot- toms, and especially i in the tide-way of the channel at Wood's *A . nov. Masses thick, turbinate, often encrusting, Surface latinous, translucen usually “convex, smoo stance , gelatinou than in A. sake. Syste oth, subst circular, oval ing eg often elongated, or irregular and complex. Zodids much elongated, slender, the branchial tube short six rounded lobes. sac e lor of the masses usually light red, va raat and pale flesh-color; the orifices maa wine, tines Zo6i erally orange-yellow; the orifices and usually flesh-color or pale yellow, sometimes bright orange; stoma: glandular ribs; mantle — pew opaq oo a | Cynthia stellifera V. proves to be a depressed vari ‘ it ae ae nov. Individuals small, about ‘10 to “12 of an inch high, connected by slender stolons, and , covering the surfaces over which they creep. Test compressed, seen from the siiaacarnely kinins team boo S™ elliptical, or subcircular, often one-sided or distorted, with a short pedicle or ne’ Sessile at base. Branchial orifice large, terminal; anal lateral or subterminal, @ litle prominent, with ais 16 angular lobes, — Fee r and smaller. Test beautifully reticulated with bright yellowish green 360 A. E. Verrill—Distribution of Marine Animals Hole, the southern purple sea-urchin (Echinocidaris punctulata), the orange star-fish (Cribrella sangwinolenta), the green star-fish, the coral (Astrangia Dane), and many other interesting species occurred. All the species referred to, excepting the widely _ diffused species of Cribrella and Amphipholis, are either charac- lometra quinquecirra were common, and both frequently gave shelter to several young “butter-fishes” (Poronotus a acanthus) of all sizes, from those just hatched up to two inches or more in length. In some cases twenty or more were foun together under one jelly-fish. They also occurred, in the even ing, under. Zygodactyla Greenlandica earlier in the season. The “ Portuguese-man-of-war ” (Physalia arethusa) was met with sev- eral times. Two Pteropods not before recorded from the Unt different from that of the sounds and bays, and closely resem bles that of Massachusetts Bay and the coast of Maine. The difference in the temperature of the water is also well-marked. The surface temperature, during the latter part of August, wer 69° to 71° in Vineyard Sound. On Sept. 9th, in the mouth Vineyard Sound, west from Gay Head, the surface temperatule was 67° F., and the bottom, in 154 fathoms, was 63°; but pro _* This and Lytechinus vari. were found by the writer, Mr. 8. L Smith, pologny E. — at Great Wee 1 rbor, N. a last a but they are very > ye TP ee ee ee eRe, oe A a eee heer) ee, mat ’ sachusetts Bay. on the Southern Coast of New England. 361 ceeding about two miles farther out, off No-mans-land, the sur- face temperature was 62°, and the bottom, in 18 fathoms, was 583°, showing a decrease of 5° within this short distance, both at the surface and bottom. A few miles farther out, at the same depth, the bottom temperature was 57°, which was the low- est temperature obtained. A short distance west of No-mans- land, on a gravelly bottom in 11 fathoms, where cod-fish are caught in winter, the temperature was 63° at the surface and 59° at the bottom. Off the mouth of Narragansett Bay, about sixteen miles south from Newport, the depth over a limited area 1s 29 fathoms, which was the deepest water found. At this locality the surface temperature was 62° and the bottom 59°. The bottom, in these deeper waters, was generally composed of soft mud, filled with innumerable tubes of worms and Amphi- crustacea, among which a species of Ampelisca, which makes a soft flabby tube, two or three inches long and covered with mud, is extremely abundant. At the last named locality humerous specimens of the rare and beautiful Hpizoanthus Amer- tcanus V. was found coating the shells inhabited by hermit-crabs (Eupagurus Bernhardus) and finally absorbing the shells en- tirely. This remarkable Actinian has been found previously only on two occasions,—first on a deep bank off the coast o New Jersey, by Capt. Gedney ; and since in deep water off Mas- With this was also found a rare Holothurian (Molpadia otilitica), previously known only from specimens taken m fish stomachs. nella glandula, Modiolaria nigra, M. corrugata, Pecten tenuicosta- va (you = P.f iach abe ag undulatum, Chrysodo- mus pygmeus (large and abundant), Crucibulum striatum, Mar- garita obscura, Cylichna alba; of ANNELIDS, Clymene torquata Leidy, Ophelia simplex Leid ta sp., Sternaspis fossor, ‘ iv? Trophon a —? Aphrodite aculeaia (large aa common), Nephthys (large species), SMpunculus Bernhardus, and species of vereis, Lumbriconereis, Aricia, ete. ; of CRUSTACEA, species of Ampelizca (abundant), 862 Scientific Intelligence. Unciola trrorata, and several other Amphipods, Crangon vulga- ris, Pandalus annulicornis. On sandy bottoms Lichinarachnius parma was very abundant, as it was, also, everywhere in the attributed to Stonington, that all these northern species pis’ obtained by him from the stomachs of haddock, ie, whiel ithi i his wo far westward as that locality, beyond which its influence has not yet been traced. er SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I CHEMISTRY AND Puysics. 1, On nitrous and hyponitric acids,—Hasenpace has repeated fo: arsenous by nitric acid. By como, ing these vapors, Nylander obtained a ee liquid boiling at 13 4 which appeared to have the formula N@,, and therefore t0 isomeric with hyponitric acid. Hasenbach employed an appara onstructed entirely of glass, and dried the liquid product * This Journal, I, vol, xlviii, 1845. Fe re ere a en A eee Chemistry and Physics. 363 tained ‘sem to boil at 2° c giving ‘off much nitric o ; the thermometer then rose rapidly to 10°C. ; sa een 10° a ed 13° of nitrous and eons nitric aci , is form (2.) Hyponitric acid and nitric oxide unite at a high tempera- ture to form nitrous acid, which may in this manner be prepared pericalt 3.) Hyponitric acid and eh under the same circumstances unite to form chloronitric acid, N (4.) Bromonitrie acid, N 6B, aon not be obtained pure by this process, as the product is decomposed b = Tait and Sepia acid do not combine at a high tem- -) Chlorin with one acid, or do so only to a very limited extent. neoes = and oxygen unite at ordinary temperatures to rm hyponit “(@,) Eaipharous: aan and carbonic oxide unite with hyponitric acid, even at a low temperature, to form compounds not further Investicated. All these facts speak in favor of the assumption that the mole- cule of fluid hyponitric acid is Ne: ; that of the vapor above ad ,» on the contrary, NO2.— ournal Sir prakt. ine: Band rs P. 1. Cow Series. G. mann may contain ammon intel salt i is to be evaporated ina ethene Vessel, not quite te dryness; a larger quantity of ! = -Monic oxalate is then to paminel dk tie whale heated to perfect Am. Jour.,Scr.—Tuirp Series, Vo. I, No. 11.—Nov., 1871. 24 364 Scientific Intelligence. point and filtered. The magnesia remains on the filter as carbon- ate, while the alkalies are present in the filtrate as carbonates per- ia epe must of course be so pure as to leave no residue on ignition. In the presence of sulphuric acid the method is not applicable, proba- diethyl anilin, methylic or ethylic aleohol and chlorhydrate of anl- lin being heated together. In this reaction, however, other. prod- ucts are formed at the same time with the salts above mentioned, and these have been examined by Hofmann and Martius, who operated upon very large quantities of material, repeating the pro cess twice in succession upon the same material. The very €,H N. HO} “Fe loxe'H, tN. Hcl+it} © H 1st phase. once Hs ot .H € 6 €"H; (N. Hol} OH loe'H; tN HOL+H | | ot © H a ©,H, (€H,) €'H, INHOLy- Hs loxe'Hs "{N-BOl4y | © 8 €H €,H,(€H,) pa OB ) gee }s.nto4- loxe'H? = n.Hol+ pf? € H, y € ihe A It can, however, scarcely be doubted that methylic chloride a water are always formed first, and that methylic chloride is the # oe of substitution. In the basic oils submitted to exa ‘aime authors discovered besides dimethyl anilin four other oe mn aa A a a i as “oRULd py, : Chemistry and Physics. 365 thylated monamines—namely, dimethylated toluidin, xylidin, cu- midin and cymidin; in symbols the compounds: Dimethyl— *1s €,H Anilin, eH), LN, = (CH Toluidin, (OTH), |N= (ern), ) EN, Xylidin, Gstle Lm Gope(OMsde Ly Camidin, (6°94), lN=G n° 3)s LN, Cr «St, = om The terminal member of this group is still wanting, and would have the formula o(CH,), nay Gy eet (CH) a poreny sylidin Prison with the coe but only one isomeric hit. Thus we already know a solid and a fluid modification of toluidia, By treatment with methylic iodide, solid toluidin yielded a dimethyl base, which in many respects resembled that mentioned above, but which yet did not appear to be certainly identical with ) i I derived from a bases ap- it, although the tertiary monamines peared to exhibit no differences whatever. The ors promise a further i investigation of the whole subject, and shemale will look with the greatest interest for their re ence Chem. Gesellschafi, Jahrgang iv, p. 7 4. On the derivatives of hydric Powphide which Sindee to ethylamin and diethylamin.—A. W. Hormann pone succeeded in , P ae 2H,I+2Ph,I4+-Zn0 = 2P(€,H,)H; 14 Znl,+0H,. In a a certain quantity of diethyl phosphin is always f formed, th reaction being expressed by the equation: 2€,H “LLPH, I+Zn0 =P(€,H,),H.1. Zul, O8,. The tertiary and quaternary derivatives of ———— _ not formed in this reaction. These, Hofmann already shown, might be obtained D the action of the aechate themselves on phosphonic iodide. The e separation of the mono- and di- compounds 366 Scientific Intelligence. is very easy. Water readily decomposes the first, setting the The Il. GkoLtogy Anp NaturaAu History. 1. Note on an Apparent Violation of the Law of Regular gressive debituminisation of the American Coal beds coming : . Lestey. (Proce. Am. Phil. Soc., xii, p. 125, 1871.) y OYJ. : —In the course of a Geological survey of certain lands in ee d. he Many years old, and several hundred feet from the outerop, under high hill cover, at a point on the western border of the d Bituminous Coal Basin of Pennsylvania, near the Mar land ap Virginia State line. More properly we should say that the bag ‘ of the First Basin. For os Negro Mountain anticlinal comes up from Virginia and 5P the First Basin into two in Pennsylvania. The Mountaip ” down at Castleman’s River; but the anticlinal axis Tup* Geology and Natural History. 367 northward. The First Basin is similarly split into two, east of Johnstown, by the Viaduct anticlinal, which may or may not be an actual prolongation of Negro Mountain. my report to the owners of the property will suffice. The accom- panying map shows the Backbone of the Alleghany passing by Altoona. This is the eastern edge of the First Bituminous Coal asin. The two Connellsville enclose the Second Bituminous Coal Basin of Penn- sylvania. The Third, Fourth and Fifth lie west of it, and the Sixth occupies the northwest corner of the map; no mountains Separating the last four. [The map referred to is here omitted ]. The property surveyed, in this instance, lies in my old tramping and camping ground of 1840, during the fifth year of the State Geological Survey. The report which Mr. James T. Hodge and myself made to Mr. H. D. Rogers, Chief of the Survey, may be found recorded in the Fifth Annual Report (1841), pages 89-92, which I will here recapitulate in the descending order of the beds, for convenience of comparison. ¢ Pittsburg bed, I, has been eroded from the whole country between the Alleghany Mountain and Chestnut Ridge (at Con- nellsville and Blairsville) except two hill tops; one near Salis- ury, and the other near Ligonier. It is possible also that a third exception may be discovered in the high hill country south of Johnstown, where a conspicuous bench runs along the hill-tops for several miles. : ’ : Limestone 20 feet below I, 6 feet thick in the Ligonier Basin. Coal bed H, 50 feet below I, 3 feet thick in the Ligonier Basin; 1 foot thick in the Salisbury Basin. os : oal bed G, 100 feet below H, 14 feet thick in the Salisbury Basin; encircles the highest hill-tops in the Ursina Basin with Conspicuous bench. Fort Hill is not quite high enough to have it. b . : mM the Salisbury Basin. It forms the high terrace of the Fort Hill. k. 368 Scientific Intelligence. Coal Bed, 22 feet below Limestone, on west bank of Castleman’s river, ¢ mile above Zook’s Run ford, and on North Fork at old ing ; carries 5 feet of Shale, containing 1 foot of ore-balls. Coal bed A, 70 feet below B; 22 inches thick, at Shroff’s Bridge over Castleman’s river. Conglomerate ; 30 feet below A; the interval pang massive gis uch was the general scheme of the Coal measures made out —e =] ee) es ° a 5 et et & a) aor) 2 .o® a] nN _ nm a3: “ i) —— — al sO oO 2 ae! ie 2 vcr "Oo rs _ Th = — 4 e details with regard to the region and the beds of rock eh coal are here omitted]. Analyses of specimens frou one of the called the Ferriferous Bed afforded as a mean of two analyses: Volatile matters and water__..__....__.__-- 17°125 Water Miue 6225 5h es ee as — carbon _..-68°535 Ashes Se 14°34 - — from another opening, near the mouth of Brown's ree Sie a or 0°55 Volatile soars! (gas) ee es Wareon (ore). cs ee Sulphur (in ash) pon oe. aaa BEG or a . 15°95 That both the 6-foot and the 3-foot Ursina ae situated at the western limit of the Ist Bituminous Coal Basin, should have only 17 cent. of volatile matters,—not more than the coals of the eidadtey The Somerset Coun s are almost perfectly undisturbed. os coal = vin gangway showe r cent. ne volatile su this is no grvarer than the ree . 0 proper scheme of the rates of debituminization to easting wl to disturbance, can be obtained until all the analyses of each the in sd series of te Measures shall be tabulated apart fi “Ga ting : an ee tne then expect to learn something also res x the int of specific a upon the percentages of ne AH A Conny MASSA. pd Dee ee ig 25 Wig a 2 SnD ae ees Sore ea Geology and Natural History. 369 But in the outset one source of error must be guarded against. The specimens of co: rom which the foregoing ana eng were chters made a recent comm ce to a German eR in which he states his opinion ‘that the westberin of coal depends upon its ability to absorb oxygen, ip binge the hydro-carbons i into water and carbonic acid. eat, say of 375° I’. only 5 or 6 per cent. of the carbon accepts exyaens the rest seems to show little or no disposition to affine with it. The F ro- But w coal, col at ordinary temperature, the aca is 80 > a as to be imperceptible, even after exposure for a tire r € says moisture has no accelerating effect, unless pyrites Herr Grundmann, of Tarnowitz, on the other hand, - recently published elaborate. pg ipesccig i tee the effects exposure on bituminous coals to be mo ous. Coal which oe exposed for nine months lost jifty per ‘eon cof its value as fuel. His con- in connection with Herr Varrenthap , of Brunswick, who prov ed by laboratory phreianye'> that oxidation took place at common “33 phceraars Le ee months sufficed to rob coal, kept uniformly ey Q ° F.) of all vag hag ttn a heat less than that : Fs i proved that the ae was the same in the middle of the heap as at the surface, and reached its maximu absorbs it most rapidly ; that moisture is an bas geo condition ; that coals making, when freshly mined, a firm — coke o good quality, make, after even only eleven days expos either no coherent eoke at all, or coherent coke of quite eda quality. or gas purposes, also, the coal is greatly inju It is evident that these facts have an important bearing on the ve. 2. On the Os wells of Terre Haute, Indiana; by 7... Sreax Hunr. Abstract of a a paper presented to the American Association for the Ne eater of Science, Indianapolis, Aug., 187].—In pre- Vlous publications I have en eavored to show that the that ous petroleum. I have, however, expr ressed the opini : the “pa, sandstones in Pennsylvania are also truly oleiferour. 370 Scientific Intelligence. In a paper read to this Association last year, I showed that the Niagara limestone at Chicago holds impri where the first two formations come together, and according to Professor Cox, where exposed at North Vernon, Indiana, are both equivalent of the Genesee slates, 50 feet. Beneath this, at 4 depth of twenty-five feet, in the underlying Corniferous limestone, ith. of 2,000 feet, but no traces of oil were met with. is_ locality, on the Wabash river, is, according to Prof. Cox, on the line of a gentle anticlinal or uplift which is traced a nie distance to the west of south. The relation of productive oil we . to such anticlinals was pointed out by Prof. Andrews and by my in 1861, - iptum.—In a note in this Journal for Beptenibes ous rocks.” It would have given a more correct jdea of my views, had he cited the words preceding; after maintaining that a primer pal source of the petroleum is in lower rocks, in fact the ime = lagara and Corniferous formations, I added: “ eee however, reason to believe, as I have elsewhere pointed out, t f much of the petroleum, ete.” I there referred to the Geology P. Canada, 1863-66, page 24, where I cite from two papers of 1 * S esley (Amer. Phil. Society, x, 33, 187), and it is from the evr _ dence there Siven by him, and not upon my own observations, SIA Rae gre (eo eM, 7 eM a jt Bead yeast El tag stig ae ed | 4 Geology and Natural History. 371 to Mr. Warner’s remark that while the sand-rocks in question are seen in certain parts to abound in fossil plants, “ they tain nothing from which the petroleum could possibly have been de- rived”, While I have constantly maintained the view held by lower horizon, I am nevertheless not disposed to reject the state- ments of so skilled an observer as Mr. Lesley. Mr. Warner will m an ndstone, nor even from the underlying pyroschists, but tom the still lower limestones of the Niagara and Corniferous ormations M - 3. Su 0. of by G. F. Marrnew, 8q., (Proc. Nat. Hist. Soc. of New Brunswick, April, 1871.)—The i ing conclusions. e present summer climate of a large part of ‘Acadia is ‘i d Lake Supe- . E. Logan, The resemblance in their D. Dana may be quoted in favor of the for- southern New England, which enjoys 372 Scientific Intelligence. 4th. That such portions of the glacier as were pushed over the tops of these hills, or through the narrow valleys between them, conformed in some degree to the slope of the surfaces over whic they moved. e. 4, Remarks on Fossil Vertebrates Srom Wyoming. (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sei. Philad., August 8, 1871.)—Prof. Lerpy remarked that the collections of fossils presented this evening by Drs. J. Van - Carter and Joseph K. Corsos were of unusual interest. They consist of remains mainly of turtles, with those of mammals and crocodiles, and were obtained from the tertiary deposits in the vicinity of Fort Bridger, Wyoming Territory. : The great abundance of remains of turtles, of many species and : ; s the earlier portion of the Tertiary period. Crocodiles and lacer- tian reptiles were likewise numerous. e many mam eal remains found in association with the reptilian fossils mainly al : oming tertiary fauna presents a remarkable contrast with the later faune of the Mauvaises Terres of White River, now living. The carapace has measured about two feet anda et ys Carteri. ; tan he first and second vertebral plates of this species prese? arance, rst is 4 ae : ni ong, 2% inches wide in front, 43 inches near the middle, and % 1s 5 inches long, and 4 inches wide. : The second turtle belongs to the recently characterized ase : but is considerably larger than its associated spe” n described. T Seles tn Ageiag of afoot anda half in length, and is - : ahalf high. The sternum is flat, and about ng. Its pedicles nd ' Geology and Natural History. 373 | are seven inches and a half broad. As in the living Dermatemys, and the sea turtles, they are covered with large scutes, four in number, as in Baena arenosa, The inte rmediate vertebral scutes nches wide. | manner in which the costal scutes join the marginal seutes, and the sternal scutes one another. The species may be named Baena unda z Dr. Carter’s collection also contains some fragments of bones }] ofa large ag settee which are so mutilated as to be hardly charac- teristic. A jaw fragment among them, with the retained fragments alceosy ops mach lar ger th an P. p sus. In absence of other evidence, it r and att, and an inch srg fe peed in front. rter had also sent some fossils to Prof. Leidy, among ) ahah were portions of poe with nearly full series teeth of yrachyus agrarius. This animal is related to the Tapir, Hyra- codon, and Lophiodon. The formula of its dentition is the same as i ‘yr a: 7 molars, 1 cani nd 3 ors. The true molars are like those of Lophiodon, except that the last lower one has a bi-lobed instead of a t Uy cro Apparently the the last rt a and the oe true a ers a vay’ Species of Hyrachyus, which may be n med azimius. ‘TI crown of the last premolar is 74 lines antero-posterior, an transversely. The true molar has measu about 84 lines fore and aft, and 6 lines transversely. The depth of oe} jaw fragment below the true molar is over an inch and a half. Another fossil is a mutilated incisor, indicating a species of Trogosus rather more than half the size of TZ. castoridens, which may be name A fem aludosus, in the collection, exhibits the third abohiaitee heraitcratic of the unequal-toed pa The astragalus of this animal almost repeats that of the living a the remains of Dr. Corson’s collection there is the ee crocodile, but too much m, as shown both by the ieote and by the soundings B74 Scientific Intelligence. executed by the Survey, is covered with a uniform deposit of clay, or clayey mud, usually very soft and bluish or drab m ons. character of the bottom, while below 30 to 40 fathoms, where the Pontoporeia affinis Lindst., at nearly every haul from the y catus, marine species, and were supp ft by Lovén to have been derived from ancient marine species le in the lake basins by the recession of the ocean. The occurrence k . this brief notice. In the shallow waters many interesting y aaity’ 7 ? 6. A. Featherman: Report of Botanical Survey of Southerm and Central Louisiana. Yn sa et Report of the Board of Supervisors of Louisiana State University, for year 1870. New Orleans, 1871.—The Botanical Report, séparately paged, fills 130 pages. Professor Featherman is | Peat on Botany in the us Geology and Natural History. 375 ‘versity, me Professor of Modern Languages. The general matter, _ which makes the principal staple of this Report, is of consider- ses > carping trite. Our attention is concentrated upon the list of new species, twelve in number, which we enumerate, appending the : ; Megane is & maculata L., a pretty well-marked, more t, and smoothish variety, of our southern coast. Sabbati nana is S. gracilis Pursh, a dwarf form, approach- ing S. stellaris. 8. oligophylla i is a slender state of S. gentianoides Ell. Hydrolea leptocaulis is H. ane Gray, Manual, ed. 5. . Ludoviciana is H. ovata Nut Jussicea oydiana is J. repens L. a small form. Tephrosia. angustifolia, from the drawing is probably only t. T. multifiora is T. onobrychoides N won Lilium Lockettii is Crinum Americanum UL. nothera paludosa, for lack of povoet ees and drawing, is not made out. Vitnnen Seminariense is H. nudiflorum Nutt., = is, Leptopoda bra ee Torr. and Gray. G. 7. Dr. Rohrbach on Typha.—Dr. pak ha ch, the shcintierbaiide of Silene, of Berlin, has published a careful revision of the genus hu. “He recognizes 9 species, with 4 sub-species: 7 of the former are found in Europe, and 2 of these also in the territories of the United grat ogee with a sub-species, peculiar to the Warmer parts o Dr. R. has discovered that nad fruits of 7 of the 9 re show The othar ee on which he relies to distinguish the Species are (1) the shape of the stigma, which is linear, spatulate or rhomboid ; (2) the presence or absence of bracts (vari riable in Shape in the same species) at the base of the female flower ; (3) the proportional length of the stigmas, the perigonial hairs, and the j entioned. bracts, at the period of maturity of et (4) the presence or absence a a on the axis of = _ lnale inflorescence ; (5) the pollen, whether in single : penne united re te Seacseical structure of the seed seek: * The specie th adnate pericarp a: T. Lawmanni Lepechin (the earlier ‘name for 7. suet Be Sm.), throughout mi Sogo — Europe and Asia; and 4: stenophylla F. & M. iieniae from aa into I 876 Scientific Intelligence. The shape of the leaves, — a contiguity or distance of the male and female inflorescence, ot furnish very reliable diagnostics. Typha oe Lin., A somanbek the United States to the Pacific, and into Mexi Axis of male inflorescence hairy; pollen grains in 4’s; feasiits Gowns without bracts; stigma lanceolatespatalat, much longer than the perigonial hairs ; leaves flattish Typha sce Ae Lin., in the northern parts of the United States, southward only known in Louisiana. Axis of male inflor- escence hairy; hairs linear; pollen vay ro de female flowers f the ward ; perigon ial hair xed female flowers slightly clavate (not that snifotia H. B K, belon A plate elucidates the differences of structure of the seed coats. n alphabetical index enumerates the names and a baneal ergs and refers them to their proper places. Ii Astronomy. 1. Cordoba Observatory.—The following are extracts from the recent official Report of the Director, Dr. B. A. Gou The Observ: vatory is situated on a height o or parranca, lying to the southeast of the city of Cordoba, at a distance of eight squares from the principal Plaza, and not far from the gardens of the Na- tional Exposition. The ground plan of the edifice consists of a square, divided i. four rooms of 5°8™ a side each; and forming wings to the ©. a two more rooms of 3°6™ "wide sdons 3° pg destin i while in tha north and south direction two cnale towers of 4 meters in diameter serve as prolongations to the mas towers have revolving cupolas, and the whole of the edifice =i & Cross terminated at its four eg eH by as rage fg towers. ade by a of 24°3" from N. toS. The i of the tice towers is 6" on lie toward the E. and for the towers to the NS & Ew el m the United States in June of the last year, with the excep tion of the masonry, which it was necessary to have con ct : = the spot. 1 materials, forming thus ephae ed . were rece Abe in Corsobe in the 3d week 5 in Octo Astronomy. BIT 2g tory. It would not be possible for me to recount here the efficient aid Cordoba. The latter authorized me on my arrival to choose a lot Magnifying power. Not having ordered it early enough, we had hot supposed that it would be finished within the brief time at our dis : I have had the fortune to be able to procure a objective of great excellence, the work of Fitz, a distinguished Optician of New Yor wer has been tried by the astron- x P. cess p : : 1 focal distance of about 3"°63, and is provided with clockwork. ‘t stands upon a pillar of white marble of a height of 1-91", under the revolving dome of the east tower. The small Equatorial has 378 Scientific Intelligence. Germany, who constructed it under the immediate supervision of the inventor himself, Professor Zoellner of Leipsic. This instru- sary apparatus for the study of the light of the southern stars, with directions to turn over to them the apparatus acquired with this sum, or a similar amount may appear to be most con- ise t informed you of the course adopted in this respect. Without loss of time there was commenced a detailed and laborious series of emands is concluded—thanks to the intense application of my i ard is no le orable ? . themselves than us to the new institution. I hope that ye eee concluded and given to the press before gs end °F 0 ompanied by > catalogue of the stars, arranged by constellations, which shall — tine Uranometry,” and no exertion on my part shall be omitted that its publication may be a stamp of honor to the nation, whie path of a higher ci “i _ Ihave found the heavens of Cordoba less serene and more S¥ ject to clouds than I had hoped according to the received data, - Astronomy. 379 have observed and reduced to the maps about 4500 stars between the 10th degree of north declination and the south pole, while the Uranometry of Argelander, which contains all the stars visible without instruments between the north pole and 30° of south lati- tude, contains only 3256 stars. If the Government decides upon vations taken at Cape Town, at Madras, Melbourne and Santiago | will serve for a beginning to this labor, which is designed rather . > tain brilliancy, situated in a given region of the heavens. The same proceeding is successively repeated up to the definitive explo- ration of the entire space between the proposed limits. A simi- lar examination has been made by the German astronomers, e 1¢ National Congress has without solicitation from Dr. Gould Provided for an obseryer’s dwelling upon the Observatory grounds. by which the Observa- 1 use in developing the science of the coun- 380 Miscellaneous Intelligence. President Sarmiento and the Minister of Public Instruction have officially approved the rors and promise to put the insti- tution into relations with the national establishments of public instruction, in pales pi carry on a full system of meteorological observation 2. ‘Hnche'e Comet.—A view of Encke’s comet was obtained at lowing places of the comet, taken from an ephemeris b Glasenapp of Pulkowa, and published in No, 1854 of the ane nomische Nachrichten, may be of interest to observers. a st P 0h Berl mt. AR. Deel. log. dist. to @ log. A. —3,q— nat hm s RS ” Aug. 18 2 8 35°83 +23 32 33-1 0-33419 021013 0°58 Sept. 20 2 01485 30 36 413 0°25522 997354 237 Oct. 21 0 21 52°73 38 54 38-5 0°14690 9°66369 17°10 29 2318 38 54 48-4 0710987 958273 29°47 Nov. 2 22 40 41°93 37 39 10°8 0-08931 9°54811 37°06 6 22 0 21:40 35 16 23-6 0-06716 | 952021 47:80 10 2119 31 44 32-8 0-04317 950100 58°33 14 2041 2649 29% 14 9-9 0-01707 949178 68°63 18 90 5 1 4 26-7 9°98850 949254 77:96 22 19 33 47-49 §=:16.- 86-171 9°95703 950334 85°84 $6. 19: 4:8 1 31:3 9-92215 9°52258 92°19 30 1838 3-4 5 46 17-2 9°88322 954957 97°43 Dec. 4 1813 41°66 + 0 41 12-7 9°83947 9°58379 101°81 16 17:15 19°72 —12 37 13-4 967272 9-72983 111°99 After reaching the ua ag F ipscasn ge 29th, the comet will be too near the sun to ce rved, In to the comet was seen with a lightintansty of 1 1-2. In 1868 it was first seen with a light of 2-2. On the night of Oct. 13th the light was about 10, conting ‘to von ene: s nope 3. Discov new Pla ER of ilk discovered a new planet (117) on the 14th vs Sept. "he was equal in brilliancy to a star of the 11th magnitude. IV. Miscenuanzous Screntiric INTELLIGENCE. 1. Midw y Islands, i in the North Pacific.—It is well koa! that the Havas line of islands is continued beyond Kauai in series of coral islands or atolls, i Bae oss Sli with the high is al to all, m art m to whe rag tay ee N avigation, in December, 1867, of Capt. Wo U.S.N. These three islands are Ocean felons ale 25’ N. and eer 178° 25’ W; Midway o 5 Oe whe in 28° 15’ N. and 177° 20’ W. ; and Pearl and Hermes land in 27° 50’ N. and 175° $0! W Miscellaneous Intelligence. 381 In Brooks Island, which was the best of the three as regards harbor, the encircling reef is 18 miles in circumference. On the west-north-we st side, for three miles, the reef is mostly wanting, there are 3 to 10 fathoms water. At the northwest point iets are breakers ; and then from there, along by the east side, for 4} miles, there is a steep wall of com pact coral rock, of about 5 feet ele evation, and only 6 to 20 feet wide, where examined ; beyond b ] and southwestern sides s, there is again a oousinare ons pr for 43 miles. There is no vegetation along the wall. ether this wall indicates an elevation of the island or not, it is difficult to say. It is more probable that there has been a subsidence of four or five feet, and that the wall is only the ruins of the coral rock that £. onl Sopp cree Welles Harbor—is rather larger than that of Hon- olulu (of Oahu), and as safe, but has not quite as much water on he bar—the depth being from 21 7 16 feet at low water. The entrance between the reefs is 800 feet. On the southwest reef there is a small island, called Middle Behnke Island, whose aon point is 15 feet above the e sea; its vegetation is shrubs and g The lagoon is 2 miles long and 14 miles in its greatest eiith,” “hare are many clumps of coral with a = 2 fathoms over them; but the — rest of the bottom is of white : Turtle abound on the island, gue seals were seen only oceasion- ally. Birds were very numerous, and the oung — were so onthem. There is but Bear guano, and this is cecbably owing to the condition of the Ocean Island is much Tike Brooks, in having a wall of coral rock on its northwest, north and east sides ; the north side reef is at low tide level, There i is no ship aakrence to the lagoon. There i is a The circumference of the reef is 42 miles, the renee: fast to west being 16 miles, and that from north to south 16 mhiles es Eruption “a the Volcano of Colima in June, 1869 ; ;* by Dr. Cuartus RIvus.—To the northwest of the town of Colima rise, Sieve omen mountains, two lofty volcanic peaks, the more easterly, capped with snow, being metres (12,434 feet) in : the (11,745 feet). The latter had an eruption in the year 1818, but Since remained in repose, though thin clouds of smoke have i it. the 12th June, 1869, a dense smoke issued from the crater, and at siebs a bright light was visible at its mouth; detonations * Smithsonian Report, 1869, p. 423 382 Miscellaneous Intelligence. tang like glass, and was vitreous and porous. In the middle of the upheaved mass the movement was strongest; there large clefts and intense light were displayed, while engulfed stones, which were swallowed up in great masses, were followed by a noise 38 ke, someti was ded tended by the constant upheavi g and descent of rocky masses, f smoke. The upper (ancient) crater has a diameter of 150 metres (492 eet), descends in a escent was very toilsome on account of the rolling ee At 3.30 p.m. the horses were reached, and at 9.30 the hacienda San Marcos, where many were waiting to learn the result of the expedition. The report of Orosco was, that the district W% threatened with no danger, as no lava was issuing, and the fissures being open gave no reason to fear any explosion from the tension of confined vapors. Later explorers of the volcano found a fissure Miscellaneous Intelligence. 383 and about three feet in depth, but neither "heat nor vapor issuing June 9 oj—A great a c of the aceite havin ng been measured in Russia ula all the precision which modern methods of observation will admit of, it became an interesting subject to examine the va- riations of the intensity of gravity in the districts traversed by this are, and to compare the progress of those changes with the varia- tions which are observed in the egiperih of gravity determined rvat operations. An extensive series of sacl ulum observations was therefore arranged by the Academy of Sciences of St, Petersburg, to be made at “certain stations between Tornea in Finlan a caenennceeeiae a 5 p=] ret 5’ LE: 4 =. 5 ue P ©, ie°) OQ £8 me Ba) B — o> eS ° wm ® Bg ° ede =| ct a 2 4 ot we ie) aM a a ia") go ca") ? ete ade during the gee of 1865 M. Sawitsch and M. Lenz; those Ta were made in 1866 and 1868 ee. an e results of the csrvatonh ic 1 are given a a Oy dierent cation situated between 65° 51’ and 45° 2 ‘north latitu At Petersburg te length of the aaa at St. . 384 Miscellaneous Intelligence. its length at St. Petersburg according to the relation of the squares of the numbers of infinitely small oscillations which the compar- calculation gives for the length of the simple seconds’ pendulum at St. Petersburg 39°16975 English inches or 441-0319 Paris lines. Assuming this length, we have deduced, as the result of our ob- servations, the values contained in the first three columns of the following table. Length of the Longitude E. Seconds pendulw Errors. Place of observation. Latitude N. from reonwich. in Paris lines. Paris lines. Tornea, 1 36 441-2525 +0°0200 Nicolaistadt, .._... 63 5 33 1 26 26 4411293 —O-0141 St.Petersburg, .... 59 56 30 a. 441-0319 —0-0017 Réval 59 26 37 P39 y 441:0190 +0°0033 Derpet eS 6S aR ae 1 46 54 440°9762 —0-0002 Jacobstadt, ....._- 56 30 3 1 440°8900 —0°0157 aha eee tert 5441 2 14112 0°8353 —0°0001 BM, sd ages 4 62.23 1 40 52 440°7268 —0°0035 Kréménetz, ....__- 0 6 1 42 54 440°6533 +0-0017 aménetz-Podolsk,. 48 4 39 1 46 18 440-5844 + 00160 inchinef; 225 6.1 7 130 1 55 18 440°5278 +0°0030 WAS accesses 45 20 34 1 55 16 4404479 —0-0071 To examine the accuracy of each of the results M. Sawitsch has compared the length of the pendulum observed at each station, with the sovreqonding length obtained from the formule give? in hi e residuals are as given in the fifth column of the preceding table; the sign + denoting that the observed length 18 greater than the calculated length. The sum of the positive residual errors is +-0°0440, and of the negative residual errors —0°0423. age Thus the formula agrees well with the equations of condition. ” ff above any certain traces of those anomalies and of the local cause? which produce them. : “In the work of W. Struve on the are of meridian between the Danube and the Arctic Sea is a detailed discussion of the latitudes of the principal places between the North Cape and the Danube The differences in latitude found directly from the astronomica observations vary only + 1°75 from those deduced from the ge ations. Athough these differences are very much lar ie erro, peer eo ert Gohe tee ere ee i. _ Tested in this subject how strongl Miscellaneous Intelligence. 385 4. Zoological Results of the 1870 Dredging Expedition of the _ “ Norna” off the coast of Spain and Portugal ; b S E There propose, commencing at the lowest animal group, to men) enumerate some of the more important forms taken, adding suc remarks on the characters or connecting circumstances which va including Hyalonema, Dactylocalyx, Aphrocallistes Bocagii, La- oe pupa, and four other species new to science, three out Selig ciatio of its size, and I would here add a few more words in reference I have been afforded the Tr m ced: local tionist’s point of view, this examination has led me to rega d specimens as holding rather the rank of a well-mark remised. c abla of the specimens, now placed side by side in the British useum collection, will, I think, suffice to prove to all those inte- forms are. Meanwhile, the generic name of Pher ay: myself, I still retain, as I consider both Prof. Wyville Thomp- Son’s form and my own to be local varieties of another species 386 Miscellaneous Intelligence. first described by Dr. Leidy of Philadelphia as Pheronema anne, and a letter recently received from Dr, Leidy himself more fully In my description of other sponges belonging to this same Hexactinellate group, read before the Royal Microscopical So- ciety, and published in their “ Transactions” for N ovember, 1870, T have, in creating a new genus and species, Askonena Setuba- lense, erroneously associated Prof. hompson’s name with it as having once pronounced the form to be of vegetable and not zatio i i 7p (Rhabdomina, &e.), and the former being notably abundant m cie ties of Lagena and Cristellaria. Many of these forms are new to science and await description. The Celenterate sub-kingdom has likewise furnished several new and rare forms, including among the latter category an example of Hyalopat amidal: i the rium, first taken sparingly dantly in the Laminarian zone near Setubal, excited our warmest admiration. Nothing can exceed the beauty of the elegant opaline polyps was experimentally stirred up one dark evening, an rilliant umin produced a spectacle too brilliant for words a d . The rting stem appeared always to be the chie seat of these phosphorescent properties, and from thence the scit- tillations traveled onwards to the bodies of the polyps themselves- cime i the supporting stalk, while the individnal polyps, when fully exserted, protruded upwards of an inch-and-a-half from this - and measured as much as an inch in the diameter s Polyzoa were also dredged up from the various , many of which remain yet to be identified; but the allied Miscellaneous Intelligence. 387 ave been presumed to constitute a distinct genus of Tunicata inter se, or otherwise to be the larval conditions of higher forms. My own observations, however, recorded in the last July number of the “ Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science,” have led me to believe that they are the free swimming reproductive zooids of igher Tunicates, bearing the same relation to them as many f n- cluded among these were—Fusus contrarius, a common fossil of the Norfolk crag recently discovered in the living state in Vigo 5. Destruction of the Museum of the Chicago Academy of Sciences—Among the devastations of the great Chicago fire, not in importance was the burning of the Museum of the son, the Curator, says, “it collapsed like a bubble in the intense heat, as did indeed all other ‘fire-proof’ buildings in the city.” Museum contained the largest collection of Crustacea in the world, “filling,” as the same letter says, “ more than ten thousand Jars,” included the very extensive suite of a species, even to the t of all the many new species, gat y Prot J.D. Dana oes Wilkes ieplonios Expedition in the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, the basis of his Report of 1,500 pages m 1855 on that subject ; and also the large collections made by Dr. Stimpson himself in his cruise in the Ringgold Expediti 7 North Pacific, besides his recent collections from the Gulf of Mexico, and specimens from various other sources. ere were also the alcoholic specimens of other invertebrata, obtained ition, and those of Dr. Stim re -Unfortunatel , the Crustacea dredged up by Mr. de Pourtal his late diedigii e itions, these having been sent there fo description and a final report. : 888 Miscellaneous Intelligence. The noise heard in Haddonfield was similarly described by all observers as resembling the dragging of heavy furniture over the was felt at Dupont’s powder mills, where there was not an explo- sion, as has been suggested. OBITUARY. Prrer D. Knieskern, M. D., died at Shark River, New Jersey, on the 12th of September last. He was born at Berne, Albany county, N. Y., June 11,1798. When a boy his love of nature and of books was such that his father despaired of making 4 far. mer of him, and he consequently, but with great difficulties, found his way to a liberal education. He took his medical degree about the year 1829 or 1830, at Fairfield (College of Physicians and — geons of the Western District,) N. Y., then a famous school © medicine. He early became passionately fond of Botany, W% zt mre steahle collector and a keen observer w botanists have exce ir for its own sake. Neither poverty nor want of opportunity companionship appear to have discouraged him, alshosge ie : 1 w fie first established himself, as a physician, at New London, then oe 7 ved to Or iskany, N. Y. He published in th Report of oe - of the University for 1842, a catalogue of plants ; . { Miscellaneous Intelligence. 389 Oneida county, of which Dr. Torrey took occasion to speak in the ighest terms, while also acknowledging the most efficient aid which Dr. Knieskern had rendered him in the preparation of his Flora of the State of New York. In the year 1841, upon Dr. orrey’s recommendation, he removed to a new field, which seemed to offer an opening for a medical man, while it afforded a richer subsequently appeared as a contribution to the Geological Survey f What articular course will be adopted in reference _ tothese botanical reliquie, the writer of this notice is at present } ~=tnable to say. But those wishing for information may address communications to him, or, which is better, to the Rev. Samuel Lockwood, Freehold, New Jersey, to whom we are indebted for the facts relative to nieskern’s later | informs us = P| Qu © oe bee So co fey © re) ou ot o ® 3 oA m. ‘ 5 che 3 ct © gre E st a Ss =! 5 ° mM ct 5 ‘eep his memory green and name perennial in American Botany long after the few surviving companions of his youth have passed “ag, ld A. G. _ _ Joun Epwarps Horproox, of South Carolina, died at Norfolk, Massachusetts, on the 8th of September. e was born ; upied the position of Professor of Anatomy in the “eae Tawvreraty of South Carolina. He is chiefly known from the es—a dred and sixty in number. Some volumes had been previously published and canceled by the author in consequence of their sup- Posed imperfection. The advance in our knowledge of American 390 Miscellaneous Bibliography. d, interfered with its completion, although, as it stands, it embraces AMES De Carte Sowersy, died August 20th, at the age of 84. Mr. Sowerby was well as a naturalist; still better, however, as an is illustrations of shells, plants, and other prominent ; in the latter department, mainly in connection with what is known as “Sowerby’s English Botany,” pags gs ches _, Sir Roprrick Impey Murcuison, the eminent geologist, died in London on the 23d of October, aged 79, having been born in 1792. V. MIscELLANEOUS BIBLIOGRAPHY. 1. The Linn-Base decimal system of Weights, Measures and Money ; by W. Witprrrorce Mann, New York, 1871. pp. 20.— This system is based upon the following, as principal units: the “inn=1 dekameter ; the arr=1 sq. dekameter ; the soll=1 capp =1 liter; the pondd=1 kilogram, and the monn=5 francs. The multiples ascend by tens by the Greek prefixes, Hena-, Dua, Tria-, Tetra-, &c., and the parts descending by tens are denoted by Latin prefixes, Primi-, Bini-, Tern-, &c. 2. Earthquakes, Voleanoes and Mountain building ; by J.D. HITNEY. 108 pp. 8vo.—Three articles published in the No American Review. A valuable and interesting discussion of many of the views connected with the three subjects mentioned in the title, with the results of the author’s own important investigations. — , of Central Canada: & y si HAPMAN, Prof. in University , Three and four place tables of Logarithmic and Trigonometric Functions. By Prof. _- FM. Pierce, of Harvard University. Ginn Brothers, Boston. pp. 16... e ements of Trigonom By Prof. E. Olney, of the University of Michiga™ 2 Shelton & Co., N. E General Geometry and Calculus. By the same author and publishers. | ’ AMERICAN JOURNAL OF SCIENCE AND ARTS, [THIRD SERIES] | ae ee ale Arr. XLIX.—On the Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico ; ty. EK. W. Hitearp, of the University of Mississippi.* ith a Map. THE colored outline map before you, without much preten- Sion to accuracy of detail, shows the general geological features of the great embayment, once a portion of the Gulf of Mexico, Whose axis is now marked by the course of the Mississippi tiver, from southern Illinois to its mouth. I have compiled this s map from the best data now extant, accessible to me, wi & view to the better elucidation of the succession and character of geological events ; and especially with a hope of bri bear ae the later formations of the interior of the continent, the chron ological record here left by the retiring waters of the sea. Marine deposits being better understood and more available ‘for 8eneral comparison and conclusions than those of inland lakes me series here shown would seem, by its original a : AD | e Rocky i Mountain region, it gee be difficult to find in thet ee of the conti The subject matter of ‘the present communication is, for the great er part, embraced in publications made by myself during 4° Past ten years ; and to these publications | must refer for : the corroborative detail, which in this general summary would be out of plac * Read before the capa: Association for the Advancement of Science, at is, August, 18 | Am. Jour. Scr—Tump rite esis Va ne a 1871. 26 the Cretaceous beds are very distinctly divided into three prin- cipal stages, viz: 4 e —s 3 8 ib ie) © it 5 a 2) | o wa i) =] fo re) aft S$ = oa) Q. bs] 2 < co 4 special home of Inocerami, Selachians, and gigantic Am- monites, 8. Ripley group: crystalline, sandy limestones, alternatil with dark colored glauconitic marls atiadnte finely preserved fossils. Thickness 300 to 350 feet. Equivalent of the highest bed yA Cretaceous of New J ersey, and doubtless of Hayden s The fauna of the Tombigb: a a at: gby sand sub-group is distin, alr eady stated, b number, hore, of indi species of In L. W. Milgard—Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. 398 } = equivalents, the Rotten limestone would be represented by his ort Pierre group. The distinctive features of these several groups become less marked the farther we advance northward, even in Mississippi. Non-fossiliferous or lignitic clays and sands mingle with the marine strata; and become altogether predominant, it would ‘ seem, near the northern termination of the outcrop.* West of the Mississippi, the continuous Cretaceous outcrop does not extend as far northward as on the east side, by some 150 miles. Nor have the more ancient lignitiferous beds Dias ilies ig 3 SE. great rock-salt mass of Petite Anset, exhibit the teristics of the Ripley group; while deep borings have demon- strated the presence, for a thousand feet beneath, of the uniform Rotten limestone, such as it exists on the prairies of Mississippi and Alabama. I have elsewheret stated the stratigraphical as Well as lithological reasons which induce me to consider both the rock-salt of Petite Anse, and the sulphur and gypsum de- posits of Calcasieu, as lying within the limits of the Cretaceous formations. The data given by D. D. Owen seem to assign to the Cretace- ous strata of Arkansas a dip S. or slightly W. of S. The out- ers in Louisiana are too limited in extent for determinations of dip; but it can scarcely be doubted that they represent the Summits of a (more or less interrupted) ancient ridge, a kind of “backbone” to the State of Louisiana, whose resistence to udation has measurably influenced the nature and confor- _ Mation of subsequent deposits. It is fair to presume that from _ this ridge the strata dip toward the axis of the Mississippi _ Valley, to meet those on the opposite side; and the depth at Which these beds are found in the Calcasieu bores, seems to Indicate, on the western slope, a south-southwesterly dip of to four feet per mile. A glance at the map shows, never- _ theless, that the general form of the northern Gulf shore was _ Rot materially influenced by the existence of this axis of eleva- _ Hon, which probably was marked merely by a series of discon- _ Rected islands in the early Tertiary sea that, after the emergence * Fide Safford : p;t, Indicated on the map by the localities of Petite Anse, Chicot, Winfield and 3 This Journal, Nov., 1869, p. 345. i : - ds observed in South Carolina and Ala Tertiary period. It will be perceived that during the Tertiary period, the north- ern Gulf shore receded from its extreme northern limits ™ southern Illinois and Missouri, to a shore-line which, though running near the latitude of Baton Rouge, is not far irom parallel to the present one, if we ignore the extreme projection of the Mississippi delta. This rapid filling-in of the embay- ment, no less am the character of the deposits, prove that the depth of water was not great; especially in the remoter por tions, where lignitic and lignito-gypseous deposits V Pu ingly interspersed with small marine beds tthe remnants © _ estuaries) from the predominant material. Similar aleransie of materials occur, in fact, throughout the older Tertiary € _ of the southwest; and hence, the divisions marked off oy difference of color on the map, as “ lignitie” and “ marine ert the dip is very slight, lignitiferous strata are altogether predom: inant on the surface; ei the i to underlie out on the surface; forming, according to Hopkins, “§ a beaches around some of the Cretaceous outliers mention 1 representing a : ary, I have little doubt that the larger portion, if aot alie (and Flatwoods clay) group (Lagrange and Porter's Creek group of Safford) are the strict srieentonte: in time of the oldest marty beds bama, and design® E. W. Hilgard—Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. 395 by Tuomey as the Buhrstone group (‘‘Siliceous Claiborne” of my Miss. Report). The lithological continuity of the bed- supported to some extent by paleontological evidence, sinchgle ‘ae [A a oo a © =A ee = | io) eo) S ° S nm o — i) =} OQ eo a oO is] o 5 =m -) 5 S @ i} ° amr) a o> ® € river, so far as I know; and the oceurrence of somewhat extensive marine Tertiary outliers on the Cretaceous territory of Arkansas, as well as of lignitic beds on that of Texas (e. g., the Cross Timbers, as approximately laid down on the map), deg that although the deeper water of the embayment fol- Owed substantially the lines of trend shown on the map, _ there still existed at that time a connection, in a northwesterly - ection, of the Gulf waters with those of the great interior: __ basin of the West. : ; ecting troug! Inconsiderable thickness of the deposits, that of course — avored their removal by the subsequent events of the Quater- hary period. Nevertheless, enough seems to remain of these § deposits to form a chain by which, with the aid of paleobotany, _ "Me equivalents in time of the Buhrstone and Claiborne marine _ Stoups, at least, can be determined among the fresh or brackish- _ * Miss, Rep., 1860, $$ 162 and ff. 188, ete. 396 FE. W. Hilgard—Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. water beds of the interior. And with these as fixed horizons to start from, aided also by the flora of the subordinate lignite beds of the later (Jackson and Vicksburg) stages, we may hope ' to establish a comparative chronological scale through which the parallelisms with more distant regions, and later times, may be aw even for the much-discussed Tertiary beds of the est. My present purpose scarcely requires that I should more than allude to the detail of the later stages of the older Tertiary, which I have not distinguished on the general map, in order not to obscure too much the general features. Buta detailed map shows both the successive decrease in the width of their outcrops, and the regularly diminishing convexity of the Gulf- outline. I may also add that as we recede from the vertex of and more subordinate ; yet, by its persistent recurrence seem ing to intimate the occurrence, if not of oscillations, at least of local variations of depth; dependent, perhaps, upon corres: i outh A (much diminished) Vicksburg sea, here represented, appeats have intri ad al A the same time, let it be remembered that both east and west of the Mississippi, from the Chattahoochee to the Sabine, the older Te eriod closes with a decided prevalence, in the Vick# geological Feiss of the ulf does not exhibit any phenomen lie sesillel wi : cn the coast pproximation to, and admixture of, modern m# icksburg epoch closes abruptly, so far as the Gu : concerned, the marine Tertiary series. The geolo- 8 Ee eee * 7 ‘ E. W. Hilgard— Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. 397 _ only in the lower, clayey division of the series; and it is suffi- ciently remarkable that the fine sand- and clay-stones of the * This Jour., Jan., 1869, p. 81; Ibid, Nov., 1869, p. 338. 398 EF. W. Hilgard—Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. upper division should have preserved no vestiges of either animal or vegetable life. 0 not see how, in view of the nature, thickness (about 260 feet) and wide distribution of this formation, the inference can be avoided that during the whole or a part of the interval tween the Vicksburg and Drift ages, the Mexican Gulf was, by some means, isolated from the Atlantic ocean; or that at least its communication, perhaps across the still submerged penin- sula of Florida, was so imperfect as to render the influx from the interior of the continent predominant over the original , supply of sea-water. An upheaval of the northern borders of ear the marks of the event recorded by the Grand Gulf rocks on the northern shore of the basin. The observations of Mr. Gabb in Sto. Domingo, and of the English geologists in Jamaica, seem to indicate the existence there of marine Miocene a Pliocene tertiaries, which are altogether unrepresented im the hat beds of that character may be covered by the Grand Gulf and later beds of the “ Northern Lignitic” of the older Tertiary, the Grand Gulf beds could be explained away as a mere littoral formation. — It is worthy of remark that while east of the Mississippi, the peculiar sand- and clay-stones of this group are confined 10 the northwesterly portion of its area of occurrence, in Louisiat@ and eastern Texas these rocks are altogether predominant, & cially along the northern (or landward) border, the clays eing subordinate. EL. W. Hilgard—Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. 399 Safford in Middle and Eastern Tennessee, and by Tuomey and myself in Alabama. The same is true, apparently of the larger channels of Texas. But within the limits of the Mississippi embayment, it constitutes one huge delta-shaped mass, covering the entire Tertiary, and a large portion of the Cretaceous area, to a depth varying from a few feet to over two hundred; on an average, perhaps, between sixty and one hundred feet. Its pre- dominant material is orange or reddish, rounded sand, mostly ferruginous, of various degrees of induration, with subordinate beds of clay, and enormous gravel-streams, evidently denoting ancient channels.* Its beds disappear beneath those of the ort Hudson age about concurrently with those of the Grand Gulf era; and consequently, it cannot well be independently represented on the map. ead of the w is elevation was succeeded, during the “Champlain” epoch, by a slow depression to at least twice that amount ; and finally, the Terrace epoch, a re-elevation be changed upward, accordingly. The same, mm a reverse direction, would be true if it could be assumed m that the occurrence of the glacial epoch sensibly affected the general level of the ocean. bles of many pounds weight ; while between these, the deposi- tion of the finer materials took place in more quiet waters. That these events were not of a local character; that on the contrary, the phenomena observed in the Southern States are but the necessary consequence and complement of the Drift Phenomena at the North, hardly requires discussion ; but it 1s time that these facts were more gi y understood and taken ito account by American geologists, and that the Ohio should * Miss. Rep., 1860, this Jour., May, 1866, and other papers above referred to. + This Jour., Nov., 1869, p. 335. 400 E W. Hilgard—Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. ferous to the Bluff or Loess. Thus, in northeastern Texas, they have been accounted of Tertiary age; the “ Tertiary iron ores” of that region being precisely the same as those of the “ Orange Sand” of Louisiana and Mississippi. The same is doubtless ore banks” of Tennessee, ington and Baltimore. I ascertained its wide prevalence in the States of Mississippi, Louisiana and Texas, and identified with it the superficial beds observed by Owen in Arkansas and southwestern Kentucky, and by Safford in Tennessee. So close and cogent a connection was thus established between it and the “modified Drift” of the Northwest, that I can no longer doubt Its equivalence, whatever may be the precise mode of origi? assigned to it. The “Eastern gravel” streams observed by Safford in the mountains of Tennessee, and no less by Kerr _ North Carolina, have their counterparts in the rivers of Texas, and in the great pebble-belts of the Mississippi embayment. But it will be difficult to combine into a harmonious whole the widely differing observations and opinions of geologists 0? the vexed Drift question, unless some agreement is come to 8 to the precise meaning of the word. Let it be understood that F oO i B ° Fry Rig’ ® 4 5B & ra) = continent, outside of river channels, and that within this “” are : ms, the Glaciet- drift or moraines; t I Een cht ial’) drift f the North- atone Se eaten glacial”) =) “fit of ai = es eg EL. W. Hilgard— Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. 401 the Western, South Atlantic and Gulf States. It will then become possible, by a comparison of the really cognate pheno- mena, to trace more definitely the history, both general and, local, of that turbulent period, without the confusion attending the use of a word to which each observer attaches, more or Having discussed this formation somewhat in detail in papers recently published, I will merely state that it embraces & group of ly littoral and estuarian, partly swamp, lagoon and Tevisate daponte whose thickness and location is mani- estly dependent upon the topographical features of the con- tinent, then (during the ‘Champlain ” period) in progress of low depression; as shown by the nature of the deposits, and the numerous superimposed generations of large cypress stumps, imbedded in laminated clays exhibiting the yearly fall of leaves. These beds overlie those of the Orange Sand or Stratified t, while themselves overlaid by, not only the river alluvium, but by the Loess or Bluff silt or its equivalents; a as well as ‘face. where this is absent, by the Yellow Loam of the ___ * See Miss. Rep., 1860, p. 153. The reference of the outcrop at Powe’s to the Grand Gulf group, I thin, undoubtedly erroneous, and be true of part or whole of the Dwyer’s Ferry section, p. 154. 402 HE. W. Hilgard—Geological History of the Gulf of Mexico. flow, have clearly been formed by simple disintegration of these strata, altogether independently of the river alluvium. These results fully confirm, therefore, the statement made by Gen. Humphreys,* that the Mississippi does not, as a rule, flow (Gen. Wade Hampton’s plantation), where a tube well has fur- nished a copious flow of combustible gas undiminished for many months. aor The swamp clays form, however, only the lower portion 0 the Port Hudson beds. igher up, Hudson Sect there lie yellow or whitish silts and “ hard- ans.” + : a side of the valley, as shown on the map. i __ * Rep. on the Mississi river, p.98, etal + Thi Jour., vol. i, 1871, p- 345. - $ See profile in this Jon Yor Pons, sEocy | Perec ety ene gee puppets,” ends the deposits clearly referable to the epoch of depression. ; he Loess differs little from its equivalents farther north, save in being, utterly devoid of stratification as well as of any fluviatile organisms. It is not easy to imagine the modus operandi by which a deposit of this kind, sometimes 70 feet thick, and of dead uniformity from top to bottom, could be produced. Its equivalents farther north exhibit very distinctly the structure resulting when deposition takes place in (gently) | flowing water; at the south it was agg substantially stag- It is altogether devoid of stratified structure, as well as of fossils, and forms the surface layer, and in most cases the subsoil of £ tion of submergence, however brief, to the highest level at - vhich ; changes of level heretofore alluded to Would be shown to have exceeded by 600 to 700 feet the esti- _ Inate given above. _ The succeeding (Terrace) epoch of elevation has not, so far as I am aware, left any marks in the way of beach-lines or terraces, unless the second bottoms or “ hommocks” be ac- counted such. They, however, belong to a very modern epoch, s no 404 A. Hali—Astronomical Proof of on the very Gulf shore, we find deposits of the Port Hudson age (180 feet at the Five Islands on Vermillion Bay) shows, nevertheless, that a wieipindous amount of erosion was accom- plished during the time that the Mississippi occupied in scoop- ing out its channel, to a depth which, even below the northern ond of Louisiana, cannot be estimated at less than 500 fee ‘ae regards the modern epoch, I will merely remark that, while in ale axis of the ancient embayment the Mississippi river, through the singular instrumentality of mudlumps up- eaval, is rapidly pushing out the land into the Gulf waters, the latter are nevertheless gaining ground on almost the eae coast of Mississippi and Alabama; and the same is true of a eet of Vermillion Bay. Yet on the whole, the scent of ouisiana, as well] as that of Texas and Florida, is more than holding its own; and the shallowness of the water, even where rareama: arn does take place, will necessarily restrict the latter within narrow limits hereafter. Art. L.—On the Astromonical Proof of a Resisting Medium m ; by AsapH HALL. THE return of Encke’s Comet during the oy cai shin and its very favorable position for observation will att the pe ee of astronomers to this, one of the most reared bodies of our solar system. Besides the interest belonging to 1786—1795 wea time= 12087112 days 1795—1805 =—1207°879..“ 1805—1819 a = =1207 454. * In order oo for this diminution Encke adapter - = a resisting medium in He appears to > been led to this hy, pothesis in the first place on account or its _ inherent probability, and in this view he was sustained by a Resisting Medium in Space. 405 the introduction of forces acting in various directions, and pro- ducing anomalous changes in all the other elements of the orbit, contrary to what was required by the observations. cke therefore, notwithstanding the doubts of Bessel and other astronomers, continued steadfast in his theory of a. resist- ‘Ing medium in space, and for more than forty years, and until within a short time before his death in 1865, pursued his cal- culations with wonderful zealand industry. Between the years 1829 and 1859, he published in the volumes of the Berlin | Academy eight memoirs on the orbit of this comet, and also | Other investigations on the same subject in the Astronomische q Nachrichten and in the Berlin Jahrbuch. He assures us, what | We car easily believe, that he spared no labor and despised no | Precaution that could give completeness and surety to his com- ana and besides being an excellent mathematician, Kncke ssed, in a degree rarely equaled, the skill of ada ing formule to convenient and safe forms for numerical calcula- ions. He has given in the Berlin Jahrbuch for 1861 a résumé of his labors, and the proofs presented there, taken simply by : themselves, seem to put beyond the shadow of a doubt two _ Conclusions: first, that the periodic time of this comet is _ “minishing ; and secondly, that this diminution is satisfactorily _ *ceounted for by the assumption of a resisting medium in sh that the comet can approach very near to Mercury, so as the small mass of this planet, the perturbations which it may produce in the motion of the 406 A. Hall—Astronomical Proof of when the observations have been accurately made. Encke imself has given in the Berlin Jahrbuch for 1858 a new and rigorous method for such calculations. : But should it be found, as seems probable, that Encke’s Comet. q- a. & ncke, 0°3407 2°2181 0°8464 Faye 1°6942 S187 0°5556 ? Winnecke, 0°7684 —-3.1367 _ 0°7550 Mercury, and always remains nearer than J upiter, on the other hand, Faye’s comet never approaches so near the sun as does a Resisting Medium in Space. 407 been very carefully determined by Professor Axel Moéller of Lund, Sweden. A i eee area culty in the telescope of the Naval Observatory, but on the } first night it was looked for it was seen exactly in the predicted | Place. Professor Peters of Hamilton College, who is provided a Aa = 105-55, Ad = +9'"9, F The prediction, therefore, was one of the most accurate ever _ Made of the return of a comet. Hence in the case of Faye’s detected in his own work, is such that there is additional reason ts orbit is that by Professor Oppolzer of Vienna. As the per- turbations of thin comet have not been large, regard was hs to the first powers only of the disturbing forces, and the calcula- fions have been made with comparative ease. By combining Am. Jour. Scr.—Turp Series, VoL. II, No. 12.—Dec., 1871. 26 408 New Goniometer Hye-piece for the Microscope. the positions of 1819, 1858 and 1869, Prof. Oppolzer finds for the first interval the value of the mean motion 638” 6312, and for the second interval 638’:7007. ‘This difference is so small that we may safely conclude that the comet’s motion is strictly in obedience to the law of gravitation. ence, so far as the motions of comets have been determined, the evidence is against the theory of a resisting medium in space. Thus far, the observations of the planets lead to the conclusion, that their motions are in strict accord with the law of gravita- tion; and in the disputes about the acceleration of the mean motion of the moon, no one has thought to seek its cause in a resisting medium, but much more probable causes are at hand. Encke’s comet, therefore, stands alone in the strange anomaly in its motion which the calculations have shown. The first thing to be done would be to test the correctness of these calculations; and for this purpose it seems to me that the method of speci “polseeagiras is better than the expansion of the general pertur- ations, since by the first method all powers of the disturbing all ot . pointed out, by Olbers I think, that this comet moves throu those regions where the zodiacal light is seen. Possibly also the numerous meteoric streams which are moving around the sun, and which are closely connected with the orbits of some of the comets, may exert an influence on their motions. Sept. 25, 1871. Art. LL—On a new Micrometric Goniometer eye-piece for the Microscope ; by J. P. SourHwortTH. ieeels Meee Saar SS ee retina ear AFTER a few experiments by Dr. H. T. Porter and myself, ! ucceeded in i i we have su making an eye-piece micrometer and process are New Goniometer Eye-piece for the Microscope. 409 Ist. A scale of 100 heavy India ink lines about 3 of an inch apart are drawn on a dead white surface of Bristol board. The es king every ten divisions are inches long and _ extend one inch each side of the scale; those marking Ala five divisions are five inches long and extend one half inc length of one-half inch. In this the lines are zi, of an inch apart. After intensifying, washing and drying, a cover of thi g is cemented on with Canada balsam, and the slide cut to the slit in the micrometer eye-piece. It can b also mounted with a spring and micrometer screw, like J ackson’s micrometer. India ink, divided into degrees. The center is indicated by a dot, and one diameter is drawn. Every five and ten degrees , 410 Dawson— Bearing of Devonian Botany on Art. LIL—On the bearing of Devonian Botany on Questions as to the Origin and Katinction of Species ; by Dr. J. W. Dawson. [The theoretical views contained in this section, though necessary to give completeness to the subject, are not suitable for an official report, and are, there- fore, printed separately by the author, for circulation to those who may be inter- ested in them as matters of science. ] Fossru plants are almost proverbially uncertain with refer- ence to their accurate determination, and have been regarded as of comparatively little utility in the decision of general ques- tions of paleontology. This results principally from the : mentary condition in which they have been studied, and from the fact that fragments of animal structures are more definite and instructive than corresponding portions of plants. that, with reference to such points, the evidence of fossil plants, when properly studied, is, from the close relation of plants to ose stations and climates, even more valuable than that of animal fossils, ss It is necessary, however, that in pursuing such SON 2 nen c forms, whether with reference to a single geological period, or to successive periods; and ced ¢ for stating here some general principles, whic b rtant for our guidance, with reference to the oA eas floras which form the subject of this memoir. (1.) ists proceed on the assumption, vindicated by e* ical purposes, the same assumption with “ag pierre Questions as to the Origin and Extinction of Species. 411 to any given geological period, and may hold that for each such period there are specific types, which, for the time at east, are invariable. : condition and various states of preservation, it is still more lave greater significance than if they appeared in the Middle a Wh sara iSyned di ithout known suc . en specific types disappear without any kno - api teams rer: ae ei it seems unlikely that We should have failed to discover their continuance, we may fairly assume that they have become extinct, at least locally ; and where the field of observation is very extensive, as in the great coal fields of Europe and America, we may esteem a es such -€xtinction as practically general, at least for the northern hem1- 412 Dawson—Bearing of Devonian Botany on without any external cause. : (6.) With regard to the introduction of specific types we have t infe i ties, may result from derivation, this by no means excludes the idea of primitive specific types originating in some other way. to discover, if possible, what are elementary or original types, and, having found these, to enquire as to the law of their crea- tion, (7.) In prosecuting such questions geographical relations must be carefully considered. When the floras of two succes: sive periods have existed in the same region, and under cireum- stances that render it Eitan that plants have continued to J broken continuity of fi I ire, however, under fone ‘orth Am Questions as to the Origin and Kectinction of Species. 418 Atlantic. The similarity of the Carboniferous flora on the two sides of the Atlantic, and thé great number of identical species proves a still closer connection in that period. These coinci. dences are too extensive and too frequently repeated to be the result of any accident of similar sequence at different times. differences in the features of each period, as, for instance, the floras of the Lower and Upper Devonian, and of the Lower, Middle, and Upper Cdebivndideeaits nother geographical question is that which relates to cen- Further, it is possible that these changes of subsidence ma ve some connection with the introduction, as well as wi the extinction, even of specific types. It is certain, at least, in the case of land plants, that such types come in most abun- tly immediately after elevation, though they are most abun- dantly preserved in periods of slow subsidence. I do not mean, however, that this connection is one of cause and effect; there are, indeed, indications that it is not so. One of these is, that | | : : | : | ain simi | _ lar to those of the Carboniferous. Of these types a few only _ Te-appear in the Middle Coal formation under identical forms ; _ 4 great number appear under allied forms; some altogether dis- - 4ppear. The Erian flora of New Brunswick and Maine occurs ide by side with the Carboniferous of the same region ; so does _ the Erian of New York and Pennsylvania with the Carbonif- us of those States. Thus we have data for the comparison of n direct seq f the Lower, Middle, and Upper Erian, and the Lower, 414 Dawson—Bearing of Devonian Botany on Middle, and Upper Carboniferous, all more or less distinct from each other, ie i i ison 1 eastern regions where the great limestone-producing subsidences were unfelt, and, on the other hand, are absent in Ohio, where the subsidences and marine conditions were almost at a maxi- mum. cilie types. Of these only four reappear in the Carboniferous under identical species, but no less than twenty-six reappear ler representative or allied forms, some at least of vin? i ed urther, a very poor flora, including oe Erian flora of America, as well as the Carboniferous, requires 4 ‘horough comparison with that of Europe before general co be safely drawn. In the meantime I may indicate the : : : | : ; - Questions as to the Origin and Extinction of Species. 415 Table of Erian and Carboniferous Specific Types. ; age a5 = Erian Types. Represented ee. Erian Types. Represented gale a in Carboniferous— alee in Carboniferous— SS /28 | BSB PS ibs 1. Syringoxylon mirabile, - --_- 21. Cordaites Robbii,....._._- * 2. Nematoxylon 28. OC. au OUR oe ee So. Prowtaxites .o0l6 85 29. Cyclopteris (Archzopteris), - 4 ma Aporoxylon, sic. cee 80.: 0: (Aneimites) oe occ Saws se * ; meMrmoxylon, ..6..+..2...5 31. C. Brownii, 4 BereMeORVION. oo cuec es */ 39. C. varia, * q 7. Sigillaria Vanuxemii, --_--_ * || 33. Neuropteris polymorpha, __ * 8. S. palpebra, * || 34. N. Serrulata, - * 9. Didymophyllum,______.-- 30..N. Dawson, sues oe.co ou 0. Calamodendron, _._....-- * || 36. N. retorquata, it 1. Calamites transitionis, _.._| * 37. N. resecta, 2. C. can Me stage * 38. Spenopteris Heeninghausi, _| * 3. Asterophyllites scutigera, 39. 8. Harttii, * ome WUIONA: oc * || 40. Hymenophyllites curtilobus, | ularia laxa, 41. H. obtusilobus, : 16. Sphenophyllum antiquam, - * || 42. Alethopteris discrepans, = byclostigma, ..._...-..-. 43. Pecopteris serrulata, ------ ma . OB WEIN a 44, P. preciosa, 19. Lepidodendron Gaspianum,| | * || 45. Trichomanites, --_-...-~-- 6 . L. Veltheimi. . * || 46. llipteris, * 21. Lycopodites Matthewi, - _ _- * || 47. Psaronius, = 22. L. Richardsoni,_-----..-- 48. Cardiocarpum,: ....------- * me ee VeRONOMT, oo... 2 4st 49. ( 24. Lepidophloios antiquus, --- * || 50. Antholithes, . 26. Psilophyton princeps, -- ---| 51. Trigonocarpum. ...=-.--=- oes ropustius .......... direction in which the facts seem to point, by the following general statements :— tees : 1. Some of the forms reckoned as specific in the ee gl pnts of structure. The fact that so many Erian and ld resul _ Struggle for existence.” (4) The elevation of a great expanse ‘new land at the close of the Middle Erian and the beginning + In the manner illustrated by Hyatt and Cope. 416 . Dawson—Bearing of Devonian Botany, ete. of the Coal period, would, by permitting the extension of species over wide areas and fertile soils, and by removing the pressure previously existing, be eminently favorable to the production of new, and especially of improved, varieties. 2. Whatever importance we may attach to the above supposed causes of change, we still require to account for the origin of our specific types. This may forever elude our observation, but we may at least hope to ascertain the external conditions favorable to their production. In order to attain even to this it will be types, or the reverse—whether these conditions were those of compression or expansion, or to what extent the a pearance of new types may be independent of any external conditions, other than those absolutely necessary for their existence. I am not without hope that the further study ‘of fossil plants may enable us thus to approach to a comprehension of the laws of the crea- tion, as distinguished from those of the continued existence of species. In the oo state of our knowledge we have no good ground eit: rence of such an advanced and ialized type as that of Syringoxylon, in the Middle Devonian, should guard us against these errors. The creative process have been applicable to grand ons which may not come till we have pr away, earnest and true to nature an its Creator, \ J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 417 Art. LIIL—On some Phenomena of Binocular Vision ; by JosepH LxConrts, Prof. Geol. and Nat. Hist., University of California. If I place a piece of money on a sheet of ye lying on the table, and look downward in the direction of the piece, but at he same time gaze on vacancy, I see two heteronymous i of the pencil. If I use the right-eye image (left image) of the pencil p to draw the left-eye on vacancy, as al- 418 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. and the right-eye image of the pencil p; and these, being in the visual line of the two eyes, are brought together by the law of corresponding points (2) precisely as the two pictures of a stereoscopic card are united, or as any two objects, an interocu- lar space apart, are superposed when we gaze at a distant point. If M. Pictet had used his left hand to draw, then he would have used corresponding images of the pencil and piece; and he would have found that in attempting to draw his ilusive image he would have placed his pencil on the prece. n the ex- periment with- out the median visual results, igs. 11 and 18, it will be observed that the ad- ditional images, viz: @ and P’, are cut off by the median screen. is evident, there- —s tet’s experiments, image we see and trace in outline is not an 7m I age seen by the left, eye. The pencil we see with the right eye, and the two points, viz: pencil and money, OF the part of the i ss ; : whic y make drawing and the money, being in the = Sea are brought — J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 419 together by the law of corresponding points. In M. Pictet’s experiment these two, the pencil and the money, are similarly related to the two eyes, one on one side and the other on the other side of the screen—one exposed to the view of one eye and the other to the view of the other eye. If the image we draw is an illusive image seen by the right eye, then the pencil with which we draw must be also an illusive image seen by the left eye. But to explain M. Pictet’s experimenta little farther: When we look directly at the money, M. Pictet says ‘‘ we see that the ver- tical screen is transparent throughout, and that it permits the night eye to see the piece as through a perfectly diaphanous surface.” But there are two transparent screens seen. e one seen by the right eye M. Pictet observes,* the other apparently escapes his observation. The truthis, when we look at the money, the heteronymously doubled images of the median screen m m’ (fig. 14) meet at the distance of the point of sight. The actual rela- tion of parts is seen in fig. 7 (p. 322), in which A Rand A Larethe visual lines converged upon the piece A. The visual result is seen in fig. 14. It is seen that the visual line of the right eye Stops at the right eye image of the median screen, while the left visual line runs parallel to its image of the median screen unobstructed to the piece a’. Again, “if we give to the optic axes a direction more parallel,” says M. Pictet, ‘“‘ we. see the image of illusion move gradually come on the right side.” “But again, he does not observe that there are two screens seen; and again, it is the left eye image of the screen which he neglects. In truth, as the eyes become parallel, the two images of the screen, mS and m’S’ fig. 14, screen seen by the left eye; only the right eye shifts tts image of the screen to the left of it. If M. Pictet would place another piece - There seems to be a kind of dexterity in the right eye. In many cases of double images, most persons habitually neglect the left-eye image. 420 J. LeConte.on Binocular Vision. only s : . : of Bae = vo bey a the principle of making tracing case of squinting’ of stance from the object itself, In the The stisisothie, rane a median screen is inadmissible. i na of M. Pictet’s first experiment, fig. 6, will : 16. now be easily un- derstood. If no me- dian screen is used, Ss fe together, so that the left-eye image of A, J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 421 line. The visual result is represented in go. As illustrating the singular confusion into which M. Pictet has fallen, I would draw 0 teal images differ slightly from each other, being taken from different points of view, so do their fac-similes the two illusive images ; also, necessarily, that the real and illusive images o each eye differ precisely, as do the two real images or the two illusive images. He believes that the perception of relief is the result of comparison by each eye of tts real with its wlusive image. ‘ow what advantage this theory has over the usual and simpler one of Brewster, Prevost and Briicke, considering the fact that the real and illusive image of each eye differ precisely as do the real images of the two eyes, it is impossible to imagine. But M. Pictet regards the existence of the four images not as a question of advantage, but as a question of fact. “A very Simple geometric construction shows us thus four images iden- Heal, two to two.” I reproduce M. Pictet’s figure illustrating 4992 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. this point. The full-lined figs. A and B are two projections of a truncated pyramid, as seen by the left and right eye respectively. On the same smal- gure. These four figures, according to Pictet, represent images formed in looking at a a truncated pyrami the full-lined figures being the true and the dotted-lined figures the illusive images. For, says he, “if we unite in oné single image these four contours (by means of a stereoscope), we eX- perience instantly the impression of. a solid body ; and we mon faces, the smal] triangles, are united, the full-lines of the ee figure must coincide with the dotted lines of the other. M. ; mage has therefore, by his dotted lines, only represented in oe of his fig ures what must take place in the binocular com- mation of his two full-lined Jigures, if there were no dotted lines and which forms the foundation of Briicke’s theory. b ame rt Prevost and Brewster explain the perception of relief ies changes of Optic convergence, by means of which ak parts of the two dissimilar images of the same object, Wo stereoscopic pictures, are successively united. In angles are perfectly united, then th 7 e smaller triangles are doubled. Thus, the alternately greater and less convergence, +L. ty, 10 unite successively different parts of the pictures— f the point of sight back and forth—precisely { | J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. 493 like that which takes place, in natural vision, in looking suc- cessively at nearer and more distant objects, or nearer and more distant parts of the same object, gives a distinct perception of relief. No one who has carefully analyzed his visual impressions, either in natural vision or in stereoscopic combination of pie- tures, can for a moment doubt that there is in all cases @ change i ears idea of a complete mental combination of dissimi- | lar images, though still supported Oy great names, is certainly : n my ou a stereoscopic Bese: or of a natural solid object; and that in insisting, against Wheatstone, on the impossibility of com- plete union of all parts of a stereoscopic picture of an object Wwe can distinctly perceive stereoscopic relief by the arath an * Arago, (Euvres complete, tome 4, p. 70. + This Jour., ITI, vol. i, p. 15. Am. Jour. Sct.—Tutrp Series, Vou. II, No. 12.—Dec., 1871. 28 424 J. LeConte on Binocular Vision. the operator. A Leyden jar was introduced into the circuit in order to increase the brilliancy of the sparks. The sparks were 1-2 inches in length. I selected stereoscopic pictures in which all other forms of perspective were entirely wanting, so that no relief was visible with one eye. Outline geometrical gures are best for this purpose. I first viewed these in the stereoscope by the continuous light When I first commenced my experiments by either of these methods, but especially the last, a rapid succession of spar! was n inati t difficulty in the interval of darkness, After some practice however, the rapid succession of sparks was no longer necessary. The combination was effected, ana the relief perceived by sepa- by monocular vision, even in the full light of day. By the x their relative distance was at once detectable with two eyes, though not with one. This last experiment was varied in many ways, but always with the same result, : Stereoscopic combination, by squinting requires considerable practice, even in the full light of day, and of course much more. by the electric spark. All the other experiments were repeated by my brother, and my results confirmed. ae ; * II, vol. ii, p. 1. J. LeConte on Binocular Vision, 425 “ whether the images are real or illusive, or whether one be real . . . a side the point of sight, are doubled, but differently, the genitally or become so by experience, I quite agree with Don- ders, that there is truth in both views. In a letter to Prof Tyndall, published in the Phil. Mag. for April, 1871, referring to the question whether the “Jaw of direction” was native or acquired, I have said that instinct is nothing but “ inherited experience.”+ Precisely the same remark applies to the law o Corresponding points, Jt is acquired by the experience of succes- sive g y 1S greater in the lower animals, the individual experience is ‘ater in man. Binocular si i _ * This Jour., II, vol. ii, p. 1 et seq. mh fil not en sen th similar view of Hering vit, that instinct is * inherited 426 H. James-Clark—The American Spongilla, is any such fusion of corresponding fibres as suppose Art. LIV.— The American Spongilla, a craspedote, flagellate Infusorian ; by H. J AMES—CLARK, 05: De Sear E POL I Hist., Kentucky University, Lexington, Ky. (With a Plate). not altogether mere cell-components of a tissue, but are each, severally, an independent body, although closely connected with others in a common bond, then the =e parallelism between the two groups must utterly fail of confirmation. ie is a eae ey member (a cephalid in this case) of a polycephalie individual.* We believe, as far as we can understand his un- not a polycephalic unit. Yet, whichever view prevails, the © Gin deii-daticde on “ Polarity and ; ism,” this Journal, January, 1870. | " rai reas : ph ae +See Carter, On Fe im the two Volvoces; on Eudorina, enone ana Magazine Nat. Hist., January, 1859; also for July, 1871, On new | 4 H. James-Clark—The American Spongilla. 427 _ new ‘Sounge fe, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., July, 1871) has an- ; etn needles. yea ne mie Soa “a heron she in- 2 contractility of the living sponge, can appreciate the ad- aS Nat, Hist., vol. i, 1867, “ On the Spongie corres _ fusoria Flageliaia.” * 428 H. James-Clark—The American Spongilla. vantage of not being obliged to destroy and sever parts of an organism from their natural relations. Premising thus, that everything has been studied “in place,” even to the details of the monads, we shall endeavor to describe this sponge as if it from the monadigerous mass (9), an were, suspen on the points of the larger, far-projecting spicules (e); just as a tent canvas is supported on the e The inner di- bracing them, as if ina sheath, from their tips to t where they rest on the brown mass of monads. In brief, we pillars are the bundles of spicules, and the floor is tapestried by Sse the pillars hangs from the ceil- which allow a free ingress of the water to the space just _be- neath. These are the afferent ostioles (os), through and into op ee the focus of the objective to the floor of arene 8 , : : h). The outer divis- Ms scattered minute pe eae es ES H. James-Clark—The American Spongiila. 429 ments here; namely, the inner division (c) of the investing membrane, and the groups of monads (h) which are imbedd in it, below its surface. In a fully expanded individual these groups seldom lie so closely as to touch each other. They vary considerably in size and are usually globular or spheroidal, and form a single stratum, with rather narrow interspaces (c’) between them. It seems proper here, at least for the sake of precision, that the cytoblastematous basis, in which the monad groups are im- where the body stands out an irregularly rounded mass, some- times an inch in diameter, the cytoblastematous basis fills mel - interior, in enormous proportion to the bulk of the mona ayer, ORGANOGRAPHY. a very diffuse cytoblastema (a') and irregularly disposed cells (6,02) scattered through it. The intercellular cytoblastema _ forms a very thin layer (a*) between the cells (6); but where _ divisions) presents in profile (a', c, d) such an irregular thickness. | toblastema (a*) is colorless, hyaline, and apparently homo- power; but, when magnified to about four it capi a very finely granular aspect. 430 Hi. James- Clark—The American Spongilla. than that, owing to the extreme transparency of the cells, and their consequent inconspicuousness, That the cytoblastema, notwithstanding its low undeveloped state, is the true contractile . . it 1s barely possible to discover even the trace of a cell on the collection of coarser granules than are generally diffused through the cytoblastemic layer. The irregular and jagged outline, and the caudate projections of the cells (2*) also tend to tempt one to the latter view. The cell element in this case, then, corres- ponds only to what is usually considered the cell contents, and anucleus. The contents are composed of coarse and fine grey quently are so transparent and slightly refractive as to appear, collectively, unless specially focussed upon, as a faint blotch in such a function, we could detect no change other than might be produced by the varying length and breadth of the cell, and the Tale, Last By pug ovetiving each other in Spongila alba. At H. James-Clark—The American Spongiila. 431 the whole organism is contrived and constructed. They are ess circular, areas scattered in pretty close proximity to each other over the “cytoblastemic mass.” Each chamber has a Xtreme border, an i of the investing membrane becomes evident. *The hollow groups of monads were originally descibed by Carter (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., July, 1857) as lining an hypothecated vesicle. he named ne “ampullaceous sac.” He has since (Ann. Mag., Jan., 1859) revoked that view another. We believe him to be, excepting the inferred “ampull ‘ ” in the main, right in his first interpretation ; but as our species are differen We cannot speak definitely. 432 HT. James-Clark—The American Spongilla. Entering this aperture we do not meet with any obstacle for a little distance around it; there is a clear open space Pt 0g es & i=) Oe 1e) 6B 4 5 oc. S 6 B Qu Sa 9 sr @ ra] - = - ° et o = OQ a Ow a power as two hundred diameters. We have studied these bodies with an 4th-inch objective, and found it not at all difficult to focus down upon the details of their organization, es, some outline ; or, when the whole mass is expanded, they scarcely impress eacli other, and therefore retain a rounded contour. By plunging the focus so as to look into the aperture of a cham- H. James-Clark—The American Spongilla. 433 The monads are so transparent, and the organization so distinct, that the collar and flagellum may be seen clearly from an oppo- site point of view, looking directly through the body of the halid. This, too, is the best position from which to study the contractile vesicles. by Plunging the focus half way through a chamber, serves best to disclose the manner in which the posterior ends (/) of the The body, proper (fig. 8, 7), of a cephalid is a little shorter w hape. Its ? The contractile vesicles \v).—The body of the monad is dis- ed her large, cl y : from each other, but always close to the periphery. These clear particular place in the body, although they, usually, are not in front. The systole and diastole are sr slow, but very distinct, if sufficient patience is summoned to wat y and without joer epiini The last third of the systole 1s 434 H. James-Clark—The American Spongilla. abrupt, and then only does the vesicle appear to contract sud- denly; whereas by watching it through a complete circuit of diastole and systole, one learns that its function is, on the whole, Hf. James-Clark—The American Spongilla. 3 435 op and expanding, draw in current through its open afferent ostloles, We regret that we have not the means, in this locality, for completing these researches. Our specimens were gathered; and studied on the spot where they lived, in the western part of Massachusetts, several Bicndeed miles away from our present Tesidence. Unfortunately we put off the attempt to feed the awe with colored matter until we had completed other me- thods of investigation, and then we were prevented, by circum- stances, from carrying out our designs. In regard to the afferent and efferent canals, seen by Carter (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1857, ut sup.) in the monadigerous mass (“ parenchyma” Carter), we have not met with any trace of them in the species described in this article. It is ag that they May exist in the oldest and largest individuals, but as we worked, only, on very small and transparent specimens, our tirect observations, in this respect, strictly apply to the latter. It is more likely that ours is a different genus from the Spongilla of Carter, in favor of which we cite the curious fact that each ES 3" a o or 5 = g ee <: ; z- 5 Fare} =) 1a ‘B 5 2 g © <— 8, a ® ivesting membrane, exactly overlies and is mseparable from the entrance to a monad-chamber (‘ ampullaceous sac ;” partim, Carter); so that whatever enters these chambers must go out by the same way that it came in; not out into a system of 436 Hough—Description of a Printing Chronograph. branching canals, burrowed in ee monadigerous mass, but into the great circulatory apartmen Spongilla set oe Jas—Cl. DESCRIPTION OF FIGURES OF PLATE IL. The following letters apply to identical part~ in all of the figures. a, Inves ue Sectio hae membrane; outer division.—a', onal profile of the cytob astema of a.—b . Cells in the thickness of me Lo — seer - se about ‘me ‘spioules ge i is ; : sti brane, with th surface porary junction (by contact only) of ‘te os tr (a) and inner © divisions iP the investing membrane.—c, Inve ting membrane; epithelioid inner division, in sec- tional Pipa be avegcanea 8 between monad-c Ubes-comaoy J ncthi of the divi- R ps 2 a —%; m chambers and monad shonpk —1, Aperture of h.—j, Monads, or the body proper in figs. 3 and 3a.—k, “pamriaas collar of j.—1, Flagellwm.—n, Nucleus.—os, Minor ostioles.—v. Bie ye Fig. 1. Magnified 320 dinmetons Part of a biped young Spongilla, of an o oblaté — form, te about z's Of an inch i in diameter. On the right is presented f the investing membrane and the underying ieeastieel mass, On the left the focus is so adapted as to be fixed on a face-view of the monad-mass, and at the same time on a sectional protile of the investing membrane at a’, 5°, ¢, Magnifie ed 780 errno Interior Ler @ monad-chamber, seen through Forti ; the monads appear in end view, and crowded together side by side like a pavement wor Fig. 3 segnited 1 600 af we ah A single monad, as seen in profile in the monad-chamber. Onl © contractile Mer eal gase present in this specimen. The eplindrcal collar On is extended to its u ;600 eters. het ened, front view of a monad; the the body iy Gi) in the Sigeneo; the hollow cylinder (%) projecting toward the ob- like a dark hoop, and the flagellum (I) in the center appearing as a black Fig. 4. ified 780 diameters, — view of a monad-chamber, —— the aperture (#) into profile, as well as the monads aeacat lie at the same ley thus showing their conve ergence about ng psa open Arr. LV. Miers ene of a Printing Chronograph; by G. W. Hovea, Director of the peers Observatory. rved. e gre point of ‘hataaeke and saving of labor, over the old eye and - ene coop y used, led to the almost general adoption © e new plan. | hth, the past ten years the idea of constructing a chrono- graph, which ahoahl print with type the time of the observ® tion, has been entertained F t fiv a a ef = tion, it is necess Hough—Description of a Printing Chronograph. 437 of an apparatus designed for this purpose, and about the same time Prof. C. A. Young, of Dartmouth College, published a proposed plan for one,* But, so far as we are informed, the mechanical construction of such an apparatus has not hereto- fore been attempted by any one. The construction of a machine which shall carry a type wheel, capable of giving impressions, with uniform ve ocity for anumber of hours together, without sensible variation in its motion, is a problem which is not easy of solution. me five or six years ago, in a paper read before the Albany Institute, I gave an account of the method I proposed to adopt, and in the construction of the machine, now to be described, the plan then proposed has been generally followed. My plan, which is radically different from any other proposed, is based on the principle of using separate systems of mechanism for the fast-moving type wheel, and those recording the integer minutes and seconds, regulating each with electro-magnets controlled by the standard clock. _ Hor a clear understanding of the mechanism, elaborate draw- ings would be necessary. We shall, therefore, merely give a general account of its construction and peculiarities : ; Ist. A system of clock-work carrying a type wheel, with fifty numbers on its rim, revolving once every second; one, two, or parts of two numbers being always kag: so that nd. A system of clock-work, consisting of two or more shafts, carrying the type wheels indicating the minutes and seconds. ‘The motion of this train is also governed by an elec- he type wheels are constructed of brass disks, around the circumference of which is soldered a strip of electrotype copper, holding sixty numbers. is Presuming now we have this system of type wheels in opera- essary to print without disturbing their motion; * See this Journal, No. 124, July, 1866. 438 Hough—Description of a Printing Chronograph. f the record is made while the type wheel indicating integer one number operation of this et allowing c~ fall and print. ihe a time - — mmer is about 0-07 sec., being but aa “€ in excess of our ordinary chronographic recording pen; 20 Since the hammer is acted’ on by she alone, the armature if ‘ Hough—Description of a Printing Chronograph. 439 Ss “3 Bg PE. 0g & of be ee m i Co — tat) S 5 pe) ) 3 co] B 3] Loar) be) Ss rae -- = = o = ; ~~ = @ _The train carrying the minutes and integer seconds will run eight hours; the gear for elevating the hammer will deliver 2000 blows; and the train for moving the paper fillet will go 1200 times without winding. The fast moving train runs one hour and thirty-six minutes ; but since this train can be stopped at pleasure, without changing the zero of the type, its compara- tively brief running is not a serious inconvenience. To recapitulate, we claim the following: t, Separate movements for the integer seconds and the hundredths of seconds; 2nd, The method of regulating the nary chron h. Three Grove elements, or six Hill's ele- ments, work the two electro-magnets well. A separate bat- tery of about the same size is used for the hammer and fillet ets. | __._In point of accuracy, this machine leaves nothing to be de- | _ Sired, and is much beyond what we thought possible. From a vast number of experiments, made by reco Aya Sc: the beats of the standard clock, both at the middle and end of the oscillation, the mean error for a single print is found to be about 0-018 sec., equal in this respect to the recording chrono- graph. The maximum difference in the records of the beats Seldom exceeds 0°03 sec. ; and we believe this is as much due to the irregularity in the clock connection as in the running of the machine, since the same thing is found in ordinary chrono- Saag where the measures are made from second to: Secon: ‘During the building of the machine, which was accomplished istant, F _ Am. Jour. Sct.—Turrp Series, Vow. II, No. 12.—Dzc., 1871. 29 440 Hough—Description of a Printing Chronograph. in the method of regulation, printing, etc. The fast moving train was used to propel the integer seconds and minute type wheels, dispensing with the auxiliary movement; but the dis- turbance of its motion was considerable, especially at the end of every minute, when it had double duty to perform. The saving of time and labor by the use of a printing chrono- graph is very considerable. At the lowest estimate, it does work equivalent to the labor of one person where three are em- ployed at the same time. In our zone work in former years, when the zone extended two hours in right ascension, it usually required the labor of two persons a whole day to convert the chronographic records into numbers and copy them on the blank forms. With the observations printed, this labor is wholly dispensed with; since the “mean” is at once deduced from the printed records. The machine is readily adjusted to indicate the same num- bers as the clock’s face, the type being so set as to print zero- hundredths when the pendulum is at its lowest point, where the magnetic circuit is completed. In the construction of the appa- ratus, provision was made for attaching engraved rings to the type wheel shaft, showing at a glance the time. But these are not found essential, as they would but little facilitate the set- ting of the type, which is accomplished as follows: The min- ute type wheel, which is free to move in either direction, 15 revolved to correspond to the correct minute; an impression my then be taken, and the machine started, when the clock indicates the same; the seconds being readily counted from the beats of the magnet regulating the fast moving train. The whole time for this adjustment need never exceed two minutes. observation of zone stars, the type may be set to give the integer-seconds of mean right ascension, so that the final reduction will always be a small quantity. _ The constant use of this mechanism on every day and observ- ing night, for more than four months, during which time more than ten-thousand records have been made, enables us to speak with confidence of its success, both as regards correctness i printing and in saving of labor. _ Other things being equal, it is found, that for three observers twice as many observations can be reduced in the same time, a8 when a recording chronograph is employed. Oe ee a ee ee G.W. Dean—Longitude Determination across the Continent, 441 Art. LVI.—Longitude Determination across the Continent ; by GrorGe W. Dean. (Read before the American Association at Indianapolis.) Wirn the permission of Professor Peirce, Superintendent of the United States Coast Survey, I offer to the Association a brief statement, in regard to the method used, and the results obtained, by the Coast Survey, in determining the longitude of San Francisco and several intermediate points, by telegraphic exchange of clock signals, with Harvard College Observatory, Cambridge, Massachusetts. required for transmitting a 0m through one or more of those instruments. The results of those preliminary experiments were longitude operations at Cambri ge. : The biden acid for determining the clock and instrumental Corrections at Cambridge, were made chiefly by Assistant A. T. Mosman and Sub-Assistant F. Blake, Jr. 442 G.W. Dean—Longitude Det-rmination across the Continent. At Omaha, the clock and instrumental corrections were determined by Assistant Edward Goodfellow and Mr. E. P. ustin, who used a forty-six-inch transit with an aperture of two and three-fourths inches. All the observations were re- corded by an astronomical clock in connection with a chrono- graph register. At Salt Lake City, the clock and instrumental corrections were determined by myself, assisted by Mr. F. HL Agnew, Sub-Assistant in the Coast’ Survey. The instruments used were similar to those provided for the stations at Omaha and San Francisco. Assistant George Davidson had charge of the longitude opera- tions at San Francisco, and codperated with Professor Winlock and myself in making the telegraphic longitude determinations across the Continent. : Cold dry weather being most favorable for exchanging tele- graph signals between Uistant stations, arrangements were made for these experiments during the winter of 1868-69. Whenever the weather permitted, the clock and instrumental corrections at each station were carefully determined, imme- diately before and after the exchange of clock signals between correction in no case exceeded 0°05 seconds. Mayer's formule, by application of the method of least squares, have been used in these reductions, which have been made in the most satis- ts. In closing this paper, I will state, that on the nights of Feb- ruary 28th and March 7th, 1869, the Western Union Telegraph science, placed two of their telegraph lines, between Cambri and San Franci purpose of measuring the “transmission time ” of ‘signals sent rom Cambridge to San Francisco and returned, and “ vice versd. The entire length of the several circuits, which were com- e ul d closely with the “double transmission time” deduced from the longitude : determinations between Cambridge and San Francisco, and ast ae with the. results of the experiments made for “ transmissiou time” with a single wire between those points, by Professor mock and Assistant Davidson. Company, with their usual liberality for the advancement of G.W. Dean—Longitude Determination across the Continent, 448 Formule used in the Reductions. STAR. LampTallies a O. M.U | Mean of Tallies F. Mean of Thread Intervals. when F sec 0 is less than 2", it may be neglected. log R. hk R=F sec dog; and is to be added to M te. —— the Time of Transit over the mean of all the 8. 6, =the level correction in time,,c dete ‘oot inequality | "of pivots: it is positive for west end high. A. A= sin ie q 5) { 180 °—d being used instead of J when B. B= sete ne star is below the pole. cos t do. C, C= secd %. x = the diurnal aberration = sec 0°021 cos g sec J, It is (—) in upper and (+) in lower culminations. Ba,. T. | T=M4+R, z. t= ay ah “BB, . o=e —t= St Aas Ce, “9 =w-+ Ce, upper sign for lamp west. The co. satan constant (c) is determined from reversals on circumpolar stars, and is to be obtained from the equation te — ty = Oy — 4, = 20 A is positive except for stars between the zenith and north pole. B at lo ower culmination. Cc “ “cc The local time and simu are obtained thus: assume an the correction for aniee ear bY mls — ° x daily rate, (1) = +* 24 rar and we have, putting A= Aat—4, rad + shes zw, ZAA0-4+ZA2a = SAo’,, Haag we determine a, 46, and thence At for the time ne 444 G.W. Dean—Longitude Determination across the Continent. ” LOF-GL + 909-21 + 009-31 + PLP-GT + OP-OL + GaP-Gt+ OoF-oL+ 9@F-o1 + 6ST | et+ 9F% \'Gt+ Z0G-201+ 609-61 + POG-6t + OLP-61+ [ép-el + 9-61 + 6FP-6L + L6P-eL + 7SU 1} Olt OFS 1 SE+ €10. + FIO. + 610- + 610. €10-— F10O-— €1-0—- G1L0-— 68F-21 + C6P-8T + 6P-61 + 68h-30+ PEROT + LOV-6L + COF-GL + SEPeol + €90-81 + PIG Stt+ 686-4. + TWt-31 + I10-LT SFL) GET-9LEL | 896-FT CEL) LIL9 STL | 9EF-696 2 | S9T-L1 €9 9) 8vL-99 669 | LOL-GS LEG) L6G-6 FFG | 9E1-3 FH | 128-62 LE S| 618.6% LEG 8P6-9T BFL) 690-9 LEL | OC6-FL GEL) FOT-9 GIL | 6FF-CS EL | GLI-LT £9 9) LOL-99 669 | 8EL-B9 LF S| OCE-Z FFG | SLL-ZHPS | FHE-6 LE S| OLE-62 LEG 080. + ¥80- + $90. + FEO. + ¥00- + G00. + 190. + #0. + FL0-— 060. — 990-— ¥60.— 410-— 8L0.— 910-— L10-— L10-— 810-— 910-— 910-— 1¢0- + 1¢0. + €h0. + €t0. + GL-T + 9SL-L+ 00-1 + 080-1 + FLEL+ TFET + €h0-T + 800-1 + GLE] &— LoL ¢ 2 $80-L+ SOL-E+ 08-0 + FLO-1 + LOF-0 + 89¢-0+ 8E6- + 928. + 398 | (= 000 | ‘I- 966-0 + 912-0 + 609-0 + GL8-0+ 160-1 + 080.1 + gop. + Lo. + 9L6 | Ot ose | ‘3+ FL0- + 910. + 080- + ¥Z0- + O10. + ¥00-+ 190. + Foo. + #90. + 990-— 990-+ 6-0 + 460-— L@0-— F60-— LG0-+ 420. + oZ0. + 60. + GLO-9II— | GL8-311+ | F80-91— | P20.9L+ “GLOEF-8 | “GOCEP.8 “9EE8E-8 Misc IZLEF-8 9OLEF-8 6786-8 G8E8E-8 “6PE9RS-L | L86SS8-T “PLOSIE-T PLOEIBT | o 80] 0. a ae 19090-0 ¥PS90.0 0600-0 LS€E0-0 S0LF0-0 eEL°0-0 6810-0 19600-0 LEGPIG-0 | LE6FIS-0 | FEOZFF'O | FZ0BFE-0 p 008 1z08e-8 | 1Z088-8 1Z088-8 oo — TZO8E-8 Tz0se-8 | 1208-8 1088-8 | “ZFILE-T | scorrs-T | “goTes-T | cornet | a Bor ¥20-0— ¥60-0— 20-0 — 000-0 $20-0+ 60-0 + $60-0 + PZ0.0+ 6IG-86— | $80-66+ | 66F-Es— 66F-£6 as aT a6. of a 960. 91E1 ¥¥6- FIL GEL vol. 9CLL Coy. GSE b ah LT E99 689. 9¢ 629 PIL Go LEG 262. 61 ch 9 006. -6F ZF 9) S98-FE RE 8 OFE-FE 98S) TW any ay a1" un "y ur'y “uL'u vay at" ‘ag 2 ee ; 5 ; x i —|%. —| #. ; +16. 4 oom [agregar gi apat ypyeae+| eqs yee Beaver |geongts |Syeqey+loge eee ox lgreDy |g 09-66 SF L | €9-8LLEL |9F-LOGEL | 09-8104 | L8FE Lb €9-66 €99 | 13-6089 08-9 8h G | CE-FT th? 9¢°-1F Le 9. D “O08 “UU "Sy | "908 “UTUR “sq “098 ‘UTUL "SY | ‘008 “UTUL'SY | “OOK *UTUL "SY | ‘O98 ‘UTM ‘BY | ‘oos*UTUT’sy =| *008 “UTUT “AIT *s “TIT "Sty “s uyUt ‘st 0 ‘a ‘a 0 ‘ad ‘H 0'd ‘a a‘da ‘0 ‘a ‘ap ua ‘dad ‘0 a ‘ao ‘a0 rom: i ft “ ‘O° = /SONTeT ae xe ide ae rnc “Sales Sy A Ral co ee pe OO ae i. |e ‘gourwoy ¢ | ‘sourmex g "ur ‘UBD DIsOUTTIEN 9 | “few ‘UeD Pp fey ‘UD a] ‘souIMIEN § | ‘stUoIIQ » | “9 “7 ‘(ad) STHOOwA(T ih G00. + = over ATInoy SZI0.+ = 9 “6981 Lt hionsga gy —"8U01{00LLO) JDQUAUNABSUT Pup yI079 Hof SUDLIDALASO) ay? fo sUuorjonpay G. W. Dean—Longitude Determination across the Continent. 445 February 17, 1869.— Collimation. Star. | Time. | Ce. | C. | c. Draconis L. ©. 5 37 | +001 | —2°7 —0004 w’ Draconis L. 0. 5 44 —0805 —3°273 +°0246 T, = 6h. 46m. 6 = +12°550. ‘ Clock and Azimuth Corrections.— Observer A. T. M. Star. Lamp.| («) A w, | A? | Ao’, || Aa | At aa W. E.|+12-246| 4+9580| —304| 6-656 |—0-784 || —-312 |12°558 ¥ Draconis (pr) L. C.| E. W.|+12'139| +2°976| —-411} 8:857 |—1°223 ||—360 12°499 @ Orionis, W. |412:496| +0°578| —-124| -335 |—0-072 ||—-070 |12°496 ¢Geminor, W. |4+12-450] +0-455| — 07 |—0-046 || —-055 |12°505 € Can. Maj. W. |+12:452| +1-080} —-098| 1-167 |—0-106 ||—-131 |12°583 i. Maj. WwW. |4+12420| +1-:037| —-130| 1-076 |—0-185 ||—"1 : Geminor, W. |+12-474| +0:372| —-076| +139 |—0-028 ||—- 18 @ Can. Min. E. 12°500| +0°60 050 3 |—0-030 || —-073 |12°573 8 Geminor, E. |412:505! 40-276) —-045| -076|—0-012 | —-033 |12°538 9 Gemin FE. |412497| +0-296| —-053| -088|—0-016 || —-036 |12°533 1 + 10-262 |—1-391 |18-964|—2-462|| + [12635 te 10 A? + 10°252 a= —1°391 A@ — °1240 = —°1391 ry +10°252 AO + 18-964 a = —2°452 Ag = —"015 A@ + 1:0252 a = —0-1391 +10°251 A@ 4 ‘if 10 a= —1°426 At = +12°535 + -007 8-454 a= — 1096 ene between ae and Omaha. [Not corrected for personal equation.] a+ Xo No. of a t .} Bao ok Date Probable Series of Probable |Series of __ 1869. hm s. error, | Signals. error. | Signals. Feb. 17, |1 39 15°305| +-018 2 990} +015 3 HAS, 15°293| +-033 2 1-960 | +°030 2 “24, 15278| +-028 3 -999| +032 2 Hared 15°351| 4-015 2 3009 | +015 2 outhy 15°351| 4-031 1 007 | +°015 4 oa 15°384| 4-034 1 1-982 | +°033 1 Mean ah \ Xi 2 Date Probable Probable || Double transmis- a. 5 hm 6 error. ||h.m 8 ror. sion time. Feb. 17 |3 18 30-295 | +4023 |/13915°147| +°012 08-315 38 30-253 | +:045 127| +:022 0°333 “24 30-277 | +043 15138 | +7021 0°279 ae 30°360 | +021 15°180| +°011 we 3: 30°3 +034 15179} +017 ‘38 30°366 | +:047 15°183 | +7024 0-402 Mean | 1 39 15°159 +008 0-366 Nore.—T h te used at Buffalo and Chicago. moe of tlograph wie ae Abit between Cambridge ant and Buffalo, 504 miles; and Chicago, 540 miles; Chicago and Omaha, 493 ment. tion across the Cont 446 GW. Dean—Longitude Determina ‘SOTIUL OSE WNOGE S¥A\ COBIOUVIT ULg pUe oBpriqmeBD UseMjoq 4 “AND BUSTA pus ‘Az oye] avg ‘ouuefoyD ‘eyeuig ‘oBeorgy Wos19 OY} Ul O1LA YdvsBe[o} Jo Yul oy, ‘oegng 78 pesn o19M siaywades ydvstojoy—mL0 Nt 418-0 __400-F | 098-4 90 € || __ oa | uBoW VIL-0 810-F | 082-4 9£0- 099-F1 T 820-F | €469 z GZ0- LE9-L ee 018-0 120-F | 820-4 6r0 F | OSF-F1 I 660-F | SZ8-s I 620-F | €€9-1 o 5 941-0 680-F | LPS L $90-F | $6F-F1 T L¥0-F | 698.9 T Gv0-F | Seo.) A 626-0 630-F | FST-L ¥t0-F | 808-71 I E0-F | $69.9 id L60-F | ST9-L 86 TZ8-0 Té0- ¥ LIE-L GF0-F | GE9.F & £20. 106-9 a G60-F | 8SL-L LG oy €98-0 L10-F | 660-4 ¥80-F | €89-4 i ¥0-F | 998.9 I FO0-F | ST heh % 981-0 £60-F | 988-4 LOO. F | GLF-FL T 860-F | &h8-9 z LG0-F | 629-4 we [88-0 810-F | oLe-2 9€0-F | 6F9-F T Té0-F | $€8.9 4 S10-F | STh- 8t » 681-80 || ¥IO-F | 11s) 93 ¢ 820-F | §29-F1 09 9 4 000-F | 116-9 93 € | __080-F | 90-4 93 € | LT “qoy ‘eluly OTS "10.110 uy “10.110 ‘* "MY |] “speusig | ‘10110 ‘S$ WY || ‘speuStg | “10110 ‘+ WH) goat “STUISUBIY O1qno || e[quqoig aquqorg JO SOLOS) eTquqorg JO Solieg; afquqoasg oqeg, Tee | v “2 OM Oy Joon + ¥ ‘uorjenba [euosaod IO} P9}DIL100 JO N—“OIstoUDAT UDSY pun abpLigquen,) waanjaq apngebuoy ‘BOLT E8EZ SVM AID OL] I[Vg puv oSpruiquiy) useMyoq WoT otf} UT ett Ydevasoqo, Jo YZuo, oy, ‘ounedoyy puw vyBug ‘oSvoryD ‘oreyng 4 pesn e10M sioyvedor dace a 169-0 ||_ 800. | 192-7 eF 2 || | | | | 0*9-0 FE0-F | SLE. 190-F | 9€9-8 5 OF0.F | 8F0-F T FL9-0 G20-F | #9L-F 090-F | 83-8 5 620-F | 168-8 I 999-0 €60-F | 982-F 9F0-F | TL¥-8 1 €0-F | 806-8 é 109-0 020-F | $6%-F OF0-F | G8a.g 820-F | 686-8 td c0¢-0 F0-F | 983-F 8F0-F | 69F-8 €£0-F | 686-€ I ene €10-F | 08%-% £20. | T9¢-8 G10-F | S86. ae €29-0 810-F | L63-% ce0-F | c6¢-8 860-F | 986- é TE9-80 || 960-F | G83-F 8h & 690.F | £98909 || & | 080. | 996-¢ eFZ a “OUT} UTS “IOLIO su y "10.110 ea “s[eusig “10110 ‘so Ml | |] speudig “IOLIO “my “SluIsuBIy O[qnog || eTquqorg sTqRqo1g JO selieg) 9iqeqo.ig JO S9Leg) erquqory x +X | ¢ I 74 || 3° ON v—% Jo ON X—y | ‘uoryenba [wuossed 10y poyood100 yoN—Ayog aynry Dg pup abpruquny ussayag opny buoy x yee eG te G. W. Dean—Longitud: Determination across the Continent. 447 Longitude Determinations across the Continent, January and February, 1869. (Final results.) Personal Equations Dea = S- Goodfell ee =e =+0 i t From Gou'd's Report of May, 1867, p. 75. NS ee From observations made at San Francisco ean ee +0180 April, 1869. : on. Observer. Dean’s Standard. Cambridge, Mosman, +0*110 ) To be applied to the — Omaha, Goodfellow, —0°020 ae cae of the Salt Lake, an, 00 tiv + ’ San Francisco, Davidson, +0180 them to > Dene! 8 pi To correct the differences of longitude for personal equation, we have :— Cambridge Time — Omaha Time = +0°130 _ “ — Salt Lake Time = +0°110 maha eo he _ = —0°020 Cambridge “ W— San Francisco Time = —0-070 Omaha * 33 “« = —0°200 Salt Lake Cc — = “« = —0°180 STATIONS. Difference of} Personal } Corrected differ- |Doubletran~- Long. (A). | equation. Pre of — mission time. .™. 8. 8. lh: 8. Cambridge to Omaha 139 15-159) +7130 [1 39 15- 289+ -008 3364 015 ambridge to Salt Lake | 2 43 bes Oe 110 |243 4:3674-008| 5914-019 to Salt Lake 1 3490 BLE “a0 1 349°061+4-008) -260+4-016 Cambr’ge to S. Francisco! 3 25 7 260) 2 2m: 3 007) ‘8174-014 Omaha to San Francisco | 1 45 52-094 — bi 1 45 51°8944-010! -483+-023 Salt Lake to S. Francisco] 0 42 3-024. —-180 | 0 42 2°8444-008) “2424-016 Diffe of ay STATIONS. : Longitude. Xi + Xs h. m. 8. #: A Cambridge to Omaha, 1 39 15-2894-008 | -3364-015 Omaha to Salt Lake, e 3 49°061+°008 | 2604-016 _ Cambridge to Salt Lake (sum), Sper eeiaued 43 43504-011 | 5964-022 NON i i ca ; 43 4367+4°008| 5914-019 a 0174-014 | 005 +°029 Cambridge to Omsha, 1 39 152894008 | 3364-015 Omaha to Salt 1 3 49°0614°008 | -260+-016 Sslt Lake to tee reiaead Ces 042 2:8444-008} -2424-016 Cambridge to San Francisco (sum), eee eoue. 325 7:1944°014 | 8384-027 (direct) os... 3.22 325 7:1904°007| -817+-014 Difference ee -0044°016 | -021+4°030 Omaha to Salt Lake, 1 339-061 4°008 | -260+-016 Salt Lake to San Francisco, ’ 042 28444008 | -242+-016 Omaha to San Francisco (sum), 1 45 519054011 | 5024-023 a irect), 1 45 518944 °010 | 483 +023 Ditters co | * O12 7015 9+-032 wo, 2 Dileroneh 0. Cambridge to Omaha. 1 39 15-2894 -008 | -3364 015 Omaha to San Francisco, --| 1 45 51°8944°010 | 4834023 Cambridge to San Francisco (min --|3 25 7-1834°013 | ‘8194-027 (direct), ........-|3 25 7-1904-007 | ‘8174-014 Difference, 5 | 0024-030 007 +015 448 Smith and Verrill—Dredgings in Lake Superior. Difference of STATIONS. Longitude. A ae hem. 8. Ss. . : Bee hala ane mate 243 4367+-008| -591+:°019 Foose. St 042 2.844+°008| -2424 016 Cambridge to San Francisco (sum), ...-______. 325 7-211+4°011 | -833+4-025 ¢ “ (direct, 325 Tl SERRE eas £30.) 90+°007 | -817+ O14 WON, fii bie inne, = 0214°013 | -016+°029 Cambridge to San Francisco, _._............. 325 7.190+°007 | -817+°014 (C. to 0.)+(0. to S. L.)+(3. L. to 8. 5 A ee eae 7-1944°014 | -838+°027 em 07 HO. te 8. Fo oT 7183+-013 | -819+°027 MirteS.)+(8. Eto 8. PY css 7-211+4-011 | -833 4-025 Cambridge to San Francisco (Mean of Me 325 7194+°006 | 82747012 Art. LVIL— Notice of the Invertebrata dredged in Lake Superior in 1871, by the U. S. Lake Survey, under the direction of Gen. - B. Comstock, S. I. Smith, naturalist ; by S. L Smirx and A. E. VerRRILL. - (Published by permission.) During the explorations in Lake Superior, mentioned in the last number of this Journal (page 373) the following species were obtained, together with a number of minute forms, which have not been determined. _ full account of the expedition, with descriptions of the Species collected, will be published in the official report of the expedition. : RADIATA. In 32 fathoms, arbor, it was b In the deep dredging bottom of the clay in the ‘oe g while the dredge was near the surface. OLLUSCA, Limnea. A species allied to L. disidiosa Say, was abundant ng ora in 8 to 13 fathoms on the south side of St. tione __A very young specimen, apparently of fathoms among the Slate Islan Smith and Verrill—Dredgings in Lake Superior. 449 Planorbis parvus Say. Common in 8 to 18 fathoms on the south side of St. Ignace. Valvatu sincera (Say sp.). Abundant with the last species, in 8 to 13 fathoms, and also, in 4 to 6 fathoms, in the cove at the eastern end of the same island. Spherium sp. nov.? Among the Slate Islands, in 6 to 8 fathoms. A single young specimen of another species of Sphe- — was found, in 8 to 13 fathoms, on the south side of St. gnace. Pisidium Virginicum Bourguignat. On the south side of St. Ignace, 8 to 13 fathoms. sidium abditum Haldeman. With the last species, in 8 to 13 fathoms, and also, in 4 to 6 fathoms, in the cove at the eastern end of the same island. . wsidium compressum Prime. In the cove at the eastern end of St. Ignace, 4 to 6 fathoms. isidium sp. nov. A small, semi-translucent species, the same 6 fathoms, and abundant among Cladophora, in 8 to 18 fathoms, on the south side of that island; among the Slate Islands, in 6 to 8 and 12 to 14 fathoms; at 13 to 15 fathoms on a sandy © bottom in Simmon’s Harbor; near Copper Harbor, in 17 fathoms, clear sand; in 82 fathoms, very soft —- mud, in Neepigon Bay ; off Copper Harbor, in 62 fathoms, and north of Keweenaw Point, in 82 fathoms, soft reddish clayey mud and sand; an in all the deep dredging down to 159 fathoms. W opMs. Lumbricus lacustris Verrill, sp. nov. About 15 inches long, ‘04 in diameter. Body round, distinctly annulated. Head short, conical, obtusely pointed. Sete spine-like, strongly curved, acute, arranged two by two, those of each pair close together. Color reddish brown. san lobes. Setae in four, fan-shaped fascicles on each segment, com- mencing at second segment behind the mouth. The two ventral fascicles are separated by a space equal to about pied the length of the sete, of which there are five or six In eac fascicle ; the sate are simple, acute, slightly curved, equal to 450 Smith and Verrilli—Dredgings in Lake Superior. about one-sixth the diameter of the body. The lateral fascicles contain three to five somewhat shorter and straighter simple sete. One specimen appeared to have four minute ocelli upon the upper side of the head. Of Doppae Harbor, 17 fathoms, sand ; off Simmon’s Harbor, 60 fathoms; and on the line from the Slate Islands toward Stannard Rock, fourth haul, 159 fathoms. Senuris limicola Verrill, sp. nov. Worm more slender than the preceding, attenuated posteriorly, composed of about 44 segments. Length about ‘33 of an inch, diameter 02. Cephalic lobe blunt, conical. Setze in four fascicles upon each segment, six to eight in each fascicle anteriorly, four or five eect” The setae in all the fascicles are relatively long, slen |‘ and acute. Two tortuous red blood vessels pass along the in- testine, forming a loop at each segment. Intestine moniliform. On the line between the Slate Islands and Stannard Rock, moniliform. Anus terminal, large. Chirodrillus larviformis Verrill, sp. nov. Body rather short and not very slender, cylindrical, obtuse at both ends, distinetly annulated, composed of about 88 rings. Length about ‘30 of an inch; diameter ‘05. Cephalic lobe short, conical, obtuse, mouth large, semi-circular beneath. Ventral fascicles of sete near together, with about five sete, which are rather short, simple, acute, little curved; lateral fascicles with five or SIX setz of similar form and size; sub-dorsal ones similar. op preserved in alcohol, the body is usually curved ventrally or 9 a simple coil. Color, when living, translucent whitish, intestine slightly greenish. A thickened smooth zone commences benin the 10th setigerous ring, occupying the space of about four segments. __ Off Copper Harbor, 17 fathoms, sand; off Simmon’s Harbor, 59 fathoms, clayey mud. le Chirodrillus abyssorum Verrill, sp. nov. Sub-cylindrical, thicker anteriorly, distinctly annulated, com of about 42 segments. Length 25 of an inch: Giameter about 02. Cephalic lobe short, conical, obtuse, mouth large, semi-circular. Ventral fascicles with eight or nine sete anteriorly, five or six posteriorly. _ The sete are long, slender, acute, strongly curved, those on the _ inferior side of the fascicles nearly twice as long as those of the upper side; setz of the lateral fascicles five or six, slender, -nearl a ly as long as those of the ventral ones, and similar in form; Smith and Verrill—Dredgings in Lake Superior. 451 ‘ dorsal fascicles with four or five shorter, stouter, and straighter, acute sete. Six miles S.E. of Passage Island, 47 fathoms; on line from the teriorly, more slender posteriorly (02 in diameter). Cephalic lobe short, conical; one specimen apparently had two minute about ten small lobes. Seta in four fascicles upon each seg- ment. Those of the lateral fascicles three anteriorly, often but two, short, slightly curved, mostly with minute forked and hooked tips; those of the ventral series in fascicles of four to six, three or four times longer than the upper ones, considerably bent, the ends minutely hooked and forked. Neepigon Bay, 32 fathoms. ; Nephelis fervida Verrill, sp. nov. Leech two or three inches long, 20 to 0 wide, elongated and slender in full extension, very little depressed, most so posteriorly, often round and M ‘tapering anteriorly. outh large, nearly circular, subterminal, the upper lip, in contraction, short and rounded; corrugated within the oesophagus with three conspicuous folds, eyes eight, blackish, conspicuous, two pairs, a little apart, on the first anteriorly to the anterior sucker, which is broad and thin, sub-cireular, about three times as wide as the neck where it is attached, Oeelli four, on the upper side of the anterior sucker, the two larger, black ones, in front, and two minute ones wider apart and farther back. Posterior sucker large, rounded or oval. Color translucent greenish, with minute black specks arranged in transverse band Among the Slate Islands, 6 to 8 fathoms. 452 Smith and Verrill—Dredgings in Lake Superior. Procotyla fluviatilis Leidy. Numerous specimens, apparent of this species, were obtained in 8-138 fathoms on the sout side of St. Ignace. They were, when living, dirty white, mottled with brown. In addition to the preceding species of worms, a few were obtained which have not yet been fully determined. CRUSTACEA. Mysis relicta Lovén. The occurrence of this and the follow- ing species, identical with forms from Lake Michigan, and the lakes of northern Europe, is mentioned in the last number of this Journal. It was brought up with sand and mud from 12 to 14 fathoms at the eastern end of St. Ignace, from 8 to 13 fathoms, with Cladophora, on the south side of the same island, and from deep water in a large proportion of the hauls from 73 to 148 fathoms. Pontoporeia affinis Lindstrém. This species was found at the peduncle of the antennule. jpoda sub-equai 12 both sexes, the second pair being only slightly larger than the first ; propodus in the first pai rate, the palmar, : and armed with several spines. _ The incubatory lamelle of the female are very large, Pd jecting meh percns the coxse of the anterior legs, as In © me of the antennule, antenne thepoda, while it differs nt . etc., _ much in the ultimate pleopoda and in the form of the telson. Length, 5 to7™ : Smith and Verrill—Dredgings in Lake Superior. 4538 Among Cladophora, in 8 to 13 fathoms, on the south side of | St. Ignace of the first segment of the pereion. Eyes small, prominent, h narro’ bly stouter the male than in the female; dactylus more than half as long as the propodus and its palmary edge armed with acute spines, of which the distal ones are larger. The mnteene pairs of legs all similar, the and prop segments sub equal in length and armed with short spines along the posterior 454 T. Coan on Kilauea and Mauna Loa. Color above dark fuscous, spotted and mottled with yel- lowish. Neepigon Bay, and two species of Phryganeide larve were common among Cladophora in 8 to 18 fathoms on the south side of St. Ignace. Arr. LVIIL— On Kilauea and Mauna Loa; by Rev. Trrus Coan. (From a letter to J. D. Dana, dated Hilo, Aug. 30.) ha leaving a high, serrous, black ledge around the circumference of 2 rsp ; ees with light puffs of long, white steam rising here and there. ; cre Were no demonstrations, and so nearly cooled was the bottom of that great south lake—Halemaumau—that I went down into it Some twelve hundred feet below the u rim of Kul measured across the floor. I found the diameter five-sixths of @ time, where the ineandeacoit rocks were seen boiling through - hy oe caverns fifty to one hundred feet below. Such y, 1869. Y recent Visit, two years later, I found great changes. uth lake had been filled with molten lavas, and successive ESTE See Se ee NS ES T. Coan on Kilauea and Mauna Loa. 455 a firmament in conflagration, and reminding one of the figures of Peter in speaking of “the heavens being on fire... an g my absence, Square miles to a depth of fifty to three hundred feet—the deepest and extending east, south, and west, to the outer walls of Kilauea, and flowing down a steep slope to the north, and sweeping over the great central concave. was in the crater on the 22d instant, and was at once surprised with the great changes manifest. I had no sooner descended from the northern terrace, or black rim, than I found myself on new ground. All old tracks and landmarks were obliterated. All was recast. About half a mile ‘from the south lake I began to rise on an angle of some 25° until I was ona level with the rim of the cauldron. About three hundred yards from the pit the heat was so great, and the gases so pungent, that I could not proceed in a direct line to the margin. Being driven back I made a detour, and again attempted a direct approach. Failing in this, I retreated to a safer atmosphere, and then flanked the fiery pit at some dis- tance, traveling southwestward for half a mile. Here I found the in I advanced on the crater at Am. Jour. Scr.—Turep Series, Vou. II, No. 12.—Dzc., 1871. 456 T. Qoan on Kilauea and Mauna Loa. clouds of smoke, which the fitful wind began to drive upon me. margin of the pit. : es he immense quantities of lava which came from this pit by not all thrown over the upper rim. After this rim had been raised, . ? - . ° e . s action is unequal, sometimes throwing up brilliant jets, and see i verns. It ha me thirty-five or forty miles from Kilauea, and about ie feet above it in altitude, how is it that we can see no sympathy that proves a subterranean connection the people have removed from the shore and built half a mile to Ww fish wl > they cultivated vegetables and grazed their horses. The de of that little cataclysm is s Chemistry and Physics. 457 SCIENTIFIC INTELLIGENCE. I. CHEMISTRY AND PuHysliIcs. nm the sensitiveness to light of the haloid salts of silver, and the sasdeotitn between optical and chemical absorption of light. —Scuurrz-Se.iack has published with the above “title a very in- teresting memoir, the principal results of which are, in the author’s words, as follows "In the case of a mixture of chlorine and hydrogen the curve of the chemical intensity of the spectrum which shows the relative chemical action which the different ee exert when completely absorbed, has a course different from that of the curve which rae citenent extends in the case of chloride of silver from ie tra- violet o 8HG: in the case of iodide of silver to }$ e case of Brarioe of silver to 4 GF, with iodo-bromide ‘and iodo-chloride of silver to beyond E. (3.) The dark a. of haloid salts of silver exposed to the spectrum takes place in the case of chloride of silver within the extent of the photographs es ; this is pee also the case with the other haloid sal 4.) In the case of the haloid salts of a. the i te of is never zero. (6.) A thin film of iodide of silver absorbs the light which is more refrangible than G very strongly, the light between G and +GF but feebly; this last is, however, photographically active. In photo: aphing upon iodide of silver, the interposition of a thin film of the iodide yor like illumination with light approximately homogeneous from G to 1 GF. © 47.) Ata ae temperature the co a silver becomes deep brown. Th loration of the haloid salts an ee to light then strongly refrangible rays of the spectram } tion then that EE aie taciens sensitive to Tight specially a precisely these rays.— Pogg. Ann., exliii, p. 1 2. On th the proteine series. melas ETZ aa “Han ERMANN have taken up the study of this somewhat megpected subject, and have arrived at results of much interest. e authors in the first p pass in review the results obtained many years since by wait i! of the products of the action of various reagents upon mem is othies ee 458 Scientific Intelligence. we must refer to the original paper. The results finally reached showed that under the circumstances the products of the decom- position were— benzoic acid, Bromanil, ucine, Bromoform Malamic acid (?) Leucimid, Bromacetic acid, Asparagic acid, Le fi Carbonic acid, Oxalie acid, Capronie ‘acid, Tribromamido- together with some ammonia and humus-like substances. Tyrosin was not found in any case; but the authors suggest that it was converted by the action of bromine into bromanil. The products Mulder. The action of bromine upon the proteine bodies, that of other agents of decomposition, yields two classes of pro- ducts—those which belong to the fatty and those which belong to der Chemie und Pharmacie, clix, p. 304, pelo 3. On the products of the reduction of silicie ether and some of tts derivatives.—LapENpure has studied the action of zinc-ethy! and sodium upon silicic ether. The first product of the reduction is the silico-propionic ether of Friedel and Ladenburg, Si€,H, (9€©2H,),. When this is repeatedly treated with zinc-ethyl and sodium, a second product is B ere which has the formula Si(€,H,),(0-©,H,).. es The density of this liquid is 0-8752 at 0° C., and its boiling point 155°°5. The author terms it silicium diethyl-keton-ether. It 1s in the air, insoluble in water, soluble in alcohol and ain Ing with chloracetyl or chlorbenzoyl the ethyl groups are ex- 2 i et Pie ether is formed. Thus __ Si(€,H,), (9 €,H,),42€,H, OCI=Si(€,H;),Cle+ Beet 2(€,H,0.0€,H,). ’